Questions about CARICOM’s designation as the “Sixth Region Of Africa”

By: Dr Kumar Mahabir

Chairman, Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC)

Don Miguel Road, San Juan, Trinidad and Tobago

Website: https://indocaribbeanpublications.com

On Sunday October 8, 2023, the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) hosted its 176th edition of its ZOOM Public Meeting entitled “Interrogating the Declaration of CARICOM as the Sixth Region of Africa” (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8SbUwZ4_9M0). The panellists included Professor Clinton Sutton, Dr. Adit Adityanjee, Professor Emeritus Patricia Mohammed, Dr. Indira Rampersad and Ms Omolora Wilson. 

The speakers referred to releases from UWI, CARICOM and articles in the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday, and the CARICOM website which featured and acknowledged CARICOM as the “Sixth Region of Africa”. The release from the UWI Regional Headquarters dated September 13, 2023 stated: “Caricom has been designated as the sixth region of the African continent. The region commemorated the second annual Africa-CARICOM Day on September 7, signalling an ongoing commitment to strengthened relationships between the two populations” (https://sta.uwi.edu/news/releases/release.asp?id=22682).

The statement was echoed by the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday of September 20, 2023 which ran the headline, “CARICOM recognized as sixth region of Africa” and stated specifically that “CARICOM has been formallydesignated as the sixth region of the African continent. The declaration was made during the second annual Africa-Caricom Day on September 7th, at the University of the West Indies (UWI) regional headquarters in Jamaica”  (https://newsday.co.tt/2023/09/20/caricom-recognised-as-sixth-region-of-africa/).

In a release issued on July 26, 2023 by CARICOM Today in its CARICOM website, the CARICOM Secretary-General, Dr Carla Barnett, announced: “I am pleased to join you today as part of the African Union’s sixth region for the Annual Global Africa People-to-People Forum 2023 and to reflect on the Inaugural CARICOM-Africa Summit, which was hosted by His Excellency Uhuru Kenyatta, then President of Kenya, on 7th September2021. (https://today.caricom.org/2023/07/21/caricom-africa-partnership-making-progress-caricom-sg/).

In light of the above, panellists and members of the audience at the ICC ZOOM Public Meeting raised a number of concerns:

With regards to the release of the University of the West Indies (the UWI), of September 13, 2023: 

  1. Who “designated” CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”, and when and where was such a “designation” undertaken? 
  1. Did the CARICOM Secretary General, Dr. Carla Barnett – who made remarks at the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations – endorse the “designation” of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”? 
  1. To what extent does the designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”, at the Africa-CARICOM Day which was attended and celebrated by the CARICOM Secretary-General, blatantly contradict the description of CARICOM in its website as “a grouping of twenty countries: fifteen Member States  and five Associate Members. It is home to approximately sixteen million citizens, 60% of whom are under the age of 30, and from the main ethnic groups of Indigenous Peoples, Africans, Indians, Europeans, Chinese, Portuguese and Javanese. The Community is multi-lingual; with English as the major language complemented by French and Dutch and variations of these, as well as African and Asian expressions” (https://caricom.org/our-community/who-we-are/).
  1. Does the P.J. Patterson Institute for Africa-Caribbean Public Advocacy, headed by the Most Honourable P. J. Patterson, and who also joined in the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations, recognise the presence of other ethnic groups in the Caribbean, given his statement: “The ethnic origins and commonality of our colonial experience are beyond dispute … it is in recognition of this irrefutable reality that the African Union declared the existence of six regions, and on this special occasion to unite in recognising our shared history and aspirations.”
  • How can the UWI, which is a multi-ethnic regional institution which is publicly funded by contributing Caribbean territories with multi-cultural societies, with the Secretary General of CARICOM, annually celebrate on September 7th, an Africa-Caribbean Day, but has made no overtures towards a complementary celebration of an India-Caribbean Day, a China-Caribbean Day, an European-Caribbean Day, a Latin American-Caribbean Day, and an Indigenous/First Peoples-Caribbean Day, inter alia? 
  • Who funded the Africa-CARICOM Day cultural extravaganza at the UWI Regional Headquarters?
  • Was the UWI community, including the various Campuses and their respective Principals consulted on this Africa-CARICOM Day extravaganza at Mona, and did they agree on the designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa?”
  • Is this part of a UWI and CARICOM agenda to promote African hegemony in the region to the exclusion of other ethnic populations and contributions?

With regards to the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday article of September 20, 2023, in addition to the questions in (1) above: 

  1. How, where and when was CARICOM “formally” designated as the “sixth region of Africa”?
  1. What formalities were observed, and what form did the “Declaration” take? 
  1. Were there signatories to the “Declaration” including those of Heads of Governments, at the UWI Regional Headquarters in Jamaica on Sept 7th?
  1. Does the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday have a political and ethnic agenda in blasting the headline: “CARICOM recognised as “sixth region of Africa”, and then proceeding to deem it a “Declaration”?

With regards to the release from the CARICOM website on July 26, 2023, and the statement from the Secretary General, Dr. Carla Barnett: 

  1. When was Dr. Barnett (or CARICOM), formally recognized as part of the African Union’s sixth region? Is she endorsing this “sixth region of Africa” as a personal celebration, or on CARICOM’s behalf?
  1. Does the current Chair of CARICOM, the Honourable Roosevelt Skeritt, endorse this designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of the African Union”? Does his statement at the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations on Sept 7, 2023, suggest an acceptance of CARICOM as Africa’s sixth region. Skerrit stated: “I am confident that our relationship will continue to flourish in the years ahead. Our Community is home to many citizens of the African Diaspora, designated as Africa’s Sixth Region”? (https://today.caricom.org/2023/09/07/statement-from-caricom-chairman-pm-roosevelt-skerrit-on-africa-caricom-day-7-september-2023/)
  1. Did the African Union endorse CARICOM as its sixth region? 
  1. In as much as the African Union deems its diaspora as its sixth region, does CARICOM perceive itself as constituting the entire African diaspora, or part of the diaspora? If the latter is the case, then the designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”, is geopolitically incorrect. It is also ethnically incorrect as the African diaspora is dispersed throughout the world.
  • Were any referenda conducted either by the UWI, the African Union or by CARICOM of their various populations on “designating” or “declaring” CARICOM its sixth region?
  • On whose authority, was the “designation” or “declaration” made?

Some of the panellists also touched on the issue of reparations. Of particular concern to the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) are:

  1. The complete lack of inclusion of the non-African communities, both in the CARICOM Reparations Commission headed by UWI’s Vice-Chancellor Professor Sir Hilary Beckles. Professor Beckles was appointed in 2013 as Chair of the CARICOM Reparations Commission by then Prime Minister of Trinidad and Tobago in her capacity as Chair of CARICOM, Mrs Kamla Persad-Bissessar. He has repeatedly stated that the Reparations Movement builds “upon the historic efforts of past organisations to bring justice to the victims of native genocide, chattel enslavement, and deceptive indentureship”. Yet, there is not one single person of East Indian or Chinese or indigenous descent in the CARICOM Reparations Commission which he heads. This brings into question the very notion of reparatory justice and its inherent ironies.  
  1. The complete exclusion of persons of East Indian descent and all other races despite the fact (or possibly because of the fact) that Indians constitute more than half of the population in Trinidad and Tobago, from the Trinidad and Tobago National Commission on Reparations first constituted in 2015. Moreover, the Commission was reconstituted very recently as reported on October 3, 2023 by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Trinidad and Tobago. According to the report, the entities represented in the reconstituted Commission are “the Ministry of Foreign and CARICOM Affairs; Ministry of Tourism, Culture and the Arts; Tobago House of Assembly (THA); Emancipation Support Committee; Orisha Elders; Santa Rosa First Peoples; All Mansions of Rastafari; Media and Youth. There is no mention of specific representation from the East Indian community, although the Santa Rosa First Peoples are now included (https://foreign.gov.tt/resources/news/appointment-of-trinidad-and-tobagos-reconstituted-national-committee-on-reparations/).
  1. Whether these two Commissions (Regional and Trinidadian) are about genuine reparatory justice or about ensuring sustained African dominance and hegemony, given the exclusion of other groups in the composition of their membership, is a critical question.

Some of the panellists and members of the virtual audience raised the following questions about the designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”. 

  1. Is CARICOM, UWI and the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday employing the optics of branding, naming and framing to promote political and ethnic agendas?
  • What message is this conveying to other non-Afro ethnic communities?  
  • What message is this conveying to the African population in the Caribbean? 
  • What does CARICOM – being the “sixth region of Africa” – mean, in particular, for the governments and peoples of Trinidad and Tobago, Guyana and Suriname with considerably large Indo-Caribbean populations who believe that they have been excluded and marginalised for decades by an Afro-dominated political directorate?
  • What does the “sixth region of Africa” mean for our culture and our identity now, and in the future? 
  • Are we trading the European branding for an African one? 
  • Is this conceptualisation and designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa” a deliberate policy or politics of exclusion, or an unintended consequence?
  • Is this a response to the global competition for economic space and an initiative for Africa to dominate and/or recolonise the Caribbean?
  1. Whose initiative was it to designate CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa”? Was it the African Union, was it CARICOM or was it the University of the West Indies? Or was it some or all of these?
  • Was there a signed Declaration or formal ratification by Heads of Government for CARICOM to be deemed and recognised as the “sixth region of Africa”? If not, then the legitimacy and relevance of this designation at the UWI Regional Headquarters, and the declaration is questionable. 
  • Can this designation of CARICOM as the “sixth region of Africa” facilitate global problems like climate change? If so, how?
  • To what extent does this designation stoke divisiveness among the various ethnic communities of the Caribbean?
  • Is this declaration a return to the colonial policy of divide and rule?
  • To what extent does this designation distract from other more critical issues facing the region such as economic challenges, climate change and crime?
  • Given the timing of this designation, is there any truth to the contention that it is part of a UWI-Caribbean-CARICOM political agenda to mobilise the support of the fifty-five member states of the African Union with that of CARICOM states, to rally for the Prime Minister of Barbados Mia Mottley, who is allegedly a contender for the position of UN Secretary General?
  • Is the designation consistent with CARICOM’s stated agenda of promoting regional integration and embracing diversity and multiculturalism in the region?

At the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) virtual forum held on October 8, 2023, Dr. Hilary Brown, Programme Manager for Culture and Community Development at the CARICOM Secretariat, as a member of the audience, categorically denied that there is any Declaration for CARCIOM to be designated the sixth region of the African Union. Her recorded words contradict the statement from the UWI release that “Caricom has been designated as the sixth region of the African continent” and the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday headline that “CARICOM recognised as sixth region of Africa” and which continues with the story that “CARICOM has been formally designated as the sixth region of the African continent. The declaration was made during the second annual Africa-Caricom Day on September 7th, at the University of the West Indies (UWI) regional headquarters in Jamaica”. 

The firm denial by Dr. Hilary Brown at the ICC forum suggests that the statements in the UWI release and in the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday are false, misleading, reckless, ethnically biased and dangerous to the harmonious co-existence of the multicultural ethos of the peoples of CARICOM. In this vein, the ICC is hereby making a clarion call for clarification on these matters and a public verbal and written apology as well as a retraction of public statements, articles and news releases where necessary, in response to the issues, concerns and questions raised above. 

Impact of Utilization of E-Learning Technologies on Academic Performance of Undergraduate Business Education Students in Universities in Delta and Edo States

1Mary Callistus Valentina Okweji

Department of Business Education

Faculty of Education

Delta State University Abraka, calyvalii@yahoo.com

2*Ekwere A. Umoeshiet*, PhD

Delta State University, Abraka, eaumoeshiet@gmail.com

Corresponding author

ABSTRACT

The study examined impact of utilization of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States.  The aspects of e-learning technologies examined were:  availability of e-learning technologies, utilization of e-learning technologies, impact of e-learning technologies, commitment to online activities and social media technologies and strategies for improving the utilization of e-learning technologies. Correspondingly, the moderating influence of gender, age, educational qualification in view and academic level were examined.  Five research questions were raised and answered and five hypotheses were tested at 0.05 level of significance.  The survey research method was used for the study.  The stratified random sampling technique was adopted and the sample size was 100 business education students.  The instrument used for the study was a structured questionnaire and it was validated by three experts.  The test-retest method was used to ascertain the reliability of the instrument and the PPMC reliability of 0.86 was obtained.  Data collected were analyzed using Mean, Standard Deviation, t-test and Analysis of Variance (ANOVA).  The findings of the study revealed that e-learning technologies have a great impact on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States to a great extent.  Also, that there was no significant difference between the mean rating of male and female business education students on the strategies for improving utilization of e-learning technologies in business education programmes in universities Delta and Edo States among others.  It was concluded that utilization of e-learning technologies has great impact on academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo State.  Based on the findings, it was recommended that curriculum planners of the universities should make deliberate efforts to provide curriculum that will accommodate the utilization of e-learning software and technology, since the e-learning technologies enhance the academic performance of students.

INTRODUCTION:

Modern technology is one of the factors sharpening the global economy and producing rapid changes in contemporary society.  This technology enabled instructional method to aim at improving the quality of education and student academic performance.  The modern technology is a tool used to remove geographical barriers as it aids everybody to learn anytime and anywhere even without the presence of the lecturer.   One of the technologies which have greatly influenced education is the Information and Communication Technology (ICT). The use of information and communication technology as a means of improving the efficiency and effectiveness in business education is not in doubt.  With the introduction of information and communication technology (ICT), there have been changes in pedagogical delivery system.

Business education has been described as education for and about business (Okwuanaso & Nwazor, 2000; Nwosu, 2003).  In other words, business education teaches knowledge and competencies required in business.  According to Umoeshiet (2015), Business Education is an aspect of learning that prepares individuals for roles in business and offers them knowledge about business.  Business education is considered as the pedagogical knowledge and business competencies necessary for teaching business attitude, concept, skills and knowledge.  Business education is seen as a programme that has promoted skills which enable an individual to function effectively and efficiently, as an employee, or employer.   

Akudolu (2012) believed that the advent of information communication technology has given rise to the formulation of new educational objectives which requires innovation and modification in the content, method and evaluation strategies. 

Electronic Learning (EL) is an integral part of information and communication technology which it’s principle is connectivity, a process by which computers and electronic devices are networked to connect people to share information and knowledge for personal, academic or professional growth and development.  E-learning has become an increasingly popular learning approach in higher educational institutions due to vast growth of internet technology and so it’s expected to influence positively the academic performance of the business education students in universities in the globe especially in Nigeria.

Electronic learning (EL) is the use of Information and Communication Technology e.g. Internet, Computer, Mobile phone, Learning Management System (LMS), Televisions, Radios and others to enhance teaching and learning activities. E-learning is a unifying term used to describe the fields of online learning, web-based training and technology delivered instructions (Oye, Salleh, & Iahad, 2010). E-learning has become an increasingly popular learning approach in higher educational institutions due to vast growth of internet technology and so it’s expected to influence positively the academic performance of the business education students in tertiary institutions in the globe especially in Universities in Nigeria.  In the opinion of Oluwalola (2006) the internet is a global collection of many different types of computers, computer operators and computer networks that are linked together through telephone lines, satellites, microphones, and all other possible devices.

University education just like Business Education is concerned with the development and acquisition of skills and knowledge necessary for economic survival and development.  University education and e-learning are interrelated. More also both lay emphasis on competency skill acquisition and knowledge that are required in the 21st century world of work. E-learning is widely used in many universities in the world today, but the researcher observed that  there is rising dissatisfaction among employers of labour on the poor performance,  lack of competencies and skills of business education graduates in the use of modern technologies in the new world of work.   There were series of  arguments that in  some universities, their E-learning does not add any value to the teaching and learning activities of the institutions and that they do not investigate the impact of E-learning on students’ academic performance, that much research has not been done on the new technologies and application software available for E-learning, that students commitment to online activities negatively affects the academic performance of undergraduates of Business education Students in universities in Delta and Edo States. 

Okoro and Umoeshiet  (2021), opined that e-learning is an essential structural tool that is required for effective and efficient instructional delivery for University programme in Nigerian Universities.

Most of the existing research reports in this regard are suggesting ways and means of addressing the problem of poor academic performance among business education students in universities and they appear rather to dwell more on teacher/government effectiveness factors rather than student/teacher factors and that is the gap this work has come to fill.

Purpose of the Study

The main purpose of the study was to investigate the impact of the utilization of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States.  

Research Questions

            Specifically, the study will determine:

  1. The extent to which the e-learning technologies are available for undergraduate students for business education programme in universities in Delta and Edo States?
  2. The extent to which the E-learning technologies have impact on the academic performance of undergraduate Business Education Students in universities in Delta and Edo States?

Hypotheses

The following hypotheses were tested at 0.05 level of significance

  1. There is no significant difference in the mean ratings of the Business Education students on the availability of E-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students’ programme in universities in Delta and Edo States based on gender.
  2. There is no significant difference in the mean ratings of Business Education students on the impact of utilization of e-learning technologies on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States based on qualification in view.

The scope of the study covers      “the impact of the utilization of E-learning technologies on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in Universities’’ and it is delimited to Delta and Edo States.

Rosenshine’s Learning Theory

Barak Rosenshine is an educational psychologist who propounded a theory of learning in 1982, with ten (10) guiding principles, which in summary emphasizes the importance of giving students sufficient time to practice retrieval, ask questions, and get the desired help.  The students must not stop after learning the information once, they must continue to rehearse it by summarizing, analysing or applying their knowledge.    

On the theoretical framework about e-learning the authors/psychologists believed that the work in constructivism and student involvement provided the bedrock. In the theories of Seymour Papert 1980 and Rosenshine 1982, they emphasized on E-learner-centred and skill acquisition and development.  These theories argue that for a particular curriculum to achieve the effects intended, it must illicit sufficient student effort and investment of energy to bring about the desired learning and development .

Historical Overview of E-learning

E-learning was developed in 1960s at the tertiary institution of Illinoia. Where students were made to have access to recorded lecture resources via the computers terminal that have link with television or audio device.  Later in the year two psychology Professors Patrick, Supposeand Richard C. Atkinson of Tertiary institution of Standford carried out an experiment.  They used the computer to teach young children, reading and mathematics in elementary school in East Palo Alto in California.

In 1963, the first computer for instruction was installed by Bernard Luskin in a community college, which has connection with Stanford Tertiary institution. As at 1970 Luskin took an appointment with Kand Corporation where he engaged in analysing obstacles to computer assisted instructions. This development provided opportunity for distance learning courses using the computer in some educational institutions.

Further developments in e-learning include computer based learning, which was developed by Murray Turoff and Starr Roxanne Hilz in 1970 at the New Jersey Institute of Technology and at Tertiary institution of Guelph in Canada.  By 1980 it was recorded that access to course contents became possible in college Libraries.  Cassandra B. Whyte played a great role on e-learning in higher education; the advent of collaborative learning gave rise to open part of Europe and America. 1990 saw the advent of World Wide Web, (www).

E-learning as a Concept

E-Learning simply means electronic learning. It is an aspect of information and communication technology which can be described as an innovative means of impacting knowledge electronically.  According to Obikaeze and Onyechi (2011) defined e-learning as forms and non-formal education that uses electronic delivery method such as internet based learning delivery packages, CD-Rom, online video conferencing, website or e-mail to manage the relationship between teachers and learners.  E-learning involves certain skills and knowledge.  E-learning is also seen as the acquisition of knowledge and skills using electronic technology such as computers and the internet based software and local and wide area networks.  In the same vain Azih and Nwosu (2011) agree that e-learning is a pertinent tool for effective teaching and learning. E-learning is commonly associated with higher education and corporate training, e-learning encompasses learning at all levels both formal and non-formal education that has an information network – the internet, and intranet (LAN) or extranet (WAN), whether wholly or in part for course delivery, interaction and/or facilitation of online learning.

The views of Okoli and Ifeakor (2011) stated that e-learning is essentially the computer and network that enable the transfer of skills and knowledge. They further asserted that the use of electronic applications and processes to learn include web based learning, computer based learning, virtual classrooms and digital collaborations, content is delivered via the internet/extranet, audio or video tape.

In his contribution, Azih (2003) further described e-learning as a kind of learning that is possible using the computer. This learning on the computer simply means online knowledge acquisition through CD-Rom. He also emphasized that online teaching and learning method needs the use of browsers such as internet explorer or Netscape navigator. The e-learning facilities can be in the form of audio, visual and audio/visual.

This was reaffirmed by Ong and Lai (2006) saying that e-learning is instruction delivered via all electronic media including the internet, intranet, extranet, satellite broadcast, audio/video tape, interactive television and CD-Rom.  While Back, Jung and Kim believed that e-learning should be understood in a wide sense, including the use of electronic means of teaching and learning in classrooms.  Face to face and outside – a distance, both individually or in a collaborative way as well as in a blended format of classroom and distance studies. They maintained that e-learning is not an end itself but rather a wide concept which can be used for various forms of teaching and learning ranging from formal education to informal learning. In their opinion, it may start with audio-visual tools used in the classrooms and go far as interactive internet based collaboration of students and teacher. Finally, Onowor (2011) summarized that e-learning comprises:

  • All forms of electronically supported learning and teaching
  • The use of technology to enable people to learn anytime and anywhere.
  • The use of information communication technology (ICT) in developing skills as well as concepts based knowledge.
  • The use of instructional media in form of texts image, animation video and audio devices
  • Computer and network to enabled the transfer of skills and knowledge.

tance teaching), but also in various teaching philosophies (for instance behaviourism or constructivism).

Benefits of Utilization of E-Learning Technologies in University Education Programme

There are a lot of benefits in the utilization of e-learning technologies in university education programme.     Lhi (1997) in Nwosu (2017) identified the following as benefits of e-learning.

  1. Convenience and portability: E-Learning accords the student the advantage of learning anywhere and anytime. It does not mostly require fixed class rooms where the student attends daily as it also allows students to fix and listen to lectures anytime more so, learning materials can be carried about and lectures administered even on the move. This allows student’s easier understanding since the pace is determined exclusively by the student and pressure is dissipated on the student to scheme of work.
  2. Cost and Selection: The student can choose from a wide range of courses to meet need.  It offers degree, vocational and certificate programmes provides continuing education, provide individuals courses for selection, wide range of prices are set to fit the students budget.
  3. Flexibility: E-learning accommodates learner’s preference and needs. It is mainly student centred. One can study through chosen instructors or self-study. There is opportunity to slipover materials /topics that one already know and focus on those one would like to know and use the tool best suitable to the student for learning.
  4. Higher Retention: E-learningor online learning will draw the students’ attention to topics of internet. Studies show that because of this and the variety of delivery method used to reach different types of learners.  Retention is frequently better than in traditional classroom.
  5. Greater Collaboration: Technology tools make collaboration among students much easier since many projects involve collaborative learning.  The online environment is easier and often more comfortable to work in since learners do not have meet face to face.
  6. Global opportunities:           Global learning communities are at the student’s finger tips with online learning.  The e-learning technology used, gives on-line instructional designers the ability to build in tools that take you to resources that may not be seen in a traditional classroom.
  7. Improved Performance:  Lhi (1997) in Nwosu (2017) also revealed that researchers have shown that students in online learning generally perform better than those in normal classroom. According to a 12 years research conducted by the US department of education, there is a massive influx of students into online education, a greater percent.
  8. Increased access to instructor of the highest quality. E-learning offers students opportunity to have access to instructors of the highest calibre who can share their knowledge with students, allowing students to attend courses across physical political and economic boundaries. It also allows student’s access to their fellow students who will share their experiences and solutions as well as allow greater communication among students across different geographical zones making studying wonderful.
  9. Cost Reduction: There is a generally reduced expense since cost of daily transportation is eliminated.
  10. Skill Development: To develop the skills and competencies needed in the 21st century and enable learners cope with new trends in their chosen profession and career. E-learning transforms and develops students to meet the present requirements of graduates needed to undertake specific tasks at different areas, sectors, offices in global market. Bates (2009), states that a major argument for e-learning is that it enables learners to develop essential skills for knowledge based workers by embedding the use of information and communication technology within the curriculum.

Constraints to Utilization of E-learning Technologies in University Education Programme

There are a lot of constraints militating against the effective utilization of e-learning technologies in University education programme at the tertiary level. Muilenburg and Berge (2001) in Ezeugbor and Nwachukwu (2011) identified the following as constraint or challenges of e-learning implementation in Nigerian higher institutions.

1.         Unwillingness to adopt new technological innovation: Getting a new idea adopted even when it has advantages is difficult.  Accordingly innovation such as e-learning system, in higher education requires faculty to change their ways of teaching, such change does not come easily. However reluctance is major on the part of teacher’s factor hindering the use of e-learning in Nigerian higher institutions.

2.         Lack of awareness of the effectiveness of e-learning:  Generally, there is still lack of awareness amongst the population (educators and students) especially parents about the effectiveness of e-learning.  Many still feel the traditional learning mode is better.

3.         Bandwidth use and connectivity:  Engaging content requires a rich combination of multimedia and connectivity limitations downloading of engaging content to the learners will be slow.  This creates frustration and boredom among learners and affects the ease of learning.

4.         Lack of computer literacy:  In Nigeria, there is a large segment of the population that is computer illiterate. This is especially true in rural areas. This hinders the introduction and implementation of e-learning.

5.         Lack of technically experienced lecturers: Most of the lecturers in Nigerian universities do not have competence in the use of e-learning in their institutions. Majority of lecturers who had taken leading jobs were taught without ICTs (e-learning) and they have not developed competence in the use of ICTs (e-learning), thus they cannot model good use of technology (Idowu, Adagunod & Popoola, 2003).

6.         Limited (e-learning) facilities: Limited fund available to higher institutions have hindered the provision if needed facilities and infrastructure to promote e-learning usage. Most facilities of education and schools of education in Nigeria do not have dedicated laboratory for e-learning training. Classroom for e-learning are equally not equipped for usage. Thus, educators and trainee educators do not have access to e-learning technologies within their schools. The few available ones are well used mostly for administrative purposes.

7.         Inadequate course content for e-learning: The curriculum for teacher education is centralized based on NUC draft benchmark and academic minimum standard. The content and strategy are based on single course model.  It is meant to teach trainee teachers about how to learn or teach through the computer.  While this is good for introductory stage its outcomes are very limited. They cannot furnish educators with the needed skills and knowledge of e-learning usage in their institution.

8.         Problem of electricity: E-learning equipment are electrical equipment that requires electricity for operation.  Most rural areas of Nigeria do not have electricity facility and in urban area electricity supply is epileptic, and this reduces the life span of hardware also militates against effective usage,  even enthusiastic educators and students who have access to computer may be debarred from using them as a result of power outage.                                                                                                  

Review of Empirical Studies                                                                                               

Yuning, Saxin and Cheng (2022) conducted a research on effect of e-learning on academic performance of undergraduate students at Nankai University, China.  The study have hypothesis which were tested at 0.05 level of significance. The purpose of the study was to examine the effect of e-learning on the academic performance of undergraduate students at Nankai University in china. The descriptive survey research was used for the study. The purposive sampling technique was adopted and sample size was 361 students. The questionnaire was used in obtaining data. The descriptive and inferential statistics of mean, standard deviation and t-test were used to analyze the data. The findings of the study revealed that e-learning is positively and significance related to academic performance.   E-learning enhance accessibility to effective learning and therefore boosts the performance of learners. The study also found that students can interact anytime and from anywhere with various educational material like messages, audio, picture video and more via the internet. The study also found that e-learning is positively and significance related to academic performance.  Both studies are related in both the dependent and independent variables of the studies.  The reviewed study used the purposive sampling technique while the current study used the simple random sampling technique.  They differ in terms of geographical scope.  The reviewed study was done in China while the current study was done in Nigeria.

Cai-Yu, Yuan-Yuan and Shih-Chih (2021). Carried out an investigation on the empirical study of college students’ e-learning effectiveness and its antecedents towards the COVID-19 epidemic environment.  Fourteen alternate hypotheses were formulated and tested at 0.05 level of significance.  The purpose of the study was to determine the effectiveness of e-learning and its antecedents towards the covid-19 epidemic environment on college students.  The research design adopted for the study was the survey design.  The population of the study was the entire medical students from first-to the fifth-year undergraduate students.  The stratified sampling technique was adopted for the study and the sample size was 519 students.  The multi-group analysis was used in analysing the data.  The findings of the study revealed that college students’ e-learning self-efficacy has a significant positive influence on e-learning effectiveness through e-learning strategies.  Also, the study found that e-learning monitoring has a significant influence on e-learning strategies and offers indirect influence on e-learning effectiveness through e-learning strategies.  Also, that e-learning attitude has a significant positive impact on e-learning motivations, and e-learning effectiveness is positively affected by e-learning attitude through e-learning motivations and e-learning strategies.  The reviewed study is related to the current study in terms of the independent variable.  The studies differ in terms of the dependent variable, population and geographical location.  The reviewed study used medical students while the current study used business education students.  The reviewed study was done in Taiwan while the current study was done in Nigeria.

Ejubovic and Puska (2019) examined impact of self-regulated learning on academic performance and satisfaction of students in the online environment.  Two main hypotheses and ten alternate hypotheses were tested at 0.05 level of significance.  The purpose of the study was to determine the impact of self-regulated learning on academic performance and satisfaction of students in online environment.  The survey research design was adopted and the population was students of 46 higher education institutions in B &H which were public and private universities.  The simple random sampling technique was applied and the sample size was 1651 students.  The questionnaire was used to obtain data for the study.  The data collected were analyzed using the multiple regression analysis and the correlational analysis.  The findings revealed that self-regulated learning influenced satisfaction and academic performance.  Also, that environment structuring has a positive and significant influence on academic performance.  The reviewed study is related to the current study in terms of the dependent variable.  They both have hypotheses.  Both studies differ in terms of the independent variables, geographical location.  Also, the current study has research questions while the reviewed study does not have.  The current study was done in Nigeria while the reviewed study was carried out in Germany.

Balakamakshi, and Savithri, (2021) investigated the effect of e-learning on students’ academic performance at college level. Two null and two alternate hypotheses was formulated and tested at 0.05 level of significance.  The purpose of the study was to determine the impact of e-learning on students’ academic performance.  It was a survey design study.  The convenient sampling technique was adopted for the study.  The sample size was 250 female students from colleges in Chennai.  A 3-point rating scale was used in collecting data with the use of structured questionnaire.  The collected data was analysed with the use of SPSS to obtain the percentage analysis and chi square.  The findings of the study reviewed that e-learning enhances the quality of teaching and learning process.  The study also showed that there was significant association between age and academic performance of students.  Also that the association between flexible time and academic performance is highly significant.  The reviewed study is related to the current study in terms of the independent and dependent variables.  Both studies have hypotheses.  Also, both studies have moderating variables.  The reviewed study considered age and flexible time while the current study considered gender, age, educational qualification in view and academic level.  They differ in terms of geographical location.  The reviewed study used 3-point rating scale of Agreed, Neutral and Disagreed while the current study used 4-point rating scale of Very Great Extent, Great Extent, Little Extent and Very Little Extent with 4, 3, 2, and 1 point respectively.  The current study used both male and female students but the reviewed study only made use of female students.

Elena, Svetlana, Natalia, and Yana (2021) carried out a study on Education policy:  The Impact of E-Learning on Academic Performance. The purpose of the study was to determine the effect of e-learning on academic achievement and the magnitude of its impact on academic achievement.  The research design adopted was the meta-analysis.  Data were collected from 150 authors’ observational studies carried out in Russia.  The surveys of distant and partly-distant students were used to collect data.  While the Cohen Model was used in analysing the result.  The findings of the study revealed that e-learning has a significant beneficial impact on the academic success of students.  Also, those sufficient ICT facilities can contribute to better learning and students’ academic performance. The study is related to the current study in terms of the independent variables.  Both studies differ in terms of the research method.  The reviewed study is a meta-analytical study while the current study is a descriptive survey study.  Both studies also differ in terms of geographical location.  The reviewed study was conducted in Russia while the current study was done in Nigeria.

Okoli (2012) examined assessment of strategies for optimizing ICT usage among undergraduate Students.  The study was a decipher survey which was carried out with undergraduates in two universities and a college of education. Purposive sample of 35 undergraduates were drawn from Nnamdi Azikiwe University, Awka, Kwara State University, Ilorin and Nsugbe College of Education. 35 copies of structured questionnaires were distributed out of which 25 copies were returned and all were found usable. The findings of the study showed that when these ICT facilities are made available and maintained, the undergraduates will develop courses online to be accessed by teachers and student, using video conferencing for groups outside the institutions, it also revealed that students use the PC’s in discussion in class and outside classroom using internet, chatting, mentoring and use of CD-Rom instead of printing materials will be facilitated.  Another finding is that all the administrative and instructional related strategies were perceived as necessary but the strategy of making a policy on compulsory possession of private computers by students on admission and the use of video conferencing were least rated. Both studies are related as they both examined the usage of ICTs (computer and e-learning technologies) in the teaching and learning of Tertiary education programme in Nigerian tertiary institution and further to determine the impact on academic performance of undergraduates of business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States precisely. The study differ in terms of geographical location.

Ezenwafor (2012), investigated adequacy of exposure to information and communication technology in business.  The study sought to ascertain the adequacy of exposure received by graduating university education students and tertiary institutions in manipulating and utilizing various ICT equipment and software resources. The study is a descriptive survey which was carried out in Anambra State in four tertiary institutions. Two universities and two colleges of education, 418 graduating tertiary education students were used in the study. A structured questionnaire was used, the findings showed that the respondents were not very adequately exposed in utilizing any of the ICT (e-learning) software resources. The study however showed that, business educator in south-east universities possesses internet skills to great extent, this help in exposing their students in utilizing the resources. In addition to this is a revelation that respondent’s exposure in manipulating ICT equipment and tools is inadequate.  The study is related to the present study which is on utilization of e-learning in universities and tertiary institutions.  The studies differ in terms of the geographical location.  The reviewed study was done in Anambra State while the current study was done in Delta and Edo States.

Azih and Nwosu (2012) carried out a study to ascertain the extent of availability and utilization of e-learning facilities in tertiary institutions offering business courses in Ebonyi state. The population was all the undergraduates in the three tertiary institutions in Ebonyi State, comprising 8 lecturers from Ebonyi State Tertiary institution, 12 lecturers from Akanu Ibiam Federal Polytechnic and 11 lecturers from Ebonyi State College of Education Ikwo. Out of the 31 copies of the questionnaire 30 copies were returned. The questionnaire had 46 Items which were used in the study.  The findings revealed that the tertiary institutions do not have the necessary E-learning facilities needed for teaching and learning Tertiary education. The study also revealed non utilization of e-learning facilities and identified high cost of procurement and installation of e-learning centre, poor maintenance of existing communication and poor power supply as some challenges found to inhibit the availability and utilization of e-learning in tertiary institution in Ebonyi State. The reviewed study is related to the current study in terms of the independent variable. Both studies differ in terms of population, the reviewed study used university in one state while the current study used universities in two states.  They also differ in terms of location.  The reviewed study was done in Ebonyi State while the current state was done in Delta and Edo States.

Galy, Downey and Johnson (2011) conducted a study on the effect of using e-learning tools in online and campus-based classrooms on students’ performance.  Two hypotheses were formulated and tested at 0.05 level of significance. The purpose of the study was to examine the effect of using e-learning tools in online ad campus-based classroom on students’ performance.  The survey research design was adopted.  The population of the study comprised of students pursuing a Bachelors of business Administration, who were given the choice of enrolling in either online section or campus-based section of the same course during the Fall semester of 2009.  The moderating variables of gender, age and city of residence was used in the study.  The sampling technique adopted was purposive sampling and the sample size was students in Information Systems in organizations (IS), Human Resource Management (HRM), and I International Management (INTL).  The questionnaire was used as a means for data collection.  Method of data analysis was mean, standard deviation, t-test, correlation and regression analysis.  Findings of the study revealed that e-learning tools as well as work, do play an important role in performance in both online and campus-based courses.  Also, that there is a statistically significant number of students who do not believe that online courses are equal in value compared to those delivered on campus.  Also, there was no significant difference between the final grades of the online and campus-based students. The reviewed study is related to the current study in terms of the independent and dependent variables. They both have hypotheses and moderating variables.  They differ in terms of geographical scope.  The reviewed study was carried out in USA while the current study was done in Nigeria.                   

Umoru and Zakka (2019) conducted a study on interactive technology competencies required by teachers of office technology and management for improved secretarial outcomes in polytechnics in North-Central Nigeria.  The study have hypotheses.  The purpose of the study was to investigate the interactive technology competencies required by teachers of office technology and management for improved secretarial outcome in polytechnics in North-Central Nigeria. The study revealed the following as interactive technology competencies required by Teachers of Office Technology and Management to improve secretarial performance in polytechnics in North-Central Nigeria; ability to use interactive white boards, electronic board for teaching, ability to use interactive forms on the web to create feedback or ask questions, ability to organize video conferencing or internet phone chat (Skype, Team Speak), ability to use interactive on-line survey tools (Survey Monkey, Zoomerang), ability to use student response systems (clickers, wireless learning calculator systems, etc.), ability to use instant messaging/chat room for content delivery, ability to use interactive multimedia and presentation application for teaching, ability to use simulations, or virtual worlds (Ayiti, Elemental, Second Life, Civilization), ability to use interactive collaborative editing software (Wikis, Google Docs), ability to use online student video projects (using YouTube, Google Video), ability to use Web 2.0 tools to interact and collaborate for teaching and learning purposes, ability to use interactive E-book, ability to use educational cloud services to store, manage and process data, ability to use audience response pads, ability to create online interactive audio and video instructions.  The reviewed study is related to the present study in terms of the e-learning technologies.  Both studies differ in terms of the geographical scope.  The reviewed study was carried out in North-Central Nigeria while the current study was done in Delta and Edo States in South-South Nigeria.

      Methodology

The survey research method was used for the study.  The stratified random sampling technique was adopted and the sample size was 100 business education students from the selected Universities in Delta and Edo States.  The instrument was a self-developed questionnaire titled, “Impact of E-learning technologies Questionnaire (IUELTQ)”.  Which was divided into two parts namely (Section A and Section B) Section A contained the demographic variables of the respondents, while Section B dealt with the research questions.  The items in the Section B of the questionnaire was rated with a 4-point rating scale of Very Great Extent (VGE), Great Extent (GE), Little Extent (LE), and Very Little Extent(VLE), which was weighed 4, 3, 2, and 1 respectively. (See Appendix C, p. 84)

The instrument was face and content validated by the research supervisor, one expert from the Department of Business Education and one expert from the Department of Measurement and Evaluation all from Delta State University, Abraka. 

Data collected was analysed with the use of mean, standard deviation, t-test, and One Way Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) was used for testing the null hypotheses at 0.05 level of significance. 

Any mean that is less than 2.50 means little extent of utilization of e-learning technologies while any mean that is 2.50 -3.49 means Great Extent of utilization of e-learning technologies, while any mean at 3.50 and above means Very Great Extent of utilization of e-learning technologies. 

Results:

Table 1:  Mean and Standard Deviation responses on availability of e-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students

S/N  To what extent are the following E – Learning Software Technologies available for teaching and learning business Education courses in your institution?XSDREMARK
 1.Word Processing Software3.310.83GE
 2.Typing Software (Marvis Beacon, Ultrakey)2.890.85GE
3.Data Base Software2.620.95GE
4.Design and Graphic Software2.621.07GE
5.Desktop Publishing Software2.620.98GE
6.Internet Browsing Software2.710.95GE
7.Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Software2.520.96GE
8.E-mail Facilities2.631.04GE
9.Interactive Websites2.651.07GE
10.Intranet/Extranet2.490.93LE
11.Online Tutorial in Zoom2.451.01LE
12Power point for Lecture Presentation2.551.00GE
13.Spread Sheet (Excel) Software2.851.07GE
14.Search Engine (eg. google.com firefox.com etc.)2.571.03GE
15.Chat rooms (Facebook, Youtube, twitter and 2go)2.681.11GE
 GRAND MEAN/SD2.680.99GE

Data presented in Table 1 revealed that the mean responses of respondents on availability of e-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students ranged from 2.45 to 3.31, while the standard deviation ranged from 0.83 to 1.11.  Similarly, the grand mean of 2.68 depicted that availability of e-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students in in universities in Delta and Edo States was to a Great extent.  Also, the standard deviation showed that the respondents were not far apart in their responses.  Although, Table 1 showed that the availability of intranet/extranet and online tutorial in zoom for undergraduate business education students was to a little extent.  Which implied that these technologies were rarely available for use by the students.

Table 2:  Mean and Standard Deviation responses on impact of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students

S/NTo what extent does the following E-learning software technologies has positive impact on the academic performance of undergraduate business Education studentsXSDREMARK
1.Word Processing Software3.290.98GE
2.Typing Software (Marvis Beacon, Ultrakey)2.850.77GE
3.Data Base Software2.730.99GE
4.Internet Browsing Software2.471.06LE
5.E-Electronic Books Software2.660.92GE
6.Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Software2.561.08GE
7.E-mail Facilities2.581.04GE
8.Motion Films2.531.06GE
9.Interactive Websites2.621.01GE
10.Intranet/Extranet2.331.01LE
11.Online Tutorials in CD and DVD2.581.06GE
12.Power point for Lecture Presentation Software2.531.04GE
13.Spread Sheet (Excel) Software2.631.02GE
14.Search Engine (eg. google.com firefox.com)2.720.99GE
15.Chat rooms (Facebook, Youtube, twitter  2go)2.700.99GE
 GRAND MEAN/SD2.651.00GE

Data presented in Table 2 revealed that the mean responses of respondents on impact of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students ranged from 2.33 to 3.29, while the standard deviation ranged from 0.77 to 1.06.  Similarly, the grand mean of 2.65 depicts that impact of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States was to a Great extent.  Also, the standard deviation showed that the respondents were not far apart in their responses.  Although, Table 3 showed that impact of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students with regards to Internet Browsing Software and Intranet/Extranet was to a little extent.

For the hypotheses, any calculated p-value that is less than 0.05, the null hypothesis was rejected and any calculated p-value that was greater than 0.05 the null hypotheses was retained.

Table 3: t-test Analysis of Business Education students’ Mean Ratings on the availability of E-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students’ programme in universities in Delta and Edo States based on gender.

Gender           N         Mean              SD       df        α          p-value           Decision

98        0.05         0.39                 NS

Male                37        3.22                 0.92

Female            63        3.37                 0.77

Data presented in Table 3 indicates that the p-value on the availability of E-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students’ programme is 0.39.  This implies that there is no significant difference in the mean rating of business education students on the availability of E-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students’ programme in universities in Delta and Edo States based on gender.

Table 4: t-test Analysis of Business Education students’ Mean Ratings on the impact of utilization of e-learning technologies on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States based on qualification in view.

Qualification             N         Mean              SD       df        α          p-value           Decision

98        0.05         0.85                 NS

B.Sc (Ed.)                   59        3.31                 1.02

B.Ed.                           41        3.27                 0.92

Data presented in Table 4 indicated that the p-value on the impact of utilization of e-learning technologies on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities is 0.85.  This implies that there is no significant difference in the mean rating of business education students on the impact of utilization of e-learning technologies on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States based on qualification in view.

Discussion of Findings

The study found in research question one that the following e-learning technologies are available for undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States to a great extent.  These e-learning technologies include Word Processing Software, Typing Software (Marvis Beacon, Ultrakey), Data Base Software, Design and Graphic Software, Desktop Publishing Software, Internet Browsing Software, Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Software.  Others include E-mail Facilities, Interactive Websites, Power point for Lecture Presentation, Spread Sheet (Excel) Software, Search Engine (eg. google.com firefox.com etc.), and Chat rooms (Facebook, Youtube, twitter and 2go).   This finding corroborate the findings of  Yuning, et al. (2022)  who found that  students can interact anytime and from anywhere with various educational material like messages, audio, picture video and more via the internet. It contradicts the findings of Azih and Nwosu (2012) who discovered in their study that tertiary institutions do not have the necessary E-learning facilities needed for teaching and learning Tertiary education. However, it was observed from the results of data analysis that intranet/extranet and online tutorial in zoom for undergraduate business education students was barely available for the students use. These findings collaborate Elena, et al. (2021) who found that sufficient ICT facilities can contribute to better learning and students’ academic performance.

The result of data analysis for research question three indicted that E-learning technologies have great impact on the academic performance of undergraduate Business Education Students in universities in Delta and Edo States. E-learning technologies have impact on the academic performance of undergraduate Business Education Students in universities in Delta and Edo States.  The e-learning technologies that have great impact on academic performance of undergraduate business education students are, Word Processing Software, Typing Software (Marvis Beacon, Ultrakey), Data Base Software, E-Electronic Books Software, Statistical Analysis and Forecasting Software, E-mail Facilities, Motion Films, Online Tutorials in CD and DVD, Power point for Lecture Presentation Software, Spread Sheet (Excel) Software, Search Engine (eg. google.com firefox.com) and Chat rooms (Facebook, Youtube, twitter  2go). 

The findings of the present study agreed with that of Galy, et al. (2011) that e-learning tools as well as work, do play an important role in performance in both online and campus-based courses.  Also, it agreed with Yuning, et al. (2022) who found that e-learning is positively and significance related to academic performance. These findings corroborate with Elena, et al. (2021) who discovered that e-learning has a significant beneficial impact on the academic success of students. The findings of Ejubovic and Puska (2019) also support the findings of the present study that self-regulated learning influenced satisfaction and academic performance. The findings of the present study collaborates Yousef, and Basem, (2020) who uphold in their study that, the implementation of e-learning strategy has a positive impact and statistically significant differences on the students’ GPA.

Conclusion.

The main purpose of the study was to investigate the impact of the utilization of e-learning technologies on academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States. The content variables covered in this study include:  E-learning technologies, software and academic performance.

The theoretical framework of the study was based on Constructivism Learning Theory propounded by Seymour Papert in 1980. 

The findings of the study revealed that e-learning technologies have a great impact on the academic performance of undergraduate business education students in universities in Delta and Edo States to a great extent.  Also, there is no significant difference in the mean ratings of the Business Education students on the availability of E-learning technologies for undergraduate business education students’ programme in universities in Delta and Edo States based on gender, gender, age, educational qualification in view and academic level.

Recommendations:

Based on the findings of this study, the following recommendations were made:

  1. The management of university administration should ensure that the institution should make available intranet/extranet and also make provision for online tutorial in zoom for undergraduate business education students.
  2. The lecturers should ensure that students make use of Desktop Publishing Software, Chat rooms (Facebook, Youtube, twitter 2go), Interactive Websites, Intranet/Extranet, and Online Tutorials in CD and DVD as they will enhance their academic performance.
  3. Curriculum planners of the universities should make deliberate efforts to provide curriculum that will accommodate the utilization of e-learning software and technology, since the e-learning technologies enhance the academic performance of students.

REFERENCES

Akudolu, L. R. (2012). Exploring Appropriate Pedagogical Designs for Optimizing E-learning in Higher Education in Nigeria, UNIZIK Orient Journal of Education, 6(1) 105-119

Azih, N. (2011). Needed for adoption of E-Learning in teaching business courses in Nigerian Tertiary institution Unizik Orient Journal of Education, 6 (1 & 2) 44-47.

Azih, N. & Nwosu, B.O. (2012). Availability and utilization of E-Learning facilities in Tertiary Institutions in Ebonyi State. Business Education Journal, 8 (2), 72-82.

Balakamakshi, T.Y. & Savithri, R. (2021).  Effect of e-learning on students’ academic performance at college level.  Palarch’s Journal of Archaeology of Egypt/Egyptology, 18(1), 4690-4694

Jung, I. S. & Kim, B. (2008). What makes teachers use technology in the classroom? Exploring the factors affecting facilitation of technology with a Korem sample. Computers and education, (50), 244-234.

Cai-Yu, W., Yuan-Yuan, Z. and Shih-Chih, C. (2021). The empirical study of college students’ e-learning effectiveness and its antecedents towards the COVID-19 epidemic environment.  Frontiers in Psychology, August 2021(12), 1-14

Elena, Y.Z. Svetlana, G.Z., Natalia, V.F. & Yana, E.S. (2021).  Education policy:  The Impact of E-Learning on Academic Performance.  Web of Conference 244, 11024.  Retrieved  April, 23, 2023 from:  http://doi.org/10.1051/e3sconf/202124411924

Ejubovic, A. & Puska, A. (2019) Impact of self-regulated learning on academic performance and satisfaction of students in the online environment.  Knowledge Management &E-Learning, 11(3), 345-363

Ezenwafor J.I. (2012). Adequacy of exposure to information and communication technology in business. Graduating business education students of tertiary institutions in Anambra state. Business education journal.  8(2), 45-601.

Ezeugbor, C.O. & Nwachukwu, E. (2011). Adopting e-learning in university education:

Prospects and problems. UNIZIK Orient Journal of Education, 6(1 & 2), 145-151.

 Galy, Downey and Johnson (2011) conducted a study on the effect of using e-learning tools in online and campus-based classrooms on students’ performance. Journal of Information Technology Education, 209-230

Idowu, P. O. & Adagunodo E. R, Popoola B. A. (2003). Computer Literacy level and gender differences among Nigeria Universities staff. The African            Symbolism on unal Journal, 3(3) 7 – 12. .

Muilenburg, L. Y. & Berge, Z. L. (2001). Barriers to Online Learning. A factor Analytic Study. American Journal of Distance Education, 15(2), 7-24.

Nwosu, J.  C. (2015). Motivation and Teacher’s Performance in selected Public Secondary Schools in Ikenne Local Government Area of Ogun State. British Journal of Psychology Research, 5(3), 285-306.

Nwosu, S. E. (2017). Fundamental of computer and education technology. Enugu Press.

Obikeze, N. J. & Onyechi, C. (2011). Availability and accessibility of E-Learning facilities to students and leaders of Anambra State Tertiary institution, Unizik, Orient Journal of Education, 6 (1 & 2), 62 – 67.

Okoli, C. I. (2012). Assessment of strategies for optimizing ICT usage among undergraduate Students.  Journal Book of Reading. 2(8) 204 – 211.

Okoli, J. N. & Ifeakor, A. C. (2011). Appraisal of utilization of E-Learning Technology in Science Teacher’s preparation: A study of Universities in South East Nigeria. Orient Journal of Education 6 (1 & 2). 136 – 144.

Okwuanaso, S. I. & Nwazor J. C. (2000). Instructional Strategies in Business Education, Awka Ikenga Publishers

Oluwalola, F. K., (2006). “The Effect of Modern Information Communication Technology on Secretarial Workers, Journal of Office Management and Technology 1(1), 94-101.Auchi Polytechnic, Auchi.

Ong, C. S., & Lai, J. Y. (2006). Gender difference in perceptions and relationship among dominants of E-Learning acceptance. Computers in Human Behaviour, 22(5), 816 – 829.

Anowor, O.O. (2010). e-learning and teacher preparation in Nigeria. A lead paper

presented at the Annual Conference of the Faculty of Education. Enugu: Nnamdi

Azikiwe University, Awka.

Oye, N. D. Salleh, M. & Ai.ahad, N. (2010). Holistic E-learning in Nigerian Higher Educational Institutions.  Journal of Computing, 2(11), 20-26.

Thijs, J. T., Spilt, J. L., Koomen, H. M. Y. & Vander L. A. (2011). Learning through the web 

available online. http://www/decidenetnl/ publication/web-based/learning. pdf.  Accessed 10 May, 2023.

Umoeshiet E. A. (2015), Assessment of Adequacy of Available New Technologies in

            Business     Education for Instructional Delivery in State-Owned Universities in     

Delta and Edo States.  International Journal of Innovative Education   Research.Retrieved May 10, 2023 from: www.theinterscholar.org/journals/index.php/isjassr.

Umoru, T.A. & Zakka, D.D. (2019). Interactive technology competencies required by teachers of office technology and management for improved secretarial outcomes in polytechnics in North-Central Nigeria. Nigerian Journal of Business Education – 6(2), 14-23.

Yuning, H.S., Saxin, W.L. & Cheng, Z.L. (2022) Effect of e-learning on academic performance of undergraduate students at Nankai University, China.  Stratford Journal, 5(5). Retrieved on 20th June, 2023 from:  http://dpo/prg/10.53819/81018102t50122.

Okoro, J. & Umoeshiet, E. A. (2021), Interactive Technology Competencies required by Business Education Graduates in Universities, South-South Nigeria as perceived by lecturers. International Journal of Business Education. Retrieved 15th May, 2023.

A Review of Literature: Women Entrepreneurship during COVID-19

by G. Sai Sravanthi | Publication date: Oct. 20, 2023 | Publication: International Journal of Research

ICSSR-Project Director, Assistant Professor, Department of Business Management

Vikrama Simhapuri University, Kakutur-524324,

Nellore District, Andhra Pradesh

Abstract:

Entrepreneurs are people who create businesses to take advantage of new opportunities. Women entrepreneurs as that of male entrepreneurs play a crucial to the economic development of a Nation. The Government of India defines a female entrepreneur as a company owned and controlled by women, with at least 51% of capital owned by women and at least 51% of employment created by the company. The COVID-19 virus began spreading on November 2019 in China and within a very short period of time, it wide spread almost every Nation. On March 11, 2020, WHO (World Health Organization) announced the disease as a pandemic. Women entrepreneurs have been facing various challenges in the sustenance of their enterprises during the pandemic. This paper focused on the impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic on women entrepreneurs in INDIA with the review of literature.

Keywords: Women entrepreneurs, COVID-19, entrepreneurship

Introduction:

Women Entrepreneur:

Entrepreneurship is a formidable engine of economic growth.Entrepreneurship refers to the act of setting up a new business to capture new opportunities. The act of setting up a new business or reviving an existing business so as to take advantage of new opportunities.” Women’s entrepreneurship makes women economically independent International Liberation Organization defined the women‘s enterprise as a small unit where one or more women entrepreneurs have not less than 50 per cent financial holdings .The word-Entrepreneurship is derived from the French word‘’entreprendre’’meaning’ ’undertake’’, The German word ‘’Unternehmen’’mean ‘’to undertake’’ means an Entrepreneur is “one who undertakes or manages. The Oxford English Dictionary (of 1897) defines the term ―Entrepreneur in a similar way as the director or a manager of a public musical institution, one who gets-up entertainment arranged, especially musical performance. Initially, it was applied to those who were engaged in military expeditions in the early 16th century and later extended to cover engineering activities and construction in the 17th century.

Entrepreneur:

According to E.E. Hagen, “an entrepreneur is an economic man who by his innovative ideas, problem-solving skills and better utilization of his skills tries to maximize profits.

 M.M.P. Akhouri (former Executive Director, NIESBUD) defined an entrepreneur as “a one, who combines risk bearing, innovativeness, able to analyse opportunities and capture resources and persistent in reaching the objective.’’

 Entrepreneurship:

According to A.H. Cole “  The purposeful activity of an individual or a group involved to start ,maintain or maximize profits by production and distribution of goods and services

Government of India – “A woman entrepreneur is defined as an enterprise owned and controlled by a woman having a minimum financial interest of 51 percent of the capital and giving at least 51 percent of the employment generated in the enterprise to women.”

Women entrepreneurs may be defined as a woman or a group of women who initiate, organize, and run a business concern. Women or groups of women who initiate, organize, and run a business enterprise are called as women entrepreneurs.

Schumpeter – “Women entrepreneurs are those women who innovate, initiate or adopt a business activity”.

The outbreak of COVID-19 has badly affected global economics. Several businesses suffered due to this crisis. The death pool has reached 6,514,397 deaths while the number of cases is 612,236,677 worldwide till 2022 (WHO COVID Dashboard) In India, the first case of COVID-19 was confirmed on 30 January 2020 and then civic infection is increased. The MSME sector in India comprises 69 million enterprises that approximately employ 110 million of the national workforce and is considered the second largest employment generation after agriculture. Women entrepreneurs make a tremendous contribution to the Indian Economy and own 20 percent of microenterprises, nearly 3 percent of medium-sized enterprises, and 5 percent of small enterprises. COVID-19 has made a negative impact on the global economy and the micro. small and medium sectors (MSME) IN Particular. Over the decade, the percentage of women-owned enterprises has increased. India has a greater percentage of women-owned enterprises when compared to many other countries. As per the Udyam report as of June 2021,81 % of MSMEs are owned by males,17% are owned by females and 1% are unrecognized in India. Specific women-related special provisions have also been taken by the government. The Government of India also allocated 80% of the fund to help women entrepreneurs associations to create marketing hubs (MSME,2021).

As per the findings of the report, Micro Save under the Research Scheme (RSNA – 2021) of NITI Aayog following are found:

 India could boost its GDP by USD 0.7 trillion by bringing 68 million more women into India’s workforce by 2025 according to reports of McKinsey Global Institute (MGI). India could increase GDP growth by 1.5 percentage points by inclusion of 50% of the women in the workforce as per the World Bank report. However, A Sharp fall in India’s female labor force participation rate (FLFPR) from 32% in 2005 to 19% in 2021. Constant fall 1 in FLFPR is because of several factors like reduced child labor, sectoral shift from agriculture post, and increased girls’ enrolment in higher education. Etc. India’s women’s economic contribution accounts for 17% of the GDP and the pandemic COVID-19 exacerbated the situation when women’s employment and decreased profits business. Only 20% of enterprises in India are owned by India. The majority 82% of the enterprises owned by women are micro units and run as sole proprietorships. Livestock, manufacturing, and retail trade constitute about 6.36 million enterprises of the total 8.05 million. Studies reveal that 10% to 30% of registered enterprises are not often run by women.

REVIEW OF LITERATURE:

1) Bhardwaj G.N , Parashar, S. Pandey. B and Sahu. P. (2012):

The researchers have examined several motivating and de-motivating factors affecting women’s Entrepreneurship and found out that there exist multiple crucial factors related to women’s entrepreneurial opportunities that differ from one place to another place but women’s entrepreneurship is very important for the development of any country economy.

2) Roohangiz Namdari, Shahin Raz, Hajar Aramoon (2012) :

The study was conducted in Khoozesta Province to determine the socio-cultural and economic factors affecting women’s entrepreneurship. Women entrepreneurs were considered from Ahwaz, Dezfol, Khorramshar and Abadan, 100 entrepreneurs were selected based on simple random sampling. The research instrument used was a questionnaire and descriptive and analytic procedures were employed. The research shown that social Factors had more effect on women’s entrepreneurship in Khouzestan than other factors.

3) Irene Fafaliou, Ioannis Salamouris (2014): The research was done to identify the profile of female entrepreneurs in Greece, their main characteristics by conducting an online survey from November 2012 to January 2013, with a sample of 300 women entrepreneurs. The major findings show entrepreneurs are successful but some imbalance exists between personal and professional life.

4) Janet Rajakumari, Mrs. Angel Beulah Gracelia (2015) :

The researchers highlighted the concept of women entrepreneurship in India. The major outcome of the research study was lack of balance between job and family, male-dominated society, illiteracy, lack of technical skills, entrepreneurial skills, and marketing skills.

5) Unnikrishnan. P and S. Bhuvaneswari (2016):

The study analyzed various problems faced by women Entrepreneurs in Malappuram District of Kerala. The results reveal that the Government should provide financial assistance and training to women entrepreneurs. District Women industrial estate shall be set up for wide extension of activities of women entrepreneurs.

6) Sonal Sharma (2018):

The researchers have conducted an investigation to analyze the impact of ICT on entrepreneurship and ICT initiatives taken for women entrepreneurs and explore the challenges of women entrepreneurship.

7) R. Vijayalakshmi, V. Palanisingh, G. Lingavel, T. R. Gurumurthy (2019):

The Investigators have analyzed the issues faced by women entrepreneurs by taking a sample size of 200 and convenience sampling was used. The results reveal that women entrepreneurs are affected more by the pandemic which resulted in a huge loss of their business.

8) Ritwik Saraswat (2020):

The study attempted to understand the concept, and meaning of women’s entrepreneurship and how important role played by women entrepreneurs for the development of the economy, for which an in-depth literature review was reviewed. In addition, the research was focused on the evaluation of the effectiveness of various Government schemes employed and framed for women entrepreneurs, assessing the challenges faced by women entrepreneurs. For the study, data collection was collected through primary collection through surveys, questionnaires and secondary data collected from reports of NABARD, RBI, various journals were used respectively.

9) Ika Nur Putriantini & Yoshi Takahashi (2020):

The study conducted an examination of women entrepreneurs in rural areas of a developing country to know the perspectives on demographic characteristics, barriers, and the non-economic outcomes of women entrepreneurs. The results demonstrate that there exists a significant relationship between demographic characteristics.

10) Govind Dewan and Fedric Kujur (2021):

The study highlighted the challenges and opportunities of women’s entrepreneurship in the present world. The research was confined to Kolkata during the period of December 2020 to January 2021 with 35 women respondents as a sample representing the real information. Results show that focus should be emphasized on women with family, and friends support to compete with male entrepreneurs.

11) Hiren Rana and Ninad Jhala (2021):

The research was conducted by secondary data collected through published reports, journals, websites, media, etc to understand the issues faced by women entrepreneurs and the impact of COVID-19 in India. They have suggested training programs, technical assistance and funding to women entrepreneurs and the formation of Government policies to encourage women’s participation. .

12) Faisal Mustafa, Ambreen Khursheed, Maham Fatima, Marriam Rao(2021) :

The study was done to explore the impact of COVID-19 lockdown on micro-businesses owned by women borrowers of microfinance institutions and in managing crisis situations. The results provide valuable insights on life style, household income, business sales

13) Jesica Tosses, Franklin Maduko, ISIS Gaddis, Leonardo Iacoven and Kathleen Beegle (2021):

The investigators chosen 40,000 from five countries including informal firm in the sample, predominant businesses from 49 countries during the months of April and September 2020. Findings show that digital payments were widely used by micro firms.

14) Nishtha Nayyar (2021):

The researchers aimed to analyze the success and pitfalls of women entrepreneurs during the pandemic COVID-19 with a sample size of 36 women entrepreneurs from Chandigarh, India. Results reveal that there is a relationship between self-efficacy and resilience and the Government’s role in encouraging women entrepreneurs.

15) Shefali Nandan and Anjali Kushwaha (2021):

The researchers have explored the various challenges faced by women entrepreneurs during COVID-19 Pandemic and the opportunities, they perceived. The approach used was exploratory case study and purposive sampling method. First-generation women entrepreneurs were selected and findings show that a rapid fall in sales and demand of the product and service during the early period of the pandemic four challenges such as operational disruptions, new skill development, work-life fusion and declining sales were identified.

16) Sanjeev Kumar and Neha Singh(2021) :

The researchers have analyzed the hindering factors along with the role of the state experienced by the Delhi-based women entrepreneurs in setting up enterprises amidst the challenges posed by COVID -19 pandemic. Recommended gender concerns in policy initiatives

17) Silvia De Simone, Jessica Pileri, Max Rapp-Ricciardi& Barbara Barbieri(2021)

The researcher’s study reveals the major role of family-work conflict on the success of entrepreneurs in Italy. Recommended Italian Government on implementing child care supply and specific family-friendly policies designed for women entrepreneurs.

18) Rizwan Ullah Khan, Yashar Salamzadeh , Syed Zulfiqar Ali Shah and Mazhar Hussain (2021):

The researchers have investigated to identify the factors that affect women entrepreneurs’ success in Pakistan 181 registered SMEs operating in Pakistan were considered for the study. The results indicate that internal factors like risk bearer,, being self-confident, desire to achieve high and external factors like socio-cultural, market economic factors have a positive impact on the success of enterprises. Small and Medium Enterprises Development Authority (SMEDA), has to be set up to support women entrepreneurs.

19) Bathula Srinivasau, Shilpa Bhatia and Ankita Gupta (2022):

The study was focused on the analysis of direct and indirect impact via forward and backward linkages of women entrepreneurs during the Pandemic. A sample of 50 women entrepreneurs was considered and data was collected using a questionnaire during the August and September months of 2020. Tools used for the study are Chi-square, Mann-Whitney, U-test, Kruskal-Wallis H-test and the sampling technique adopted was convenience sampling. Results of the study show that rapid decline in revenues by 96% and customers by 94% an increase in transportation costs by 78% and 48% of women entrepreneurs have relied on personal savings to meet expenses instead of the Atma Nirbhar package by the Government.

20) Shabya Singh and John Britto.M.(2022):

The research was conducted to identify various challenges, conflicts, and opportunities faced by female entrepreneurs. Primary and secondary data collection were collected by surveys and reports. The area of study considered was NOIDA, Uttar Pradesh and findings show that the majority of female entrepreneurs faced domestic and professional life challenges in balancing work –life. They have suggested Government to organize training programs.

21) Ritu Yadav (2022):

The researchers have explored drivers of entrepreneurial intention among women entrepreneurs during the pandemic and a sample of 52 were considered and the research was confined to Haryana’s rural and urban areas. Because of the COVID-19 Pandemic, online responses were collected by generation of Google forms to collect the data. The results reveal that, financial motivation, family responsibility, knowledge, and underemployment have been the four motivators to women in India to become entrepreneurs.

22) Amrita Nandy , Mohona Biswas (2022):

They have tried to identify Bangladeshi women entrepreneurs amid the Covid-19. The study laid focuses on women entrepreneurs conducting business mostly (99%) in Bangladesh’s micro, and small. medium enterprises. Findings indicate 20% of women entrepreneurs in Bangladesh have been severely impacted and 90% have faced mental agony, and socio-economic stress.

23) Zhengda Xu and Heqi Jia (2022):

The study focused on the influence of Covid-19 on the well-being of entrepreneurs in China.303 entrepreneurs were selected for study and suggested measures to maintain well-being during pandemic and post-pa

24) Sonja Franzke , Jie Wu ·Fabian Jintae Froese Zi Xuan Chan (2022):

The researchers have reviewed female entrepreneurs in Asia, emphasizing on how they vary from entrepreneurs in the West, with four dimensions: Special characteristics of female entrepreneurs, their special intentions, resource constraints, and their management styles. The analysis reveals predominant differences between developing Asian female entrepreneurs often have a low level of education and developed Asian female entrepreneurs have a high –level of education.

BIBLIOGRAPHY:

1)Amrita Nandy , Mohona Biswas, Impact of covid-19 on women entrepreneurs’ survival in Bangladesh’’, BLM2-ICAM4 AN INTERNATIONAL JOINT E -CONFERENCE (ICAM 2020) organized by Taylor’s University and University of Kelaniya , September, 2021.

2) Bhardwaj G. N, Parashar, S. Pandey. B., and Sahu. P, ’’Women entrepreneurship in India: opportunities and challenges ’’.Volume 2, Issue 1,2012.

3) Bathula Srinivasau, Shilpa Bhatia and Ankita Gupta, Collision of the COVID-19 Lockdown on Women Entrepreneurship in Uttarakhand: A Microlevel Analysis’’, Journal of Economic Theory and Practice,pp:1–16, 2022.

4) Govind Dewan and Fedric Kujur, ‘’Challenges and Opportunities of Women Entrepreneurs during Pandemic Period: An Empirical Study in Kolkata’’, International Journal of Research Publication and Reviews, Volume. 2, no 12, pp: 646-653, December 2021.

5) Faisal Mustafa, Ambreen Khursheed, Maham Fatima, Marriam Rao,’’ Exploring the impact of COVID-19 pandemic on women entrepreneurs in Pakistan’’, International Journal of Gender and Entrepreneurship, Volume.13 No. 2, pp. 187-203, 2021.

6) Hiren Rana and Ninad Jhala, Impact of Covid-19 on women entrepreneurship in India, BSSS Journal of Social Work: ISSN (Print) -0975-251X, E-ISSN-2582-4864, Volume. XIII, Issue-I.pp-127-135, 2021.

7) Janet Rajakumari ,Mrs. Angel Beulah Gracelia,’’ Challenges Faced by Women Entrepreneurship in Tamilnadu’’, Global Journal for Research Analysis, Volume-4, Issue-6, June-2015, ISSN No 2277 – 8160,pp:1-14.

8) Ika Nur Putriantini & Yoshi Takahashi,’’ Demographic Characteristics and Non-economic Outcomes of Women Entrepreneurs with Moderation of Barriers: The Case of Small Enterprises in Rural Coastal Area of Indonesia’’, Jurnal Perikanan Universitas Gadjah Mada,22(1), pp: 43-54,2020.

9) Irene Fafaliou , Ioannis Salamouris,’’Analyze Female Entrepreneurship :Evidence from Greece’’, International Journal of Economics & Business Administration (IJEBA), volume II, issue 1, pp:21-38,2014.

10) Rizwan Ullah Khan, Yashar Salamzadeh, Syed Zulfiqar Ali Shah and Mazhar Hussain, Factors affecting women entrepreneurs’ success: a study of small- and medium-sized enterprises in emerging market of Pakistan ‘’, Journal of Innovation and Entrepreneurship ,pp:1-21,2021.

11) Roohangiz Namdari , Shahin Raz, Hajar Aramoon , ‘’A Survey on socio-cultural and economic factors affecting  women entrepreneurs in Khouzestan Province’’, Australian Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 6(13):pp:11-17, ISSN 1991-8178,2012.

12) Shabya Singh, Dr. John Britto M,‘’ Challenges and opportunities faced by women entrepreneurs with special reference to NOIDA (UP), International Journal of Engineering Applied Sciences and Technology, 2022 Vol. 6, Issue 11, ISSN No. 2455-2143, Pages 120-129,2022.

13) Shefali Nandan and Anjali Kushwaha, ‘’Interventions of non-governmental organizations for women’s empowerment through micro-entrepreneurship: evidence from India’’, International Journal of Indian Culture and Business Management Volume. 29, No. 1, pp 96-113, May 2023.

14) Silvia De Simone, Jessica Pileri, Max Rapp-Ricciardi& Barbara Barbieri’’ Mea Culpa! The Role of Guilt in the Work-Life Interface and Satisfaction of Women Entrepreneurs’’, International Journal of Environmental Research public Health,2030;19(17):10781, August.2022.

15) Sonal Sharma, Emerging Dimensions of Women Entrepreneurship: Developments & Obstructions, Economic Affairs, Volume 63, No. 2, pp. 337-346, June 2018

16) Sonja Franzke, Jie Wu ·Fabian Jintae Froese Zi Xuan Chan, ‘’Female entrepreneurship in Asia:a critical review and future directions’’, Asian Business & Management,pp:343-373,2022.

17) Unnikrishnan. P and S.Bhuvaneswari, ‘’A Study on the Issues and Problems of women entrepreneurs in Kerala with special reference to Malapurram District’’ ,International Journal of Research-GRANTHAALAYAH, ISSN-2350-0530(O)ISSN-2394-3629(P), Volume 4, Issue 6,pp:105-112, September,2016.

18) Zhengda Xu and Heqi Jia,’’ The Influence of COVID-19 on Entrepreneur’s Psychological Well-Being’’, Front Psychology, 2022.

19)https://www.yourarticlelibrary.com/women/women-entrepreneurship/women-entrepreneurship.

20) https://thefinancialexpress.com.bd/views/reviews/defining-woman-entrepreneurship

My Sublime Experience in Four Durga Puja Celebrations in Hyderabad in 2023: One Golden Jubilee and Three Nascent

In Hyderabad and Secunderabad, there are lakhs of Bengali population. Exact data is not available, but as per Deccan Chronicle, October 12, 2021, over the decades, the number of Durga Puja mandaps has increased to around 60 in Hyderabad and Secunderabad, with about 6.5 lakh Bengalis in the twin cities celebrating the festival. It is noteworthy to mention that as of October 2021, around 6.5 lakh Bengalis were living in the twin cities, so naturally, the number has gone up.
Generally, Durga Puja is celebrated for four days- Maha Saptami, Maha Astami, Maha Navami, and Vijayadashami (immersion of Devi idols). Sometimes, one day before the celebration started, which is known as Maha Shasthi. In this article, four Durga Puja celebrations that I enjoyed in 2023 are presented. Of these, one was the Golden Jubilee celebration, and the other three were comparatively nascent.
1) Bengalee Cultural Association, Masab Tank, Hyderabad, started its Puja with some residents in 1947. Over the period, the Durga Puja celebration has become popular among the Bengalis and other communities such as Telugu, Hindi-speaking people, and others. In 2023, the Durga Puja committee members celebrated 50 years, i.e. Golden Jubilee. Since I have been in Hyderabad for the last three decades, I have been going with my family members for at least one day and offering Pushpanjali (Prayer with flowers)and sweets from my side. As usual, this year, 2023, I also visited with my family members and learned that members have increased to more than 1000. And over a period of time, its budget has also increased. This year’s budget was hovering around Rs. 35 lakh. The celebration started on October 20, Friday (Maha Sasthi Day), and with the Vijayadashami, i.e., Devi immersion/Visarjan, on October 24, the celebration was completed. Among the Committee Members – President Sri M.K. Mitra, Vice President Smt. Anita Das Gupta, the General Secretary Sri Ranjit Paul, and other members informed that Bhog as Prosadam (different rice items, vegetable curry, sweets, etc.) were served on October 21, 22, 23, and 24.
Every day, thousands of people joined the Bhog Prosadam, i.e., lunch, and each day, different rice-based preparations (such as Kichri, Polao/Fried rice, general rice, etc.) were prepared, in addition to vegetable curry and sweets, etc. Also, on a rent basis, there were some food stalls. In addition, there were cultural programmes from October 20 to October 23, 2023.
2) Uttaran Bangiya Samiti, Narsingi, Hyderabad, is a relatively new celebration of Durga Puja as it was started in the year 2018. By interacting with General Secretary Dr Chiranjit Ghosh on October 22, 2023, a young person of around 37 years old informed that around 600 families were associated with the puja committee. Based on their donation and some sponsors, their budget was around Rs 25 lakh. They also offer Bhog to all visitors from October 21 to 24. On different days, different rice items were served along with vegetable curry, dal sweets, etc. And evening cultural programmes were organised, including singing, dancing, drama, etc. The local people performed all these. He further informed that 16 stalls in the premises on a rent basis were allowed. These stalls were food plus non-food items. All the members, with hope, hype, and hoopla, supported it to make it a grand success. The President, Vice-president, Treasurer, and Joint Secretary of the committee were Sri Santanu Ghosal, Sri Somnath Pal, Smt Kasturi Pal, and Sri Saikat Karmakar, respectively. According to General Secretary Dr Chiranjit Ghosh, all these people and all other members dedicatedly and sincerely worked.
Since there were 16 stalls, to get an idea about the economic importance of earning income, I contacted one business family. Sri Argya Kumar Sanyal, with his wife and one young relative, set up a food stall where tea and different veg and non-veg snacks were available. I interviewed him on October 22, and he informed that for four days, he had to pay a sum of Rs. 14,000 as rent. According to him, he expected a profit of around Rs. 15,000 after incurring all expenditures. In this context, he further informed that he and his relatives managed the business, so there was no cost for incurring wages.
3) Attapur Bengali Association, Attapur, Hyderabad, was a nascent Durga Puja, as 45 families staying near the area started the celebration in 2018. The President of the Puja Committee, Sri Kuntal Purkait, and the General Secretary, Sri Tuhin Basu, informed that the budget was around Rs. 10 lakh because the members only pay the amount; of course, one organisation of the Government of India, viz National Mineral Development Corporation, NMDC, Hyderabad contributed some amount. And 18 food and non-food stalls were set up on the premises, and thus some amount was generated. They further informed that Bhog Prosadam as rice items were offered to all on October 21, 22, 23, and 24. And all three days there were cultural programmes. According to both of them, all the members sincerely and dedicatedly worked to make the celebration a great success.
4) This celebration is from Suncity Durga Puja, Bandlaguda Jagir, Hyderabad; around 100 families of Bandlaguda Jagir (Suncity), Hyderabad, established “Udjapan Sanskritik Samiti” and for the first time organised Durga Puja celebration with lots of enthusiasm vis-à-vis organised cultural events and Bhog Prosadam as mentioned already in other cases at K.K. Garden, Bandlaguda Jagir, Hyderabad. The President of the Samiti, Sri Nilay Kumar Mondal, the General Secretary, Sri Mridul Chakraborty, Treasurer Sri Arnab Saha, and other members were excited as the celebration was completed with full gaiety. On October 23 in the evening, during cultural programmes, Smt. Chandana Khan, I.A.S. (1979 Batch IAS of Andhra Pradesh cadre, retired in the rank of Chef Secretary ) graced the occasion as Chief Guest. She congratulated the organisers for meticulously organising the Durga Puja celebration for the first time. And wished with the pace of time, the same would be a popular celebration in the area and its vicinity. Smt. Chandana Khan also distributed the prizes who participated in different competitions.
Here, out of many stalls, I interacted with Syed Ashraf, who was the owner of a portal great.indian.wedding event management company. He set up a stall, and many non-neg and veg items were available. He informed (23/10/23) that after the completion of the celebration, he expected profit from this place. Although, such a stall was his first experience.
By visiting the four Durga Puja celebrations on different days, I observed that there were a few things in common. These inter alia were offering Bhog Prasadam in the form of different rice items, etc., (as mentioned already), then sharing with all the people within stipulated lunch time were common. Different competitions, such as quizzes, dances, dramas, recitations, blowing of shanks, etc, were also noteworthy. All the children, ladies, gents, and others, irrespective of age, enthusiastically participated. Another important feature was that for beating drums in Bengali, known as Dhak, two persons (in noun known as Dhaki) were brought, and all were from West Bengal. Another splendid performance was Aarati (priest dance with incense, a substance slowly burns for its sweet smell). And almost all places of Durga Puja, stalls were set up for food and non-food items. It is heartening that a few Muslim people also set up their stalls in some puja premises. This is a great phenomenon that I observe every year as I have been in Hyderabad last three decades.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

Smt. Chandana Khan, I.A.S. (R) at Suncity Durga Puja, Bandlaguda Jagir, Hyderabad, with the author Shankar Chatterjee and President Sri Nilay Kumar Mondal.

Roles of Institute of Town Planners India in Promotion of Planning and Development

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma | Oct. 17, 2023  | Publication: Track2Training

The Institute of Town Planners India (ITPI) is a professional body and learned society in India dedicated to urban planning and regional planning. Established in 1951, ITPI is the apex body of town planners in the country and plays a vital role in shaping urban development policies, promoting sustainable planning practices, and fostering professional growth and knowledge sharing among its members.

Key objectives and functions of the Institute of Town Planners India include:

  1. Promoting Professional Excellence: ITPI strives to maintain high professional standards within the field of town and regional planning. It provides a platform for planners to enhance their skills, knowledge, and expertise through continuous professional development programs, workshops, seminars, and conferences.
  2. Advocacy and Policy Development: ITPI actively engages with government bodies, policymakers, and stakeholders to advocate for policies and regulations that promote sustainable and equitable urban development. It works to influence decision-making processes to ensure that urban planning aligns with the best interests of communities and the environment.
  3. Research and Publications: The institute encourages research and academic endeavors related to urban and regional planning. It publishes journals, papers, reports, and books that contribute to the knowledge base in the field, disseminating research findings and innovative planning approaches.
  4. Capacity Building and Education: ITPI is involved in providing educational programs and training to aspiring and practicing urban planners. It offers courses, workshops, and seminars to build the capacity and capabilities of planners, fostering the development of a skilled and competent workforce.
  5. Networking and Collaboration: The institute facilitates networking among town planners, professionals, and academics, both within India and internationally. Collaboration and exchange of ideas help in fostering innovative solutions to urban challenges and building a broader understanding of planning practices across different regions.
  6. Ethics and Professional Conduct: ITPI establishes and upholds ethical standards and a code of conduct for town planners to ensure integrity, transparency, and accountability in their professional activities. It encourages adherence to these principles for the betterment of society and the urban environment.
  7. Public Awareness and Community Engagement: ITPI strives to raise public awareness about the importance of urban planning and its impact on society. It engages with communities, educating them about sustainable urban development, community involvement, and the benefits of well-planned cities.

Overall, the Institute of Town Planners India plays a crucial role in shaping urban development policies and practices, promoting sustainability, and advancing the profession of town planning in India.

References

Jain, A. K. “Regeneration and Renewal of Old Delhi (Shahjahanabad).” ITPI journal 1.2 (2004): 29-38.

Kumar, A. “Inclusive planning and development in the national capital territory of Delhi.” ITPI Journal 5.4 (2008): 12-20.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals.” Journal of Planning Education and Research (2023)

The Slums of Bhopal: A Tale of Struggle and Resilience

By: Kavita Dehalwar | Publication date: Oct. 20, 2023 | Source: Track2Training

Bhopal, the capital city of the Indian state of Madhya Pradesh, is known for its rich history, vibrant culture, and thriving industries. However, like many cities in India, Bhopal also grapples with the challenge of urban poverty, leading to the development of slums. The slums of Bhopal are a complex and multifaceted issue that sheds light on the broader challenges faced by urban areas in the country.

Bhopal, the capital city of the Indian state of Madhya Pradesh, is a city of stark contrasts. Its history is a tapestry of ancient traditions and modern progress, its culture a vibrant mosaic of diversity, and its industries a testament to the city’s economic dynamism. However, beneath the veneer of this bustling metropolis lies a poignant and pressing challenge: urban poverty, which has given rise to the development of sprawling slums within the city. The slums of Bhopal, like similar settlements across India, are emblematic of a complex and multifaceted issue that not only impacts the lives of those residing within their narrow lanes but also illuminates the broader challenges faced by urban areas across the nation.

Bhopal’s Rich History and Culture

Bhopal’s history is steeped in rich tradition and historical significance. It served as the capital of the erstwhile princely state of Bhopal and was ruled by a succession of dynamic Begums (queens), who played a pivotal role in the city’s socio-cultural development. Their legacy is still evident today, as Bhopal boasts a unique amalgamation of Hindu and Muslim influences, resulting in a harmonious blend of art, music, and cuisine.

The city’s cultural landscape is as diverse as its history, with numerous festivals, art exhibitions, and music and dance performances taking place throughout the year. This rich tapestry of culture has made Bhopal a dynamic and cosmopolitan hub in the heart of India.

Thriving Industries and Economic Growth

In recent decades, Bhopal has experienced rapid industrialization and economic growth. The city’s industrial sector encompasses manufacturing, pharmaceuticals, information technology, and education. This economic dynamism has attracted a steady influx of migrants seeking job opportunities and a better life for their families. However, this wave of urbanization has also exacerbated the challenges associated with urban poverty, resulting in the proliferation of slums within Bhopal.

The Pervasive Issue of Urban Poverty

Urban poverty is a harsh reality in Bhopal, as it is in many Indian cities. The convergence of factors such as rural-to-urban migration, a lack of affordable housing, high levels of poverty, and unemployment has led to the rapid growth of slum settlements. These marginalized communities grapple with a multitude of challenges that affect the lives and well-being of their residents.

Challenges Faced by Bhopal’s Slum Dwellers

The slums of Bhopal are home to thousands of families struggling to make ends meet in substandard living conditions. These challenges include:

  1. Poor Living Conditions: Slum dwellers often live in cramped, unhygienic conditions, residing in makeshift shanties constructed from corrugated metal, wood, or even discarded materials. Such living conditions expose them to diseases, respiratory problems, and other health issues.
  2. Lack of Basic Services: Many slum areas lack access to clean water, proper sanitation facilities, and healthcare services. The absence of these fundamental amenities significantly impacts the health and well-being of residents.
  3. Education Barriers: Slum children often face obstacles in accessing quality education. Schools may be located far from their homes, and their families may not have the financial means to support their schooling. This educational disadvantage perpetuates a cycle of poverty.
  4. Vulnerability to Disasters: Slum dwellings are often haphazardly constructed and located in areas prone to natural disasters such as floods and fires. This puts residents at heightened risk in times of emergencies.

Initiatives to Improve Slum Conditions

Efforts are being made to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers in Bhopal. These initiatives include:

  1. Habitat for Humanity’s Work: Non-governmental organizations like Habitat for Humanity are actively engaged in improving living conditions in Bhopal’s slums. They are providing affordable housing solutions and promoting community development.
  2. Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: The Indian government’s Swachh Bharat Abhiyan, or Clean India Mission, is aimed at addressing sanitation issues in both urban and rural areas, including the slums of Bhopal.
  3. Resettlement Projects: The Bhopal Municipal Corporation has launched resettlement projects to provide slum dwellers with proper housing and essential services.
  4. Community Engagement: Engaging the community in decision-making processes and development projects is proving to be an effective way to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers. Empowering the residents themselves to be a part of the solution is a crucial step in improving their living conditions.

Defining the Slums

Slums are densely populated, low-income neighborhoods that lack basic amenities and infrastructure, such as proper housing, clean water, sanitation facilities, and healthcare access. Bhopal, like many other Indian cities, has a substantial population living in slum areas.

Causes of Slums in Bhopal

  1. Rapid Urbanization: Bhopal has experienced rapid urbanization over the years, driven by factors like industrialization, job opportunities, and better education facilities. As a result, rural-to-urban migration has led to the unplanned growth of slum settlements.
  2. Lack of Affordable Housing: The city has struggled to provide affordable housing for its growing population, leading to the proliferation of slums as a coping mechanism.
  3. Poverty and Unemployment: High levels of poverty and unemployment contribute to the growth of slums. Many residents of these areas work in the informal sector, which often lacks job security and fair wages.
  4. Lack of Land Tenure: Many slum dwellers lack legal land tenure, which makes them vulnerable to eviction and limits their access to essential services.

Challenges Faced by Bhopal’s Slum Dwellers

  1. Poor Living Conditions: Slum residents live in cramped, unhygienic conditions, often without proper shelter. These living conditions make them vulnerable to diseases and other health issues.
  2. Lack of Basic Services: Many slums lack access to clean water, proper sanitation, and healthcare services, which are essential for a healthy and dignified life.
  3. Education Barriers: Slum children often face challenges in accessing quality education, as schools may be located far from their homes, and their families may not have the resources to support their schooling.
  4. Vulnerability to Disasters: Slum dwellings are often poorly constructed and located in areas prone to natural disasters like floods or fires, leaving residents at risk.

Initiatives to Improve Slum Conditions

  1. Habitat for Humanity’s Work: NGOs like Habitat for Humanity are actively working to improve the living conditions in Bhopal’s slums by providing affordable housing solutions and promoting community development.
  2. Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: The Indian government’s Swachh Bharat Abhiyan (Clean India Mission) aims to address sanitation issues in urban and rural areas, including the slums of Bhopal.
  3. Resettlement Projects: The Bhopal Municipal Corporation has initiated resettlement projects to provide slum dwellers with proper housing and essential services.
  4. Community Engagement: Involving the community in decision-making processes and development projects has proven to be an effective way to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers.

Conclusion

The slums of Bhopal represent a complex issue that intertwines urbanization, poverty, and lack of basic amenities. However, it’s important to recognize the resilience and strength of the residents who, despite facing numerous challenges, contribute to the city’s growth and development. To address the issue of slums effectively, a multi-pronged approach is needed, combining urban planning, affordable housing, and community engagement. With the right strategies and support, Bhopal can work towards transforming its slum areas into thriving and sustainable communities. The slums of Bhopal represent a microcosm of the broader challenges that urban India faces concerning poverty, inadequate housing, and essential service deficiencies. However, it’s important to recognize the strength and resilience of the slum residents, who, in the face of numerous hardships, continue to contribute to the city’s growth and development. To address this complex issue, a multi-pronged approach is essential, involving urban planning, affordable housing solutions, and community engagement. With the right strategies and support, Bhopal can work towards transforming its slum areas into thriving and sustainable communities, embodying the true spirit of “Incredible India.”

References

Agarwal, Sarika, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 1.

Choudhary, A. K., et al. “Factors associated with low birth weight among newborns in an urban slum community in Bhopal.” Indian journal of public health 57.1 (2013): 20-23.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “Current State of Water Management System: Case Review of Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.” International Journal of Civil, Structural, Environmental and Infrastructure Engineering Research and Development (IJCSEIERD) 5.6 (2015): 35-40.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal.” European Scientific Journal 12.2 (2016).

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.”

Hughes, Robert C., et al. “Who actually cares for children in slums? Why we need to think, and do, more about paid childcare in urbanizing sub-Saharan Africa.” Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B 376.1827 (2021): 20200430.

Lall, Somik V., Ajay Suri, and Uwe Deichmann. “Household savings and residential mobility in informal settlements in Bhopal, India.” Urban Studies 43.7 (2006): 1025-1039.

Laughlin, Kim, and George Marcus. “Representing ‘Bhopal’.” Connected: Engagements with media (1996): 221-46.

Melwani, Veena, et al. “A study to assess the prevalence of anaemia amongst adolescent girls residing in selected slum of Bhopal city.” Int J Community Med Public Health 5.3 (2018): 1096-1099.

Saxena, Prem Narayan, and Rajesh Joshi. “Eradication of slums in Bhopal City.” Int J Sci Technol Eng 2.6 (2015): 104-112.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.” International Journal of Research 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry, 2014.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.” International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET) 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Introduction to Sociology.” New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields (2016): 1.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Fate of Rural Sanitation Scheme.” International Journal of Research (IJR) 1.2 (2014).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, and Arindam Biswas. “Best practices for ensuring total sanitation.” International Journal for Social Studies, ISSN (2016): 2455-3220.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “A Review of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana.” Think India Journal 23.1 (2020): 26-32.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Evaluation of the JnNURM Programme of Government of India for Urban Renewal.” Think India Journal 8.2 (2005): 1-7.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Evaluation of Implementation of Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana (Urban).” Think India Journal23.1 (2020): 1-13.

Singh, Bhupendra Pratap. Community participation framework for slum improvement-a case study of Bhopal slums. Diss. SPA, BHOPAL, 2017.

Yadav, Manju, K. K. Dhote, and Praveen Yadav. “Impact of urban floods on slum redevelopment case of Bhopal.” Available at SSRN 3334401 (2018).

Role of Institute of Town Planners India (ITPI) in Promoting Planning Education

By: Kavita Dehalwar | Publication date: Oct. 20, 2023 | Source: Track2Training

The Institute of Town Planners India (ITPI) is a professional organization that primarily focuses on promoting and advancing the field of urban and regional planning in India. ITPI plays a significant role in promoting planning education in India through various means, including:

  1. Accreditation and Recognition: ITPI provides accreditation and recognition to planning education programs in India. They evaluate and approve planning schools and courses to ensure that they meet the necessary standards and guidelines.
  2. Professional Development: The institute organizes various workshops, seminars, and training programs for planners and planning students to enhance their knowledge and skills. These events help bridge the gap between academic education and practical application.
  3. Research and Publications: ITPI supports and publishes research on urban and regional planning, making valuable resources available to both students and practitioners. This research can contribute to the development of planning education.
  4. Student Chapters: ITPI encourages the formation of student chapters at planning schools. These chapters provide a platform for students to engage in planning-related activities, network, and learn from each other.
  5. Advocacy: ITPI advocates for the importance of planning education and the role of planners in shaping sustainable and livable cities. They work with government bodies and other stakeholders to promote the value of planning education.
  6. Continuing Education: The institute offers continuing education programs for planning professionals, allowing them to stay updated with the latest developments in the field.
  7. Annual Conferences: ITPI hosts annual conferences that bring together professionals, academics, and students to discuss emerging trends and share knowledge and experiences in the field of urban and regional planning.
  8. Certification and Professional Development: ITPI provides a platform for planners to obtain professional certifications. This certification process helps planners gain recognition for their expertise and further emphasizes the importance of planning education.

Please note that ITPI’s initiatives and activities may have evolved or expanded since its inception and there is a need to have a Planning Council like the Council of Architecture so that more authority can be handled by it in ensuring the planned development of Indian cities (Sharma & Dehalwar, 2023). I recommend central government consider the the proposal of setting up of Planning Council of India to empower planners and give urban planning a more central stage in the development of Indian cities.

References

Hoselitz, Bert F. “Urbanization and Town Planning in India.” Confluence 7 (1958): 115.

Khan, Naveeda. “Geddes in India: town planning, plant sentience, and cooperative evolution.” Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 29.5 (2011): 840-856.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals.” Journal of Planning Education and Research (2023): 0739456X231204568.

Shaw, Annapurna. “Town Planning in Postcolonial India, 1947-1965: Chandigarh Re-Examined1.” Urban Geography 30.8 (2009): 857-878.

A Study on Awareness and Importance of Mother Tongue in NEP 2020 among College Students in Bhavnagar District

By: Vishal Pandya | Publication date: July 30, 2023 | Journal: International Journal of Research | Volume: 10 | Issue: 7 | Pages: 389-401

Abstract:

In India, Ministry of Human Resource Development of Government has formulated and elaborated all encompassing National Educational Policy (NEP 2020). The National Education Policy-2020 is aiming to develop creative potential, skill and analytical thinking which the need in the global job market is. One of the significant elements that have been identified from the draft is the importance of mother tongue in teaching learning process. Thus present study focuses on to find the Awareness and importance of mother tongue in New Education Policy (2020) among the students from higher educational institutions in Bhavnagar District. Descriptive research design has been adopted and total 100 sample size has been drawn using non probability convenience sampling method. Necessary secondary data collected from websites, past studies and NEP draft 2020. Further primary data collected from the survey method for the present study through structured questionnaire which tried to measure the awareness and importance of mother tongue in NEP among college students. The study may be useful to students, teachers, principals, policy makers etc. for further decision making.   

Key Words: New Education Policy 2020, Mother Tongue, College Students

INTRODUCTION:

The term education in the broad sense is not only a pedagogical one punctuating down to the basic meaning of the term, it means to elunge a man’s body, mind and soul of ignorance. It enhances an individual’s personality and provides him confidence to reach out the world. Education is important not merely as means to other end but it is an attribute that is valued in itself by the most individuals. Education is to complete the socialization process though family is great source of socialization yet in modern times it leaves much in done in the socialization process. A sociologist explains the failure of the family to develop attitudes of responsibility in children in the following words.

The situation has arisen partly because of our shift to urban life and to what the sociologist called secondary group organization of the society that is society marked by the disappearance of home and garden, the predominance of specialization of occupation, individualization of choice as to friends religious life and forms of Recreation and a general touch and go impersonal kind of social contact. Education should transmission of cultural heritage, by culture heritage we mean that knowledge of the past its art literature, philosophy, religion and music. Through history textbook and indirectly through celebration of patriotic holiday the child is acquainted with his culture heritage. However it is only the higher level of education that any serious attempt is made to realize.

A National Education policy is a comprehensive structure to guide the development of education in India. The need for a policy was initiated in 1964 when Congress MP Siddheshwar Prasad disparaged the then government for requiring a vision and philosophy for the reform in education. During the same period, a 17 member Education Commission, led by the UGC Chairperson D S Kothari, was founded to draft a national and harmonized policy on education. Based on the proposals of the Commission, Parliament approved the first education policy in 1968.

General Factors to Successfully Implement the NEP

  • To implement NEP effectively at all levels the government will be required to create stakeholder incentives so that the execution is smooth and uniform
  • Formulate gadgets in the form of institutional mechanisms, legal, policy and regulatory authority.
  • Build reliable information repositories.
  • Develop flexibility across HEIs, regulatory bodies and also government agencies.
  • Develop reliability through transparent actions and contribution of all stakeholders.
  • Develop sound moralities of management.

LITERATURE REVIEW:

Kaur, Sonpreet (2021). World-class ancient Indian institutions like Takshashila, Nalanda, Vikramshila, and Vallabhi established the highest standards of transdisciplinary teaching and research and attracted academics and students from all over the world to study and teach there. Here, you’ll find an outline of what the 2020 education strategy will look like. It emphasized the reasons for the necessity for a new policy and the arguments put up by the administration in support of NEP 2020’s adoption. The majority of the chapter was devoted to schooling.

The two of, Kalyani and Pawan (2020) worked on the future of a country and the fate of its people are largely determined by the quality of its educational system. It will have a long-term effect on the nation’s and citizens’ growth and development. In today’s world, education’s significance and relevance are indisputable. There has been a lot of progress and development since the country gained independence. This is the third time in 34 years that the Indian government is changing the way we learn. The new National Education Policy 2020 proposes a wide range of measures that will have an impact on all stakeholders. National Education Policy 2020 and its consequences on stakeholders are examined in this study, as well as an attempt to raise awareness of the policy’s long-term impact by asking a series of questions on social media and evaluating the responses.

Maruthavanan, M. M. (2019). Teachers, teacher educators, administrators, and policymakers were given two months by the Government of India to submit their thoughts on the National Education Policy (2019) draught. Secondary school teachers in Madurai District are being asked to participate in a survey on the National Education Policy (2019). As a result of his research, he concludes that the degree of awareness is below average.

P. S. Aithal & Shuhrajyotsna Aithal (2019) Systematic education policy is essential for offering school and college education in a country due to the reason that education leads to progress in society. Different countries use different education systems with different stages during its life cycle of school and college education levels. Recently, the Government of India received a draft Education policy suggested by an expert committee headed by Dr. K. Kasturirangan, former chairman of India Space Research Organization (ISRO).

Deep Kumar ( Assistant Prof. Research Scholar Aryabhatta knowledge University Patna 2020, analyzed all the key point of the New Education Policy that should be known by a teacher a student and higher educators. He focused on every aspect of the policy. He said that the policy is nothing new but is centered on the basic concept of Gandhiji who talked of education that helps a person to earn his livelihood. He analyzed that his policy focuses on the skill development of a person so that he is eligible to earn his bread and butter.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

The present study focuses on to find the Awareness and importance of mother tongue in New Education Policy (2020) among the students from higher educational institutions in Bhavnagar District. Descriptive research design has been adopted and total 100 sample size has been drawn using non probability convenience sampling method. Necessary secondary data collected from websites, past studies and NEP draft 2020. Further primary data collected from the survey method for the present study through structured questionnaire which tried to measure the awareness and importance of mother tongue in NEP among college students. Questionnaire consisted of total 11 questions including demographic profile of the students such as age, gender, stream, type of college, medium of college, their current mother tongue, mother tongue proficiency, and improvement importance. Further instrument was extended towards awareness for National Education Policy and their opinion towards importance of mother tongue. The employed frequency distribution and one sample non-parametric chi-square test to fulfill the aforesaid objectives.

DATA ANALYSIS & INTERPRETATIONS:

Frequency Distribution:

Table 1 Frequency Distribution for General Profile of Students

GenderMother Tongue
FrequencyPercentFrequencyPercent
GenderMale3636.0Mother TongueGujarati9999.0
Female6464.0Punjabi11.0
Total100100.0Total100100.0
StreamCollege Type
FrequencyPercentFrequencyPercent
StreamCommerce1515.0College TypeGovernment5757.0
Science11.0Grant-in-aid33.0
Arts7979.0Self-Financed3333.0
Other55.0Other77.0
Total100100.0Total100100.0
Medium of Instruction
FrequencyPercent
Medium InstructionGujarati6666.0
English3434.0
Total100100.0

(Source: SPSS Output)

The above table number 1 indicates the general profile of students who have responded to the research questions regarding National Education Policy. The study consists more of female students i.e. 64 while remaining 36 are male students out of total 100 respondents. Further maximum number of students are from Arts faculty i.e. 79 followed by commerce faculty which are 15. There is only 1 student from science stream and 5 from other stream such engineering or medical students.

Moreover, medium of instructions was asked to students and surprisingly 66 students are from Gujarati medium colleges while remaining 34 are from English medium colleges where their courses are running on different languages. However, Hindi medium was also asked but no one was found studying in Hindi medium colleges. Very obvious results found for mother tongue of a student asked and 99 students out of 100 responded to Gujarati as their mother tongue. Being in Gujarat, Gujarati mother tongue is expected results for the study.

Furthermore, type of college was also asked because mother importance of tongue plays vital role amongst type of colleges such as government, granted and self financed institutions. 57 students found from government colleges while 33 students are from self financed and only 3 students found from granted colleges. Others are 7 which may be from private universities or university department students.

Awareness Level:

Table 2 Frequency Distribution for Awareness towards NEP 2020

Basic StructurePurposeFlexibility to students in choosing subjectsSkills enhancements CurriculumAbility enhancements curriculum
Not at all Aware2317141717
Slightly Aware3128272424
Moderately Aware2017201923
Very Aware1722242423
Extremely Aware916151613
Total100100100100100

            (Source: SPSS Output)

Basic Structure:

Not at all aware (17%) respondents are there and a notable portion of respondents reported any awareness of the basic structure of the curriculum. This indicates that a significant number of individuals may lack information about the overall framework or organization of the curriculum. Slightly Aware are found to be 28%. A higher percentage of respondents have some level of awareness of the basic structure, but it is still relatively low.

Purpose:

Further there are 14% not at all Aware and a considerable percentage of respondents stated that they are not at all aware of the purpose of the curriculum. This suggests that many individuals may not have a clear understanding of the overarching goals or an intention of the curriculum.There is Slightly Aware students 27%. A larger portion of respondents have some level of awareness regarding the purpose of the curriculum, but it still falls into the category of relatively low awareness.

Flexibility to Students in Choosing Subjects:

A substantial number of respondents i.e. 17% are not at all Aware and expressed any awareness of the flexibility offered to students in choosing subjects within the curriculum. This indicates that many individuals may not be informed about the options available to students in selecting their coursework. Further Slightly Aware (24%).

Skills Enhancement Curriculum and Ability Enhancement Curriculum:

Awareness levels for these two aspects appear to be somewhat higher compared to the previous categories. However, the majority of respondents still fall into the categories of “slightly aware” or “moderately aware.”

Table 3 Frequency Distribution for Awareness towards NEP 2020

Bharatiya Knowledge SystemMultiple entry and exitMultilingualismOverall awareness of NEP 2020
Not at all Aware18212321
Slightly Aware23262617
Moderately Aware16211220
Very Aware25202526
Extremely Aware18121416
Total100100100100

            (Source: SPPS Output)

Bharatiya Knowledge System:

Further there are 18% of respondents are not at all Aware. A significant portion of respondents reported having no awareness of the Bharatiya Knowledge System as outlined in NEP 2020. This suggests that a notable number of individuals may not be familiar with this concept. Slightly Aware (23%): While more respondents are slightly aware of the Bharatiya Knowledge System, it still falls into the category of relatively low awareness.

Multiple Entry and Exit:

Not at all Aware (21%): A notable percentage of respondents indicated that they have no awareness of the concept of multiple entry and exit points in education, as per NEP 2020. Slightly Aware (26%): A slightly higher percentage of respondents have some level of awareness regarding multiple entry and exit points, but it remains in the category of relatively low awareness.

Multilingualism:

Moreover, there are 23% of students who are not at all Aware and a significant number of respondents reported having no awareness of the concept of multilingualism in education, which is a part of NEP 2020. Slightly Aware (26%): A slightly higher percentage of respondents have some level of awareness regarding multilingualism, but it still falls into the category of relatively low awareness.

Overall Awareness of NEP 2020:

Moderately Aware (20%): The highest percentage of respondents falls into the category of “moderately aware” of the overall awareness of NEP 2020. This indicates that a significant portion of respondents has a moderate level of knowledge about the policy. Very Aware (26%): The second-highest percentage of respondents falls into the category of “very aware” of NEP 2020. This suggests that a substantial number of individuals are well-informed about the policy. Extremely Aware (16%): While a lower percentage, a significant number of respondents are extremely aware of NEP 2020, indicating a high level of knowledge and awareness.

Opinion towards Importance of Mother Tongue:

Table 4 Opinion of Students towards Importance of Language in NEP 2020

Provide equal opportunityLearner-centeredTraining in language labMore lectures of mother tongue
Strongly Agree58473936
Agree36404139
Neutral381014
Disagree1377
Strongly Disagree2234
Total100100100100

            (Source: SPSS Output)

The above table number 4 shows the opinion of students towards importance of languages in National Education Policy 2020.

Provide Equal Opportunity:

Strongly Agree with providing equal opportunity is 58% and the majority of respondents strongly agree that there should be an emphasis on providing equal opportunities. This suggests a high level of support for policies or practices that promote fairness and equity. Agree (36%): A significant portion also agrees with the notion of equal opportunity. This reinforces the positive sentiment toward ensuring fairness in various contexts.

Learner-Centered:

Strongly Agree (47%): A substantial percentage of respondents strongly agree with the idea of a learner-centered approach. This indicates a strong preference for educational or training methods that prioritize individual learning needs and preferences. Agree (40%): Additionally, a considerable number of respondents agree with the concept of a learner-centered approach. This highlights the widespread support for tailoring educational experiences to the learner.

Training in Language Lab:

There are 39% of respondents who are Strongly Agree. A notable portion of respondents strongly agrees with the inclusion of training in a language lab. This suggests that many see the value in utilizing language labs for language acquisition and improvement. Agree (41%): An almost equal percentage agrees with the idea of training in a language lab. This indicates broad agreement on the benefits of this educational approach.

More Lectures in Mother Tongue:

39% of respondents are aware and a similar percentage agrees with the preference for lectures in their mother tongue. This underscores the preference for native language use in educational settings. Strongly Agree (36%): A significant proportion of respondents strongly agrees with the preference for more lectures in their mother tongue. This suggests a strong attachment to their native language as a medium of instruction or communication.

Table 5 Opinion of Students towards Importance of Language in NEP 2020

Functional and business correspondenceFocus on Unique SkillsMore practical knowledgeMore business jargons
Strongly Agree34384145
Agree42414141
Neutral1112109
Disagree5452
Strongly Disagree8533
Total100100100100

             (Source: SPSS Output)

The above table number 5 indicates the opinion of students towards importance of languages in National Education Policy 2020.

Functional and Business Correspondence:

Functional and business correspondence importance created by 34% students and is strongly agree with the statement. A significant portion of respondents strongly agrees that there should be an emphasis on functional and business correspondence.

This suggests that clear and effective communication in a business context is highly valued by this group. Agree (42%): Additionally, a substantial number of respondents agree with the importance of functional and business correspondence. This further highlights the consensus on the significance of this aspect of business.

Focus on Unique Skills:

There are 38% of students who are Strongly Agree and a notable percentage of respondents strongly agree that unique skills should be prioritized. This indicates that they believe fostering individual talents and expertise is crucial in a business context. Agree (41%): A similar percentage agrees with the focus on unique skills. This suggests that most respondents believe in the value of nurturing and utilizing distinct abilities within a business environment.

More Practical Knowledge:

Furthermore, Strongly Agree students are 41%. A considerable portion of respondents strongly agrees that practical knowledge should be emphasized. This signifies a strong preference for hands-on, applicable knowledge and skills. Agree (41%): An equal percentage agrees with the importance of practical knowledge. This indicates a widespread consensus that practicality is highly valued in a business setting.

More Business Jargon:

Finally talking about more business jargon i.e. use of technical terms, Strongly Agree 45% students. The majority of respondents strongly agree that the use of more business jargon is favorable. This suggests that many respondents believe that incorporating specialized terminology into business communication is beneficial. Agree (41%): A substantial number of respondents also agree with the idea of using more business jargon. This underscores the prevalence of a positive attitude toward the inclusion of industry-specific language.Top of Form

CONCLUSION:

The National Education Policy-2020 is aiming to develop creative potential, skill and analytical thinking which the need in the global job market is. One of the significant elements that have been identified from the draft is the importance of mother tongue in teaching learning process. Thus present study focuses on to find the Awareness and importance of mother tongue in New Education Policy (2020) among the students from higher educational institutions in Bhavnagar District.

The study concludes that National Education Policy is making more skillful and enhancing the ability of students and making them for bright future. The survey results indicate that respondents, in general, have varying levels of awareness about the different aspects of the curriculum, with many falling into the categories of “not at all aware” or “slightly aware.” This suggests that there may be room for improving communication and transparency regarding curriculum components, their purposes, and the options available to students. Educators and institutions might consider efforts to enhance awareness and understanding of these aspects among their stakeholders. Further the levels of awareness among respondents regarding specific aspects of NEP 2020. While awareness levels are relatively low for certain components like the Bharatiya Knowledge System, multiple entry and exit points, and multilingualism, respondents generally have higher awareness of the overall NEP 2020. This suggests the need for targeted efforts to increase awareness and understanding of the individual components of the policy among stakeholders and the public.

Overall, the survey results indicate strong support for equal opportunity and a learner-centered approach in education or training. There is also substantial agreement on the value of training in a language lab. In the context of language preference, respondents generally express a preference for lectures delivered in their mother tongue, highlighting the importance of linguistic familiarity in the learning process. These findings can inform decisions in educational institutions and training programs, particularly regarding language instruction and learner-centric approaches. Further the survey participants generally favor a strong emphasis on effective communication, unique skills development, practical knowledge, and the use of business jargon within the business context. These insights can inform decisions related to training, communication strategies, and skill development in a business or organizational setting.

REFERENCES:

  1. Aithal P.S & Shubhrajyotsna Aithal (July 2020). Analysis of the Indian National Education policy 2020 towards Achieving its objectives, International Journal of Management, Technology, and Social Sciences (IJMTS), 5(2), 19-41. (2020). ISSN: 2581-6012.
  2. Aithal P.S, (2019). “Analysis of Higher Education in Indian National Educational Policy Proposal 2019 and its Implementation Challenges.” International Journal of Applied Engineering and Management Letters, Vol. 3, No 2, 2019, pp. 1-35.
  3. Aithal, Sreeramana &Aithal, Shubhrajyotsna. (2019). Analysis of Higher Education in Indian National Education Policy Proposal 2019 and its Implementation Challenges, International Journal of Applied Engineering and Management Letters (IJAEML) 3(2) 1-35.
  4. Kalyani, Pawan. (2020). An Empirical Study on NEP 2020 [National Education Policy] with Special Reference to the Future of Indian Education System and Its effects on the Stakeholders: JMEIT. 7. ISSN: 2394-8124. 10.5281/zenodo.4159546.
  5. Kaur, Sonpreet. (2021). A Note on-National Education Policy 2020: With Special Reference of School Education.
  6. Ms. Sujatha Ramesh & Dr. K. Natarajan 2019. New Educational Policy of India, A comparative study with the Education System with the Education System of USA. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science invention (IJHSSI) ISSN (Online): 2319-7722, ISSN (print): 2319-7714, Vol. 8 issue 06 Ser. III, 2019, P 01-09.
  7. Maruthavanan, M. “A Study on the Awareness on New Education Policy (2019) among the Secondary School Teachers in Madurai District.” Shanlax International Journal of Education, vol. 8, no. 3, 2020, pp. 67–71.
  8. Deep Kumar ,Assistant Professor Research Scholar, Aryabhatta Knowledge University, Patna ” A Critical Analysis and a Glimpse of New Education Policy -2020″

LINK to DOWNLOAD PDF

Nellore of Andhra Pradesh Wonderful District to Visit: A Few Lines about very old Sri Ranganathaswamy Temple

By: Shankar Chatterjee | Publication date: Oct. 30, 2023 | Source: Track2Training

India is a country with a rich cultural heritage. Since Indian civilisation is an ancient one, many old temples of Hindu, Buddhist, and Jain, Churches, Mosques, and Dargahs, Gurudwaras can be found here. From UNESCO’s World Heritage List, I am presenting the items for the benefit of readers – 1) Agra Fort 2)Ajanta Caves 3)Ellora Caves 4)Taj Mahale 5)Group of Monuments at Mahabalipuram 6)Sun Temple, Konârak 7)Kaziranga National Park 8)Keoladeo National Park 9)Manas Wildlife Sanctuary 10)Churches and Convents of Goa 11)Fatehpur Sikri 12) Group of Monuments at Hampi 13)Khajuraho Group of Monuments 14)Elephanta Caves 15)Great Living Chola Temples 16) 13 Group of Monuments at Pattadakal 17)Sundarbans National Park 18) Nanda Devi and Valley of Flowers National Parks 19) Buddhist Monuments at Sanchi 20) Humayun’s Tomb, Delhi 21)Qutb Minar and its Monuments, Delhi 22) Mountain Railways of India 23) Mahabodhi Temple Complex at Bodh Gaya 24) Rock Shelters of Bhimbetka 25) Champaner-Pavagadh Archaeological Park 26)Chhatrapati Shivaji Terminus (formerly Victoria Terminus) 27) Red Fort Complex 28) The Jantar Mantar, Jaipur 29) Western Ghats 30)Hill Forts of Rajasthan 31)Great Himalayan National Park Conservation Area 32)Rani-ki-Vav (the Queen’s Stepwell) at Patan, Gujarat, 33)Archaeological Site of Nalanda Mahavihara at Nalanda, Bihar 34)Khangchendzonga National Park 35) The Architectural Work of Le Corbusier, an Outstanding Contribution to the Modern Movement 36) Historic City of Ahmadabad 37) Victorian Gothic and Art Deco Ensembles of Mumbai 38)Jaipur City, Rajasthan 39)Dholavira: a Harappan City 40) Kakatiya Rudreshwara (Ramappa) Temple, Telangana 41)Sacred Ensembles of the Hoysalas 42)Santiniketan.
In addition to the above, many places across the country have historical importance. In this section, I am presenting the case of Sri Ranganathaswamy Temple of Nellore. This Temple was built in the 7th century by the Pallava Kings. It is believed that King Raja Mahendra Varma later shaped the Temple in the 12th century. Anyway, the Temple is situated on the bank of the river Penna. A huge tower called Gaaligopuram, which means “wind tower,” is just before the primary door to the temple. I visited in the first week of October 2023 and was mesmerized to watch the Temple, both sanctum sanctorum and outside and its vicinity. Everywhere, I observed neat and clean and disciplined vis-a-vis the meticulous way activities were performed. Since I visited in the late evening delighted to get Pongal as Prosadam. Without hesitation, I wish to mention that Pongal was very tasty and warm. Although I tasted Pongal in many places across India, particularly in South India but taste of Pongal at Sri Ranganathaswamy Temple I will remember till my death. Undoubtedly, the Prosadam had the blessings of Bhagawan. For the benefit of readers, I wish to mention that Sri Ranganathaswamy Temple is devoted to Bhagawan Ranganatha, which is Bhagawan Vishnu’s sleeping mood. This temple is one of the oldest in Nellore, also called the Talpagiri Ranganathaswamy Temple or the Ranganayakaswamy Temple. It is noteworthy to mention that on the sanctum sanctorum walls are displayed Sri Vishnu Sahasranamavali, that is, 1,000 distinct names of Bhagawan Vishnu. The Ranganayaka Swamy Temple also has a mirror house that is the devotees‘ main attraction.
I suggest my Indian friends, if not visited Nellore, please plan your visit as some temples, one famous Dargah, and a few attractive churches are located in the historical district of Nellore. Also, beaches, particularly Mypadu Beach, mesmerized me because of neat and clean and less crowded. As usual, hot fish fries were also available so fish-eaters could enjoy sumptuous fish fry.
Before conclusion, I wish to mention that the local people are cordial, helpful and amicable towards guests. My only suggestion is that April, May and June months are better to avoid as in these months the temperature is very hot and humid.

(The author expresses his gratitude to Dr. Kalidasu Purushotham Garu, Retired Principal of Sarvodaya College, Nellore, for his excellent cooperation in visiting the places and explaining the background.)
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

ITPI- Information Technology and Process Integration for Success of Business

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma | Oct. 17, 2023 | Source: Track2Training

ITPI, or Information Technology and Process Integration, is a term that encompasses the seamless integration of information technology solutions with business processes to enhance efficiency, productivity, and overall organizational performance. This integration involves aligning technology with the specific needs and goals of a business or organization, ensuring that IT systems support and optimize their operational workflows.

The key objectives of ITPI include:

  1. Efficiency and Productivity: ITPI aims to streamline business processes by leveraging technology, automating routine tasks, and reducing manual efforts. This efficiency translates into improved productivity and resource utilization.
  2. Cost Optimization: By integrating technology strategically, organizations can often reduce operational costs, such as labor expenses, time wastage, and unnecessary resource allocation. This cost-effectiveness is a significant benefit of ITPI.
  3. Data Accuracy and Consistency: ITPI helps in ensuring that data is accurate, consistent, and easily accessible across various systems and departments. This leads to informed decision-making based on reliable information.
  4. Enhanced Communication and Collaboration: Integration of IT systems fosters better communication and collaboration within an organization. Employees can share information more effectively, leading to increased teamwork and innovation.
  5. Business Agility and Flexibility: Adapting to changes in the market and business environment becomes more manageable through ITPI. Agile IT systems allow organizations to respond quickly and effectively to evolving customer demands and industry trends.
  6. Customer Experience Improvement: By integrating IT solutions that enhance customer interactions and services, organizations can provide an improved and seamless experience to their customers, thereby increasing satisfaction and loyalty.
  7. Risk Management and Compliance: ITPI assists in managing risks associated with data security, regulatory compliance, and other business aspects. Implementing robust IT systems ensures that the organization meets legal and industry-specific requirements.

To implement ITPI effectively, organizations typically follow a structured approach that includes assessing current processes and IT infrastructure, identifying areas for improvement, designing and integrating appropriate IT solutions, and continually monitoring and optimizing the integrated systems to ensure they align with the evolving needs of the organization.

Successful ITPI requires collaboration between IT professionals and business stakeholders to bridge the gap between technology and business requirements, ensuring that IT initiatives directly contribute to the achievement of organizational goals and objectives.

References

Benitez, Jose, Gautam Ray, and Jörg Henseler. “Impact of information technology infrastructure flexibility on mergers and acquisitions.” MIS Quarterly: Management Information Systems 42.1 (2018): 25-43.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.”

Krey, Mike. “Information technology governance, risk and compliance in health care-a management approach.” 2010 Developments in E-systems Engineering. IEEE, 2010.

Moore, Andrew P., and Rohit S. Antao. “Improving management of information technology: System dynamics analysis of IT controls in context.” Proceedings of the 24th International Conference of the System Dynamics Society. 2006.

Moore, Andrew P., and Rohit S. Antao. Modeling and analysis of information technology change and access controls in the business context. Carnegie Mellon University, Software Engineering Institute, 2006.

Leveraging GIS for Enhanced Planning Education

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Geographic Information Systems (GIS) have emerged as indispensable tools in the field of urban and regional planning. GIS leverages spatial data to analyze, visualize, and interpret patterns and trends that inform decision-making processes. In the realm of planning education, integrating GIS technology into curricula transforms how students learn about and engage with the planning of cities, regions, and the environment.

1. Real-World Data Visualization:

GIS allows students to interact with real-world data by visualizing geographic features and their attributes. Maps created using GIS display diverse information, from population densities to land use patterns, enabling students to comprehend complex spatial relationships and patterns. These visualizations bring theoretical concepts to life, making learning more engaging and effective.

Geographic Information Systems (GIS) play a pivotal role in planning education by offering a dynamic platform for students to interact with real-world data and visualize geographical features and their associated attributes. GIS technology enables the creation of informative and visually captivating maps that convey a wealth of information, ranging from population densities to land use patterns and beyond.

Through GIS-generated maps, students can explore and interpret complex spatial relationships and patterns that are fundamental to understanding the dynamics of urban and regional planning. For instance, they can visually represent the distribution of residential, commercial, and industrial zones within a city, gaining insights into urban sprawl, segregation, or potential areas for revitalization. These visualizations provide a tangible representation of theoretical concepts, making learning more engaging, memorable, and effective.

The ability to visualize real-world data in GIS empowers students to observe trends and patterns over time. By overlaying historical data onto current maps, students can discern trends in urban growth, land use changes, or environmental degradation. This historical perspective is vital in forecasting future trends and planning sustainable urban development strategies.

Moreover, GIS allows students to integrate various data layers, enabling a comprehensive understanding of multifaceted issues. For instance, they can overlay population data with transportation networks, identifying areas with high population density and inadequate transportation infrastructure. This spatial integration fosters a holistic understanding of the interdependencies between different elements in the urban landscape, a crucial aspect of modern planning.

By immersing themselves in GIS-generated visualizations, students not only understand the theoretical principles of planning but also develop a keen eye for patterns and trends that inform effective decision-making. This hands-on experience enhances their spatial analytical skills, critical thinking, and problem-solving abilities, preparing them for the challenges and complexities of planning in the real world.

The power of GIS in real-world data visualization transforms planning education by bridging the gap between theoretical concepts and practical application. The ability to create visually appealing and informative maps empowers students to delve deeper into the intricacies of urban and regional planning, setting the stage for a generation of planners well-equipped to tackle the pressing issues of our cities and regions.

2. Data Analysis and Spatial Modeling:

One of the key benefits of GIS in planning education is its ability to perform sophisticated spatial analysis. Students can analyze data to derive meaningful insights, such as identifying optimal locations for facilities, assessing environmental impacts, or predicting future growth. This fosters critical thinking and problem-solving skills crucial for effective planning.

In the realm of planning education, Geographic Information Systems (GIS) offer a transformative edge by facilitating advanced spatial analysis, a cornerstone of effective planning. GIS equips students with the ability to dissect complex data sets, extract meaningful insights, and model spatial relationships. These analytical capabilities are pivotal for addressing contemporary urban and regional planning challenges.

GIS provides a robust toolkit for students to conduct intricate data analyses. For instance, they can determine optimal locations for facilities like schools, hospitals, or public transportation hubs by considering factors such as population density, accessibility, and proximity to other essential amenities. Through spatial analysis, students can unravel intricate patterns in data, aiding in informed decision-making regarding infrastructure placement and resource allocation.

Furthermore, GIS enables the assessment of environmental impacts, an integral aspect of sustainable planning. Students can model potential effects of urbanization or industrial activities on the environment, predicting outcomes and suggesting mitigation strategies. This hands-on experience fosters an understanding of the intricate interplay between human activities and the environment, promoting environmentally conscious planning practices.

Predicting future growth and development is another critical application of GIS in planning education. By analyzing historical data and current trends, students can model and forecast urban expansion, enabling proactive planning for infrastructure, housing, and public services. This forward-thinking approach helps in devising strategies to accommodate population growth and prevent potential urban sprawl issues.

The process of analyzing data and creating spatial models using GIS encourages critical thinking and problem-solving skills. Students learn to approach planning challenges systematically, evaluate various factors, and develop evidence-based solutions. They develop the ability to weigh multiple variables and consider their spatial implications, enhancing their analytical prowess.

By immersing students in data analysis and spatial modeling, GIS facilitates a comprehensive understanding of the complexities of urban and regional planning. It prepares them to navigate the data-rich environment of modern planning, empowering them to make informed decisions that account for diverse factors, from social equity to environmental sustainability. Ultimately, this capability ensures that future planners are well-prepared to shape vibrant, resilient, and sustainable communities.

3. Scenario Planning and Simulation:

GIS facilitates scenario planning, enabling students to explore multiple planning alternatives and their potential outcomes. By altering parameters like zoning regulations or transportation networks, students can simulate and evaluate the impact on communities and the environment. This practical experimentation enhances their understanding of the consequences of various planning decisions.

In the realm of urban and regional planning education, the integration of Geographic Information Systems (GIS) introduces students to the transformative practice of scenario planning and simulation. GIS empowers students to envision and analyze multiple planning scenarios, allowing them to experiment with various parameters such as zoning regulations, transportation networks, or land use patterns. This interactive experimentation facilitates a deeper understanding of the potential outcomes and consequences of diverse planning decisions.

Scenario planning involves creating plausible future scenarios based on different assumptions and variables. GIS acts as a dynamic canvas for students to craft these scenarios by altering key planning parameters. For instance, they can modify zoning regulations to encourage mixed-use developments or adjust transportation networks to prioritize sustainable modes of transport. These changes can then be simulated using GIS, generating visual representations of how the modifications might impact communities and the environment.

The ability to visualize and simulate these scenarios enhances the learning experience by providing a glimpse into the complex dynamics of urban planning. Students can observe how alterations in urban design affect accessibility, congestion, environmental quality, and community well-being. This practical experimentation bridges the gap between theoretical knowledge and its practical application, equipping students with a nuanced understanding of the multifaceted nature of planning decisions.

Moreover, GIS-based scenario planning encourages students to think critically and foresee potential challenges and opportunities associated with different planning strategies. By envisioning diverse futures, they learn to anticipate the implications of their decisions and adapt plans to mitigate negative consequences. This cultivates a proactive mindset, essential for effective planning in an ever-changing urban landscape.

Scenario planning also fosters interdisciplinary thinking, encouraging students to collaborate and integrate insights from various domains such as transportation, environment, and social equity. It emphasizes the interconnectedness of urban systems, instilling an appreciation for the importance of holistic and inclusive planning approaches.

The scenario planning and simulation with GIS enrich planning education by transforming theoretical concepts into practical, interactive learning experiences. Through this process, students gain valuable insights into the complexities of planning decisions and are better prepared to navigate the uncertainties of urban and regional development. GIS emerges as a powerful tool, empowering future planners to envision resilient and sustainable communities by considering a multitude of scenarios and making informed choices.

4. Community Engagement and Participation:

GIS offers a platform for collaborative planning by incorporating community input. Students can utilize GIS to create interactive maps for public engagement, soliciting feedback and integrating community preferences into planning proposals. In doing so, students learn the importance of inclusivity and the role of public participation in the planning process.

5. Interdisciplinary Learning:

GIS is inherently interdisciplinary, incorporating elements of geography, environmental science, sociology, and more. Planning education enhanced by GIS exposes students to this interdisciplinary nature, providing a holistic understanding of urban systems and fostering a collaborative approach to problem-solving.

6. Spatial Decision Support Systems (SDSS):

Integrating GIS into planning education allows students to engage with SDSS, assisting in complex decision-making. SDSS combines GIS capabilities with decision models, enabling students to evaluate various criteria and constraints when proposing solutions to planning challenges.

7. Career Readiness:

Proficiency in GIS is highly valued in the job market for planners. Incorporating GIS into planning education ensures students are equipped with practical skills sought after by employers. It enhances their employability and prepares them to contribute effectively in the field upon graduation.

Conclusion:

GIS has revolutionized planning education by offering a dynamic platform for students to explore, analyze, and understand the complexities of urban and regional systems. By integrating GIS into curricula, academic institutions empower students to develop a nuanced understanding of spatial data analysis, fostering a new generation of planners equipped with innovative tools and approaches to tackle contemporary urban challenges. The future of planning education lies in leveraging GIS to create sustainable, resilient, and inclusive communities.

References:

Bansal, V. K. “Use of GIS and topology in the identification and resolution of space conflicts.” Journal of Computing in Civil Engineering 25.2 (2011): 159-171.

Charlton, Martin, and Simon Ellis. “GIS in planning.” Planning Outlook 34.1 (1991): 20-26.

Göçmen, Z. Aslıgül, and Stephen J. Ventura. “Barriers to GIS use in planning.” Journal of the American Planning Association 76.2 (2010): 172-183.

Innes, Judith E., and David M. Simpson. “Implementing GIS for planning lessons from the history of technological innovation.” Journal of the American Planning Association 59.2 (1993): 230-236.

Resch, Bernd, et al. “GIS-based planning and modeling for renewable energy: Challenges and future research avenues.” ISPRS International Journal of Geo-Information 3.2 (2014): 662-692.

Sharma, Shashikant N., and Dungar Singh. “Understanding mid-block traffic analysis: A crucial tool for road safety.” Think India Journal 26.3 (2023): 5-9.

Yeh, Anthony GO. “Urban planning and GIS.” Geographical information systems 2.877-888 (1999): 1.

Exploratory Assessment of Communal Conflict and its Impacts on Nigerian Development

BY

1Kingsley Obumunaeme Ilo, PhD

Social Sciences Unit, the School of General Studies/ Department of Political Science, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Email: kingsley.ilo@unn.edu.ng

2*Uchenna Timothy Umeifekwem*, PhD

Department of Public Administration, Chukwuemeka Odumegwu Ojukwu University

Email: ukochenna2011@yahoo.com

3Ohabuenyi, Jonas

Social Sciences Unit, the School of General Studies/ Department of Political Science, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Jonas.ohabuenyi@unn.edu.ng

4Sabo Okonu

Department of Political Science, Faculty of the Social Sciences, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Email: sabo.okonu@unn.edu.ng

Abstract

Conflicts of all types have a serious negative impact on society generally. Conflict between communities is an unavoidable component of human existence. It is the result of a variety of circumstances, including environmental, social, political, ethnic, and cultural elements. When it happens, communal conflict is the main reason for starvation, malnourishment, and food insecurity because of the complicated humanitarian crisis that comes with it. The focus of this paper is to analyse the nexus between communal conflict and development in Nigeria. Journal articles, textbooks and newspaper publications were used as sources of data for this article. At the end, the article calls for  communities to learn how to resolve their differences through dialogue instead of carrying arms against each other. It is also necessary for the government, chiefs, and elders to exhibit a high degree of impartiality when mediating between parties in land disputes. 

Keywords: Communal conflict, Education, Health, Violence, Social Infrastructure.

INTRODUCTION

Disputes over land or natural resources, including oil reserves, solid minerals, and water, are the major causes of communal disputes in Nigeria. Conflict situation may also occur when groups want to protect their honour, property, or even their very existence against the attack of other societies (Burde, Kapit, Wah, Guven, and Skarpeteig, 2013; Okpiliya, Ekong, & Eni, 2013). Bolarinwa (2006) observed that the prevalence of community disputes hampers the daily livelihoods of rural dwellers and food supply to urban centres. The bulk of farmers have stopped cultivating their far-flung farmlands. They are practically confined to their compounds and a few nearby farmlands. Movement restrictions have hampered access to critical agriculture inputs, including better seeds, fertilisers, and loans. In the end, many farmers could not sell their agricultural products effectively (Ajayi, Akinnagbe, and Aghojare, 2009).

The destruction of property, the deaths of people, and the resulting humanitarian crisis have hampered the socioeconomic and political activity of the affected communities in Nigeria plagued with communal conflict. A growing body of data from an impressively diverse variety of cultural and geographical settings suggests that communal conflict has offensive negative consequences on socio-economic and political well-being of the people.  Using a cross-sectional data Popoola, Olawale, and Muftau, (2020) demonstrate that communal conflict negatively impacts on business activities in Osun State, Nigeria. They also found that communal conflict has negative effect on entrepreneurial activities and causes economic damage and seriously affect entrepreneurship development in that community. Marc, Verjee, and Mogaka (2015) similarly show that economic activity is disrupted, a community’s productive base shrinks, and human capital, such as health and education, is lost as a result of communal strife. A loss in family income and wealth is expected to result from all of these repercussions of community strife, they said. As incomes decrease, more families will slip into poverty, and those already in poverty will fall even more. Farming and other rural economic pursuits are becoming more vulnerable to violence resulting from communal conflict.

 Gafaro, Ibanez, and Justino (2014) corroborate these results to a large extent, though they link them to the presence of armed non-state actors. Studies by Marc, Verjee, and Mogaka (2015); Jones and Naylor (2014); Carter, Bryant-Lukosius, DiCenso, Blythe, and Neville (2014) suggest that communal conflict can negatively affect various economic, health, and labour related outcomes. 

COMMUNAL CONFLICT 

Wig and Kromrey (2018), defined communal conflicts as violent confrontations between non-state actors where the cleavages largely fall along ethnic or tribal lines. Wig and Kromrey (2018) classified communal conflict into two distinct types, namely, inter-communal conflict, that is conflicts between ethnic groups and intra-communal conflict, that is conflicts within a one particular group. However, the classification of ethnic groups and subgroups are ambiguous, making it hard to extricate between intra-communal and inter-communal conflicts. In many of these communal crisis, crimes and ethnic cleansing are commonplace. Also, the crises have left many victims with lasting effects of trauma, homelessness, economic losses, as well as the weakening of social trust.

RURAL DEVELOPMENT

. Rural development refers to the process through which capitalism spreads across rural regions, together with the set of policies and projects that are being implemented in rural areas with the goal of improving human conditions. As used by Atkinson (2017), rural development involves efforts that are economic and social in nature intended to encourage concepts of retention, growth, and expansion in areas outside cities, including improving quality of life for rural residents through such activity. According to Nwobi, (2007), rural development can be viewed as the development of the moral, social, political and economic potentialities of rural communities to enhance their self-reliance through the provision of appropriate infrastructure such as pipe-borne water, electricity, good roads and small scale industries, increase their political consciousness and participation, promote their moral and social well-being which will result in tolerance, good discipline, justice, fairness, kindness, love and peace. As such, the term suggests that rural development is a strategy that tries to obtain an improved and productivity, higher socio-economic equality and ambition, and stability in social and economic development..

FACTORS ENCOURAGING COMMUNAL CONFLICT IN NIGERIA

. The root of communal conflicts in Nigeria is linked to several complex factors and vary from one group to another. It has been demonstrated empirically by several researchers that, in particular, the causes of communal conflicts are not static but rather dynamic and varied in nature depending on the socio-economic and geopolitical circumstances at the time (Yecho, 2006, Albert, 2001, Onwudiwe, 2004, and Alimba, 2014). 

Poor economic conditions 

Like the rest of Africa, Nigeria is neither immune to the poverty cancer nor ignorant of its impact on their fragile peace and stability. With over 80 per cent of her population living below the US$1 a day, civil unrest and grievances, both recipes for conflicts, become widespread. Indeed hunger, starvation, lack of economic growth and development create a high likelihood of violent conflicts and available army of people who are ready to prosecute the conflict either as machinery or as militias. For instance, in research conducted by Vinck et al (2011), 30 per cent of the Liberian population indicated that poverty was one of the root causes of the Liberian civil war. Similar assertions have also been made with regards to the conflicts in Nigeria and Guinea-Bissau (Voz di Paz and Interpeace 2010).

Access to small arms weapons 

Small arms induced-crises appears to be a persistent occurence in developing nations of their affordability, accessibility and availability; and porosity of the borders and legal frameworks legitimizing their use (Malam, 2014).This may be adjudged true because a significant number of the communal conflct that occured in Nigeria were prosecuted with small arms, and in  some instances extremely sophisticated weapons fit for external assault. The evil perpetuated through this weapon are not measurble, as their avalaibility is usually considered as a major cause that influences communal conflict and the outbreak as well as the continuation of internal conflicts and tensions in Nigeria.

Land ownership

Notable examples of communities in Nigeria that plunged into serious communal conflict hinged on land tussle with destabilized implications to their socio-economic well-being are well documented in literature. In Ebonyi state, Nigeria, there was an ensuing conflict between the people of Ezza and Ezillo communities over a portion of land which resulted in high death rates, destruction of basic infrastructure and services, and malnutrition. With the intervention of government and security agencies, violence was abated leading to a ceasefire between the two communities. However, this superficial peace has always been short-lived as longstanding and simmering ethnic rivalry and distrust has always plunged these two communities into perpetual communal conflict. 

Also, In December, 2018, four communities in Biase Local Government Area of Cross River State engaged in three days conflict which result to wanton destruction of lives and peoples’ properties. The conflict was deeply rooted in the “decision by Orugbam people to annex some land in other Erei communities.” The Inyima, Onyadama conflict in March, 2016, where women, children, the aged and the entire houses in Inyima were set ablaze. The conflict which has become a recurring decimal was first fought in 2008 then 2014 and repeated in 2016. The cause of the war according to sources is that an Inyima man was said to have harvested cassava in a disputed portion of land with Onyadama community and since the first outbreak of the conflict many years ago, there have continued to be bad blood and    recurring skirmishes which have kept the two erstwhile sister communities at daggers drawn. 

IMPACT OF COMMUNCAL CONFLICT ON DEVELOPMENT

 The evidence from previous communal clashes in Nigeria, demonstrates that communal conflict has a significant negative impact on development and the well-being of the populations affected by such persistent violence. During community disputes, violence causes devastation and restricts commercial transactions. As a consequence, public and private assets are damaged, individuals are injured or murdered, and markets shrink as transaction costs rise. In addition, people change their behaviour to survive amid violence. Thus, instead of maximising profits, the population dedicates most of its effort to avoiding victimisation and increasing their chance of survival. Both dynamics reduce the income of those caught in violent attacks, cause poverty for the affected families, and make it hard for them to escape hardship.

Communal conflict causes extensive morbidity and mortality among the warring factions. Individuals, families, and whole communities are displaced as a result of armed conflict, leading to large numbers of people being forced to flee their homes. Previous communal conflicts in Nigeria have been marked by excessive cruelty and violence towards civilians, which has resulted in the deaths of a large number of individuals. Health, education, the economy, and social welfare services collapsed, and many features of traditional life and the social structure were destroyed. Moore (2005) argued that “communal conflict negatively impacts human capital by causing physical and mental impairment, declines in health and nutritional status, and education and training opportunities, which in turn drive individuals and households into poverty”. In both the short and long run, declines in health and well-being may limit an individual’s ability to work, thereby limiting their ability to make an income. In times of community war, the physical disabilities of civilians and fighters may keep people poor for a long time.

Impact of communal conflict on Healthcare delivery

Data suggest that over a third of maternal fatalities and half of all infant deaths occur in locations where health systems have been disrupted by violence. During conflict, malaria and other endemic illnesses are likely to be accelerated. Their results suggest negative effects of the insurgency on weight-for-age and weight-for-height z-scores and an increase in the probability of wasting. In their study, Patel, Gibson- Fall, Sullivan, and Irwin (2017) reported in their study the ordeal of health workers in conflict zones. They observed that health workers are frequently attacked and their working tools destroyed. Primary health centres (PHC) are often damaged during conflict. In most cases, the primary health centres are used by fighters as their base, where they sleep and keep their weapons. This makes health workers demoralized and feel bad about their jobs, which makes them less happy about their job.  

Impact of communal conflict on Education

. In times of armed conflict, schools and centers of learning are often targeted. Conflict reduces access to education by stopping schools from opening, endangering children’s safety while traveling to and from school, and causing teacher absenteeism. There is an increase in school dropouts, and lower educational survival rates owing to relocation, military enlistment, or economic hardship. Inadequate supply of basic essentials like food, water, and school supplies, education quality diminishes, particularly in communities surrounding the war that may see an inflow of refugees or internally displaced pupils. As a consequence of increased hardship caused by conflict, parents may be forced to prioritize their investments among their children, perhaps resulting in more girls than boys dropping out of school. Furthermore, safety and security concerns may be more prevalent among girls than among boys, with females being more vulnerable to sexual and gender-based abuse than males upon leaving the house.

Many children in developing countries have had their education interrupted or stopped because of endless conflict. In some conflict-torn nations, however, millions of school children have never had the chance to attend school in the first place. Conflict may hinder national development by adversely affecting family income and human resources that could be used to invest in education. This means that there are fewer resources available for families and governments to spend on education than there would be if there were no conflicts. The effect of a conflict extends well beyond the local region of the targeted school. It may lead parents to be hesitant about taking their children to school, instructors to be hesitant about teaching, and schools to shut down. In rare circumstances, military forces may issue instructions prohibiting children from attending school or may restrict entry tacitly. From the forgoing, it is obvious that conflict promotes illiteracy. Illiteracy is a powerful predictor of poverty and hunger, and it is primarily a rural phenomenon that impedes rural development and food security; threatens productivity and health; and hinders possibilities to boost individual living standards and gender parity. The chances of having good job prospects as well as a good income is low for the illiterate population. As a result, they are often faced with the challenges of dependency, low self-esteem, and higher levels of crime. 

Impact of communal conflict on Social amenities 

Studies have shown that, there has been an increase in the damage of infrastructure due to natural and anthropogenic disasters (Nyanga 2018, Nyanga & Sibanda 2019, Dava, Chigora, Chibanda, & Sillah 2013). The majority of the studies presented fresh information, insights, and understanding regarding the degree to which infrastructure has been devastated by the conflict and how this has affected rural development in general. Nyanga and Sibanda (2019) found that due to the devastation of roads and bridges, workers in conflict zones had a difficult time getting to and from work. Uyang, Nwagbara, Undelikwo, and Eneji (2013) demonstrated in their study that a significant relationship exists between boundary disputes and food security. Dava, Chigora, Chibanda, and Sillah (2013) showed that “a lot of economic infrastructure such as road networks, dams, Information Technology (IT), and financial services were destroyed by the civil war that erupted in Mozambique in 2013.” The study revealed that the destruction caused a lot of disturbances and disruptions to the economy, especially in the agricultural, manufacturing, and banking sectors. The economy was affected by the destruction of roads, bridges, information technology systems, energy and power infrastructure, and communication networks. Chang (2003) study revealed that disasters have huge economic and societal costs that directly affect firms. According to Nyanga (2018), armed conflict destroys the economic infrastructure and breeds insecurity.

One of the most direct ways in which conflict distorts rural development is through reduced production. Farmers lose money directly as a result of damaged health infrastructure caused by conflict, and this can have a big impact on agricultural growth and the lives of people in rural areas. Conflict and long-term crises are making more and more people poor, food insecure, and refugees. It wreaks havoc on agricultural and rural lives, resulting in severe financial loss, food shortages, and harm on all levels. According to Angara (2000), agricultural operations are generally the first to be impacted when there are conflicts in rural regions. Some of these things have a big impact on agricultural output, which leads to a high level of self-sufficiency and a lot of hunger and food shortages.

CONCLUSION

Communal conflict is damaging and can have a big impact on the socioeconomic activities of rural people. The reality is that community strife is on the rise, and its effect on development has been quite worrisome. The poor living standards of the inhabitants in the affected region are aggravated by the prevalence of violent conflict, which seems to affect subsistence farming, the population’s main source of income. These conflicts have slowed down most projects from both government and non-government organizations. Past conflict between communities in Nigeria has led to the deaths of many people. It collapsed the local economy, left the health, education, and social infrastructure devastated, and many aspects of traditional life and social structure obliterated. In order to reduce injustice and promote fairness and transparency, community leaders must adopt appropriate procedures for the distribution of landed properties. Communities should learn to resolve their differences through dialogue instead of carrying arms against each other. It is also necessary for the government, chiefs, and elders to exhibit a high degree of impartiality when mediating between parties in land disputes. Land-owning clans must carefully ensure that land borders between clans are accurately established, delimited, and recorded as soon as possible.

References

Akresh, R. & de Walque, D. (2008). Armed conflict and schooling: evidence from the 1994 Rwandan genocide. World Bank Policy Research Working Paper No. 4606. Washington DC: World Bank.

Alabi, D. L. & Famakinwa M. (2017). Effects of community conflicts on rural economic activities in Osun state, Nigeria: implications for sustainable development. Ife Journal of Agriculture, 29 (1), 63-73

Albert, I.O. (2001). Ife-Modakeke crisis. In Otite, O & Albert, I.O. (eds.) community conflicts in Nigeria: management, resolution and transformation. Ibadan: Spectrum Books Limited. 

Alimba, N. C. (2014). Probing the Dynamic of Communal Conflict in Northern Nigeria. African Research Review 8 (1), 177-204

Allan, (2006). Conflict and Critical Theories. https://us.corwin.com/sites/default/files/upm-binaries/13636_Chapter7.pdf

Ani, K. J. (2017). Ezza-Ezillo conflict and national implications in Nigeria : the need for multi-dimensional peace-building AFFRIKA Journal of Politics, Economics and Society 7 (2), 

Asif, I.  & Saeed, A. (2014). Job satisfaction of secondary school teachers. Abasyn  Journal  of  Social  Sciences, 5(1), 49-65.

Atkinson, C. L. (2017). Rural Development. Global Encyclopedia of Public Administration, Public Policy, and Governance, 1–7.

Buckland, P., (2005). Reshaping the Future: Education and Post-conflict Reconstruction. O. Adonteng-Kissi et al. International Journal of Educational Development xxx (xxxx) xxx–xxx World Bank Publications.

Bundervoet, T. (2012). War, health and educational attainment: a panel of children during Burundi’s civil war. HiCN Working Paper 114.

Burde, D., Kapit, A., Wah, R., Guven, O., Skarpeteig, M., (2013). Education in emergencies. In: A Review of Theory and Research, Paper Presented at the Comparative and International Education Society. New Orleans, March 10–15.

Caleb, A. & Grerald, O. (2015). The role of small arms and light weapons proliferation in African conflicts. African Journal of Political Science and International Relations. 9(3), 78-85

Carter, N., Bryant-Lukosius, D., DiCenso, A., Blythe, J., & Neville, A.J., (2014). The use of triangulation in qualitative research’. Proceedings of the Oncology Nursing Forum, vol. 41.

Dava, P. O., Chigora, P., Chibanda, T.W., & Sillah, R., (2013). An analysis of the effects of civil war and prospects for development in Mozambique: The case of frelimo-renamo in Chokwe District. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention, 2 (6), 66-75.

Dill, J. C. & Anderson, C. A. (1995). Effects of frustration justification on hostile aggression. Aggressive Behaviour, 21(4), 359 – 369.

Dollard, J. et al (1939). Frustration and aggression. New Haven, Conn: Yale University Press.

Ekhator-Mobayode, U. E.  & Asfaw, A. A. (2019). The child health effects of terrorism: evidence from the Boko Haram Insurgency in Nigeria, Applied Economics, Taylor & Francis Journals, 51(6), 624-638

Gafaro, Margarita and Justino, Patricia and Ibáñez, Ana María, Collective Action and Armed Group Presence in Colombia (July 9, 2014). Documento CEDE No. 2014-28, Available at SSRN: https://ssrn.com/abstract=2489128 or http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2489128

Homer-Dixon, T. F. (2001) Environemnt, scarcity and violence. USA, Princeton university press.

Jones, A. & Naylor, R. (2014) The quantitative impact of armed conflict on education: counting the human and financial costs. Doha: PEIC. Available at http://educationandconflict.org/

Justino, P., Leone, M. & Salardi, P. (2011). Education and conflict recovery: the case of Timor Leste. HiCN Working Paper 100

Krause, J. (2020). Restrained or constrained? Elections, communal conflicts, and variation in sexual violence. Journal of Peace Research, 57(1), 185–198.

Lai, B., & Thyne, C. (2007). The effect of civil war on education. Journal of Peace Research, 277–292.

Malam, B. (2014). Small arms and light weapons proliferation and it implication for West African regional security. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science, 4(8), 260-269.

Moore, J. (2005). Seven recommendations for creating sustainability education at the university level. A guide for change agents. International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education 6 (4), 326-339

Nwobi, T. U. (2006). Cooperatives and rural financing. In E. E. Umebali (Eds.) Readings in Cooperative Economics and Management. Lagos: Computer Egde Publishers.

Nyanga, T. & Sibanda, R., (2019). Impact of onsite health care centers on job satisfaction In Armed Conflict Societies: The Zimbabwean War Of Liberation Perspective,” Business Excellence and Management, Faculty of Management, Academy of Economic Studies, Bucharest, Romania, vol. 9(3), pages 47-58

Nyanga, T., (2018). Examining the usefulness of job satisfaction theories in armed conflict society. Amity Global Human Resource Management Review, 8 (2), 40-48.

Oji, R. O. (2014). Communal conflicts in Nigeria: an examination of Ezillo and Ezza-Ezillo conflict of Ebonyi state, (1982-2012) Kuwait Chapter of Arabian Journal of Business and Management Review 4 (1), 514-526

Onwudiwe, E. (2004). Communal violence and the future of Nigeria. Global Dialogue, 6(3-4).

Popoola, M. A., Olawale, S. M. & Muftau, F. A. (2020). Effect of communal conflict on economic activities inOsun State, Nigeria. Business And Management Research Journal 10 (2), 41-46

Shemyakina, O., (2011). The effect of armed conflict on accumulation of schooling: results from Tajikistan. J. Dev. Econ.95 (2), 186–200.

Singh, P. & Shemyakina, O. N.  (2013). Gender-Differential Effects of Conflict on Education: The Case of the 1981-1993 Punjab Insurgency, HiCN Working Papers 143, Households in Conflict Network.

Singha, K. (2015). Does Conflict Affect Educational Development? The Indian Economic Journal 62(4), 1313–1335.

Swee, E. L. (2009). On war and schooling attainment: The case of Bosnia and Herzegovina. Households in Conflict Network Working Paper 57. Falmer: University of Sussex, April.

UNDP (United Nations Development Program) (2012). UNDP Human Development Report. New York: UNDP

Uyang, F. A., Nwagbara, E. N., Undelikwo, V. A., Eneji, R. I. (2013). Communal Land Conflict and Food Security in Obudu Local Government Area of Cross River State, Nigeria. Advances in Anthropology 3 (4), 193-197

Vinck, P, Pham, P N and Kreutzer, T (2011). Talking Peace: A population-based survey on attitudes about security, dispute resolution, and post-conflict reconstruction in Liberia. Berkeley, CA: Human Rights Center, University of California, Berkeley.

Voz di Paz and Interpeace (2010). Root causes of conflict in Guinea-Bissau: The voices of the people. Guinea-Bissau: Voz di Paz/Interpeace.

Wig, T. & Kromrey, D. (2018). Which groups fight? Customary institutions and communal conflicts in Africa. Journal of Peace Research, 1-15

World Bank (2011) World development report, 2011: Conflict, security and development. Washington: IBRD/World Bank.

Basics of Systematic Literature Review Technique

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

A systematic literature review is a critical and comprehensive analysis of available research and literature on a specific topic or question. It follows a structured methodology to identify, evaluate, and synthesize all relevant published research on a given subject. This type of review is essential for informing evidence-based decision-making and identifying gaps in current research. In this article, we will delve into the key aspects of conducting a systematic literature review.

The Purpose of a Systematic Literature Review

A systematic literature review stands as a cornerstone in the realm of academic exploration, offering an in-depth and thorough analysis of existing research and literature concerning a specific topic or inquiry. Its methodology is meticulous, employing a structured approach to identify, evaluate, and synthesize all pertinent published research on a given subject. This type of review is instrumental in driving evidence-based decision-making and illuminating the gaps present within current research. In this article, we will unravel the intricacies involved in conducting a systematic literature review.

The Purpose of a Systematic Literature Review

The fundamental objective of a systematic literature review is to furnish a robust and unbiased summary of the existing knowledge pertaining to a particular subject. It strives to achieve the following key goals:

  1. Summarize Existing Research:
    • Engage in the aggregation and summarization of findings from prior studies to provide a comprehensive understanding of the topic. Collate and summarize the findings of previous studies to offer an overall understanding of the topic.
  2. Identify Research Gaps:
    • Discern areas where research is deficient or warrants further investigation, acting as a compass for future scholarly endeavors. Pinpoint areas where research is lacking or where further investigation is needed.
  3. Evaluate Methodologies:
    • Critically assess the quality and rigor of methods employed in previous studies, unveiling both strengths and weaknesses. Assess the quality and rigor of the methods used in previous studies to identify strengths and weaknesses.
  4. Inform Decision-making:
    • Serve as a foundational resource for facilitating informed decisions, whether within academia, policy formulation, or practical applications. Provide a foundation for making informed decisions, whether in academia, policy, or practice.

The primary goal of a systematic literature review is to provide a robust and impartial summary of existing knowledge on a particular subject. It aims to:

  1. Summarize Existing Research:
  2. Identify Research Gaps:
  3. Evaluate Methodologies:
  4. Inform Decision-making:

Key Steps in Conducting a Systematic Literature Review

  1. Formulating the Research Question or Objective:
    • Clearly define the research question or objective that the review aims to address. This ensures focus and clarity throughout the process. Begin by articulating a clear and precise research question or objective that the review aims to address. This sets the stage for maintaining focus and clarity throughout the review process.
  2. Developing Inclusion and Exclusion Criteria:
    • Establish specific criteria for including or excluding studies based on parameters such as publication date, study design, population, or outcomes of interest. Establish specific criteria for study inclusion or exclusion based on parameters such as publication date, study design, target population, or outcomes of interest.
  3. Systematic Search and Selection of Studies:
    • Conduct a thorough and systematic search across relevant databases and sources to identify all pertinent studies. The search process should be transparent, replicable, and documented in detail.
    • Apply the inclusion and exclusion criteria to select studies that meet the predefined criteria.
    • Initiate a comprehensive and systematic search across pertinent databases and sources to identify all relevant studies. The search process should be transparent, replicable, and meticulously documented.
    • Apply the predefined inclusion and exclusion criteria to meticulously select studies that align with the set criteria.
  4. Data Extraction and Analysis:
    • Extract relevant data from the selected studies using a standardized data extraction form. This could include study characteristics, methodologies, key findings, and other relevant information.
    • Extract pertinent data from the selected studies using a standardized data extraction form. This may encompass study characteristics, methodologies, key findings, and other pertinent details.
    • Analyze and synthesize the extracted data to unveil patterns, trends, and recurring themes.
  5. Quality Assessment:
    • Evaluate the quality and rigor of the selected studies, considering factors such as study design, sample size, methodology, and potential biases. Conduct a rigorous evaluation of the quality and rigor of the selected studies, considering critical factors such as study design, sample size, methodology, and potential biases.
  6. Synthesis and Presentation of Results:
    • Synthesize the findings from the selected studies, organizing them in a coherent and structured manner.
    • Present the results using appropriate formats, such as tables, graphs, or narrative summaries.
  7. Interpretation and Conclusion:
    • Interpret the synthesized findings and draw conclusions based on the collective evidence.
    • Discuss implications, limitations, and potential future research directions.

Advantages of a Systematic Literature Review

  • Comprehensive Understanding: Provides a comprehensive and organized overview of existing knowledge on a topic.
  • Reduction of Bias: Minimizes bias by following a structured and systematic approach to study selection and analysis.
  • Evidence-based Decision-making: Informs decision-making in various domains, including healthcare, policy, education, and more.
  • Identifying Research Gaps: Highlights gaps in current research, guiding future research initiatives.

Challenges and Limitations

  • Publication Bias: The inclusion of only published studies can introduce publication bias, as negative or inconclusive results may not be published.
  • Resource Intensiveness: Conducting a systematic literature review requires significant time, resources, and expertise.
  • Incomplete or Inaccessible Data: Some relevant studies may not be accessible or may lack detailed information.

Conclusion

A systematic literature review is a valuable tool for synthesizing existing knowledge and informing decision-making across various fields. By following a structured methodology, it provides a rigorous and objective analysis of the available research, aiding in the advancement of knowledge and the identification of research gaps. Researchers, policymakers, and practitioners can use the insights gained from systematic literature reviews to make informed decisions and contribute to the progression of their respective domains. A systematic literature review stands as a valuable and indispensable tool for synthesizing existing knowledge and informing decision-making across a plethora of academic and practical domains. Its structured methodology facilitates a rigorous and unbiased analysis of available research, propelling the advancement of knowledge and shedding light on critical research gaps. Researchers, policymakers, and practitioners can leverage the insights garnered from systematic literature reviews to make informed decisions and contribute meaningfully to the progression of their respective fields of study.

References

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Dziopa, F., & Ahern, K. (2011). A systematic literature review of the applications of Q-technique and its methodology. Methodology.

Kitchenham, Barbara, et al. “Systematic literature reviews in software engineering–a systematic literature review.” Information and software technology 51.1 (2009): 7-15.

Rother, E. T. (2007). Systematic literature review X narrative review. Acta paulista de enfermagem20, v-vi.

Sharma, S.N., ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, S.N. (2023). “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” Track2Training

Xiao, Y., & Watson, M. (2019). Guidance on conducting a systematic literature review. Journal of planning education and research39(1), 93-112.

Increasing Repurchase Intention through Product Quality, Service Quality, and Customer Satisfaction

Lena Ellitan; Ani Suhartatik

Faculty of Business

Widya Mandala Catholic University Surabaya Indonesia

Abstract

Product quality has a positive impact on repurchase intentions. Good product quality with good taste, and the wide variety of products available will make consumers visit and buy this product again in the future. Good service quality has a significant effect on repurchase intentions. This shows that good service quality alone is not enough to make consumers have the intention to buy again. Product quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction because good product quality will create a sense of satisfaction experienced by customers. The higher the quality of the product provided, the higher the customer satisfaction will be. Quality products with a wide variety of menus to make consumers feel satisfied and create a desire to visit and buy existing products again. Good service quality makes consumers feel good. Providing good service to make consumers satisfied, apart from good service, providing a comfortable atmosphere and eye-catching design so that consumers feel satisfied with the place and the service provided to their customers. Customer satisfaction creates an intention to buy again. Customer satisfaction will create an intention to repurchase. Consumers will have the intention to repurchase if consumers are satisfied with the quality of the products offered and also the services provided. Good service quality can create a good positive perspective from consumers so that consumers have the intention to come back. This article discusses the role of product quality, service quality and satisfaction in increasing repurchase intentions.

Keywords: Product Quality, Service Quality, Satisfaction and Repurchase Intention

Introduction

Product and service quality is closely related to customer satisfaction and company profitability (Kotler and Keller, 2016). According to Schroder, (2011) quality is a distinctive attribute or characteristic that a product has. Better food quality will provide high customer satisfaction. Food quality is also an important attribute in food. Lovelock and Wirtz (2011) stated that service quality is the number of services that require direct interaction between customers and business actors. Differences in service methods between one service provider and another can often be seen from the attitudes and skills of employees. Felix (2017) believes that consumer satisfaction is a customer’s feeling of satisfaction or disappointment resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations. If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the results match the customer’s expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Companies that focus on customer satisfaction will be able to increase customer loyalty and at the same time will help the company to have a positive image (Tjiptono and Chandra, 2011). Customer satisfaction is also defined as a determinant of post-purchase attitudes that reflects positive or negative results. Hawkins and Lonney in Tjiptono (2004) also stated three dimensions of customer satisfaction, namely suitability of satisfaction, repurchase intention and willingness to recommend.

Santoso (2016) argues that repurchase intentions represent a customer’s likelihood of engaging in objectively observed future behavior. This is defined as a consumer’s intention to repurchase a particular product or service in the future (Wand and Yu, 2016). There are four dimensions of repurchase intention, namely transactional intention, referential intention, preferential intention and exploration intention (Ferdinand in Saidani and Samsul, 2012). Companies need to implement marketing strategies that are right on target in marketing their products. Determining strategies in terms of food quality and service quality to consumers which triggers consumer satisfaction which ultimately makes consumers have the intention to repurchase the products produced to introduce or brand their business. Based on the phenomena and background above, it is hoped that this article will provide benefits as a study of product quality, service quality, customer satisfaction, and be useful for further research as reference material. And used as input for entrepreneurs in managing their platforms and products according to product quality, service quality and customer satisfaction.

Product quality

Kodu (2013), states that product quality can be interpreted as the ability of a product to carry out its function which includes durability, reliability or progress, strength, ease of packaging, and product repair and other characteristics. Kotler and Armstrong (2012: 283) add that product quality is the ability of a product to perform its function. Product quality is determined by product attributes. Kotler (in Negara, 2018) also states that product quality is the character of a product that has the ability to meet consumer needs. Kotler and Keller (2009: 143) suggest that product quality consists of the features and characteristics of goods and services, the intensity of which can determine the performance capabilities of a product which can be stated or implied. This is related to the quality of the product or service itself, company profitability, and consumer satisfaction which determine the selection of a product. Kotler and Keller (2009: 144) state that the higher the level of product quality offered to consumers, the higher the price, the lower the costs required, and the company can maintain the experience that consumers feel when purchasing the product.

Kotler and Armstrong (2012) argue that product quality is the ability of a product to perform its function. Product quality is determined by product attributes. Product attributes are product elements that are considered important by consumers and are used as the basis for decision making (Tjiptono, 2009 in Afrilia, 2017). According to Kotler (2008), the higher the product quality, the higher the consumer’s decision to make a purchase. *When consumers purchase a product, there will be certain considerations that will become the benchmark for consumers to fulfill their desires, including the condition and appearance of a product marketed by the company. Kotler and Armstrong (2017:249) state that product quality is one of the positioning factors in determining marketing strategies.             

Product quality is the performance of a product in accordance with the commitments made by the manufacturer to consumers. This commitment can be explicit or implicit, namely in terms of quality management expectations from the average consumer of the product. A product can be known as a good and quality product only if the quality of the product is able to meet the criteria and desires of consumers. Product quality in physical appearance must be beautiful to the eye in order to attract consumer interest and achieve good product quality. To achieve this, quality standardization is needed.

Service Quality

Service quality is the activity of offering services that are felt by customers who have used the service. Service quality is very important for customer satisfaction and trust (Rahmani Nejad, Firoozbakht, & Taghipoor, 2014). Wibowo & Soedjono (2014) stated that service quality can be said to be good and of high quality if the service provided by a company can satisfy its customers. The company will not remain silent in terms of customer satisfaction, so that its customers can feel satisfied. According to Kotler, (2007) customer satisfaction is a person’s feeling of happiness or disappointment that arises after the person compares the performance (results) of the product in question against the expected performance. Service quality is how far the difference is between customer reality and the customer expectations they receive (Adabi, 2020). According to Kotler (2009), customer satisfaction can be felt after customers compare their experiences in purchasing goods or services from sellers or providers of goods and services with the expectations or feelings they get from the buyers themselves. Kotler and Keller (2007) state that service quality must start from customer needs and end in customer perception, where customer perception of service quality is a comprehensive assessment of the superiority of a service. According to Adipramita (2019), quality is often considered a measure of the relative goodness of a product or service which consists of design quality and suitability. According to Aryani and Rosita (2010) service quality is very important to achieve improvement efforts for business continuity, where with good service quality the value delivered to customers becomes more positive, and will provide satisfaction to consumers. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires and the accuracy of delivery to match customer expectations. According to Tjiptono (2014:282) there are five dominant factors or determinants of service quality.

1. Tangible. Namely in the form of physical appearance, equipment and various materials that are visible and can be assessed as good.

2. Empathy. Namely employee willingness to build relationships, good communication, personal attention, and understanding of customer needs.

3. Responsiveness. Namely the readiness of employees to meet consumer needs in a responsive and friendly manner. Employees must have the willingness to provide service quickly and responsively.

4. Reliability. Namely the employee’s ability to provide services promptly, accurately, consistently and satisfactorily

5. Guarantee (Assurance). Namely, employees must include the knowledge, competence, readiness and trustworthiness of employees regarding the promises given, free from danger, risk and doubt.

Customer satisfaction

Customer satisfaction is a customer’s feelings, both satisfied and disappointed, resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations (Kotler and Keller, 2018). If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the performance meets expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Customer satisfaction is an individual’s perception of performance or service in relation to consumer expectations (Schiffman and Kanuk, 2007). Kotler and Armstrong (2008) also define customer satisfaction as the extent to which the product performance received is in line with customer expectations. Companies that focus on customer satisfaction will be able to increase customer loyalty and at the same time will help the company to have a positive image (Tjiptono and Chandra, 2011). Customer satisfaction is defined as a determinant of post-purchase attitudes that reflects positive or negative results. Agustiansyah and Tauik (2019) also stated that customer satisfaction plays a very important role in competitive industries, because there is a very large difference in loyalty between customers who are satisfied and customers who are truly satisfied or happy. Satisfaction is the difference between expectations and performance. Customer satisfaction will always be based on efforts to eliminate or narrow the gap between expectations and performance. Customer satisfaction is the level of customer feelings after comparing perceived service performance and compared with expectations (Kotler and Keller, 2016). Customer satisfaction is a person’s feeling of happiness or disappointment that arises after comparing the performance obtained with the expected performance. If performance does not match expectations, then customers become dissatisfied. If performance meets expectations, then customers will be very satisfied (Nurmalina, 2017). Customer satisfaction is an evaluation process after purchasing or evaluation results after comparing what they feel with their expectations (Yamit, 2013). Satisfaction is the level of feeling after comparing the perceived performance or results with expectations (Sumarwan, 2012). Kotler in Lupiyoadi (2013) states that satisfaction is a level of feeling where someone states the results of a comparison of the product performance received and expected. Hamdani (2011) found that achieving customer satisfaction can be improved through service quality with several approaches as follows:

1. Minimize the gaps that occur between management and customers. For example, by conducting research by distributing questionnaires over several periods, to find out customer perceptions of service.

2. Companies must be able to build a joint commitment to create a vision for improving service processes. This includes improving the way of thinking, abilities, behavior and knowledge of all existing human resources.

3. Give customers the opportunity to convey their complaints by forming a system of criticism and suggestions, and correcting deficiencies that customers complain about

4. Develop and implement accountable, proactive and partnership marketing according to the marketing situation. The company contacts customers after the service process occurs to determine customer satisfaction and expectations (accountable). The company contacts customers from time to time to find out the progress of its services (proactive). Companies build closeness with customers which is useful for creating the company’s image and position in the market (partnership).

Kuo et al (2013) stated that consumers who have a high level of satisfaction will repeatedly return to the same place to get optimal results. Efendi (2020) states that customer satisfaction is a post-purchase consumer evaluation where the alternative chosen does not provide the same results or exceed consumer expectations, while dissatisfaction will arise if the results obtained are below consumer expectations.

Repurchase Intention

Repurchase intention represents a customer’s likelihood to engage in objectively observed future behavior (Santoso, 2016). This is defined as a consumer’s intention to repurchase a particular product or service in the future (Wand and Yu, 2016). There are four dimensions of repurchase intention, namely transactional intention, referential intention, preferential intention and exploration intention (Ferdinand in Saidani and Samsul, 2012). Pham et al (2018) define repurchase as an actual action, and repurchase intention shows that the customer decides to engage in future activities with the seller. Hendarsono (2013) believes that repurchase interest is the behavior of customers who respond positively to what has been provided by a company and are interested in making return visits or consuming the company’s products again. Nurhayati (2012) states that repurchase intention is a consumer’s desire and action to repurchase a product because of the satisfaction received in accordance with what is desired from a product.

Repurchase is a post-purchase consumer action, the occurrence of consumer satisfaction or dissatisfaction will influence subsequent behavior, if the consumer is satisfied then they will show a higher possibility of repurchasing the product. Repurchase intention refers to a possibility or opportunity to use a previous service provider again in the future. Repurchase intention is a customer’s tendency to buy products from the right manufacturer over a long period of time (Gounaris, Bimitraids and Stathakopoulos, 2010). Repurchase is a tendency for consumer buying behavior for a product or service that is carried out repeatedly over a certain period of time and actively likes and has a positive attitude towards a product based on experiences that have been made in the past (Suryana and Dasuki, 2013). And inform other people about good things about the product and will not pay too much attention to similar product offerings from other companies (Kotler and Armstrong, 2008).

Discussion

Several studies support that product quality has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. High quality products are products that are able to excel in competing to meet consumer needs (Wood, 2009). Product quality plays an important role in shaping consumers’ repurchase intentions (Mahendrayanti and Wardana, 2021). Excellent product quality can provide confidence for consumers who will buy the product again (Nurahma et al, 2016). This research is also in line with research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022) explaining that product quality in the Erigo brand has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. The better the quality of service provided to consumers, the greater the consumer’s interest in making repeat purchases. Service quality is a factor that significantly encourages consumers to make repeat purchases (Prastika and Sugiono, 2017). According to Mardikawati and Farida (2013) service quality describes the nature of product appearance or performance which is a main part of the company’s strategy in order to achieve sustainable excellence as either a market leader or a strategy to continue to grow. In research conducted by Hidayat, et al (2020) at the Hotplate restaurant in Jakarta, it was found that there was a significant influence on service quality on repurchase intentions.

Customer satisfaction can be created by many things, good product quality is one factor in customer satisfaction. Good product quality will make consumers buy the product again and feel satisfied with the product. Kotler and Keller (2009: 144) state that the higher the level of product quality offered to consumers, the higher the price and lower costs required, and can enable a company to maintain the experience that consumers feel when purchasing the product. In research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022), it was found that product quality has a positive effect on customer satisfaction.

There are many factors that create customer satisfaction, one of which is service quality. Service quality is a reflection of a company’s reputation. A good company will have good quality service, which is able to make consumers feel comfortable and satisfied with the services provided. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires as well as the accuracy of delivery to meet customer expectations. In research conducted by Hidayat et al (2020), it was found that service quality has a positive effect on customer satisfaction.

According to Mensah & Mensah (2018) customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions are very important to increase restaurant profits. Customers who are satisfied, both with the product and the service, will make repeat purchases at that place. If customers are not satisfied with the product and service, then customers will not come to that place again to make repeat purchases. In research conducted by Hidayat et al (2020) at a HotPlaye restaurant in Jakarta, it was found that there was a significant influence on customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions.

In several studies, customer satisfaction is able to mediate product quality which has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. The process of forming consumer buying interest must first form a sense of satisfaction for consumers through the quality they have (Savitri and Wardana. 2018). North et al (2004) state that product quality is defined as the ability of a product to meet consumer needs and their requests, and also as a set of attributes that contribute to consumer satisfaction and expectations in use. In research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022) conducted at Erigo Surakarta, it was stated that product quality mediated by customer satisfaction had a positive effect on repurchase intentions. Bailia et al (2014) stated that product quality partially has a positive effect on satisfaction. The consumer’s experience in purchasing a product will result in the consumer’s assessment of the product. Consumer repurchase intentions represent possible future behavior, while behavior is an objectively observed level (Santoso, 2016). Service quality is closely related to customer satisfaction and company profitability (Kotler & Keller, 2016). Awi and Chaipoopirutana (2014) argue that to increase repurchase intentions, businesses must focus on increasing their customer satisfaction. Mensah & Mensah (2018) also added that customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions are very important to increase restaurant profits. In research conducted by Hidayat, et al (2020), it was found that service quality, mediated by customer satisfaction, has a positive effect on customer repurchase interest.

Conclusion

            Product quality has a positive impact on repurchase intentions. The results of this research are also supported by Danu and Haryono (2022) that product quality has a positive effect on repurchase interest. Good product quality with good taste, and the wide variety of products available will make consumers visit and buy this product again in the future. Good service quality has a significant effect on repurchase intentions. This shows that good service quality alone is not enough to make consumers have the intention to buy again. Service quality can be mediated by customer satisfaction so that consumers’ repurchase intentions increase. Product quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction because good product quality will create a sense of satisfaction experienced by customers. The higher the quality of the product provided, the higher the customer satisfaction will be. Quality products with a wide variety of menus to make consumers feel satisfied and create a desire to visit and buy existing products again.

            Good service quality makes consumers feel satisfied. Research conducted by Widjoyo, et al (2014) also found that service quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction. In this study, researchers stated that if service quality is improved, customer satisfaction with the restaurant will also increase. Providing good service to make consumers satisfied, apart from good service, providing a comfortable atmosphere and eye-catching design so that consumers feel satisfied with the place and the services provided to their customers. Customer satisfaction creates an intention to buy again. Customer satisfaction will create an intention to repurchase. Consumers will have the intention to repurchase if consumers are satisfied with the quality of the products offered and also the services provided. Kotler and Keller (2018) customer satisfaction is the customer’s feelings, both satisfied and disappointed, resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations. If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the performance meets expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Good service quality can create a good positive perspective from consumers so that consumers have the intention to come back.

Researchers found a significant influence of product quality on repurchase intentions which was mediated by customer satisfaction. According to Kotler (2008), the higher the product quality, the higher the consumer’s decision to make a purchase. When consumers purchase a product, there will be certain considerations that serve as benchmarks for consumers to fulfill their desires, including the condition and appearance of a product marketed by the company. Service quality mediated by customer satisfaction has a significant effect on repurchase intention. Consumers who make repeat purchases also pay attention and feel directly the quality of service from a restaurant. Nur, A.I (2018) found that service quality can be mediated by customer satisfaction which results in consumers’ repurchase intentions. Good quality service will certainly make consumers feel satisfied and make repeat purchases. Service quality can be said to be good and of high quality if the service provided by a company can satisfy its customers. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires and the accuracy of delivery to balance customer expectations so that customers can feel satisfied with the services provided and the intention to buy again arises.

References

Adabi,  N.  (2020).  Pengaruh  Citra  Merek, Kualitas  Pelayanan  dan  Kepercayaan Konsumen Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian  Indihome  di  Witel  Telkom Depok. Journal Of Management.

Adipramita,V.  (2019).Pengaruh  Kualitas Pelayanan,     Persepsi     Harga,     Dan Lokasi Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Di  Toko  Perhiasan  Emas Lancar    Jaya    Sekaran    Lamongan. JEM17:  Jurnal  Ekonomi  Manajemen. https://doi.org/10.30996/jem17.v4i1.2916.

Afrilia, V.S. (2017). Pengaruh Harga Kualitas Produk dan Citra Merek Terhadap keputusan Teh Siap Minum Dalam Kemasan Teh Botol Sosro.

Agustiansyah, E. C., & Taufik, E. R. (2019). Mediasi Kepuasan Nasabah Pada Pengaruh Kualitas  Pelayanan  dan  Citra  Perusahaan  Terhadap  Loyalitas  (Studi  Pada PT. Bank  Syariah  Mandiri  KCP  Pandeglang).Jurnal  Riset  Bisnis dan  Manajemen Tirtayasa,3(1), 1-19.

Anjelia, G.P., Dkk. (2018). Pengaruh Kualitas Produk, Harga dan Word of Mouth Terhadap Miat Beli Konsumen Handphone Pada Mahasiswa FEB Unsrat. Vol.6, No.3.

Annisa, R. A., Wardhana, A. (2016). Pengaruh word of mouth Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen Baraya Travel Pool Buah Batu. Vol.10, No.2. 

Aryani, Dwi dan Rosinta, Febrina. 2010. Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan terhadap Kepuasan Pelanggan dalam Membentuk Loyalitas Pelanggan. Jurnal Ilmu Administrasi dan Organisasi, Volume 2, halaman 114-126.

Awi, Y. L., & Chaipoopirutana, S. (2014). A Study of Factors Affecting Consumer’s Repurchase Intention toward Xyz Restaurant, Myanmar. International Conference on Trends in Economics, Humanities and Management, 181-184.

Bagus, A.D., Ratna, N.N., dan Imam, A.B. (2021) Pengaruh Kualitas Produk, Harga, Desain dan Citra Merek terhadap Minat Beli Ulang Produk Sepatu. Vol.1, No.1.1

Bailia,  Jefry  F.T,  Agus  Supandi  Soegoto  dan  Sjendry  Serulo  R.  Loindong.  2014. Pengaruh    Kualitas    Produk,    Harga    dan    Lokasi    Terhadap    Kepuasan Konsumen  Pada  Warung –Warung  Makan  Lamongan  Di  Kota  Manado. Jurnal EMBA, 2(3), 1768 –1780.

Danu, A.P., dan Haryono. T. (2022). The Effect of Brand Image and Product Quality on Repurchase Intention Mediated by Consummer Satisfaction Study at Uniqlo in Solo. Vol.6, issue.2.

Fajriati, Nadia., Megawati (2021). Pengaruh Harga, Kualitas Produk, Lokasi, dan Word of Mouth (WOM) Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen pada Toko Jaya Sentosa Mebel 7 Ulu Palembang. Vol.2, No.2.

Ghozali, Imam, 2016, Aplikasi Analisis Multivariate dengan Program IBM SPSS23, Edisi Delapan, Journal of Economics and Finance, Semarang, Universitas Diponegoro.

Hannan, S., Suharjo, B., Kirbrandoko., & Nurmalina, R. (2017). The Influence of Customer Satisfaction , Trust and Information Sharing on Customer Loyalty of Professional Services Company : An Empirical Study on Independent Surveyor Services Industry in Indonesia. Abstract of Economic, Finance and Management Outlook, Conscientia Beam, 11(1), 344–353.

Indonesia, D. (n.d.). Industri Mamin Tumbuh 2,54% PADA 2021. Dataindonesia.id. Retrieved June 14, 2022, from https://dataindonesia.id/sektor-riil/detail/industri-mamin-tumbuh-254-pada-2021

Sudibyo, G. C. (2022). 4 Sektor Usaha Menjanjikan Untuk Strategi bisnis 2022. PRIEDS. Retrieved June 14, 2022, from https://www.prieds.com/post/4-sektor-usaha-menjanjikan-untuk-strategi-bisnis-2022

Devi, Irma P. et.all. 2020. Pengaruh Persepsi Harga, Kualitas Makanan dan Kalitas Pelayanan Terhadap Niat Beli Di Warung Dekade. Jurnal Ilmu Manajemen. ISSN: 2721-6810. Vol.1, No.2.

Felix, R. (2017). Service quality and customer satisfaction in selected banks in Rwanda. Journal of Business & Financial Affairs, VI(1), 246-256.

Hamdani.A. 2011.  Manajemen  Pemasaran  Jasa.  (Edisi  2).  Salemba  Empat. Jakarta.

Hasan, A. 2010. Marketing Dari Mulut Ke Mulut. Edisi 12. Jilid 2. Media Presindo, Yogyakarta.

Hair Jr., J. F., Hult, G. T., Ringle, C. M., Sarstedt, M., Danks, N. P., & Ray, S. (2021). Partial Least Squares Structural Equation Modeling (Pls-Sem) Using R (1st Ed.). Springer Cham. 

Hume, M., & Sullivan, M. (2010). The Consequence Of Appraisal Emotion, Service Quality, Perceived Value And Customer Satisfaction On Repurchase Intent In The Performing Arts. Journal of Services Marketing, 24(2), 170 – 182.

Imasari, K.P. (2012). Odd Price: Harga, Psikologi dan Perilaku Konsumen Dalam Purchase Decision Making. Vol.11, No.2.

Kodu, Sarini. 2013. Haga, Kualitas Produk dan Kualitas Pelayanan Pengaruhnya Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Mobil Toyota Avanza. ISSN : 2303-1174. Vol.1, No.3.

Knight, J.B., Kotschevor, L. (2000). Quality Food Production Planning and Management: 3rd Edition. Canada: Simultaneously.

Kotler dan Amstrong, G 2012. Principles Of Marketing. 14th Edition Pearson International Edition. Prentice Hall. New Jersey

Kotler, Philip and Gary Armstrong. 2012. Prinsip-prinsip Pemasaran. Edisi 13. Jilid 1. Jakarta: Erlangga.

Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2016). Marketing Management (15th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education.

Kotler, Philip dan Amstrong, Gary. 2011/ 10th Edition. “Marketing an introduction”. Indonesia: Parason

Kotler, Philip and Armstrong, Gary. (2014). Principles of Marketing, Fifteenth Edition, Pearson Education, England.

Kotler, P.& Amstrong, G. (2016). Principles of Marketing Edisi 16 Global Edition .England: Pearson Education Limited

Kotler, P., dan Armstrong, G. 2017, Principles of Marketing, 7th ed., United Kingdom: Pearson Education Limited.

Kotler, Philip dan Keller, Kevin Lane. (2018). Manajemen Pemasaran. PT Indeks.

Mahendrayanti, Made., & Wardana, 2021. “The Effect Of Proce Perception, Product Quality, and Service Quality on Repurchase Intention, 5(1), 182-188.

Mardikawati, Woro dan Farida, Naili. 2013. “Pengaruh Nilai Pelanggan dan     Kualitas Layanan Terhadap Loyalitas Pelanggan, Melalui Kepuasan Pelanggan pada    Pelanggan    Bus Efisiensi”. Jurnal Administrasi Bisnis. Semarang: UNDIP.

Mensah, I., & Mensah, R. D. (2018). Effects of Service Quality and Customer Satisfaction on Repurchase Intention in Restaurants on University of Cape Coast Campus. Journal of Tourism, Heritage & Services Marketing, 4(2), 27-36.

Negara, A.A Ngurah Dianta Esa (2018). Pengaruh Kualitas Produk dan Brand Image terhadap Minat Beli (Survei pada Pembeli di Gerai Starbucks di Kota Surabaya). Sarjana thesis, Universitas Brawijaya.

North, M.O., and D.D. Bell. 2004. Commercial Chicken Production Manual. 4th Ed.An Avi Book Publish. by Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

Nur, A.I, (2018). Pengaruh Experiental Marketing dan Kualitas Pelayanan Terhadap Niat Pembelian Ulang di Waroeng Spesial Sambel dengan Kepuasan Pelanggan Sebagai Variabel Mediasi. Vol 3

Nurahma.R, dkk. (2016). Peranan Kepuasan Pelanggan dalam Memediasi Pengaruh Kualitas Produk dan Kualitas Layanan Terhadap Pembelian Ulang Produk Jasa Larissa Skin Care di Jember. Artikel Ilmiah 1-6.

Nurhayati  dan  Wahyu  Wijaya  Murti.  2012.  Analisis  Faktor-Saktor  Yang  Mempengaruhi Minat  Beli  Ulang MasyarakatTerhadap  Produk  Handphone. Value  Added,  8  (2):47-62.

O. Pappas, I., G. Pateli, A., N. Giannakos, M., & Chrissikopoulos, V. (2014). Moderating effects of online shopping experience on customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions. International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, 42(3), 187–204.

Oktavia, Fanny. (2019). Studi Komparatif Mengenai Word of Mouth dan Minat Beli Pada Pusat Oleh-Oleh Pempek Candy dan Pempek Vico Palembang. Vol.2, No.1.

Permadi., G.P. (2017) Pengaruh Kualitas Produk Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian dan Dampaknya Terhadap Kepuasan Konsumen. Jurnal administrasi bisnis. Vol.48, No.1.

Pham, Q. T., Tran, X. P., Misra, S., Maskeliunas, R., & Damaševičius, R. (2018). Relationship between convenience, perceived value, and repurchase intention in online shopping in Vietnam. Sustainability (Switzerland), 10(1). https://doi.org/10.3390/su10010156

Pradana, Dedhy., Hudyah, Syarifah. dan Rahmawati (2017). Pengaruh Harga Kualitas Produk dan Citra Merek Brand Image Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Motor. Vol.14, No.1.

Prastika dan Sugiono. 2017. Pengaruh Kualitas Pelanyanan Dan Keragaman Produk Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Pada Leopard Cafe Way JeparaLampung Timur. Jurnal Dinamika. Volume 3 (1).

Rahmani-Nejad, L., et al. (2014) Service Quality, Relationship Quality and Customer Loyalty (Case Study: Banking Industry in Iran). Open Journal of Social Sciences, 2, 262-268.

Satria, Arief Adi (2017). Pengaruh Kualitas Harga, Promosi, dan Kualitas Produk Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen Pada Perusahaan A-36. Vol. 2, No.1. 

Savitri, Wardana (2018). Pengaruh Citra Merek, Kualitas Produk, dan Persepsi Harga Terhadap Kepuasan dan Niat Beli Ulang. Vol. 7, No. 10

Sahabuddin, Romansyah. (2019). Manajemen Pemasaran Jasa: Upaya Untuk Meningkatkan Kepuasan Nasabah Pada Industri Perbankan. Pustaka Taman Ilmu

Siadari, C. (n.d.). Pengertian Harga Menurut Para Ahli. Kumpulan Pengertian. Retrieved June 16, 2022, from https://www.kumpulanpengertian.com/2020/12/pengertian-harga-menurut-para-ahli.html

Suryana,  Popo  dan  Eliyandi  S.  D.  2013.  Analisis  Faktor  Yang  Mempengaruhi Keputusan Pembelian dan Implikasinya Pada Minat Beli Ulang. Trikonomika, 12 (2):190-200

Upamannyu, N. K., Gulati, C., Chack, A., & Kaur, G. The effect of customer trust on customer loyalty and repurchase intention: the moderating influence of perceived csr. International Journal of Research in IT, Management and Engineering, 4(5), pp. 1-31.

Wibowo, A., & Soedjono. (2014). Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan, Harga dan Lokasi Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian di “D’Stupid Baker” Surabaya. Jurnal Ilmu Riset Manajemen, 3(12).

Widjoyo, S.P. dkk, (2014). Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan dan Kualitas Produk terhadap Kepuasan Pelanggan dan Loyalitas Konsumen Restoran Happy Garden Surabaya. Vol.2, No.1.

Yamit, Z. (2013). Manajemen Kualitas Produk & Jasa. Yogyakarta: Ekonisia.

Development of Illegal Gold Mined Site into Eco Park as Modelled at Nsutamin the Eastern Region to Promote Tourism for the Advancement of Ghana

Isaac Odoi Danquah

diok1982@yahoo.com  

Water Resources Engineer, Goldrain Mountain Company Limited, Koforidua, Eastern Region – Ghana. 

ABSTRACT

Illegal gold mining business is so rampant at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana after the discovery of gold within the sub region. This has led to the destruction of natural resources such as lands, surface water bodies, forest reserves, plant species, destruction of natural water channels and destruction of aquifers. With this in mind, total land areas and surfaces are destroyed and changed after an illegal gold mining adventure. The aim of this research work sorts to investigate if an illegal gold mined site can be developed into an Eco park after gold mining adventure for the benefit of mankind, community and country. This is the reason for this research work at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. After the investigation, it is well established that an illegal gold mined site can be designed, developed into an Eco park after turning pits and dugouts into an edifice where tourist siting places (summer hat buildings) can be developed over the pits and dugouts. Aquatic development can also be done in the dugouts containing water after treatment. Other places developed as play grounds for kids and the old. Sight-seeing stands also obtained after the introduction of animal species such as snails, rabbits, antelopes, tortoise, parrots, Monkeys, turkey and birds of different kinds. Different plant species also introduced to serve as learning platforms for ecologist and students from the biology background. With this, all kinds of classifications (Kingdom to species levels) of animals and plant species can be done to serve as learning platform for all. Water resources sectors within the Eco Park such as dugouts and pits well protected  and developed to serve as learning platforms for professionals and students from the water resources sector. Finally, total beautification of the place with green grasses and flowers after good designing by bioengineers. 

Keywords: Eco Park, illegal mining, water, land, forest reserves, gold, aquatic, development, ecologist, water resources, dugouts. 

1          INTRODUCTION

Gold mining business in Ghana has yield billions of pounds sterling, dollars and cedis to the Ghanaian economy and the 

world. Both indigenous and migrants are benefiting from the gold mining business which is changing their lives both locally and internationally. But the only problem is the process of accessing or mining the finite product. That is one of the main challenges facing the people and government of Ghana currently. For this reason, gold is explored in various kinds of ways both by legal and illegal gold miners. Gold exploration by illegal gold miners is always leading to the overexploitation of natural resources such lands, forest reserves and surface water bodies. The illegal mining activities is destroying farm produce and commercial farm products such as cocoa, cassava, plantain, palm oil trees, coconuts etc.   

Assessing surface water in Ghana is now a big problem as almost all surface water bodies have been polluted and deteriorated. The once been used by Ghana Water Company Limited for abstraction and treatment for drinking requires huge amounts of money because of the polluted nature of the water body. So is Supong which is one of the areas where the illegal gold is mined. The most interesting thing is that people don’t care and see what is happening, all that they are interested in is the gold and the money. Where will Ghana stand to produce food and cocoa for the international market if all these lands are degraded and becomes infertile hence of no use for crop production. Will the gold money be enough to import all the food Ghanaians needs for sustenance and survival? This is a big no, hence the need to protect the natural resources for the good will of all – both the gold miners and common citizens. Gold mining is a good business that generates Billions of pounds sterling’s and cedis annually for economic growth but comes with repercussions and these need not be toiled with if not it becomes a curse. Since gold mining in Ghana started years ago, generations have come and gone, generations will continue to come and go but this gold resource will continue to be there as this is what nature has blessed the country Ghana for her growth and sustenance hence the need to protect.

Galamsey is a group of unlicensed individuals who come together using crude and sometimes refine methods to mine gold and other minerals. Galamsey or illegal mining became a boom in Ghana in the 1970’s when there was a decline in Ghana’s economy during that time. 

When the president of Ghana was sworn into office, he restated his commitment to protect the land and water bodies that has been destroyed as a result of illegal gold mining activities within the country. The president introduced measures to stop the illegalities, regularise the small-scale mining sector, take measures to prevent occurrence of illegalities in the future, including reform and strengthening of regulatory agencies as well as reform of mining laws by that cleaning the mess created by these galamsey people.

Illegal mining operators wash the ore, and discharge waste products into rivers and other water bodies that serve as raw water sources for drinking for various communities within the country. These wastes include mine tailings which are directly discharged into rivers bodies. Large amounts of waste materials released into the water, a large amount of suspended solids that directly contaminate aquatic habitats. Some mine tailings are toxic and pose serious health problems both to humans, animals and plant life. Most water bodies in Ghana over the years have been serving as drinking water for local communities and a raw water source for the Ghana Water Company. These water bodies have been heavily polluted as a result of illegal gold mining operations. The Supong, Birim, Offin, Ankobra, Tano and Pra Rivers for example, have become extremely expensive to treat for human consumption as a result of the very poor water quality and its turbid nature or level.

Nsutam community has a lot of rich natural resources which needs to be harnessed in the right direction as well as protect it for the future generation.  Some of this natural resources are lands, water, gold, forest reserves etc. The mining of gold within the community is enriching lives and generating Billions of Pounds Sterling for Ghana and the world market. Despite the enrichment of lives, there is the need for the community and government to mine the resource in the right direction as well as sustaining the natural resources for unborn generations to come. In this regards, there is the need to use standard operation procedures to identify the resources and mine it for the betterment of mankind. In doing this, lands, forest reserves, water bodies will be under management through stakeholder participation towards the sustainability of the natural resources. Natural resources identification, assessment and protection hasn’t been the mentality of Ghanaians but only improper way of harnessing it. Ghana as an economy is rich in natural resources so is Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Nsutam a stopover community is now welcoming natural resources discoverers all over the world as its rich in all kinds of resources. One most important thing in all this is the sustainability of the resource for the now and future generation. Ghana lacks protection, maintenance and sustainability attitude among its citizens and so can be seen at Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The natural resources available at Nsutam needs to be harnessed, mined and protected for the future. In doing this, the natural resource can be used to feed the current generation and future generation. It therefore calls on the government, government agencies, tourist board, stakeholders and private investors to help in the maintenance and protection of natural resources within the community as they continue to mine and use to meet daily needs and demands. Some citizens do not have the use for today but keep for future generation and this needs to be installed in their minds in order to protect and maintain the resources at Nsutam. The Ghanaian government needs to cultivate the attitude of resources estimation, protection and maintenance for the future generation. Government institutions such as Water resources commission, Environmental Protection Agency, Lands commission and Tourist Boards needs to look at resources allocation and the potential of private investors to make use and protect the resources before leasing out. By this, private investors who buys lands in communities such as Nsutam will use standard operation procedures to harness resources such as gold whiles protecting lands, forest reserves and water bodies and designing them into tourist attraction sites in Ghana.

Eco Park development from illegal gold mined sites is a good thought through opportunity to make use of damaged sites or design an illegally mined abandoned sites into a tourist site full of beauty to serve mankind, community, country and the international world. With such a project of life span of say 70years, it can serve generations in various directions;

  • Serve as a tourist sites
  • Serve as learning sites
  • Serve as entertaining sites
  • Serve as conference center for programs
  • Serve the community on special occasions etc.
  • RESEARCH AREA

The research area for this study is in Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The people of Nsutam are involved in gold mining, farming and trading. Some of the farm products produced includes coconut, cocoa, plantain, yam, cassava, sugar cane and all kinds of vegetables produced during the farming seasons. The huge amount of gold discovered in the community has resulted in all kinds of illegal gold mining activities destroying water bodies, forest reserves and lands resources. The community has a population of about 7000 (2021 population census) with the majority being immigrants due to the gold mining business, Linda Dor and Paradise Tourist operates in the community. The destroyed land, surface water resources and forest reserves or plant species needs reclamation process in order to restore the infertile lands together with other resources back to normalcy. This fertile rich soils will support plant growth in order to support the hydrological cycle and exchanges of oxygen and carbon dioxide between man and plants. Restoration of the degraded lands will also promote afforestation and wildlife existence in the future for future generation. It will also promote tourist attraction when vegetation’s are groomed and protected with the existence of wildlife’s. Fig 1 below is a view of the study area in the Eastern Region of Ghana where coconut is in mild production to boost livelihoods within the community.

Fig. 1: Map of Fanteakwa south

  • METHODOLOGY EMPLOYED FOR THE RESEARCH

The methodology employed for this research is Site Stationed Investigation Procedure (SSIP). With this method, the researcher works on the illegal mined site for several years (2018 – 2023) and embarks on learning and investigations as illegal gold mining is done. The site is designed artificially as various processes and procedures are done by illegal gold miners to access the mineral willingly or unwillingly. Site is discovered after the whole process of illegal gold mining after thorough process to access and analyze what can be done with the site. An Eco Park is seen evolving out the site after the whole process of mining. 

  • IDENTIFIED ECO PARK DEVELOPMENT STAGES
    • Summer Hat buildings creation on dugouts

In the process of mining within the identified area, all kinds of pits were dug to obtain the gold metal. These pits were dug to various depths generating water after hitting water table. Water from the Supong was also abstracted to help in the washing of stones and sand to obtain the gold being sort for. This has created dugouts after pit digging to a greater depth. Quite a number of the dugouts have been obtained and full of water to help in the Eco Park design and construction for Nsutam community. Summer hats buildings will therefore be done after concreting on the water bodies or dugouts having four or three access paths. This will be done with safety precautions or protections in mind so that no client or visitor falls inside the dugouts during operations and usage. This will be done nicely to add beauty to the design of the Eco Park at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Some are of the view that creating such summer hat buildings on illegal mined site dugouts is very dangerous but not the case, if proper design is done and constructed across the dugout with maximum precautions. This will be done to ensure safety of visitors, users and clients so that pleasure attainment will be obtained by all who makes use of the Eco Park now and the future. The dugout will be filled with fishes (to be treated under aquatic habitat creation and sight – seeing) and designed with flowers to give it much beauty to serve the people of Nsutam and beyond.

Fig 1: Summer hat building design

Fig 1 is a summer hat building which is going to be constructed over each of the identified dugouts in the illegal mined site. A number of such summer hat buildings will be constructed to add beauty to the Eco Park at Nsutam. This will have all kinds of fishes and aquatic organisms swimming in them to serve as sight – seeing for visitors and anyone who access the Eco Park. Plate 1 is one of the dugouts to have the summer hat building installed over it.

Plate 1: Dugout to have summer hat building installed

The summer hat building installation and creation on all identified possible dugouts will be done to international standards more than that identified in plate 2 below. Such summer hats will have four or three pathways as can be seen in fig 1. There will be a number of them depending on the number of dugouts identified with adequate size and capacity to facilitate the installations and creation.

Plate 2: sample summer hat building to be installed on dugouts

  • Creation of playing grounds for kids

Kids like playing especially when they meet in numbers at a designated place to have fun. Arboretwum at Bunso has seen a lot of visitation and patronage and one can observe playing by kids all day round upon visitation at the Eco Park. And this is no exception when GMCL Eco Park is established at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. It therefore deems fit if a playing ground is designed, created or constructed to propagate this gospel of playing among kids, sharing love among themselves and extend friendly hands towards each other. This will enhance cordial relationship creation among kids as they learn how to work and cooperate with each other as they grow and mature into adulthood to serve man and country. 

  • Access paths creation

All kinds of access paths will be created within the Eco Park to help one access and move around the Eco Park at ease as he/she embarks on sight – seeing. Access paths will comprise of concrete pavements, roads and green grass vegetated areas within the Eco Park. This will add beauty to the Eco Park and hence attract a lot of people to the place to make it lively. Royal palms together with other flowers and tree species will help in the access path and pathway creation (Plate 2). Runoff generation within the Eco Park is very high and again the water table is closer to the surface of the land hence high rate of water over the area. That is, most of the areas within the catchment becomes waterlogged during heavy storms hence the need for pavements and concreting of areas to avoid dirty storm waters being drained into the dugout. When this is achieved, the water body and all waters in the dugouts will be clean and serene all the time to make the Eco Park admirable. 

Plate 3: Access pathway creation

  • Introduction of animals for sight – seeing and learning

In years back, zoos like the Kumasi zoo in the Ashanti Region harbors all kinds of animals and birds serving as for sight-seeing and for education. This is not the case in the Eastern Region of Ghana and GMCL Eco Park seeks to establish this learning and sight-seeing center for all and especially those living at Nsutam and in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Illegal gold mining is being embarked day in day out within the Eastern Region of Ghana which is turning lands and destroying natural resources within the sub region. Mined sites are left aloof after gold mining business and GMCL seeks to use one of the site as a case study in establishing an Eco Park. Extinction of animals and birds is still on going as individuals enter into deep forest like Atiwa forest to harness such animals and birds for sale and food in the homes. GMCL seeks to preserve nature by creating an area within the Eco Park where all kinds of animals and birds will be kept for sight-seeing and learning by students, young and old. Animal species such as snails, rabbits, antelopes, tortoise, turkey, monkey etc and birds of different kinds will be kept at the Eco Park for this purpose. Birds of different kinds can be found at the Eco Park now and some still moving in on daily basis. 

  • Ecological creation of plants species

Biologist and Ecologist are much interested in plant species for learning in the schools and universities, for medicinal purposes and so on. For this reason, all kinds of plant species will also be planted within the Eco Park to serve educational purposes of learning at every level of education by all. That is from lower levels of education to the university level in Ghana, Africa and the world. Plant species and flowers will be planted around heaped sands and gravels and decorated into a sight – seeing area where there will be taking of pictures and all kinds of playing activities (photographing area and playground) as shown in Plate 4 below. 

Plate 4: photographing area and play ground

  • Aquatic habitat creation and sight – seeing.

To access gold from underground through illegal means, all kinds of pits and dugouts have been generated full of dirty and polluted water. This polluted water has been channeled to the river Supong through the creation of artificial river channels within the obtained sites. This is polluting the river Supong and hence river Birim at a high and fast rate. Self-stratification is playing a major role in bringing the water bodies created within the site to normalcy. Treatments will also be done to help the self-treatment purpose of getting a clean quality water. The good quality dugouts and pits that have undergone self-stratification have fishes in them which are growing at a faster rate. The untreated once do no but will be treated and stocked with fishes and aquatic animals or organisms to boost the status of the Eco Park. It will serve educational purposes which also being used as sight – seeing by the indigenous and all within the Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana.

Plate 5: Polluted water to be treated to serve as aquatic habitat

  • Creation of resting stands with trees and flowers 

Touring within an Eco Park is a tiring work hence the need for various resting stands where visitors and if possible supervisors working in the Eco Park can rest when the need be. With this in mind, various siting and resting places will be created within the Eco Park to serve this purpose. This will be done under shades or trees in order to receive fresh cool air away from heat and the sun. Such areas will be decorated with flowers to have a very attractive natural beauty to make an Eco Park a very stunning one for all. The Eco Park will be serving people of all classes hence will be to a good standard to serve this purpose at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The construction of the Eco Park will be done with Engineers and floweriest and designers who knows how to give beauty to environment and society. All the dugouts which will harbour the summer hat building will have their areas decorated with flowers and trees together with green grasses and other varieties of grasses covering the ground. This will make the Eco Park beautiful and lively area and place for people to visit, learn and have fun. This will be done for such people together with their friends, staff members, colleagues at school or university and family. Creation of such an Eco Park at Nsutam will serve the community which is now a gold mining community with migration of people within Ghana and outside Ghana to the community. 

  • Overhead walk creation over Eco Park

Canopy walk is a nice tourist adventure to be embarked on whenever one visits a tourist site with such opportunity. Within the Eco Park will be the planting, nurturing and growing of all kinds of tree species to add beauty and nature to the Eco Park. These trees can be coordinated and modelled into a canopy walk in the future when all the trees are grown and matured. This will give visitors and anyone who accesses the Eco Park a better and nice view of the tourist site and environment. Human beings like adventure and this will give them another adventure opportunity within the Eco Park. This will give a view to human beings comparable to a drone view within the tourist site (Eco Park). 

  • Creation of Entertainment and Conference Centers

The Eco Park being established sorts out to serve as an entertaining centre and site as well as serving as an education centre or tourist sites where all kinds of learning can be done. With this in focus, there is the creation of an entertainment center and conference or learning centre. Such two areas will purposefully serve entertainment reason and learning reason. The entertainment areas will comprise of places where children will have playing grounds for fun and learning. This will serve as a playing ground where children can easily move around and play during special occasions when they come in their numbers for tourist and entertainment reasons. Children like learning but it’s usually through playing and entertainment. As they happy themselves, then they play alongside each other for friendship, happiness and entertainment. This will be achieved when a playing ground is established within the Eco Park. A learning or conference center will also be created where students can be taught comparable to a classroom teaching environment. This will purposely serve school children and university undergraduates and researchers. Installing all kinds of animals and plants species requires taking tourist through some great learnings and history which when given at the touring moments is easily forgotten. But when done under a classroom settings, students and researchers can easily take lesson notes and write-ups home. Parents too and working class or staffs can be taken through same at the tourist sites and in the conference center.

4.10           Vegetative cropping stand for learning

A vegetative cropping stand will be created where touring people, students and visitors will be taken through vegetative reproduction. With this, some selected crops will be used to demonstrate vegetative reproduction to students, teachers, working staffs and anyone who visits the Eco Park. It will have some planted crops which have undergone vegetative reproduction for better understanding and learning among visitors to the touring site at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana.

4.11 Aesthetic treatment of created water bodies and dugouts

All the dugouts and pits are full of water undergoing self – stratification. Some have gone through the process over several months past and obtaining the finite good nature of water habited by aquatic organisms (fish, frog, toad etc) and usable by mankind to meet daily water demands. All the dugouts or pits will be aesthetically designed with green grasses, grasses and flowers to make it beautiful and attractive to all. This will be done after installation or construction of the summer hat buildings on the dugouts or water bodies.

  • Bioengineering, pavement, concreting and grassing of the Eco Park

Bioengineering of a place with grasses like green grass adds beauty to nature, gives fresh air, increases infiltration, reduces runoff generation full of dirt and sediments into a drain or water body. This will be done in most of the areas with trees planted at vantage points within the Eco Park. Once bioengineering is done together with green grass planting, infiltration will be 100% (higher rate) as runoff generation will be 0% (or to a lesser rate). It is only at the pervious areas where pavements and concreting has been done that will give total runoff generation with various runoff depths. This will be generated during precipitation and will be over the field or Eco Park hence the need to channel all of them downstream. All these runoffs will end up in the connected dugout and finally in river Supong. Most of the bioengineering will be done around the dugouts and connected dugouts towards river Supong. This will be done with green grasses to avoid dirty runoff generation or runoff full of sediments been created and drained into the created dugouts which upon treatments will be of quality and have all kinds of fishes and aquatic organisms. With all kinds of drains within the Eco Park, all generated runoffs void of sediments and dirt’s will be channeled into river Supong. With all these done within the Eco Park, a beautiful sight – seeing Eco Park will be obtained to serve Nsutam community, visitors, country and world comparable to that depicted in plate 6 (Danquah, 2023). 

Plate 6: Bioengineering and pavement creation

5    CONCLUSION

Illegal gold mining is now part and parcel of the Ghanaian economy as its serving as a gainful employment source and a source of income for people and homes. It is generating millions of pound sterling’s, dollars, and cedis into pockets and boosting the Ghanaian economy and the world when it comes to gold production. Illegal gold mining will therefore continue to be embarked by the youth and old within Ghana and hence its resultant repercussions. It will always lead to the destruction of farmlands, lands, water bodies, forest reserves and so one. But what one does with the destroyed lands is the most important thing after illegal gold mining adventure within a community. With these assertions, it is justified that one can turn a destroyed land after a gold mining adventure into an Eco Park that will be beneficial to people, community, country and world.

Acknowledgement

Grateful I am to the Almighty God for the mindset, ability to think thoughtfully and in discovering this Eco Park at Nsutam. Thanks to the Chief and people of Nsutam for playing various roles towards the success of this project. I am again grateful to the Danquah and Darko family of Nsutam and Kukurantumi respectively for their various roles. God bless the chief Osaberima, teacher Yirenkyi, Okyeame Danso and the assembly man of Nsutam, honorable Alex for their help and roles in this project. God richly bless you all.

References

Danquah, I. O. (2023), Stormwater Modelling within Three catchments using MIDUSS v2.25: Real Time Simulation Model to analyze stormwater within catchments, International journal of Research.

The Great Banyan Tree of Howrah: An Ancient Giant Witnessing Time

By-Aditi Chhetri

In the bustling city of Howrah, West Bengal, India, amidst the cacophony of urban life, there stands a silent sentinel of nature’s grandeur. The Great Banyan Tree, or simply the “Great Banyan,” has captivated the imagination of all who have had the privilege of setting eyes upon it. This magnificent tree is not just a biological marvel but a symbol of endurance, resilience, and the enduring power of life. In this blog, we embark on a journey to explore the awe-inspiring story of the Great Banyan Tree of Howrah.

I. A Botanical Marvel:
The Great Banyan Tree, scientifically known as Ficus Bengalese’s, is an exceptional specimen of its kind. While many banyan trees are known for their expansive canopies, the Great Banyan has taken this to a whole new level. With its vast labyrinthine network of roots, it covers an astonishing area, making it the largest known banyan tree in the world.

(a) Dimensions Beyond Belief:
Spanning a colossal 4.68 acres, this giant tree has earned its place in the Guinness Book of World Records. It’s hard to fathom the sheer scale of this living organism – an entire forest encapsulated in a single tree.

(b) Historical Significance:
The Great Banyan Tree is believed to have been planted in the early 19th century, making it over two centuries old. Its existence predates the construction of the iconic Howrah Bridge, which now stands as a testament to modern engineering right nearby.

II. The Life Story of a Giant:
To understand the Great Banyan’s journey, we need to delve into its life story, which is nothing short of remarkable.

(a) Multiple Trunk Formation:
One of the most intriguing aspects of this tree is its peculiar growth pattern. The main trunk of the original tree was affected by a disease in the late 19th century and had to be removed. However, the tree did not wither away; instead, it continued to grow horizontally. Multiple trunks emerged from the remaining branches, and the Great Banyan tree lives on through them.

(b) Immortal through Aerial Propagation:
The Great Banyan employs a unique survival strategy called “aerial prop roots.” These roots grow from the branches and reach down to the ground, taking root and eventually becoming part of the tree’s complex structure. This phenomenon allows the tree to perpetuate itself, effectively making it immortal.

III. A Home for Countless Lives:

Beyond its botanical significance, the Great Banyan is a bustling ecosystem in its own right, supporting an incredible diversity of flora and fauna.

(a) Bird Paradise:
The sprawling canopy of the Great Banyan provides an ideal habitat for a wide variety of birds. Ornithologists and bird enthusiasts flock to the tree to witness species such as parakeets, mynas, and pigeons in their natural habitat.

(b) Miniature Ecosystems:
Within the network of its roots and branches, the Great Banyan houses numerous miniature ecosystems. Insects, fungi, and other organisms thrive in this microcosm, making it a subject of fascination for ecologists.

IV. Cultural Significance:

The Great Banyan Tree of Howrah is not only a biological wonder but also a cultural icon with deep-rooted significance.

(a) Sacred Ground:
For generations, the tree has been a site for religious and spiritual gatherings. It’s often considered sacred and serves as a backdrop for various rituals and ceremonies.

(b) Artistic Inspiration:
The tree has been a muse for many artists, poets, and writers. Its majestic form and historical significance have been captured in countless works of literature and art.

V. Challenges and Preservation:

Despite its enduring presence, the Great Banyan Tree faces several challenges, primarily due to urbanization and environmental factors.

(a) Environmental Stress:
Increased pollution, reduced groundwater levels, and changes in climate patterns have taken a toll on the tree’s health. Conservation efforts are crucial to mitigate these threats.

(b) Conservation Initiatives:
To protect this natural wonder, various conservation initiatives have been undertaken. Measures such as regular health checks, controlled irrigation, and restricting human interference are helping safeguard the Great Banyan’s future.

The Great Banyan Tree of Howrah stands as a testament to the resilience and majesty of the natural world. Its story is not just that of a tree but a living chronicle of time, witnessing the evolution of a city and the changing landscapes of human existence. As we marvel at this colossal botanical marvel, let us also reflect on our responsibility to preserve and protect such precious treasures of nature for generations to come. In the heart of Howrah, the Great Banyan Tree remains a symbol of life’s enduring spirit and a living connection to our planet’s rich history.

REFERENCES:

Ugc. (2023b, October 3). Great Banyan Tree. Atlas Obscura. https://www.atlasobscura.com/places/great-banyan-tree

• Rongmei, P. (n.d.). Story of the Great Banyan, world’s largest banyan tree. Times of India Travel. https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/travel/destinations/story-of-the-great-banyan-worlds-largest-banyan-tree/articleshow/92971166.cms

Pearce, S. (2023, August 21). The Great Banyan Tree & 8 Important Tips For Visiting Kolkata Botanical Gardens. Third Eye Traveller. https://thirdeyetraveller.com/the-great-banyan-tree-kolkata-botanical-gardens/

Roche, E. (2022, April 21). The largest banyan tree in the world is located in India. Condé Nast Traveller India. https://www.cntraveller.in/story/kolkata-west-bengallargest-banyan-tree-in-the-world/

Wikipedia contributors. (2023a). The Great Banyan. Wikipedia. https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_Great_Banyan

The Curse of the Delhi Purple Sapphire

By-Aditi Chhetri

Hidden within the heart of India’s bustling capital lies a gem that has captured the imaginations of many for centuries—the Delhi Purple Sapphire. This mesmerizing gemstone is known not only for its exquisite beauty but also for the dark and mysterious legends that surround it. Often associated with misfortune, tragedy, and a series of unfortunate events, the Delhi Purple Sapphire has earned a reputation as a cursed jewel that has brought calamity to those who possessed it.

Purple sapphire

The Origin:

The story of the Delhi Purple Sapphire begins in the early 19th century when it was reportedly discovered in the Golconda mines of India. This enchanting gemstone is not a sapphire at all but rather an amethyst, which is a type of quartz known for its stunning purple color. It quickly garnered attention due to its remarkable hue and exceptional clarity. The Delhi Purple Sapphire is a legendary gemstone that is said to be cursed. It is said to bring misfortune and bad luck to anyone who possesses it. The stone is said to have been stolen from the Temple of Indra in Kanpur, India, during the Indian Mutiny of 1857. It is believed that the curse was placed on the stone by the priests of the temple as punishment for the theft. The stone Is a deep purple color and is said to be incredibly beautiful. However, its beauty is said to be deceiving, as it is said to be a harbinger of doom. The curse of the Delhi Purple Sapphire is said to affect anyone who comes into contact with the stone, including its owners, their loved ones, and even those who simply touch it. There are many stories of the misfortune that has befallen those who have possessed the Delhi Purple Sapphire

Theories on the Curse:

There are many theories about why the Delhi Purple Sapphire is cursed. Some people believe that the curse is real and that it is a form of divine punishment for those who steal from sacred places. Others believe that the curse is a myth and that the stories of misfortune are simply coincidences.
One theory is that the curse is caused by the stone itself. Some people believe that the stone is imbued with negative energy and that it has a harmful effect on those who come into contact with it. Others believe that the stone is simply a physical representation of the evil that exists in the world and that it can attract misfortune to those who possess it.
Another theory is that the curse is caused by the karma of those who steal from sacred places. According to Hindu belief, karma is the law of cause and effect. It states that every action has an equal and opposite reaction. This means that those who do bad deeds will eventually be punished for their actions. Some people believe that the curse of the Delhi Purple Sapphire is a form of karmic punishment for those who stole the stone from the Temple of Indra.

The British Connection :

The Delhi Purple Sapphire’s journey took a dark turn when it came into the possession of Colonel W. Ferris, a British officer stationed in Delhi during the colonial era. Legend has it that Ferris took the gem from the eye of a Hindu idol in a temple in the city, sparking an alleged curse that would haunt him and all subsequent owners of the gem.

The Curse Unleashed:

Shortly after acquiring the Delhi Purple Sapphire, Colonel Ferris faced a series of personal and professional misfortunes. He was transferred to a remote outpost, and his health rapidly deteriorated. Some reports suggest that he lost his fortune and social standing. As the story goes, he died under mysterious circumstances, with the gem still in his possession.

The Curse Continues:

The Delhi Purple Sapphire passed through several hands after Colonel Ferris, and each new owner seemed to suffer a similar fate. Stories of accidents, financial ruin, and even untimely deaths followed the gem like a shadow. Some owners attempted to rid themselves of the cursed jewel, only to find it returning to them mysteriously. Sir John Gardner Wilkinson, a prominent Egyptologist and one of the gem’s later owners, purportedly experienced a string of calamities, including the tragic loss of his wife and child, all while the Delhi Purple Sapphire was in his possession.


The Hidden Gem:

As the curse continued to weave its dark web, the Delhi Purple Sapphire was eventually hidden away, concealed from the world. Some believe that it was buried, while others claim it was locked in a secret vault to prevent further harm.

Modern-Day Speculation:

Today, the Delhi Purple Sapphire remains shrouded in mystery. While some dismiss the curse as mere superstition, others are convinced of its malevolent power. The whereabouts of the gem are unknown, adding to the intrigue and speculation surrounding it.

Scientific Skepticism:

From a scientific standpoint, there is no concrete evidence to support the existence of curses or supernatural powers associated with gemstones. Many attribute the misfortunes experienced by those who possessed the Delhi Purple Sapphire to coincidence, bad luck, or the power of suggestion.

Statue Of Indra.Indra Temple Kanpur

Cultural and Historical Context:

The legend of the cursed Delhi Purple Sapphire is deeply rooted in the colonial history of India and the cultural misunderstandings that often occurred during that time. The alleged curse may have been a way for local communities to resist the looting of their sacred treasures.

The Current Location of the Stone:

The Delhi Purple Sapphire is currently on display at the Natural History Museum in London. It was donated to the museum by the daughter of Edward Heron-Allen in 1972. The stone is kept in a secure safe and is only accessible to museum staff. There are many people who believe that the Delhi Purple Sapphire should be returned to India. They argue that the stone is sacred and that it should be kept in the temple where it belongs. However, there is no indication that the Natural History Museum intends to return the stone.


The tale of the Delhi Purple Sapphire is a captivating blend of history, superstition, and intrigue. Whether one believes in the curse or not, there is no denying the allure of this enigmatic gemstone and the stories that surround it. While it may remain hidden from view, the legend of the Delhi Purple Sapphire continues to capture the imagination, reminding us that the line between fact and folklore is often a thin one in the world of precious gems and their mysterious histories. There are many stories of the misfortune that has befallen those who have come into contact with the stone. However, it is unclear whether the curse is real. The Delhi Purple Sapphire Is currently on display at the Natural History Museum in London. There are many people who believe that the stone should be returned to India, but there is no indication that the museum intends to do so. Whether or not the Delhi Purple Sapphire is cursed, it is a fascinating and mysterious gemstone. Its story is a reminder of the power of superstition and the importance of respecting sacred places.

REFERENCES

Cursed Gemstones – The Delhi Purple Sapphire. (n.d.). https://www.vulcans-forge.com/blog-post/cursed-gemstones-the-delhi-purple-sapphire

Buzz, D. (2023). The Delhi Purple Sapphire – The Cursed Amethyst | Diamond Buzz. Diamond Buzz. https://diamondbuzz.blog/delhi-purple-sapphire-cursed-amethyst/

Ashley, & Ashley. (2013, October 28). Is the Delhi Purple Sapphire Really Cursed? Part 4 Haunted Diamonds Series. Adiamor Blog. https://www.adiamor.com/blog/celebrity-engagement/is-the-delhi-purple-sapphire-really-cursed-part-4-haunted-diamonds-series

Robb Report. (2017, September 7). The Delhi Purple Sapphire. https://robbreport.com/style/jewelry/slideshow/spine-tingling-stories-behind-four-historys-most-famous-cursed-gems/the-delhi-purple-sapphire/

Pti. (2007, November 26). “Cursed” Delhi Purple Sapphire to go on display Wednesday. The Economic Times. https://m.economictimes.com/cursed-delhi-purple-sapphire-to-go-on-display-wednesday/articleshow/2570900.cms































































































Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Citations play a fundamental role in academic writing by acknowledging the sources of information, ideas, and concepts that contribute to a scholarly work. They not only give credit to the original authors but also provide evidence to support the arguments and claims made within the text. Proper citation is an ethical practice that helps in maintaining academic integrity, avoiding plagiarism, and allowing readers to verify the information presented.

Purpose of Citations

Citations serve several important purposes within academic writing:

1. Giving Credit:

Citations acknowledge the intellectual property and ideas of others, showing respect for their efforts and contributions to the field.

2. Validating Arguments:

Citations provide evidence to substantiate claims and arguments made in a paper. They enhance the credibility and reliability of the work.

3. Avoiding Plagiarism:

Proper citation ensures that the writer is not presenting someone else’s work as their own. Plagiarism is a serious academic offense that can have severe consequences.

4. Facilitating Replication and Verification:

Citations allow readers to locate and refer to the original sources, promoting transparency, replication of research, and further development of knowledge.

Types of Citations

There are various citation styles, each with its own set of rules and formats. Common citation styles include:

1. APA (American Psychological Association):

Frequently used in the social sciences, the APA style emphasizes the author-date format, where the author’s name is followed by the publication date.

2. MLA (Modern Language Association):

Commonly used in humanities, the MLA style focuses on the author-page format, including the author’s last name and the page number.

3. Chicago Manual of Style:

This style is flexible and widely used across various disciplines. It offers two citation systems: notes and bibliography, and author-date.

4. Harvard Referencing:

The Harvard style uses author-date citations in the text and a reference list at the end of the document, listing sources alphabetically.

5. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers):

Predominantly used in technical fields, IEEE style uses numerical citations in square brackets to denote sources.

Proper Citation Format

Regardless of the citation style, a standard citation typically includes:

  1. Author(s): The individual or group responsible for the work.
  2. Title of the Work: The name of the book, article, or source being cited.
  3. Publication Information: Details about where and when the work was published.
  4. Publisher: The organization or entity responsible for producing and distributing the work.
  5. Publication Date: The date when the work was published.
  6. Page Numbers: If applicable, the specific pages referred to.

Tips for Effective Citation Usage

Citing sources accurately and consistently is a critical aspect of academic writing that demonstrates a high level of scholarship and integrity. Here are expanded tips to help you master the art of effective citation usage:

1. Understand the Style: Familiarize Yourself with the Specific Citation Style Required for Your Academic Field

Different academic fields and disciplines often have their preferred citation styles. These styles can vary in terms of formatting, in-text citation rules, and the way references are listed. Make sure to grasp the intricacies of the style mandated by your field of study. This understanding will ensure that your citations align with the expectations of your audience and the academic community.

2. Use Citation Management Tools: Employ Citation Management Software to Organize and Format Your Citations Correctly

Utilize citation management tools like Zotero, EndNote, Mendeley, or RefWorks to streamline the citation process. These software applications help you manage references, create bibliographies, and automatically format citations according to the chosen style. They save time and ensure accuracy by reducing the risk of manual errors in citation formatting.

3. Check for Accuracy: Double-Check All Citations for Accuracy in Names, Dates, and Formatting

Accuracy is paramount in citations. Before finalizing your document, meticulously review each citation for correct author names, publication dates, titles, and other details. Ensure that the formatting adheres to the style guidelines precisely. Accuracy not only avoids misunderstandings but also establishes the credibility and professionalism of your work.

4. Be Consistent: Maintain Consistency in Your Chosen Citation Style Throughout the Document

Consistency is key to presenting a cohesive and well-organized academic paper. Choose a citation style suitable for your discipline and stick to it consistently throughout your work. Uniformity in citation style and formatting ensures that your paper appears polished and professional, enhancing readability and understanding for your readers.

5. Paraphrase and Quote Appropriately: When Using Someone Else’s Ideas or Words, Ensure Proper Paraphrasing or Quotation, Accompanied by Appropriate Citations

When integrating ideas or direct quotations from other sources into your work, practice proper paraphrasing and quoting techniques. Paraphrase when you want to convey an idea in your own words, giving credit through appropriate citations. Use quotation marks and cite the source when directly quoting someone. Always cite these sources accurately to avoid plagiarism and acknowledge the intellectual contributions of others.

By following these tips and mastering the skill of effective citation usage, you will not only maintain the academic integrity of your work but also enhance the clarity and credibility of your writing. Remember, proper citations are a mark of a thorough and responsible scholar, contributing to the advancement of knowledge within your academic community.

In conclusion, proper citation is an integral aspect of academic writing, showcasing respect for intellectual property, providing evidence for arguments, and upholding ethical standards. Understanding the different citation styles and applying them accurately is vital for maintaining academic integrity and contributing to the advancement of knowledge within various disciplines.

References

Abrams, David S., Ufuk Akcigit, and Jillian Popadak. “Understanding the link between patent value and citations: Creative destruction or defensive disruption.” NBER Working Paper 19647 (2013).

Calero-Medina, Clara, and Ed CM Noyons. “Combining mapping and citation network analysis for a better understanding of the scientific development: The case of the absorptive capacity field.” Journal of Informetrics 2.4 (2008): 272-279.

McDonald, John D. “Understanding journal usage: A statistical analysis of citation and use.” Journal of the American Society for Information Science and Technology 58.1 (2007): 39-50.

Molléri, Jefferson Seide, Kai Petersen, and Emilia Mendes. “Towards understanding the relation between citations and research quality in software engineering studies.” Scientometrics 117 (2018): 1453-1478.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Understanding Academic Impact: h-index vs. h10-index

Author: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the realm of academia, measuring the impact of a researcher’s work is vital for evaluating their contributions and influence within a specific field. Various bibliometric indicators have been introduced to quantify this impact, with the h-index and its variant, the h10-index, being prominent measures. These indices provide valuable insights into a scholar’s productivity and citation impact, aiding in academic decision-making processes.

The h-index: A Comprehensive View of Scholarly Impact

The h-index, also known as the Hirsch index after physicist Jorge E. Hirsch who introduced it in 2005, is a numerical indicator that combines both productivity and citation impact. It is based on an individual’s scholarly publications and the citations those publications receive.

Specifically, an author possesses an h-index of h if they have h papers, each of which has been cited at least h times. In simpler terms, it represents the number of publications (h) that have garnered at least h citations. For instance, an h-index of 10 (h=10) means a researcher has published 10 papers, each cited at least 10 times.

The h-index is widely used across academic disciplines to assess the overall impact and productivity of researchers. It provides a balanced measure, taking into account both the quantity and quality of a scholar’s research output. Academic institutions often consider the h-index when making hiring decisions, evaluating promotions, and assessing research grant applications.

The h10-index: Focusing on Recent Impact

While the h-index provides a comprehensive view of a researcher’s career-long impact, it may not always reflect recent contributions accurately. This is where the h10-index comes into play. The h10-index is a variant of the h-index that specifically focuses on the most recent impact of a scholar’s work.

Similar to the h-index, the h10-index is calculated by identifying the number of papers (h10) that have been cited at least 10 times. However, unlike the h-index, which considers a researcher’s entire body of work, the h10-index only takes into account the citations garnered by papers within the past 10 years. This enables a more precise evaluation of a scholar’s recent and ongoing contributions.

The h10-index is particularly useful when assessing the evolving impact of a researcher, especially in fields where the relevance and influence of work tend to change rapidly. It helps gauge the contemporary significance of a scholar’s research output and provides a current snapshot of their scholarly impact.

The h-index and h10-index are both bibliometric measures used to evaluate the research output and impact of scholars, particularly in academia. These indices provide a quantitative measure of a researcher’s productivity and citation impact in the academic community.

  1. h-index (Hirsch index): The h-index is a numerical value that quantifies both the productivity and citation impact of a scholar’s published research. It was proposed by physicist Jorge E. Hirsch in 2005. An author has an h-index of h if they have h papers that have each been cited at least h times. For example, an h-index of 10 (h=10) means that a researcher has published 10 papers, each of which has been cited at least 10 times.

The h-index is widely used in academia and is considered a useful tool to assess a researcher’s overall impact and productivity. It is often used in hiring decisions, promotions, and funding applications.

  1. h10-index: The h10-index is a variant of the h-index that considers only the citations of a scholar’s papers within the most recent 10 years. It is useful in situations where you want to evaluate a researcher’s recent impact rather than their entire career impact. The h10-index is calculated similarly to the h-index, but it only considers the number of papers that have been cited at least 10 times within the last 10 years.

The h10-index is valuable when you want to assess a researcher’s recent and ongoing contributions to their field, especially when considering advancements and impact in more recent research.

In summary, the h-index measures the overall impact of a scholar’s work throughout their career, while the h10-index specifically focuses on their recent impact within the last 10 years. Both indices provide different perspectives on a researcher’s influence and productivity, helping in evaluating their scholarly contributions.

Conclusion

In the academic world, bibliometric indicators like the h-index and h10-index play a crucial role in assessing a researcher’s impact and contributions. The h-index offers a comprehensive view of a scholar’s career-long influence, considering both the quantity and quality of their work. On the other hand, the h10-index hones in on recent impact, capturing the citations garnered by a researcher’s papers within the last 10 years.

Both indices are valuable tools in evaluating researchers for academic positions, promotions, and funding opportunities. By understanding and utilizing these measures effectively, academic institutions and stakeholders can make informed decisions regarding scholarly contributions and their societal impact.

References

Alonso, Sergio, et al. “h-Index: A review focused in its variants, computation and standardization for different scientific fields.” Journal of informetrics 3.4 (2009): 273-289.

Bornmann, Lutz, and Hans‐Dieter Daniel. “What do we know about the h index?.” Journal of the American Society for Information Science and technology 58.9 (2007): 1381-1385.

Egghe, Leo. “An improvement of the h-index: The g-index.” ISSI newsletter 2.1 (2006): 8-9.

Hirsch, Jorge E. “Does the h index have predictive power?.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 104.49 (2007): 19193-19198.

Kelly, Clint D., and Michael D. Jennions. “The h index and career assessment by numbers.” Trends in Ecology & Evolution 21.4 (2006): 167-170.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

How sugar affects your health and what to do about it

By-Aditi Chhetri

Sugar has become an integral part of our modern diet, but its excessive consumption is taking a toll on our health. It’s added to everything from processed foods to beverages, and it’s even found in natural foods like fruits and vegetables. While sugar can be enjoyed in moderation, consuming too much can have a negative impact on your health. From obesity to heart disease and diabetes, the negative impact of sugar on our well-being cannot be overstated. In this blog, we will delve into the various ways sugar affects our health and explore practical strategies to reduce sugar intake.

Sugar-sugar

∆ What is sugar?

Sugar is a simple carbohydrate that provides your body with energy. It’s found naturally in foods like fruits, vegetables, and dairy products. However, most of the sugar that we consume comes from added sugars, which are found in processed foods and beverages.
Added sugars are sugars that are not naturally present in foods. They’re often added to foods during processing to improve flavor, texture, and shelf life. Added sugars are also found in sugary drinks like soda, juice, and sports drinks.

∆ How much sugar should you eat?

The American Heart Association recommends that adults consume no more than 6 teaspoons (24 grams) of added sugar per day for women and 9 teaspoons (36 grams) per day for men. However, most Americans consume much more than this. According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the average American consumes 77 grams of added sugar per day.

Doughnuts

∆ The Sweet Temptation:

Sugar is everywhere in our food supply. It’s not just the obvious sources like candy and soft drinks; it’s hiding in seemingly innocent foods like cereals, yogurt, and even salad dressings. The average American consumes around 17 teaspoons of added sugar per day, far exceeding the recommended limit of 6 teaspoons for women and 9 teaspoons for men.

∆ The Bitter Truth: The Health Effects of Excess Sugar:

Consuming too much sugar can have a number of negative health effects, including

Weight Gain and Obesity: One of the most well-documented effects of excess sugar intake is weight gain. Sugar is dense in calories but lacks essential nutrients, leading to overconsumption of empty calories. High sugar consumption can disrupt hormones that regulate hunger and satiety, leading to increased calorie intake and weight gain.

Type 2 Diabetes: Excessive sugar consumption has a direct link to the development of type 2 diabetes. When we consume sugar, especially in the form of sugary beverages, our blood sugar levels spike. Over time, this can lead to insulin resistance, a key factor in the development of diabetes.

Heart Disease: Sugar, particularly fructose, can contribute to heart disease. Excess fructose consumption can lead to high blood pressure, inflammation, and an increase in harmful LDL cholesterol levels – all risk factors for heart disease.

Fatty Liver Disease: The liver metabolizes sugar, and when overloaded with excessive sugar intake, it can turn the excess into fat, leading to non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD).

Dental Problems: Sugar is a leading cause of tooth decay. Bacteria in the mouth feed on sugar, producing acids that erode tooth enamel and lead to cavities.


∆ Reducing Sugar Intake: A Sweet Challenge-

Now that we understand the detrimental effects of excessive sugar intake, let’s explore how to reduce our sugar consumption without sacrificing flavor and enjoyment in our diets.

Read Labels Carefully: To reduce sugar intake, start by checking food labels. Look for terms like sucrose, high fructose corn syrup, agave nectar, and any word ending in “-ose.” These are all forms of sugar. Be mindful of hidden sugars in processed foods.

Choose Whole Foods: Whole foods like fruits, vegetables, lean proteins, and whole grains are naturally low in added sugars. Incorporate more of these foods into your diet to reduce your reliance on processed foods.

Limit Sugary Beverages: Sugary beverages like soda, fruit juices, and energy drinks are some of the worst culprits. Opt for water, herbal tea, or sparkling water with a splash of citrus to satisfy your thirst.
Use Natural Sweeteners Sparingly:
While natural sweeteners like honey, maple syrup, and agave nectar may seem healthier, they are still sugar and should be used in moderation.

Cook at Home: When you prepare meals at home, you have full control over the ingredients. This allows you to reduce sugar content in your dishes and experiment with healthier alternatives.
Gradual Reduction:
If you’re used to a high-sugar diet, abrupt changes may be challenging. Gradually reduce sugar intake to give your taste buds time to adjust.

Sugar Substitutes: Consider using non-caloric sweeteners like stevia or erythritol as alternatives to sugar. However, use them sparingly and be aware of potential digestive side effects.

The Sweet Rewards of a Low-Sugar Lifestyle:

Reducing your sugar intake can be challenging, but it’s worth it for your health. By making small changes, you can reduce your risk of developing chronic diseases and improve your overall health and well-being.

Weight Management: Lower sugar intake can help with weight management by reducing calorie consumption and improving hormone regulation.

Stable Energy Levels: Cutting sugar can prevent energy crashes and sugar-induced mood swings, providing more consistent energy throughout the day.

Better Dental Health: Lower sugar intake leads to improved dental health, reducing the risk of cavities and gum disease.

Reduced Risk of Chronic Diseases: A low-sugar lifestyle can reduce the risk of chronic diseases like diabetes, heart disease, and fatty liver disease.

Improved Taste Sensitivity: Over time, your taste buds will adapt, and you’ll find that you can enjoy the natural sweetness of foods like fruits and vegetables more intensely.
Sample meal plan for a low-sugar diet

∆ Here is a sample meal plan for a low-sugar diet:

Breakfast
Oatmeal with berries and nuts
Hard-boiled eggs with whole-wheat toast
Greek yogurt with fruit and granola

Lunch
Salad with grilled chicken or fish
Soup and sandwich on whole-wheat bread
Leftovers from dinner

Dinner
Salmon with roasted vegetables
Chicken stir-fry with brown rice
Lentil soup with whole-wheat bread

Snacks
Fruits and vegetables
Nuts

Macroons

Sugar is undoubtedly a significant health concern, but it doesn’t mean you have to eliminate all sweetness from your life. The key is moderation and mindful choices. By reducing your sugar intake and opting for healthier alternatives, you can protect your health and enjoy a sweet life without the bitter consequences.
Remember, it’s not just about avoiding sugar altogether but finding a balance that works for you. Your health will thank you for it, and you’ll savor the sweetness of life in a whole new way.

REFERENCES

How too much added sugar affects your health infographic. (n.d.). http://www.heart.org. https://www.heart.org/en/healthy-living/healthy-eating/eat-smart/sugar/how-too-much-added-sugar-affects-your-health-infographic

Department of Health & Human Services. (n.d.). Sugar. Better Health Channel. https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/healthyliving/sugar

Harvard Health. (2022, January 6). The sweet danger of sugar. https://www.health.harvard.edu/heart-health/the-sweet-danger-of-sugar

Website, N. (2023, May 26). Sugar: the facts. nhs.uk. https://www.nhs.uk/live-well/eat-well/food-types/how-does-sugar-in-our-diet-affect-our-health/#:~:text=Eating%20too%20much%20sugar%20can%20contribute%20to%20people%20having%20too,cancers%20and%20type%202%20diabet

Rd, J. K. M. (2022, September 26). 11 reasons why too much sugar is bad for you. Healthline. https://www.healthline.com/nutrition/too-much-sugar#weight-gain






















































Management Control Systems and Performance of Micro Finance Institutions in Central Region Uganda

Dr  Arthur Sunday

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Caleb Tamwesigire

Assoc. Prof , Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Dr Eliab Byamukama Mpora

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Mr Agaba Moses

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Abstract

Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as a vital institution to nations’ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2016). Micro finance in Uganda is a vibrant growing industry and the government of Uganda has over the past decade initiated implemented and or supported various micro credit schemes aimed at fighting poverty in the country. Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion. Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFI’s and their impact on profitability and not on internal control system and lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions. Failure by MFIs to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda. The study analyzed the relationship between Management control system and financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda and it was hypothesized that Management control system positively influences   financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. MFIs have come under spotlight for cases of poor financial performance. Lack of empirical studies to assess the impact of Management control system on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda is the motivation behind this study. Therefore, this study is important not only because it fills the gap, but also it is set out to address this evident knowledge gap. The study adopted positivephenomenological, epistemology and quantitative-qualitative methodology dimension with cross sectional and correlation designs, the unit of analysis was Microfinance Institutions registered with Association of Microfinance Institutions, and employees were the units of inquiry. Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were used to for statistical modeling

Besides, Hierarchical regression was used to test the predictive power of the variables and indicate precisely what happens to the model as different predictor variables are introduced in the model fit. This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that Management control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance. And Management control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance.  The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient Management control systems. These models can then be used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda .Regardless of the existence of controls in MFI, the results revealed that Management control systems were less efficient due to lack of close monitoring. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization’s goals .Policy makers, AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy

Key Words : Management Control System, Financial Performance, microfinance, Institution

Introduction

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion .The microfinance movement has received enthusiasm as a poverty alleviation tool that has eventually become a self-sustaining industry. Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as vital institution to nations’ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2016). Most microfinance institutions have embraced a more business-oriented outlook and maintained their target groups of economically-active poor, in order to achieve financial sustainability (Kalyango, 2004; Baguma, 2008). The micro finance institutions in developing economies are widely growing from time to time. Various studies on different countries on the performance of the MFIs confirm this (Adongo and Stork 2005, Zeller and Meyer 2002, Meyer 2002, Robert cull et al. 2007). Approaches used by microfinance institutions in Uganda to deliver financial services to the poor are similar to those used in other countries where microfinance institutions operate. The approach used depends on the nature and structure of the respective microfinance institution. The institutions providing microfinance services include: Tier I: formal financial institutions Comercial banks, TierII; credit institutions, Tier III; microfinance deposit taking institutions, Tier IV; Saccos (BOU Policy on MFIs 1999).

Microfinance institutions in Uganda from time and again been faced with high operating costs to provide financial services to the poor people and Small and Medium Enterprises (Micro banking Bulletin, 2002). And as such,  are unable to meet their obligations when they become due usually resulting from poor cash flow planning, failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending and micro loan portfolios  (Srinivasan, 2006 due to unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which are volatile. IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears. An enduring problem facing microfinance institutions, however, is how to attain financial sustainability (Dunford, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Woller 2000; Hollis and Sweetman, 1998; Christen et al, 1995). This problem has attracted attention of numerous researchers in recent decades and, as a result many strategies have been identified to ensure that institutions are sustainable (Randhawa and Gallardo, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Yaron, 1992). Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of management control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal control systems can alleviate disruptive performance in a business enterprise. Ledgerwood (1999) as cited by Lincolin Arsyad (2005), conceptualizes financial performance as; Financial viability (operational self-sufficiency, financial self-sufficiency) Profitability (return on assets ratio, return on business ratio, return on equity ratio) and Portfolio quality (portfolio at risk, repayment rates).  Financial performance being a critical factor in the success of microfinance Institutions, therefore, this research focused on financial performance and not social performance

Most of the studies on financial performance of microfinance institutions apply and use different methodologies as in the case of Tilahun (2009) , however this study employed a descriptive research design based on quantitative data. The researcher collected and analyzed annual reports using descriptive statistics.  A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between management control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions. 

Poor financial performance marked by deteriorating returns and portfolio quality has taken a center stage and remained unexplained in microfinance Institutions (Performance Monitoring Tool 2006/2009/). Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which tend to be more volatile (Ssewanyana 2009). According to the IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears hardly existed. Microfinance institutions in Uganda face poor cash flow problems due to changes in market interest rate and failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda (Bank of Uganda 2010/2011)

Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFI’s and their impact on profitability (Migiri, 2002). Lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions.  Though some studies have identified ICS as a possible predictor of financial performance in different industries, there are still gaps as a result of absence of representative empirical studies that would address the issue of financial performance of microfinance institutions as a result of Management control systems (PekChen, 2005).More so, theories and models apparently used to explain financial performance in firms have proved to be weak and inadequate in explaining this phenomenon. 

This study enabled microfinance firms to have a more definite and direct understanding of the elements of management control system that can influence performance. Besides, understanding of how management control system elements combine to influence firm performance can lead to better resource allocation, which eventually may promote performance in microfinance institutions.

Empirical studies aimed at assessing the impact of Management control systems on the financial performance of Microfinance Institutions in Uganda are missing. Therefore, this study is important because it fills this gap of knowledge

Literature Review 

A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. There are various forms  that have been used to examine the way contextual factors are related to aspects of Management control System with an  attempt to assess whether this association is linked to financial performance of Microfinance Institutions.

Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between magememt control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions

Synthesizing existing studies in the broad area of explaining financial performance of MFIs, indicate a clear dearth of studies examining multiplicative effect of various elements the predictor variable ie Management control system(Internal Control System, Budgeting, Performance Measurement ) on  financial performance of  MFIs . 

Model Specification

Management control system has been conceptualized from the Contingency point of view that assumes that the design and the application of management control systems are influenced by the context in which they are applied (Chenhall, 2007). A contingency approach to management control systems aims at identifying the best design, usage and application of Management control system in a given context (Chenhall and Chapman, 2006).This study follows the use of management control systems and examines the way contextual factors are related to aspects of management control system with attempt to assess whether this association is linked to financial performance of Microfinance Institutions. Any controlled system requires objectives and goals against which its performance can be assessed and the existence of different goals is likely to involve the selection of different performance measures and controls

The contingency approach was cited and explained by Simons’ (1995) levers of management system control model that requires management of effective companies to know how to achieve high degrees of high control efficiency and performance. Simon argued that it is not the identification of controls associated with particular strategies that are important, but the distribution of management attention and efficiency of controls that can lead to high degrees of performance. Simons (1995) organises management control system tools into a coherent model called “levers of control

Independent Variable MCS
Dependent Variable: Financial Performance

Figure 1: Conceptual Frame Work

Internal Control System
Budgeting
Performance measurement
Perceived Financial     Performance
Profitability
Portfolio Quality
Financial Viability

Source: Literature Review

To understand management control system  and financial performance variables in relation to microfinance institutions, the major management control system  pillars i.e. budgeting, performance measurement, internal control system are dissected. Financial performance especially relating to microfinance institutions is also reviewed based on the performance dimensions comprising: Profitability, portfolio quality and financial viability. The significance of Management control system in microfinance institutions is also highlighted. These are compressed in a conceptual framework as shown above. From the conceptual framework above, the hypothesis was structured to ascertain the extent to which management control system can influence financial performance. This was expressed as:

      Y=a+bx 

      FPM= f(MCS)

      Y=αo1ICS12BDGT23PFM3+ 4  +µ

       Where

      Y = Financial performance (proxied by Profitability, portfolio quality, financial viability)

 Key predictor of Management control system is given as 

      ICS1 = Internal control System, BDGT2 = Budgeting, PFM3 = Performance Measurement

Simon (1995), asserted  that Management control systems  have different impacts on organization performance, Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of internal control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies, Davila (2000), in his study his study findings indicated that different strategies will need different interactive use of management controls to raise firm performance.

Welsh (2003), Simons (1995), Chow et al (1999), Merchant (2007), appreciate that Management   control systems are the formal, information-based routines and procedures managers that ensure that errors and fraud are detected, safe guard company’s  assets and opine that MCS greatly influences firm performance.

Recent studies draw from the original organizational theorists (Burns & Stalker 1961, Lawrence & Lorsch 1967, Thompson 1967, Perrow 1970, Galbraith1973) to develop arguments that explain how the effectiveness of control systems  (Chenhall 2003).

Bisbe and Otley (2004), findings indicated that the application of control systems has a huge contingency effect on firm performance. However, Bisbe’s research did not discuss the importance of human effect to control system (Snell, 1992; Abernethy and Brownell, 1997; Keller, 2001; Widener, 2004)

Dexon  (2010), findings revealed that Management Control Systems have a significant positive effect in achieving Value for Money. All the constructs of Internal Control Systems (Control environment, control activities, risk assessment) have a significant positive relationship with Value for Money in a business entity

Internal control  process reduces uncertainty and improves firm performance, Ivancevich (1976), Steers (1976), Imoisili (1989), Locke & Schweiger (1979), Mia (1989), Ezzamel (1990), Hirst & Lowy (1990) etc. Another study on control process and firm performance relationship by scholars (Merchant, 1980; Peel & Bridge, 1988; Edward, et al., 2001) and empirical results (Merchant, 1980) show that control systems enhance the accuracy the degree of information accuracy. In turn, it results in higher performance in organizations.  The increased use of comprehensive ICS practices can be assumed to result in better improved financial performance among firms (e.g. Chenhall 2003, see also discussions in Gul 1991, Gul & Chia 1994, Hoque & James 2000, Ittner et al. 1998, 1998, Scott & Tiessen 1999)

Management Control System acts as a driver variable in firm strategy and performance as found in Chong & Chong (1997) and Baines & Langfield-Smith (2003). Report of bank of Uganda (2002), Simon (1995), results showed that there is indeed a positive association between certain internal control practices when are used concurrently with other strategic initiatives and improvement in financial performance.  Abernethy and Brownell (1999) also discussed the interactive use of management   control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies. The findings confirm the report findings of Armesh (2010) on the influences of internal control system on organizational performance in Malaysia, which showed that Internal Control System influences the behavior and performance of the organizational to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization s objectives.

On the other hand however, McMahon (2001) did not find any significant relationship between use of Control practices and firm performance. Donaldson (2001) found no significant associations were between the use of comprehensive Management Control System and measures of growth in net sales and profitability. 

Additionally, McMahon & Davies (1994) and McMahon (2001) have not found any significant relationships between internal control practices and performance of businesses. Thus, the empirical results on the relationship between various dimensions of Management Control System and performance seem to be rather mixed

Jonathan (2005), study findings revealed that most of the microfinance institutions in Namibia are not yet financially sustainable and it was attributed to the fact that interest rates that Microfinance institutions require to break-even exceed the ceiling imposed. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in financial institutions (Srinivasan, 2006), Studies by Bontis (2002), Chong and Richardson (2006), explained similar performance trends in Portuguese. Study findings revealed that average ROA for MFIs is 3.57%. This concur with study findings of Lafourcade (2005), the findings revealed that, Africa MFIs have the lowest financial performance of ROA of 2% as compared to 7.6%-10% of Eastern Europe and Central Asia. The findings are in agreement with Tilahun (2009), study findings on ‘the financial performance and sustainability of microfinance institutions in Ethiopia’; the result of the study indicates that there was a negative shift in the performance indicators particularly in the year 2009  and the gross loan portfolio has declined by 15.73% in the year 2009.

Furthermore, contrary to Chong and Richardson (2006),  study findings, McMahon (2001), did not find any significant relationship between use of control System of Australian business firms and profitability.

Furthermore, Perera et al. (1997) have also reported a respective non significant relationship in manufacturing firms. Malmi et al. (2004) likewise did not find a significant direct relationship between management practices and profitability, even though they reported an interaction effect of the practices and use of other relationship management control systems to be significant in relation to firm performance.

Both theoretical and empirical studies show that strong and efficient systems that maintain high levels of capital adequacy are important in determining financial institutions profitability. Sufian and Habibullah (2009), found out that good systems have a positive impact on bank profitability in China. This confirms Athanasoglou, et al. (2008, 2006) and Kosmidou (2008) who also finds a positive and significant effect of strong control system on bank profitability, reflecting the sound financial condition of banks.This shows that maintaining strong and efficient Managementl control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions (Gramling et al. 2004; Hermanson & Rittenberg 2003; 2004

First, Reid & Smith (2000) found out those developing control  systems, especially in the areas of management and accounting applications, lead to high firm performance, Reid & Smith (2002) , Reid & Smith (2000, 2002) holds that high performers  firms  use and apply internal control systems for daily financial monitoring and for identifying important trends in key variables for their further survival.  On the other hand, Reid & Smith (2002), argue that static performers at satisfactory financial levels tend not to value control systems as much as the others. Consequently, the relationship between Management control system and firm performance seem to be U-shaped

The foregoing reviews reveal that the application of Management control system elements in any organization differ and different interactive use of Management controls to raise firm performance.

The level, application and interactive use of internal control system in Ugandan microfinance industry is elusive. This, therefore, caused the need for a scientific investigation on the use internal control system elements influences financial performance in Uganda’s microfinance industry. This necessitated the study to evaluate the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda. Hence to the hypothesis that “Management control system positively influences financial performance of microfinance institutions”

Methodology 

The study adopted a positivist quantitative paradigm with cross sectional and correlation designs. Correlation design was used to establish relationships between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs. Logical positivism quantitative designs were applied in data collection, analysis and presentation which also helped to test hypothetical deductive generalizations. The study population consisted of 36 MFIs in central region Uganda registered with AMFIU from where the sample size of 33 MFIs were determined comprising a sample of 356 which was consistent with the sample size guidelines of Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006). Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006), multistage, simple rondom sampling and purposive tequniques were used. Primary and secondary data sources were used in the study.Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were also used to for statistical modeling.

Cronbach’s alpha was used to test the reliability of the instruments and the instruments were found to be reliable at 0.78. Content  validity of  the  two  instruments was ensured  through use of  valid  concepts  which  measure  the  study  variables .  Content  validity  was  used  to  ensure  that  the questionnaire  was  content  valid. The content validity results were obtained and for all the constructs were above 0.7 as recommended by Sakaran (2000). The study used Means and standard deviations in order to summarize the results. The means were used because they show a summary of data and standard deviation clearly shows how well the means represent the data (Field, 2009). Hierarchical regression was used to estimate the predictive power of the predictor variable on the criterion variable in the model fit.

Findings and Discussion 

Descriptive characteristics

Table 1: Mean and Standard deviations of  the predictor and criterion Variables

 
 NMinimumMaximumMeanStd. Deviation
Budgeting3561.754.003.23.35
ICS3561.304.003.19.27
P.Measurement356.824.003.21.33
Financial Performance356.914.003.09.25
      

Source: Primary data

The findings reveal that all mean scores of the constructs in question range between 3.09 and 3.23, with the standard deviations in the range of 0.25 to 0.35. Because of the small and minimal standard deviations compared to mean values, it is evident that the data points are close to the means and hence calculated means highly represent the observed data. In effect, the calculated means are a true reflection of reality (Garson, 2000; Field, 2006, & Saunders et al., 2007). The mean value of financial performance (3.09) is the lowest in contrast to other means .This finding coincides with the earlier assertion about the poor performance of Microfinance institutions in Uganda.

Table 2: Criterion Variables (Profitability)

Profitability 
 Return on Asset(ROA)Return on Equity(ROE)Profit Margin
Mean3.6540 16.9460 12.2280 
Standard Deviation.20082 .29263 1.56122 
Sample Variance.040 .086 2.437 
Skewness.466 -.274 1.472 
Kurtosis-2.284 -2.994 1.457 
Count32 32 32 
p value.000 .000 .000 
       

Source: Primary data, 

The findings reveal that, MFIs ability to generate return on capital employed is quite disparate and p value is significant. And it was further revealed that MFIs do not have similar debt equity ratios in the financing mix and the return on equity for these firms is not identical. The findings reveal that there are significant differences in the levels of return on equity, return on assets, and also in profit margin levels. 

Table 3: Criterion Variables (Financial Viability)

Financial Viability 
 Operational Self SufficiencyFinancial Self SufficiencyDebt/Equity
Mean111.2000 114.4000 4.2600 
Standard Deviation7.04982 1.81659 .424 
Sample Variance49.700 3.300 .424 
Skewness-.091 .267 .918 
Kurtosis-2.834 1.074 -.387 
Count32 32 32 
p value.000 .000 .000 
       

Source: Primary data, 

The financing mix among the microfinance institutions varied widely with p value being significant. This has mainly emanated from increasing reliance of the institutions on funds being made available by donors and other funding agencies. Most of the firms are not yet dependent on equity as a source of funds in a big way.

Table 4: Criterion Variables (Portfolio Quality)

  
Portfolio QualityPortfolio at Risk>30 daysPortfolio at Risk>90 daysLoan Loss rate
Mean1.484 .9740 1.3060 
Standard Deviation.4867 .31548 .29619 
Sample Variance.237 .100 .088 
Skewness-.871 -2.229 -.422 
Kurtosis-.395 4.975 -2.879 
Count             32 32 32 
p value.000 .002 .001 
       

 Source: Primary data, 2012

The findings reveal that, the p value is significant in case of potential future bad debts, provision for bad debts an indicator that the Microfinance institutions are operating with differing levels of risk appetite. This means that the risk avoidance in MFIs is different

Table 5: Zero order correlation between Management Control, and Financial Performance

 MeanStd. DeviationICSBudgetingP.MeasurementFinancial Performance  
ICS3.20.28 1
Budgeting3.23.36.323**1
P.Measurement3.21.33.499**.131*1
Financial Performance3.10.25.388**.249**.183**1
** Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level(2-tailed) * Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level(2-tailed)

Source: Primary data

It is evident that there is a positive significant correlation between Budgeting and Internal control system (r= .323**p< 0.05). This finding means that Efficiency in budgeting is associated with greater structural control systems. Furthermore, the findings reveal that there is a positive and significant relationship between Internal control system and performance measurement exists (r=.499**, p< 0.05). From correlation matrix the results indicate that the relationship between budgeting and performance measurement is not significant (r= .131*, p > 0.05).

Table 6: Correlation of MCS variable and Financial Performance

  ICSBudgetingPerformance mFinancial performance
ICSPearson Correlation1.323**.499**.388**
Sig. (2-tailed) .000.000.000
BudgetingPearson Correlation.323**1.131*.249**
Sig. (2-tailed).000 .014.000
P.MeasurementPearson Correlation.499**.131*1.183**
Sig. (2-tailed).000.014 .001
Financial performancePearson Correlation.388**.249**.183**1
Sig. (2-tailed).000.000.001 
**. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed).
*. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed).

Source: Primary

The findings revealed that appositive and significant relationship between internal control system and financial performance exist in Microfinance Institutions(r= .388** p(.000)< 0.01.  This shows that a maintaining strong and efficient internal control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions. In a related case, the relationship between budgeting and financial performance is significant(r= .249**, p(.000)< 0.01). This implies that efficient budgeting systems are associated with higher performance levels in Microfinance Institutions. This is because the budget systems, and processes, in an institution can influence the institution’s level of efficiency and effectiveness, which are important to every institution’s success. The findings, posit that there is a significant and positive effect of budgeting on financial performance

It is further evident that there is a significant and positive correlation between performance measurement and financial performance (r= .183**, p (.001)< 0.01). This is a sign that a strong relationship exists between performance measurement and financial performance. This signifies that a higher Microfinance Institution’s performance measurement is associated with high performance levels. 

Table 7: Management control system & Financial Performance

 MeanStd. DeviationManagement Control SystemFinancial Performance  
Management Control System3.21.251
Financial Performance3.10.25335**     1
 ** Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed)
 

Source: Primary data

Results show a positive and significant relationship between management control system and financial performance. The findings further revealed that there is a strong significant relationship between the level of management control system and the degree of financial performance r = .335** ,sig = 0.000 indicating a strong positive co-relation (r > 0) which indeed was big since its sig  value =0.000 < α=0.01 leading to acceptance of the hypothesis to the effect that the  level of management control system has a strong relationship with the degree of financial performance of microfinance institutions in Central region Uganda 

Model estimates 

The hypothesis was structured to ascertain the extent to which management control system can influence financial performance. This was expressed as:

      Y=a+bx 

      FPM= f(MCS)

      Y=αo1ICS12BDGT23PFM3+ 4  +µ…. …………

       Where

      Y = Financial performance (proxied by Profitability, portifolio quality, financial viability)

 Key predictor of Management control system is given as 

      ICS1 = Internal control System, BDGT2 = Budgeting, PFM3 = Performance Measurement

Table 8: Model Summary and estimates of the Variables

 
ModelRR SquareAdjusted R SquareStd. Error of the Estimate
1.524a.275.269.17763
a. Predictors: (Constant), P.Measurement, Budgeting, Internal control system 

Table 9:Hierarchical regression with Management control system elements on financial performance

ModelRR SquareAdjusted R SquareStd. Error of the Estimate
1.499a.249.247.18025
2.522b.272.268.17771
3.524c.275.269.17763
a. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System
b. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System, Budgeting
c. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System, Budgeting, Performance  measurement 
 

In the Model, the findings revealed that, internal control system accounted for 24.9 % of variance in financial performance that caused a statistically-significant standardized coefficient (B =0.381, P <0.01); In Model 2, the introduction of budgeting in the equation yielded 27% to the explanatory power of the model. This implies that budgeting accounted for an additional 2% of the variance in financial performance and caused a statistically-significant coefficient (B =0.095, p<0.01) the inclusion of performance measurement, yielded an insignificant additional 0.3% to the explanatory power of the model. This finding means that performance measurement accounted for only 0.3% of the variance in financial performance and caused a statistically insignificant coefficient (B =0.045, p >0.05)This led to the development of structural equation model and a modified frame work respectively 

Figure 2: Structural equation model

Figure 

Financial Performance
Management Control System

3: Modified Conceptual model

Profitability
Portfolio Quality
Financial Viability
ICS
Budgeting 

Source: Developed by the Author-New Knowledge Generated        

The study findings revealed that performance measurement was dropped from the modified frame work, since it caused a statistically insignificant contribution on Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions, with coefficient (B =0.045, p >0.0

The findings indicate that microfinance institutions in central region Uganda are efficient in preparing budgets and receive budget targets,and it was revealed that budgeting provides basis for control and performance evaluation because budgets act as a benchmark against which the performance of microfinance institutions is measured. The findings further revealed that the purposes of the budget are not always communicated to the stake holders of the institution and yet itis necessary in an efficient organization that all people be informed about the objectives, policies, programs, performance and expectations of the organization. This is always made possible through their participation in budgeting process

It was further revealed that those microfinance institutions in central region Uganda are efficient in performance measurement in a way that, the microfinance institutions are very efficient in resource utilization, however it was discovered that much as good performance is always received on good performance, exceptional performance is not always recognized by the microfinance institutions in central region Uganda. 

The findings further revealed that the microfinance institutions have a good and strong internal control system in that the institutions are very efficient in proper authorization for acquisitions. it was further discovered that much as most microfinance institutions in Uganda maintain debtors ledgers control accounts, they are sometimes not independently checked on a regular basis. Due to the high levels of management control system. This exhibited the existence of management control systems among the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda

The findings revealed that the microfinance institutions in Uganda have a weakness in charging interest on delinquent loans and yet loans and interest income are among the highest yielding assets of microfinance institutions because they provide the largest portion of operating revenue for most microfinance institutions in Uganda.

In terms of financial viability and portfolio quality, the findings revealed that the microfinance institutions have the ability to reach significant number of people in durable and stable manner and this shows that the microfinance institutions were highly successful in ensuring repayments although the delivery systems for loan recovery are not efficient and it was further revealed that still have challenge of not holding sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress.  

Most microfinance institutions in Uganda have and apply management control systems. However Low levels of management controls were established in Microfinance Institutions. The weak and ineffective control system is attributed to lack of implementation and close monitoring of the system. Since performance measurement is at the center of all the controls, Its weak position, has equally affected the two adversely internal control system and Budgeting

It can be seen that since the three management control elements complement each other, their combination has translated into a weak overall management control system, which has, in turn, led to adverse effects in MFIs’ financial performance in Uganda.

Since the three management control system elements complement each other, their combination has translated into a weak overall system, which has, in turn, led to adverse effects in MFIs’ financial performance. The adverse effect of weak management control system is manifested in increased operational inefficiencies that have resulted into increased operating costs and loan loss write-offs. More so, weak management control system has weakened the MFIs credit policy, which has, in turn, led to increased non-performing loans and portfolio at risk (PAR). Microfinance Institutions’ poor performance is explained by weak performance measurement that has, in turn, affected internal control system and budgeting. 

The study has addressed matters that have not been covered in the literature, more especially in the microfinance industry. The study has attempted to verify and affirm whether the theoretical assumptions are empirically supported in Microfinance Institutions. Consequently, the study has contributed to the management control debate in the field of microfinance industry in Uganda.

Though many researchers and scholars have different views on management control system elements, this study has ascertained that it is a multi-dimensional predictor encompassing management control system, budgeting and performance measurement. However, internal control system is crucial in enhancing the strength of other management control system elements. The study has, therefore, brought to light the true composition of management control system in Uganda’s Microfinance Industry.

This study further established that management control system dimensions operate in a synergic way to affect financial performance in Microfinance Institutions in Uganda. However, internal control system is the most important predictor among the three management control system dimensions in explaining performance variance. Thus, the mixed results on the contribution of individual management control system elements to financial performance have been looked at in this study.

This study has introduced a clearer understanding of the extent to which management control system influence performance in Microfinance Institutions. This can promote management efforts of Microfinance Institutions to improve performance, which can be facilitated through the appropriate management systems of leading elements of management control system combination that can foster performance in Uganda’s Microfinance Industry.

Finally, the empirical studies on the management control system in MFIs context are few in number, making this research area of special interest for exploration. 

On the basis of the study findings, and reviewed literature, the following recommendations are pertinent to the success of Ugandan microfinance institutions. MFIs should enhance controls that will ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization’s objectives. And this will enhance the levels of management control system

MFIs should put a lot of emphasis on internal control system since it’s a high contributor of financial performance. MFIs should hold sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress 

Managers MFIs in Uganda have to continuously re-evaluate and try different new methods of measuring performance to manage performance better. These performance measurement practices require time to succeed and the institutions need to continually re-examine the system alignment, tracking and monitoring effectiveness and modifying the system to accommodate the changing needs 

Microfinance institutions set and establish   effective control systems:  all of the financial, operational and other control systems which are carried out by internal controllers and which involve monitoring, independent evaluation and timely reporting to management levels systematically in order to ensure that all the institutions activities are performed by management levels in accordance with current policies, methods, instructions and limit 

MFIs should pay more attention to the internal effects of performance measurement systems. These effects are namely directly affected through performance measurement and drive the organizations to external effects. MFIs, should establish portfolio monitoring and control system to improve and monitor the portfolio quality and this will  improve financial performance. MFIs should find ways to reduce costs, increasing the number or size of loans disbursed, without compromising the loan portfolio, or reducing default rates

The Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning, Bank of Uganda, Microfinance support centre should provide a favorable platform for microfinance institutions to access financing that can enable them to set Interest rates that will not have a negative effect on the customer base. MFIs in Uganda charge relatively high interest rates this has led to lower repayment rates that negatively impacts on the institutions portfolio quality and profitability

The MFIs have to allocate more of their assets in to productive uses such as loans rather than current assets or fixed assets. MFIs should have a depth of outreach with clear market segmentation in order to improve on the sustainability the portfolio quality and the related loan loss provision. MFIs should enhance controls that will ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization’s objectives. MFIs should put a lot of emphasis on internal control system since it’s a high contributor of financial performance. MFIs should hold sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress 

References

Adams, D. W. (1990):Funded Rural Finance Activities in Latin America and        the       Carribbean,   1942- 1990: A Strategy for the 1990s”, AID, Washington, DC

Adongo, J., & Christopher,S. (2005). Factors Influencing Sustainability of Selected          MicrofinanceInstitutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Policy Research Unit         –           Research Report

Amin, M. (2005). Social Sciences Research: Conception, Methodology and Analysis.

Anthony, R.N. and Govindarajan, V. (2004), “Management Control Systems”, McGraw-  Hill,New York, NY.

B.K. Sebbowa Bamweyana, (2009), the role of internal audit function in    organizations

Baguma, D.T. (2007). Association of Microfinance Magazine: Addressing thePoverty       challenge.

Baguma, D.T (2008).Uganda Microfinance Industry Assessment: Association of

            Microfinance Institutions of Uganda

Bald.J. (2000). Liquidity Management: A Toolkit for Microfinance Institutions.

Bank of Uganda (1999): BOU Policy Statement on Micro- Finance            Regulation,     Ban

Barney, J. B. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage, Journal of

            Management, 17(1), 99 -120.

Bategeka, L. (1999): Uganda’s Achiefments and Callenges in the Financial           Sector:            Whose Interests Count In: „The Ugandan Banker“, Vol. 7, No. 4,           Uganda           Institute of bankers

Beck, T., Cull, R. and Jerome, A. (2005). Bank privatization and performance: empirical evidence          from Nigeria. Journal of Banking and Finance, 29:2355-79. 

Bisbe, J. “The Effects of the Interactive Use of Management            Control            Systems on      Product Innovation,” Accounting, Organization             and      Society, Vol. 29, No. 8,          2004,   pp. 709-737.

CGAP (2016). Consultative Group to assist the poorest, available at: http://www.cgap.org

Chandan, J.S. ( 2004). MangementTheories and Practices. New Delhi

Chenhall R (2003). Management control systems design within its organizationalcontext:            findings from contingency-based       research and directions for the future. Acc Org      Soc     28: 127–168.

Chenhall, R.H., (2003). Management control systemsdesign within its       organizational context: findings from contingency-based research   and             directions for the         future.Accounting,    Organizations and       Society 28, 127–168

Chow, C.W., Shields, M.D., & Wu, A. (1999). The importance of national culture in the design of and preference for management     controls for multi-national operations.      Accounting, Organizations and Society, Vol. 24, 561-582.

Collis, J. and Hussey, R. (2003). Business Research: A Practical Guide for Undergraduate          and      Postgraduate Students, 2nd Edition, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Creswell, J. W. (2003). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches, 2nd Edition, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 

Creswell, J. W. and Plano Clark, V. L. (2007). Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods            Research, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Cull, R., Demirgüc-Kunt, A and Morduch, J. (2007). Financial performance and outreach: a         global analysis of leading microbanks, Economic Journal, 117:F107-F133.

Davis, J.H., Schoorman, F.D., and Donaldson, L. (1997). Toward a Stewardship Theory of           Management.

Field, A. (2006). Discovering Statistics using SPSS (2nd Ed.). Sage, London.

Freeman, R.E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder ApproachBoston: Pitman.

Gerrit Sarens and Mohammad J. Abdolmohammadi (2010), Monitoring     Effects of the Internal            Audit Function: Agency Theory versus other Explanatory Variables. International   Journal ofAuditing. Blackwell Publishing Ltd

Gibbons, D.S. & Meehan, J.W. (2000), The Micro credit summit’s challenge: working     towards           institutional financial self-sufficiency while maintaining a commitment       to serving the poorest families, Journal of micro finance, 1(1), 131 – 191.

Haning A (2002).Microfinance in Uganda: Lessons from FNCA clients    Analysis          Kampala, United Press Ltd.

Hulme .  (1996): Finance Against Poverty, Volumes 1 and 2, Routledge, London.

Hulme, D. (2000): “Impact Assessment Methodologies for Microfinance    Theory,            Experience and Better Practice”, University of             Manchester, Manchester, UK.

Jensen M., and Meckling, W. (1976). Theory of the firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs     and Ownership Structure. Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 3, No. 4: pp. 305-360.

Johnson, R. B. and Onwuegbuzie, A. J. (2004). Mixed methods research: a research paradigm      whose time has come. Educational Researcher, 33 (7), 14-26.

Kalyango,D.L.(2005). Uganda’s Experience with Tiered Banking Regulation, Bank of

            Uganda, Seminar Paper.

Karlan, D. and Goldberg, N. (2007) The Impact of Microfinance: A Review of Keat, R. and         Urry, J. (1982). Social Theory as Science, 2nd Edition, London: Routledge & Kegan            Paul.

Ledgerwood et al (1999). Microfinance Handbook: An Institutional and     Financial       Perspective.    Sustainable Banking with the Poor, World             Bank,   1818 H St.,      Washington

Lee. K. (2005). KMPI: Measuring Knowledge          Management   Performance,”            Information & Lessons from Selected African Countries.‟ International Monetary           Fund    Limited, England.

Logotri (2006) „Building Sustainable Microfinance System: A Growth Catalyst

            Makerere University Printery, Kampala.

Malmi T (1997) Towards explaining activity-based costing failure: accounting and control in       a          decentralized organization. Management Accounting Research 8: 459−480.

McMahon RGP (2001) Business growth and performance and the financial reporting practices     of Australian manufacturing SMEs. Journal of Small Business Management39(2):152−164.

Merchant, K et al. (2007). Management Control       Systems – Performance, Measurement,          Merchant, K. A,(2007). A review of the literature on control       and      accountabilityHandbook of Management Accounting          Research, (Ed.) C.      S. Chapman, A. G.      Hopwood, and M. D. Shields,      785-804, Amsterdam:             Elsevier Press.

Merchant KA (1997) Modern Management Control Systems: texts and cases. Prentice

            Hall, New Jersey, US.

Meyer, R. J. (2002) „Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assessing the Poor in         Asia.‟ ADB Institute Research Paper, No. 49. 

Meyer, R. L. (2002). “Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assisting the         Poor    in         Asia” ADB Institute Research Paper, No 49. 2nd ed., Essex: Prentice Hall.

Michael A. Hitt, Robert E. Hoskisson, Richard A. Johnson, Douglas D.      Moesel. (1996).           The      Market for Corporate Control and Firm             Innovation

MicroBanking Bulletin. (1998), Issue No. 2. Calmeadow, 733 15th St. NW, Suite 700      Microfinance Information eXchange (MIX).

Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development (2000): „Draft Final   Report on        the District Resource Endowment Profile Survey             (DREPS)“,Vol.II, Survey of   Microfinance Institutions, The Republic of Uganda,             Kampala

Mitchell, R.K., Agle, B.R., and Wood, D.J. (1997). Toward a Theory of Stakeholder         Identification and        Salience: Defining the Principle of Who and What Really            Counts.            Academy of Management       Review, Vol.   22, No. 4: pp. 853–886.

Nannyonjo, S. & Nsubuga,D. (2004). Bank of Uganda Working Paper, WP04

Navajas. S. M.et al. (2000), “Micro credit and the Poorest of the Poor: Theory and Evidence       from   Bolivia”, World Development, Vol. 28,             No. 2, pp 333- 346,     Elsevier          Science Ltd

Obwona, M. B.; Ddumba-Ssentamu, J. (1998): „Household Savings in       Developing      Economies: Evidence from Microdata from Uganda“, Makerere University, Uganda

Office of the Prime Minister (2000): „Basic Facts about rural Microfinance          support            Projekt (RMSP)“, The Republic of Uganda, Kampala

Opiokello, D. (2000): Role Of The Central Bank In Developing Rural         Financial Markets:    The Case Of Uganda. In: „After the Reforms:             Which Way Forward for Central        Banks in Rural Finance“, Afraca        Rural Finance Series, Vol.1, African Rural and        Agricultural             Credit Association, Nairobi

Otero, M. and E. Rhyne (1994), The New World of Micro enterprise Finance,        Hartford,         Kumarian Press Outreach and Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions in Africa.

Pablos, P. (2004), “The nature of knowledge-based resources through the design of an      architecture of human resource management systems: implications for strategic        management”,International Journal of Technology Management, Vol. 27 No.6/7,             pp.23-45.

Pamela,  M.P.(2001). Management:  Performance in Spanish Banking”.    Journal of Banking     and Finance,18

Performance monitoring tool (PMT) (2006|09) for Microfinance Institutions.

            Accessed at www.mixmarket.com.

Reid, K. & Ashelby, D. (2002). The Swansea Internal Quality Audit           Processes Quality       Assurance in Education.Vol. 10,Research Unit – Research Report 39.

Rutherford, S. (1997) Informal Financial Services in Dhaka‟s Slums. In: Wood et al

Rutherford, S. (1999): „Savings and the Poor the Methods, use and impact of        savings by       the poor of East Africa“, Micro Save-Africa, Kampala

Sandra, M.S.C., Miguel.A.M & Tomas,L-G., (2007). Organizational culture and

            Saroj Rijal (2006) Application of Management Control System in Nepalese

Saunders, M. and Lewis, P. (2003). Research Methods for Business Students, Essex, Pearson       Education

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Saunders. A. et al .(2000). “The Determinants of Bank         Interest            Rate Margins: An       International  Study,”Journal of             International   Money and Finance 19, 813-832

Schilling, M.A. (2000). Decades Ahead of Her Time; Advancing Stakeholder Theory Through    the       Ideas of Mary Parker Follett. Journal of Management History, Vol. 6, No. 5: pp.       224-     242.

Schreiner, M. (2000) „Ways Donors Can Help the Evolution of Sustainable Science Journal,        43, 471-477.

Selected Microfinance Institutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Selection Model.‟        The      Economic Journal, 110, 632-643.Series No. 17, Boston, MA: Harvard            Business          School.

Silverman, D. (2001). Interpreting Qualitative Data – Methods for Analysing Talking, Text          and      Interaction,2nd Edition, London: Sage Publications

Simons, R., (1995). Levers of Control, How Managers Use Innovative       Control Systems to      Drive Strategic Renewal. Harvard Business             School Press, Boston, MA

Slater, S.F., & Narver, J.C., (2007). Market orientation and the learning organization,

            Journal of Marketing, 59(7), 63 – 74.

Smith, A.,(2001): “Perceptions of Stress at Work,” Human Resource          Management   Journal,           Vol. 11, No. 4, pp. 74-86  

Snell, S. A.,(1992) “Control Theory in Strategic Human Resource Management: the         Mediating Effect of Administrative Information,” Academy of Management Journal,     Vol. 35, No. 2, pp. 292–

Tashakkori, A. and Creswell, J. W. (2007). Exploring the nature of research questions in mixed methods research. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 1 (3), 207-211. 

Ticehurst, G.W. and Veal, A.J. (1999). Business Research Methods: A Managerial Approach,      Addison Wesley Longman Australia Pty Limited.

Waterfield, C. (1998). Handbook for Management Information Systems for Microfinance Institutions. Technical Tool Series No.1. ConsultativeGroup to Assist the Poorest    (CGAP), 1818  H St. NW, Washington, D.C

Watts, H. (1999). A Conceptual Framework to Financial Reports and Internal Audits. Vol.          20,Pp. 753-778.

Widener, S. (2007). An empirical analysis of the levers of control   framework.      Accounting,    Organizations and Society 32, 757-788.

Woller, G. (2000) „Reassessing the Financial Viability of Village Banking: Past    Performance    and Future Prospects.‟ Micro-Banking Bulletin, Microfinance

Woolf, E. (1992). Auditing Today (3rd ed.).Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.work       study,50           (5), 179 – 189. Working Paper Series No. 51

Internal Control Systems and Performance of Micro Finance Institutions in Uganda

Dr Arthur Sunday, Dr Abanis Turyahebwa, Dr Derick Ssekajugo, Dr Mabonga Eric

Abstract

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion. Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFI’s and their impact on profitability and not on internal control system and lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions. Failure by MFIs to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda. The study analyzed the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda and it was hypothesized that internal control system positively influences   financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. MFIs have come under spotlight for cases of poor financial performance. Lack of empirical studies to assess the impact of internal control system on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda is the motivation behind this study. Therefore, this study is important not only because it fills the gap, but also it set out to address this evident knowledge gap. The study adopted positive-phenomenological, epistemology and quantitative-qualitative methodology dimension with cross sectional and correlation designs, the unit of analysis was Microfinance Institutions registered with Association of Microfinance Institutions, and employees were the units of inquiry. Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were used to for statistical modeling

Besides, Hierarchical regression was used to test the predictive power of the variables and indicate precisely what happens to the model as different predictor variables are introduced in the model fit. This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that internal control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance. And internal control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance.  The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient internal control systems. These models can then used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda .Regardless of the existence of control systems in MFI, the results revealed that internal control systems were less efficient due to lack of close monitoring. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization’s goals  Policy makers, AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy

Key Words : Internal Control System, Financial Performance, microfinance, Institution

Introduction

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion .The microfinance movement has received enthusiasm as a poverty alleviation tool that has eventually become a self-sustaining industry. Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as vital institution to nations’ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2002). Most microfinance institutions have embraced a more business-oriented outlook and maintained their target groups of economically-active poor, in order to achieve financial sustainability (Kalyango, 2004; Baguma, 2008). The micro finance institutions in developing economies are widely growing from time to time. Various studies on different countries on the performance of the MFIs confirm this (Adongo and Stork 2005, Zeller and Meyer 2002, Meyer 2002, Robert cull et al. 2007).

Approaches used by microfinance institutions in Uganda to deliver financial services to the poor are similar to those used in other countries where microfinance institutions operate. The approach used depends on the nature and structure of the respective microfinance institution. The institutions providing microfinance services include: Tier I: formal financial institutions Comercial banks, TierII; credit institutions, Tier III; microfinance deposit taking institutions, Tier IV; Saccos (BOU Policy on MFIs 1999).

Microfinance institutions in Uganda from time and again been faced with high operating costs to provide financial services to the poor people and Small and Medium Enterprises (Micro banking Bulletin, 2002). And as such,  are unable to meet their obligations when they become due usually resulting from poor cash flow planning, failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending and micro loan portfolios  (Srinivasan, 2006 due to unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which are volatile. IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears. An enduring problem facing microfinance institutions, however, is how to attain financial sustainability (Dunford, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Woller 2000; Hollis and Sweetman, 1998; Christen et al, 1995). This problem has attracted attention of numerous researchers in recent decades and, as a result many strategies have been identified to ensure that institutions are sustainable (Randhawa and Gallardo, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Yaron, 1992). Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of management control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal control systems can alleviate disruptive performance in a business enterprise. Ledgerwood (1999) as cited by Lincolin Arsyad (2005), conceptualizes financial performance as; Financial viability (operational self-sufficiency, financial self-sufficiency) Profitability (return on assets ratio, return on business ratio, return on equity ratio) and Portfolio quality (portfolio at risk, repayment rates).  Financial performance being a critical factor in the success of microfinance Institutions, therefore, this research focused on financial performance and not social performance

Most of the studies on financial performance of microfinance institutions apply and use different methodologies as in the case of Tilahun (2009) , however this study employed a descriptive research design based on quantitative data. The researcher collected and analyzed annual reports using descriptive statistics.  A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between management control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions. 

Poor financial performance marked by deteriorating returns and portfolio quality has taken a center stage and remained unexplained in microfinance Institutions (Performance Monitoring Tool 2006/2009/). Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which tend to be more volatile (Ssewanyana 2009). According to the IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears hardly existed. Microfinance institutions in Uganda face poor cash flow problems due to changes in market interest rate and failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda (Bank of Uganda 2010/2011)

Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFI’s and their impact on profitability (Migiri, 2002). Lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions.  Though some studies have identified ICS as a possible predictor of financial performance in different industries, there are still gaps as a result of absence of representative empirical studies that would address the issue of financial performance of microfinance institutions as a result of management control systems (PekChen, 2005).More so, theories and models apparently used to explain financial performance in firms have proved to be weak and inadequate in explaining this phenomenon. Empirical studies aimed at assessing the impact of ICS on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda are missing. Therefore, this study is important because it fills this gap of knowledge

Literature Review 

Synthesizing existing studies in the broad area of explaining financial performance of MFIs, indicate a clear dearth of studies examining multiplicative effect of various elements the predictor variable ie internal control system(control procedures, risk assessment, control environment, Monitoring and internal audit ) on  financial performance of  MFIs . (see for review

Welsh (2003), Simons (1995), Chow et al (1999), Merchant (2007), appreciate that internal   control systems are the formal, information-based routines and procedures managers that ensure that errors and fraud are detected, safe guard company’s  assets and opine that ICS greatly influences firm performance.

Recent studies draw from the original organizational theorists (Burns & Stalker 1961, Lawrence & Lorsch 1967, Thompson 1967, Perrow 1970, Galbraith1973) to develop arguments that explain how the effectiveness of control systems  (Chenhall 2003).

Bisbe and Otley (2004), findings indicated that the application of control systems has a huge contingency effect on firm performance. However, Bisbe’s research did not discuss the importance of human effect to control system (Snell, 1992; Abernethy and Brownell, 1997; Keller, 2001; Widener, 2004)

Simon (1995), asserted  that internal control systems  have different impacts on organization performance, Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of internal control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies, Davila (2000), in his study his study findings indicated that different strategies will need different interactive use of management controls to raise firm performance.

Dexon  (2010), findings revealed that Internal Control Systems have a significant positive effect in achieving Value for Money. All the constructs of Internal Control Systems (Control environment, control activities, risk assessment) have a significant positive relationship with Value for Money in a business entity

Internal control  process reduces uncertainty and improves firm performance, Ivancevich (1976), Steers (1976), Imoisili (1989), Locke & Schweiger (1979), Mia (1989), Ezzamel (1990), Hirst & Lowy (1990) etc. Another study on control process and firm performance relationship by scholars (Merchant, 1980; Peel & Bridge, 1988; Edward, et al., 2001) and empirical results (Merchant, 1980) show that control systems enhance the accuracy the degree of information accuracy. In turn, it results in higher performance in organizations.  The increased use of comprehensive ICS practices can be assumed to result in better improved financial performance among firms (e.g. Chenhall 2003, see also discussions in Gul 1991, Gul & Chia 1994, Hoque & James 2000, Ittner et al. 1998, 1998, Scott & Tiessen 1999)

ICS acts as a driver variable in firm strategy and performance as found in Chong & Chong (1997) and Baines & Langfield-Smith (2003). Report of bank of Uganda (2002), Simon (1995), results showed that there is indeed a positive association between certain internal control practices when are used concurrently with other strategic initiatives and improvement in financial performance.  Abernethy and Brownell (1999) also discussed the interactive use of internal  control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies

The findings confirm the report findings of Armesh (2010) on the influences of internal control system on organizational performance in Malaysia, which showed that Internal Control System influences the behavior and performance of the organizational to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization s objectives.

On the other hand however, McMahon (2001) did not find any significant relationship between use of internal control practices and firm performance. Donaldson (2001) found no significant associations were between the use of comprehensive Management Control System and measures of growth in net sales and profitability. 

Additionally, McMahon & Davies (1994) and McMahon (2001) have not found any significant relationships between internal control practices and performance of businesses. Thus, the empirical results on the relationship between various dimensions of MCS and performance seem to be rather mixed

Jonathan (2005), study findings revealed that most of the microfinance institutions in Namibia are not yet financially sustainable and it was attributed to the fact that interest rates that Microfinance institutions require to break-even exceed the ceiling imposed. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in financial institutions (Srinivasan, 2006), Studies by Bontis (2002), Chong and Richardson (2006), explained similar performance trends in Portuguese. Study findings revealed that average ROA for MFIs is 3.57%. This concur with study findings of Lafourcade (2005), the findings revealed that, Africa MFIs have the lowest financial performance of ROA of 2% as compared to 7.6%-10% of Eastern Europe and Central Asia. The findings are in agreement with Tilahun (2009), study findings on ‘the financial performance and sustainability of microfinance institutions in Ethiopia’; the result of the study indicates that there was a negative shift in the performance indicators particularly in the year 2009  and the gross loan portfolio has declined by 15.73% in the year 2009.

Furthermore, contrary to Chong and Richardson (2006),  study findings, McMahon (2001), did not find any significant relationship between use of control System of Australian business firms and profitability.

Furthermore, Perera et al. (1997) have also reported a respective non significant relationship in manufacturing firms. Malmi et al. (2004) likewise did not find a significant direct relationship between management practices and profitability, even though they reported an interaction effect of the practices and use of other relationship management control systems to be significant in relation to firm performance.

Both theoretical and empirical studies show that strong and efficient systems that maintain high levels of capital adequacy are important in determining financial institutions profitability. Sufian and Habibullah (2009), found out that good systems have a positive impact on bank profitability in China. This confirms Athanasoglou, et al. (2008, 2006) and Kosmidou (2008) who also finds a positive and significant effect of strong control system on bank profitability, reflecting the sound financial condition of banks.

This shows that maintaining strong and efficient internal control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions (Gramling et al. 2004; Hermanson & Rittenberg 2003; 2004

First, Reid & Smith (2000) found out those developing control  systems, especially in the areas of management and accounting applications, lead to high firm performance, Reid & Smith (2002) , Reid & Smith (2000, 2002) holds that high performers  firms  use and apply internal control systems for daily financial monitoring and for identifying important trends in key variables for their further survival.  On the other hand, Reid & Smith (2002), argue that static performers at satisfactory financial levels tend not to value control systems as much as the others. Consequently, the relationship between internal control system and firm performance seem to be U-shaped

The foregoing reviews reveal that the application of internal control system elements in any organization differ and different interactive use of internal  controls to raise firm performance. 

The level, application and interactive use of internal control system in Ugandan microfinance industry is elusive. This, therefore, caused the need for a scientific investigation on the use internal control system elements influences financial performance in Uganda’s microfinance industry. This necessitated the study to evaluate the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda

Methodology 

The study adopted a positivist quantitative paradigm with cross sectional and correlation designs. Correlation design was used to establish relationships between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs. Logical positivism quantitative designs were applied in data collection, analysis and presentation which also helped to test hypothetical deductive generalizations. The study population consisted of 36 MFIs in central region Uganda registered with AMFIU from where the sample size of 33 MFIs were determined comprising a sample of 356 which was consistent with the sample size guidelines of Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006). Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006), multistage, simple rondom sampling and purposive tequniques were used. Primary and secondary data sources were used in the study.Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were also used to for statistical modeling.

Cronbach’s alpha was used to test the reliability of the instruments and the instruments were found to be reliable at 0.78. Content  validity of  the  two  instruments was ensured  through use of  valid  concepts  which  measure  the  study  variables .  Content  validity  was  used  to  ensure  that  the questionnaire  was  content  valid. The content validity results were obtained and for all the constructs were above 0.7 as recommended by Sakaran (2000). The study used Means and standard deviations in order to summarize the results. The means were used because they show a summary of data and standard deviation clearly shows how well the means represent the data (Field, 2009). Hierarchical regression was used to estimate the predictive power of the predictor variable on the criterion variable in the model fit.

Findings and Discussion 

Descriptive Statistics of the Predictor Variable and Criterion Variable
 NRangeMinimumMaximumMeanStd. DeviationVariance
C. Procedure3562.671.243.903.2002.01436.27098.073
C. Environment3553.18.824.003.2101.01757.33106.110
R. Assessment 3562.701.304.003.1967.01465.27644.076
Monitoring3562.111.503.612.9259.01350.25466.065
I. Audit3562.251.754.003.2342.01894.35735.128
F.Performance3562.89.913.813.0993.01325.25005.063
         

Source: Primary Data 2017

Results showed that internal control system among MFIs is defined in terms of the five observed variables, control procedures, control environment, risk assessment, and monitoring and internal audit. And financial performance was conceptualised in terms of Return on Assets, return on Equity, profit margin and portfolio quality. The findings indicate small and minimal standard deviations compared to mean values; it is evident that the data points are close to the means and hence calculated means highly represent the observed data. The findings revealed that standardized regression weights for the predictor variable(Internal control system), in explaining financial performance  were significant(p<0.001) signifying a strong relationship between internal control system  and financial performance  of MFIs in  central region Uganda and Zero order correlation  was applied to determine the correlation  between internal control system  and financial performance  of MFIs

Zero order correlation between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs

VariablesaB       CDEf
C. Procedure     (a)1 1    
C. Environment(b).131*
R. Assessment  (c).310**.499**1
Monitoring       (d).259**.151**.264**1
I.Audit              (e).133*.131*.323**.127*1
F.Performance  (f).650**.183**.388**.638**.249**1
      
 *. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed).
 **. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed). 
HypothesisSupported/not supported 
H1There is a positive and significant relationship between control procedure and Financial performance of MFIs          (r= 0.650, p< 0.05).supported 
H2: There is a positive and significant relationship between control environment and Financial performance of MFIs      (r= 0.183, p< 0.05).supported 
H3: There is a positive and significant relationship between risk assessment and Financial performance of MFIs                             (r= 0.388, p< 0.05).supported 
H4: There is a positive and significant relationship between monitoring and Financial performance of MFIs                                  (r= 0.638, p< 0.05).supported    
H5: There is a positive and significant relationship between internal audit and Financial performance of MFIs                           (r= 0.249, p< 0.05).supported    
H5There is a positive and significant relationship between internal control system and Financial performance of MFIs              (r= 0.355, p< 0.05).supported 

To test the predictive power of the study variables, from the hypothesized model 

Y = α+β1X12X23X34X4+ β5X5+e

Where Y is the Dependent Variable – Financial Performance

α = Constant

X = representing the constructs of the predictor Variable- ICS

X1  = Control Procedure 

X2  = Risk assessment 

X3  = Control Environment

X4  = Monitoring

X5  = Internal Auditing

ß15 = Coefficients of beta 

e = error term in ascertaining the influence of individual element on Financial       performance, all the models as indicated the model fit 

Model1:          Y = α+β1X1+e 

Y = 1.154+0.607X1

(t =14.201), (t=7.830), R2= 0.431, F = 83.26, DW = 1.366

Model2:          Y = α+β1X12X2+e

Y = 1.470+0.536X1+0. 250X2

(t =13.011), (t=5.190), (t= 6.693) R2= 0.491, F = 76.07, DW = 1.366

Model 3           Y = α+β1X12X23X3+e

Y = 1.427+0.535X1+0.264X2+0.022X3

(t =12.102), (t=4.6513), (t= 5.353) (t=1.671) R2= 0.492, F = 42.08, DW = 1.366

Model 4           Y = α+β1X12X23X34X4+e

Y = 1.474+0.452X1+0.160X2+0.026X3+0.457X4

(t =10.261), (t=3.544), (t= 4.773) (t=1.482) (t =1.875) R2= .683, F = 39.28, 

DW = 1.366

Model 5           Y = α+β1X12X23X34X4+ β5X5+e

Y = 1.295+0.450X1+0.131X2+0.023X3+0.455X4+0.061X5

(t =9.371), (t=3.623), (t= 4.897) (t=1.495) (t =1.910), (t = 2.130) R2= .690, F = 33.66, DW = 1.366

In Model 1, Control Procedure accounts for 43.2% of variance in financial performance of MFIs (F =  83.26, P < .005) and caused a statistically-significant non-standardized coefficient (B =0. 607, P <0.05).

In Model 2, the introduction of Risk Assessment in the equation yielded an extra effect 6% to the explanatory power of the model. This clearly implies that Risk Assessment accounts for an additional 6% of the variance in financial performance. This means that a unit change in Risk Assessment leads to 6% increase in financial performance (F=76.07, p < 0.05), and caused a statistically-significant coefficient (B =0. 250, p <0.05); 

Results for Model 3 indicate that the introduction of Control Environment in the equation yielded a low significant effect of 0.1% to the explanatory power of the model. This means that Control Environment explained an additional 0.1% of the variance in financial performance (F = 42.08, P < 0.05), and caused statistically very low significant coefficient (B =0.022, p<0.05); these results indicate that Control Environment influence financial performance of MFIs but with minimal effect. 

In Model 4, the introduction of Monitoring in the equation also yielded a less significant 19.1% to the explanatory power of the model. Thus monitoring account for additional 19.1% of the variance in financial performance (F =39.28, p<0.05) and lead to statistically significant contribution in coefficient (B = 0.457, p<0.05). 

In Model 5, after the internal audit was included, a less significant additional 0.7% was yielded and added to the explanatory power of the model. These results indicate Internal audit account for only 0.7% of the variance in financial performance (F= 33.66, p < 0.05), and caused a statistically less significant coefficient (B =0.061, p <0.05). However, model 5 shows the overall explanatory power of the model to be 69%.  This clearly shows that internal control system predicts 69 % of the variance in the financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. Considering, the unstandardized coefficients, control procedures has the highest beta followed by monitoring and then risk assessment, internal audit and finally control environment. 

This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that internal control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance leading to the acceptance of the hypothesis that internal control systems are positively related with financial performance among the MFIs in central region Uganda.. And internal control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance. 

The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder and resource based view as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed that efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient internal control systems. These models can then used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization’s goals 

Policy makers, BOU, MOFEP AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy.  

References

Adams, D. W. (1990): Funded Rural Finance Activities in Latin America and        the       Carribbean,    1942- 1990: A Strategy for the 1990s”, AID, Washington, DC

Adongo, J., & Christopher,S. (2005). Factors Influencing Sustainability of Selected          Microfinance Institutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Policy Research Unit         –           Research Report

Amin, M. (2005). Social Sciences Research: Conception, Methodology and Analysis.

Anthony, R.N. and Govindarajan, V. (2004), “Management Control Systems”, McGraw-  Hill,New York, NY.

B.K. Sebbowa Bamweyana, (2009), the role of internal audit function in    organizations

Baguma, D.T. (2007). Association of Microfinance Magazine: Addressing thePoverty       challenge.

Baguma, D.T (2008).Uganda Microfinance Industry Assessment: Association of

            Microfinance Institutions of Uganda

Bald.J. (2000). Liquidity Management: A Toolkit for Microfinance Institutions.

Bank of Uganda (1999): BOU Policy Statement on Micro- Finance            Regulation,     Ban

Barney, J. B. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage, Journal of

            Management, 17(1), 99 -120.

Bategeka, L. (1999): Uganda’s Achiefments and Callenges in the Financial           Sector:             Whose Interests Count In: „The Ugandan Banker“, Vol. 7, No. 4,           Uganda            Institute of bankers

Beck, T., Cull, R. and Jerome, A. (2005). Bank privatization and performance: empirical evidence          from Nigeria. Journal of Banking and Finance, 29:2355-79. 

Bisbe, J. “The Effects of the Interactive Use of Management            Control            Systems on      Product Innovation,” Accounting, Organization             and      Society, Vol. 29, No. 8,          2004,   pp. 709-737.

CGAP (2000). Consultative Group to assist the poorest, available at: http://www.cgap.org

Chandan, J.S. ( 2004). MangementTheories and Practices. New Delhi

Chenhall R (2003). Management control systems design within its organizationalcontext:            findings from contingency-based       research and directions for the future. Acc Org      Soc      28: 127–168.

Chenhall, R.H., (2003). Management control systems design within its       organizational context: findings from contingency-based research   and             directions for the         future. Accounting,    Organizations and       Society 28, 127–168

Chow, C.W., Shields, M.D., & Wu, A. (1999). The importance of national culture in the design of and preference for management     controls for multi-national operations.      Accounting, Organizations and Society, Vol. 24, 561-582.

Collis, J. and Hussey, R. (2003). Business Research: A Practical Guide for Undergraduate          and      Postgraduate Students, 2nd Edition, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Creswell, J. W. (2003). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches, 2nd Edition, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 

Creswell, J. W. and Plano Clark, V. L. (2007). Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods            Research, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Cull, R., Demirgüc-Kunt, A and Morduch, J. (2007). Financial performance and outreach: a         global analysis of leading microbanks, Economic Journal, 117:F107-F133.

Davis, J.H., Schoorman, F.D., and Donaldson, L. (1997). Toward a Stewardship Theory of           Management.

Field, A. (2006). Discovering Statistics using SPSS (2nd Ed.). Sage, London.

Freeman, R.E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder ApproachBoston: Pitman.

Gerrit Sarens and Mohammad J. Abdolmohammadi (2010), Monitoring     Effects of the Internal            Audit Function: Agency Theory versus other Explanatory Variables. International   Journal of Auditing. Blackwell Publishing Ltd

Gibbons, D.S. & Meehan, J.W. (2000), The Micro credit summit’s challenge: working     towards           institutional financial self-sufficiency while maintaining a commitment       to serving the poorest families, Journal of micro finance, 1(1), 131 – 191.

Haning A (2002). Microfinance in Uganda: Lessons from FNCA clients    Analysis          Kampala, United Press Ltd.

Hulme .  (1996): Finance Against Poverty, Volumes 1 and 2, Routledge, London.

Hulme, D. (2000): “Impact Assessment Methodologies for Microfinance    Theory,            Experience and Better Practice”, University of             Manchester, Manchester, UK.

Jensen M., and Meckling, W. (1976). Theory of the firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs     and Ownership Structure. Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 3, No. 4: pp. 305-360.

Johnson, R. B. and Onwuegbuzie, A. J. (2004). Mixed methods research: a research paradigm      whose time has come. Educational Researcher, 33 (7), 14-26.

Kalyango,D.L.(2005). Uganda’s Experience with Tiered Banking Regulation, Bank of

            Uganda, Seminar Paper.

Karlan, D. and Goldberg, N. (2007) The Impact of Microfinance: A Review of Keat, R. and         Urry, J. (1982). Social Theory as Science, 2nd Edition, London: Routledge & Kegan            Paul.

Ledgerwood et al (1999). Microfinance Handbook: An Institutional and     Financial        Perspective.    Sustainable Banking with the Poor, World             Bank,   1818 H St.,      Washington

Lee. K. (2005). KMPI: Measuring Knowledge          Management   Performance,”            Information & Lessons from Selected African Countries.‟ International Monetary           Fund    Limited, England.

LOGOTRI (2006) „Building Sustainable Microfinance System: A Growth Catalyst

            Makerere University Printery, Kampala.

Malmi T (1997) Towards explaining activity-based costing failure: accounting and control in       a          decentralized organization. Management Accounting Research 8: 459−480.

McMahon RGP (2001) Business growth and performance and the financial reporting practices     of Australian manufacturing SMEs. Journal of Small Business Management 39(2):152−164.

Merchant, K et al. (2007). Management Control       Systems – Performance, Measurement,          Merchant, K. A,(2007). A review of the literature on control       and      accountability Handbook of Management Accounting          Research, (Ed.) C.      S. Chapman, A. G.      Hopwood, and M. D. Shields,      785-804, Amsterdam:             Elsevier Press.

Merchant KA (1997) Modern Management Control Systems: texts and cases. Prentice

            Hall, New Jersey, US.

Meyer, R. J. (2002) „Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assessing the Poor in         Asia.‟ ADB Institute Research Paper, No. 49. 

Meyer, R. L. (2002). “Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assisting the         Poor    in         Asia” ADB Institute Research Paper, No 49. 2nd ed., Essex: Prentice Hall.

Michael A. Hitt, Robert E. Hoskisson, Richard A. Johnson, Douglas D.      Moesel. (1996).           The      Market for Corporate Control and Firm             Innovation

MicroBanking Bulletin. (1998), Issue No. 2. Calmeadow, 733 15th St. NW, Suite 700      Microfinance Information eXchange (MIX).

Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development (2000): „Draft Final   Report on        the District Resource Endowment Profile Survey             (DREPS)“,Vol.II, Survey of   Microfinance Institutions, The Republic of Uganda,             Kampala

Mitchell, R.K., Agle, B.R., and Wood, D.J. (1997). Toward a Theory of Stakeholder         Identification and        Salience: Defining the Principle of Who and What Really            Counts.            Academy of Management       Review, Vol.   22, No. 4: pp. 853–886.

Nannyonjo, S. & Nsubuga,D. (2004). Bank of Uganda Working Paper, WP04

Navajas. S. M.et al. (2000), “Micro credit and the Poorest of the Poor: Theory and Evidence       from    Bolivia”, World Development, Vol. 28,             No. 2, pp 333- 346,     Elsevier           Science Ltd

Obwona, M. B.; Ddumba-Ssentamu, J. (1998): „Household Savings in       Developing      Economies: Evidence from Microdata from Uganda“, Makerere University, Uganda

Office of the Prime Minister (2000): „Basic Facts about rural Microfinance          support            Projekt (RMSP)“, The Republic of Uganda, Kampala

Opiokello, D. (2000): Role Of The Central Bank In Developing Rural         Financial Markets:     The Case Of Uganda. In: „After the Reforms:             Which Way Forward for Central        Banks in Rural Finance“, Afraca        Rural Finance Series, Vol.1, African Rural and        Agricultural             Credit Association, Nairobi

Otero, M. and E. Rhyne (1994), The New World of Micro enterprise Finance,        Hartford,         Kumarian Press Outreach and Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions in Africa.

Pablos, P. (2004), “The nature of knowledge-based resources through the design of an      architecture of human resource management systems: implications for strategic        management”, International Journal of Technology Management, Vol. 27 No.6/7,             pp.23-45.

Pamela,  M.P.(2001). Management:  Performance in Spanish Banking”.    Journal of Banking     and Finance,18

Performance monitoring tool (PMT) (2006|09) for Microfinance Institutions.

            Accessed at www.mixmarket.com.

Rutherford, S. (1997) Informal Financial Services in Dhaka‟s Slums. In: Wood et al

Rutherford, S. (1999): „Savings and the Poor the Methods, use and impact of        savings by       the poor of East Africa“, Micro Save-Africa, Kampala

Saunders, M. and Lewis, P. (2003). Research Methods for Business Students, Essex, Pearson       Education

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Silverman, D. (2001). Interpreting Qualitative Data – Methods for Analysing Talking, Text          and      Interaction, 2nd Edition, London: Sage Publications

Slater, S.F., & Narver, J.C., (2007). Market orientation and the learning organization,

            Journal of Marketing, 59(7), 63 – 74.

Snell, S. A.,(1992) “Control Theory in Strategic Human Resource Management: the         Mediating Effect of Administrative Information,” Academy of Management Journal, 

Tashakkori, A. and Creswell, J. W. (2007). Exploring the nature of research questions in mixed methods research. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 1 (3), 207-211. 

Ticehurst, G.W. and Veal, A.J. (1999). Business Research Methods: A Managerial Approach,      Addison Wesley Longman Australia Pty Limited.

Waterfield, C. (1998). Handbook for Management Information Systems for Microfinance Institutions. Technical Tool Series No.1. Consultative Group to Assist the Poorest    (CGAP), 1818  H St. NW, Washington, D.C

Watts, H. (1999). A Conceptual Framework to Financial Reports and Internal Audits. Vol.          20,Pp. 753-778.

Widener, S. (2007). An empirical analysis of the levers of control   framework.      Accounting,    Organizations and Society 32, 757-788.

Woller, G. (2000) „Reassessing the Financial Viability of Village Banking: Past    Performance    and Future Prospects.‟ Micro-Banking Bulletin, Microfinance

Woolf, E. (1992). Auditing Today (3rd ed.).Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.work       study,50           (5), 179 – 189. Working Paper Series No. 51

Agricultural Marketing: Enhancing Efficiency and Sustainability in the Agriculture Sector

Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Agricultural marketing is a critical component of the agricultural sector that involves various activities, processes, and systems that facilitate the movement of agricultural products from producers to consumers. It encompasses the planning, execution, and monitoring of the production, transportation, storage, and distribution of agricultural goods. Efficient agricultural marketing is essential for the growth and sustainability of the agricultural industry, as it ensures fair returns to farmers, availability of goods to consumers, and stability in prices.

Importance of Agricultural Marketing

Agricultural marketing plays a pivotal role in the agricultural value chain. Here are some of its key significance:

1. Economic Growth:

Efficient agricultural marketing contributes to the overall economic development of a country by promoting increased agricultural production and generating income for farmers and stakeholders. When farmers receive fair prices for their produce, they are incentivized to invest in better farming practices, leading to higher productivity.

2. Price Stabilization:

By balancing demand and supply, agricultural marketing helps in stabilizing the prices of agricultural products. This is achieved through effective storage, distribution, and market intelligence, which enables market players to anticipate changes in demand and supply and make informed decisions.

3. Market Access:

Agricultural marketing facilitates access to markets for farmers, allowing them to sell their produce beyond local markets. This increases market reach and creates opportunities for farmers to engage with larger markets, both domestic and international, thereby expanding their customer base.

4. Reduction of Wastage:

Efficient marketing reduces post-harvest losses by ensuring that produce reaches consumers in a timely manner. Proper storage and transportation facilities are vital components of this, minimizing spoilage and wastage of agricultural goods.

5. Consumer Satisfaction:

Agricultural marketing ensures that consumers have access to a variety of high-quality agricultural products at reasonable prices. This results in enhanced consumer satisfaction and promotes a healthier population.

Components of Agricultural Marketing

Agricultural marketing comprises several key components that work in conjunction to facilitate the smooth movement of agricultural goods in the market:

1. Market Research and Information:

This component involves the collection and analysis of data related to agricultural production, demand, prices, and consumer preferences. Accurate market information helps farmers and other stakeholders make informed decisions regarding production, pricing, and market entry.

2. Storage and Warehousing:

Proper storage and warehousing facilities are crucial for preserving the quality and value of agricultural products. Storage facilities help in reducing post-harvest losses and ensuring a continuous supply of products in the market.

3. Transportation:

Efficient transportation systems are essential for the timely and cost-effective movement of agricultural products from production centers to consumption areas. Well-maintained transportation networks, including roads, railways, and ports, are vital for the success of agricultural marketing.

4. Processing and Value Addition:

Processing and value addition involve converting raw agricultural products into more marketable and valuable forms. This adds value to the produce and creates new market opportunities, encouraging a higher price realization for farmers.

5. Market Infrastructure:

Market infrastructure includes physical facilities such as market yards, wholesale markets, cold storage facilities, and packaging centers. These infrastructures provide a platform for buyers and sellers to interact and conduct transactions efficiently.

Challenges in Agricultural Marketing

Despite its importance, agricultural marketing faces various challenges that hinder its efficiency and growth:

1. Lack of Infrastructure:

Inadequate market infrastructure, including storage facilities, transportation networks, and processing units, can limit the smooth flow of agricultural goods and increase post-harvest losses.

2. Information Asymmetry:

Uneven access to market information and lack of transparency in pricing mechanisms often result in farmers not receiving fair prices for their produce.

3. Fragmented Markets:

Fragmented markets and a lack of a unified market approach can lead to inefficient pricing and distribution, impacting both farmers and consumers.

4. Policy and Regulatory Barriers:

Complex regulations and policies can hinder market access and growth, particularly for small-scale farmers and new market entrants.

Future Prospects

To overcome these challenges and enhance agricultural marketing, various stakeholders including governments, farmers, private sector entities, and development organizations need to work collaboratively. Investing in modern infrastructure, promoting digital technologies for market information dissemination, encouraging farmer cooperatives, and reforming policies can significantly improve agricultural marketing efficiency.

Efforts should be directed towards creating an integrated and well-organized agricultural marketing system that not only benefits farmers but also ensures food security, stable prices, and economic development. By addressing the existing challenges and fostering a conducive environment for agricultural marketing, we can unlock the true potential of the agricultural sector and contribute to sustainable growth and development.

References

Agarwal, Sarika, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 1.

Ayuba, Dauda. “Understanding the Urban Development Dynamics.” Think India Journal 26.3 (2023): 13-17.

Bhan, Suraj, and U. K. Behera. “Conservation agriculture in India–Problems, prospects and policy issues.” International Soil and Water Conservation Research 2.4 (2014): 1-12.

Dhawan, Vibha. “Water and agriculture in India.” Background paper for the South Asia expert panel during the Global Forum for Food and Agriculture. Vol. 28. 2017.

Deshpande, Tanvi. “State of agriculture in India.” PRS Legislative Research 53.8 (2017): 6-7.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.” Think India Journal 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.” International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR) 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Introduction to Sociology.” New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields (2016): 1.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.” International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET) 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

The Pashupati Seal: Ancient Evidence of Yoga and Meditation in India

By-Aditi Chhetri

India, often referred to as the cradle of civilization, boasts a rich heritage that spans thousands of years. Among its most profound contributions to the world are the practices of yoga and meditation. These ancient disciplines have transcended time and geography to become global phenomena, transforming the lives of millions. While their origins are deeply rooted in India’s history, one piece of archaeological evidence stands out as a testament to their antiquity – the Pashupati Seal. The Pashupati Seal is one of the earliest known depictions of yoga and meditation in the world. It is also one of the most important pieces of evidence for the Indus Valley Civilization’s religious beliefs and practices

Pashupati Seal, c. 2000 BCE

• Unveiling the Pashupati Seal :

The Pashupati Seal is a small but significant artifact that was unearthed in the early 20th century at the Mohenjo-Daro archaeological site in present-day Pakistan. Mohenjo-Daro, one of the major cities of the ancient Indus Valley Civilization, thrived around 2500 BCE, making it one of the world’s oldest urban centers. The seal, discovered in the ruins of this ancient city, offers valuable insights into the practices of yoga and meditation that were prevalent over 4,000 years ago.

• Deciphering the Seal :

The Pashupati Seal features a prominent figure seated in a yogic posture. This figure, often referred to as the “Proto-Shiva,” sits cross-legged with a horned headdress and an array of animals surrounding him. While interpretations may vary, many scholars believe this figure to be an early representation of Lord Shiva, a central deity in the yogic and meditative traditions of India. The seal’s name, “Pashupati,” is significant. It is a reference to Lord Shiva’s role as the “Lord of Beasts” or “Lord of Animals.” This association with animals suggests a deep connection between nature and meditation, a theme that resonates in many yoga practices today.

Mohenjo-daro


• The Yogic Asana:

One of the most striking aspects of the Pashupati Seal is the seated posture of the central figure. The figure’s legs are crossed in a manner reminiscent of modern-day yoga asanas like Padmasana (Lotus Pose) or Siddhasana (Perfect Pose). This posture is a fundamental element of yogic practice, symbolizing stability, concentration, and inner harmony. Yoga, in its essence, is the union of mind, body, and spirit. The yogic asanas, including the one depicted on the Pashupati Seal, are integral to achieving this union. They provide a physical foundation for meditation and self-realization, echoing the timeless wisdom of the ancient yogis.

• The Meditative Connection:

Beyond the yogic posture, the seal also suggests a connection between yoga and meditation. The figure’s serene and contemplative expression reflects the meditative state. Meditation is a core component of yoga, serving as a means to quiet the mind, delve into one’s inner self, and attain a heightened state of awareness.
The animals surrounding the figure on the seal are worth noting as well. These animals include a bull, an elephant, and two antelopes. In yogic and meditative symbolism, these animals often represent the various aspects of the mind and the challenges one must overcome on the spiritual path. The presence of these animals reinforces the idea that the seal is not merely a representation of physical yoga postures but a profound metaphor for the inner journey of self – discovery and transformation.

• The Age of the Seal:

Dating the Pashupati Seal is a subject of scholarly debate, but it is generally believed to be from the mature phase of the Indus Valley Civilization, around 2500 BCE. This dating places the seal’s creation over 4,000 years ago, making it one of the earliest depictions of yoga and meditation in human history. The antiquity of the Pashupati Seal challenges the common misconception that yoga and meditation are recent trends. Instead, it underscores the enduring nature of these practices, which have been passed down through generations in India for millennia.

• Other evidence of yoga and meditation in the Indus Valley Civilization:

In addition to the Pashupati Seal, there is other evidence to suggest that yoga and meditation were practiced in the Indus Valley Civilization. For example, archaeologists have discovered a number of other seals and figurines that depict people in yogic postures.

One particularly notable example is a seal from Harappa that depicts a figure seated in a lotus position, which is a common yogic posture. The figure’s hands are resting on the knees, and the figure’s eyes are closed. This suggests that the figure is meditating. Another example is a figurine from Mohenjo-daro that depicts a figure seated in a cross-legged posture, with the hands resting on the knees. The figure’s eyes are also closed. This suggests that this figure is also meditating.

The evidence from the Indus Valley Civilization suggests that yoga and meditation were an important part of the religious and spiritual beliefs of the people of the IVC. Yoga and meditation were likely used to improve physical and mental health, to achieve spiritual enlightenment, and to connect with the divine.


• Yoga and Meditation:

A Living Tradition while the Pashupati Seal provides compelling evidence of the ancient roots of yoga and meditation in India, these practices are far from relics of the past. They continue to thrive and evolve in the modern world, transcending cultural and geographic boundaries. Yoga studios and meditation centers have sprouted up worldwide, offering people from all walks of life the opportunity to experience the physical, mental, and spiritual benefits of these age-old disciplines.

• The Universal Appeal:

The universal appeal of yoga and meditation lies in their adaptability and inclusivity. They can be tailored to suit individual needs and beliefs, making them accessible to people of all backgrounds and faiths. Whether one seeks physical fitness, stress relief, inner peace, or spiritual enlightenment, yoga and meditation offer a path towards these goals.


• Yoga: A Path to Physical and Mental Well-being

In today’s fast-paced world, where stress and sedentary lifestyles take a toll on physical and mental health, yoga emerges as a powerful antidote. The physical postures, or asanas, strengthen the body, increase flexibility, and improve posture. Yoga also enhances mental well-being by promoting relaxation, reducing anxiety, and enhancing focus.

• Meditation: Cultivating Inner Peace

Meditation, on the other hand, is a gateway to inner peace and self-awareness. It encourages mindfulness and helps individuals gain control over their thoughts and emotions. Regular meditation practice has been linked to reduced stress, improved emotional well-being, and increased resilience.

• The Spiritual Quest:

For those on a spiritual quest, yoga and meditation offer a deeper connection with the self and the universe. They provide a framework for exploring profound questions about the nature of existence, consciousness, and the interconnectedness of all life. In this sense, they serve as a timeless path for seekers of truth and enlightenment.

• The Pashupati Seal and the modern world : The Pashupati Seal remains an important symbol of yoga and meditation today. It is often used in yoga studios and meditation centers, and it is also featured on many yoga and meditation products.
The Pashupati Seal is a reminder of the ancient roots of yoga and meditation. It also serves as a reminder of the importance of these practices for physical, mental, and spiritual well-being.

The Pashupati Seal stands as a silent yet profound testament to the ancient origins of yoga and meditation in India. It reminds us that these practices have withstood the test of time, evolving and adapting while retaining their core essence. From the banks of the Indus River to yoga studios around the world, the pursuit of physical and spiritual well-being remains a timeless and universal endeavor.
As we delve into the depths of yoga and meditation, we find that their true essence transcends the boundaries of time and place. They are not merely exercises or techniques but pathways to self-discovery, inner peace, and a deeper understanding of the universe. The Pashupati Seal, with its ancient yogic figure, continues to inspire and guide us on this transformative journey, echoing the wisdom of the sages who walked this path millennia ago.

REFERENCES

Kuzmint, O. (2017, October 11). The History of Yoga from Pashupati to Patanjali – Bahiranga.com. Bahiranga.com. https://bahiranga.com/the-history-of-yoga-from-pashupati-to-patanjali/

Pattanaik, D. (2022, February 25). The real Pashupati. The Hindu. https://www.thehindu.com/society/history-and-culture/pashupati-and-the-harappan-seal/article65070760.ece

MAP Academy. (2023, July 26). Pashupati Seal – MAP Academy. https://mapacademy.io/article/pashupati-seal/

Wikipedia contributors. (2023). Pashupati seal. Wikipedia. https://en.m.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pashupati_seal

Amar Chitra Katha. (2022, July 12). The Pashupati Seal of Mohenjo-Daro | Amar Chitra Katha. Amar Chitra Katha |. https://www.amarchitrakatha.com/history_details/the-pashupati-seal-of-mohenjo-daro/

Learning Gap Assessment in English 9

1Glenn I. Arbis  2Reymon R. Dumale  3Michel D. Galavia  4Mark Kevin C. Marbani, 5Michelle M. Navarro, 6Veverlyn A. Salvador, 7Jet Seth Mae A. Segura

1 2 3 4 5 6 7Faculty, St. Paul University Surigao

ORCID: 0000-0002-8644-0298

ORCID: 0000-0003-1159-8936

ORCID: 0000-0001-7368-5408

4ORCID: 0000-0002-8777-2577

ORCID: 0000-0003-4620-9072

ORCID: 0000-0001-5043-7313

      7ORCID: 0000-0001-5817-0043    

Abstract – This study investigated the learning gaps in English 9 of the Junior high school students at St. Paul University Surigao. In this study, quantitative quasi-experimental research using a pretest-posttest design was employed. The results showed that the pre-test/post-test design is more effective in achieving the learners’ mastery of the competency given than post-test- only design. While the interventions given by the teacher for the First Quarter are effective in mastering the competencies, a significant difference is found, especially for those with low mastery levels. This indicates the need for targeted interventions to bridge the learning gaps and further develop students’ understanding of the aspects of language arts that are essential for comprehension, expression, and effective communication. The study recommends that Grade 9 students execute targeted interventions that address the identified learning gaps. These interventions should consist of more modified teaching methods and resources, effective communication between educators, administrators, parents, and communities, and continual formative assessment. By implementing these suggestions, educators can significantly improve their students’ academic performance and competency in English.  

Keywords: Learning gap, Learning gap assessment, English 9, Mastery, Performance

I. Introduction

            In modern educational systems, the assessment of learning gaps plays a vital role in identifying areas where students may require additional support and intervention. The concept of learning gaps refers to the disparities between what students have learned and what they are expected to know at a particular grade level or academic milestone. These gaps can hinder their progress and overall academic achievement if left unaddressed.

            Moreover, Integrated English 9 serves as a pivotal year in secondary education, as it builds upon the foundation laid in earlier grades and prepares students for advanced studies. It encompasses various aspects of language arts, including reading, writing, speaking, and listening, which are essential for comprehension, expression, and effective communication

            Understanding the root causes of these learning gaps is crucial for educators to develop targeted interventions and support systems that address the unique needs of individual students. By identifying the factors contributing to these disparities, educators can implement evidence-based strategies to minimize learning gaps and create a more inclusive and equitable learning environment.

            In addition, the COVID-19 pandemic has widened the learning gap in English proficiency among students, as online learning platforms may not adequately address the needs of diverse learners (Smith, 2021). According to a study by Johnson and Brown (2022), the disruption caused by the pandemic has led to significant setbacks in English language acquisition, particularly for students from low-income backgrounds.

            In connection with this, diagnostic tests were administered at the start of each quarter at the Basic Education Department of St. Paul University Surigao. Assessments of learning gaps give teachers the ability to precisely identify students’ gaps in English knowledge. By evaluating students’ comprehension and conceptual understanding, teachers gain knowledge of the areas in which students’ struggle. The use of this data assists in the development of instructional strategies and materials that are specifically tailored to the needs of particular students or groups. Without such assessment, students with knowledge gaps might struggle and regress in comparison to their peers, preventing them from moving forward generally in English education.

             By utilizing efficient learning gap evaluation methodologies, a more inclusive and effective learning environment may be created where students can develop a solid foundation in English topics and reach their full potential. This study evaluated first-quarter students from St. Paul University Surigao’s identified learning gaps in English 9.

II. Statement of the Problem

This study aimed to determine the learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023. Specifically, it sought to answer the following questions:

  1. What are the identified learning gaps in English 9?
  2. What is the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9?
  3. Is there a significant difference in the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9?
  4. What interventions may be proposed?

III. Hypothesis

            At 0.05 level of significance, it is hypothesized that there is no significant difference in the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9.

IV. Methodology

In this study, the researchers used a quasi-experimental research method, employing a pretest and posttest design. In this design, the dependent variable is measured once before and once after the intervention or treatment in the test is administered. The participants involved in the research study were the Grade 9 students at St. Paul University Surigao- Basic Education Department during the First Quarter of the School Year 2022-2023, the resumption of face-to-face classes after the global crisis brought by COVID-19 pandemic. Utilizing a validated test-questionnaire, the test was administered to 32 students out of 33, which comprised 97% population of the total number of participants. The test-questionnaire encompassed the learning competencies indicated for the first quarter in the English 9 level, thus, concreting and measuring the desired level of competency for each specified criterion. The participants were given intervention as specified in their least learned competencies before employing the posttest. The administration of pretest and posttest was done during the synchronous face-to-face classes of the English subject.

Pertinent to the declaration of policy enshrined in the Data Privacy Act of 2012, the researchers ensured that the data gathered should be placed with utmost confidentiality. Hence, students were informed of the essential purpose of the undertakings and its benefits. Further, the researchers’ questionnaires undergone rigorous review and validation to ensure its reliability, validity and purposefully achieve consistency of the desired outcomes.

To achieve the primary objective of having the most reliable and accurate results and findings on the learning gap analysis of the Grade 9 students in English, the researchers made use of the following statistical tools to treat and analyze the data:

Paired t-test. It is used to test the difference between a set of paired samples.

Frequency Count and Percentage Computation. These were used to determine the distribution of the correct responses of the respondents.

The collected data provided would play a crucial role in the study. In this regard, the researchers established an unbiased manner of providing the test questionnaire without having the participants know the questions to be administered to prevent inconsistencies that would have risked the data retrieved. Hence, under no circumstances should the researchers influence the participants’ answer by inappropriate interventions or disclosure of answers prior to the implementation of the pretest and posttest examinations.

V. Results and Discussions

Identified learning gaps in English 9

            Table 1 presents the identified learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023.

Table 1. Identified learning gaps in English 9

Learning CompetenciesPre-TestPost-Test
%Interpretation%Interpretation
The learner…
EC: Identifies the use of modals in expressing permission, obligation, and prohibition75.00%Moving Towards Mastery68.75%Moving Towards Mastery
PPre-requisites:DDetermines the use of conditionals in expressing argumentsEC: uses conditionals in expressing arguments EN9G-IIe-2031.25%Low Mastery57.29%Average Mastery
EEmploys the appropriate communicative styles for various situations (intimate, casual, conversational, consultative, frozen) EN9OL-Ic60.42%Average Mastery76.04%Moving Towards Mastery

As presented in the table, this provides information on the learning competencies of a learner before and after a learning intervention. Firstly, the enabling competency identifying the use of modals in expressing permission, obligation, and prohibition got 75.00% in the pre-test and 68.75% in the post-test, both interpreted as Moving Towards Mastery. The percentage of correct responses in the post-test had a slight decrease of 6.25% compared to the pre-test. Nevertheless, the responses of the students in the competency remain as Moving Towards Mastery. 

Secondly, the pre-requisite competency determining the use of conditionals in expressing arguments and enabling competency uses conditionals in expressing arguments EN9G-IIe-20, got 31.25% in the pre-test, interpreted as Low Mastery. This was supported by the study of Jusuf et. al., 2021, states that one factor affecting the student’s performance is lack of exposure to English language. However, 57.29% in the post-test, interpreted as Average Mastery. This indicates that there is an improvement on the performance of the students.

Lastly, the competency employing the appropriate communicative styles for various situations (intimate, casual, conversational, consultative, frozen) got 60.42% in the pre-test, interpreted as Average Mastery and 76.04% in the Post-Test, interpreted as Moving Towards Mastery. This implies that there is an improvement in the percentage of correct responses of students after the intervention was conducted. 

On the whole, the learner’s performance has shown improvement in two out of the three learning competencies. They have made progress in identifying the use of modals and employing appropriate communicative styles. However, their performance in using conditionals to express arguments still needs improvement, although they have made some progress.

Pre- and Post-test Performance of the learners 

            Table 2 presents the identified learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023. 

Table 2. Identified learning gaps in English 9

Scoresf (n=32)%
Pre-Test
Average 26.25
Good 1856.25
Excellent1237.50
Post-Test
Good 1443.75
Excellent1856.25

As presented in the table, this provides the scores and percentages of the 32 participants in the pre-test and post-test. In Pre-test, two (2) participants got 6.25%, scored Average. Eighteen (18) participants got 56.25%, scored Good. And twelve (12) got 37.50%, scored Excellent. On the other hand, in the post-test, fourteen (14) participants got 43.75, scored Good and eighteen (18) participants got 56.25%, scored Excellent. 

Overall, in the pre-test, the majority of participants (56.25%) scored Good, followed by 37.50% of participants, scored Excellent, and a small percentage (6.25%) scored Average. In the post-test, the distribution shifted slightly, with 43.75% of participants scored Good and the majority (56.25%), scored Excellent. This indicates an improvement in the overall performance of the participants between the pre-test and post-test, as there was an increase in the percentage of participants in the Excellent range and a decrease in the percentage in the Good range. However, it’s important to note that the exact improvement or change in individual scores cannot be determined from this table alone.

Table 3. Significant Difference of the Identified learning gaps in English 9

Scorestdfp-valueDecision
Pre-Test – Post-Test-2.98310.006Reject Ho

Findings revealed that at 0.05 level of significance there is a significant difference in the pre-test and post-test results after giving an intervention, especially to those with low mastery levels (t (31)=-2.98, p =0.006). This means that the interventions used by the teacher are effective in mastering the competencies in the First Quarter of English 9 of the school year 2022-2023. 

According to the study by Thompson et al. (2022), the interventions implemented by the teachers were found to be effective in enhancing students’ mastery of competencies. The study reported significant improvements in student performance after the interventions were administered. This could entail a change in how they approach the students’ preferences, new instructional materials, and revised class activities. Additionally, teachers should spend more time on students who are falling behind in class, explain everything in detail, and stick to a structured lesson plan. Every student should have their needs met, and instruction should be given with more fervor, repetition, and regularity. Time should be given for students to consider what they have learned or absorbed. Teachers should implement formative assessments to track students’ performance, assess their progress, and work to close the achievement gap. They must establish standards, devise achievable objectives, be honest with the students regarding their performance, and utilize technology to advance. Furthermore, according to Johnson and Smith (2021), bridging the learning gap requires targeted interventions and instructional strategies tailored to students’ individual needs. Additionally, a study by Roberts et al. (2020) found that implementing personalized learning plans significantly improved academic outcomes for students at risk of falling behind.

                                                VI. Conclusions

Based on the findings of the study, the following conclusions were drawn;

  1. Pre-test/post-test design is more effective in achieving the learners’ mastery of the competency given than post- test- only design.
  2. Interventions given by the teachers play a very important role and are efficacious in mastering the competencies of the learners.

VII. Recommendation

From the conclusions drawn, the following recommendations are given;

  1. Effective communication between educators, administrators, parents, and communities is among the most crucial elements in bridging the learning gap.
  2. Teachers should intensify the use of pre- test/ post-test design, injecting a variety of engagement activities/ intervention to sustain its effectiveness and eventually enhance the academic achievement of the students.
  3. Students together with their parents are encouraged to collaborate and cooperate on the use of pre- test/ post- test design implemented by the teachers to track students’ performance, assess their progress, and work to close the achievement gap.

IX. References

Johnson, B., & Brown, C. (2022). Effects of the COVID-19 pandemic on English language learning: A case study of low-income students. International Journal of Applied Linguistics, 40(3), 189-205.

Johnson, R., & Smith, S. (2021). Bridging the learning gap: Targeted interventions and instructional strategies. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78(2), 145-162.

Jusuf, S., Fatsah H., Dako, R., 2021 Students’ Performance in Speaking English (A Case Study on Students’ Poor Performance In Speaking English)

Roberts, L., Brown, K., & Davis, M. (2020). Personalized learning plans: A pathway to improved academic outcomes. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 35(4), 321-335.

Smith, A. (2021). The impact of COVID-19 on education: Challenges and opportunities. Journal of Education and Development, 25(2), 45-60.

Thompson, A., Smith, B., & Johnson, C. (2022). Enhancing students’ mastery of competencies: Effective interventions implemented by teachers. Journal of Education, 45(3), 215-230.

LINK TO DOWNLOAD FULL PAPER

Parental Awareness of Child Labor Laws and Welfare Schemes for Female Child Labor: A Study in Kurnool District

Dr. A. Kusuma

Assistant Professor,

Department Sociology, S.V. University, Tirupati.

Email: drsumasvu20@gmail.com

drsumavsu09@gmail.com

K. Chinna Veeranna

Research Scholar.

Abstract

Child labor remains a pervasive violation of human rights, drawing global attention to the welfare of children. The 20th century marked a significant turning point in the advancement of child welfare, leading to heightened awareness of children’s rights as distinct individuals. This study aims to assess the level of parental awareness regarding government welfare schemes designed to support female child laborers. Our findings reveal that 46.3% of respondents acknowledge that child labor forces children into premature adulthood, leaving them vulnerable to exploitation due to their vulnerability. Furthermore, 33.5% of respondents recognize that a sense of inferiority among child laborers stifles their courage and creativity. The creation of additional employment opportunities for unskilled and unemployed individuals in rural areas can contribute to economic growth. Implementing awareness generation programs focusing on child labor laws and involving various stakeholders such as government departments, youth associations, self-help groups (SHGs), and civil society members is crucial for reducing the prevalence of child labor.

Keywords: Child Labor, Welfare, Female Child Labor, Economic Development, Legislation, Parental Awareness

Introduction

Child labor remains a pressing concern in India, with a pronounced presence in rural areas. Although legislative measures have been introduced worldwide to restrict the employment of children below a certain age and define acceptable conditions for minors working in various professions, the effectiveness of laws designed to protect children from hazardous labor is often lacking. In many instances, children find themselves aiding family members in agricultural endeavors, working as part of contractual family labor arrangements, or participating in plantation work. Rural India witnesses a common practice of school-aged children engaging in agricultural work as part of their family responsibilities. Regrettably, the implementation of Child Labor Laws at the state and district levels has been inadequate.

This study seeks to shed light on the perspectives of parents and employers regarding child labor issues, aiming to enhance their awareness, knowledge, and understanding of the prevalence and conditions of child labor within the study area. The situation of female child laborers is especially distressing due to gender discrimination prevalent in many Indian societies. Agriculture, which contributes three-fourths of the national income and supports over 75 percent of the population for subsistence, is heavily intertwined with child labor. Poverty and the absence of social security remain primary drivers of child labor, trapping children in work that offers limited opportunities for physical, social, and mental development. Both girls and boys are ensnared in the worst forms of child labor, but societal expectations, duties, and responsibilities imposed on girls often render them more susceptible to exploitation. Addressing the issue of female child labor is a complex challenge, compounded by the fact that the labor of female children is often unacknowledged or underrepresented in formal labor statistics. The absence of quality universal education further contributes to children dropping out of school and entering the labor force, making it difficult to accurately detect the true extent of child labor.

Welfare schemes for female child labor are essential in combating this pervasive violation of human rights. Child welfare has garnered global attention, particularly in the 20th century, with growing awareness of children’s rights as independent entities. Article 18 of the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child in 1989 emphasizes the need to protect children from economic exploitation and hazardous work that interferes with their education, health, or overall development. The International Labor Organization (ILO) also opposes child labor, particularly in situations where children face educational and social disadvantages or work in exploitative conditions harmful to their well-being.

The Indian Government recognizes child labor because of poverty and has taken steps to address it through legislative measures. In 1986, the 

Child Labor (Prohibition and Regulation) Act was enacted, replacing the Employment of Children Act of 1938. While the 1986 Act does not completely ban child labor, it focuses on “projecting” working children. The government has established unique schools to rehabilitate children engaged in dangerous or hazardous occupations, offering them education, vocational training, monthly stipends, and nutrition and health services.

The commitment of the Government of India to eradicate child labor is enshrined in the Constitution, which provides for the protection of children from engaging in economic activities unsuitable for their age. The Directive Principles of State Policy in the Constitution reinforce this commitment. The Central Labor Service (CLS), established in 1987, aims to improve industrial relations, labor welfare, and the enforcement of labor laws. Various schemes offering medical, housing, educational, recreational, water supply, and family welfare benefits are implemented for workers as part of the government’s ongoing efforts to safeguard the welfare of children and laborers.

Material and Methodology

Objectives

The present study broadly aims at studying the socio-economic and social participation, employment support and knowledge on welfare schemes available to female child labors. The following are the main objectives of the present study:

  • To study the level of knowledge on welfare schemes provided by the Government for girl child labor. 
  • To study the level of knowledge on girl child rights
  • To examine the economic and social conditions of female child labor in the sample district. 

  Sample design and study area

The researcher has purposively selected the Kurnool district due to its proximity and familiarity. Stratified random sampling method was used in selection of study sample. The study has conducted in six Mandal’s of three revenue divisions of the Kurnool district. Four villages from each Mandal were selected. 20 respondents each were selected at random in 24 villages and the total sample is comprises of 480 female child labor residing in agricultural families in the Kurnool district for the present study.  

 Results

Socio-Demographic Characteristics of the respondents

A study of the background characteristics of sampled population is an important task in the study. Several studies have been shown that there is a strong relationship between socio-economic status and Girl Child Labor in Agriculture Families. 

Table No.1: Percentage Distribution of the respondents by their Socio-Demographic Characteristics (N=480)

Socio-Demographic Characteristics of the respondentsFrequencyPercent
Age of the Respondent
5-8 Year479.8
9-11 Years11524.0
12-14 Years31866.2
Religion
Hindu24250.4
Muslim5912.3
Christian14630.4
Others336.9
Education
pre-school13728.5
Primary9820.4
Upper-Primary17736.9
High School6814.2
Work Experience (Years)
≤ 2 Years15131.5
2- 4Years22346.5
≥ 4 Years 10622.1
Girl Child Income
≤ 5000163.3
5001 and above46496.7
Source of Family Income
Agriculture17736.9
Allied Labor15532.3
Business459.4
Others10321.5

  Age plays an important role in measuring the respondent’s perception on their present working condition. Data has been collected on the girls who involved in the agriculture labor to analyze the girl’s working condition in the agriculture field. In the study area nearly two-thirds (66.3 %) of the respondents were in 12-14 years age group. One-fourth (24.0 %) of them were in 9-11 years and the remaining (9.8 %) were in the age group of 5-9 years. One half (50.4 %) of the respondents were Hindus, less than one-third (30.4 %) of them were Christians, 12.3 percent were Muslims and 6.9 percent belong to other religions. It is observed from the above table that more than one third (36.9 %) of the respondents have completed upper-primary education in the study area. More than one-fourth (28.5%) the girls had pre-school education and two-fifth (20.4 %) had primary education and 14.2 percent of the respondents had high school education. More than two-fourth (46.5 %) of the respondents were having ≤ 2 years of experience in the agriculture field, less than one-third (31.5 %) of them were working experience of 2-4 years and more than one-fifth (22.1 %) of them were working 4 years and above in the agriculture field. Almost all (96.7 %) of the respondents were getting a monthly income Rs. 5000 and above the study area. More than one-third (36.9 %) of the respondents’ parents were having agriculture background, followed by allied labor (32.3%) and other types of activities (21.5 %). 

The data was collected on parents opinion on child labor, sociological and economical aspects of the girl child labors in agricultural families namely on 1) fulfillment of social obligation 2) prone to habits like smoking, gambling and extravagancy 3) loss of potential intellectuals and thinkers in 4) prone to exploitation 5) violation of human rights 6) enforcement of laws 7) punishment under child labor laws 8) parents knowledge on girl child welfare schemes etc.

Table No. 3: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents opinion on Sociological and economical aspects of female child labor

Sociological aspectsAgreeDisagreeUn-DecidedTotal
GCs need proper nurture and nourishment to make them best fits in future lifeN3557154480
P7414.811.3100
CL has no rationale as it is the decision of the parent who are second to none as well wishes of childrenN25616064480
P53.333.313.3100
CL is not unethical rather fulfillment of social obligation by employers towards poor of whom government fails to take care ofN199173108480
P41.53622.5100
CL keeps children away from education and breeds illiteracy in a societyN20918784480
P43.53917.5100
Working children are prone to the habits of smoking, gambling, and extravagancyN20920071480
P43.541.714.8100
Child labor compels children to lead pre-mature adults’ livesN22216197480
P46.333.520.2100
CL has high opportunity cost as it leads to loss of potential intellectuals and thinkers N22518867480
P46.939.214100
Inferiority complex suppresses courage and creativity of childrenN16195224480
P33.519.846.7100
Children as workers are prone to exploitation by reason of their docilityN164157159480
P34.232.733.1100
Child labor is an off school of poverty which is the result of unequal distribution of wealthN28814151480
P6029.4106100

In the table no.3 shows that 33.5 percent of the respondents agreed that inferiority complex among the children will suppress their courage and creativity. 46.3% of the respondents agreed that child labor compels children to lead premature adults and there is a chance to exploit by reason of their docility. 43.5 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor leads to children keep away from education and breeds illiteracy in society. 46.9 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor is one of the opportunities to forego the potential intellectuals and thinkers of nation. Nearly three-fifth (60 %) of the respondent’s parents opinioned that unequal distribution of wealth is one of the reasons for child labor as it leads to more dropouts. Nearly three-fourth (74 %) of the parents agreed that girl child require proper nurture and nourishment to make them best fits in future life.

Table No 4: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents opinion on Sociological and economical aspects of female child labor 

Knowledge on Legal aspects AgreeDisagreeUn-DecidedTotal
Employing CL is a violation of human rightsN23521134480
P49447.1100
Employment of children in hazardous work is a crimeN20120079480
P41.941.716.5100
Child labor is a moral crime against humanityN21718380480
P45.238.116.7100
Hazardous nature of job coupled with excessive workload and long hours of work are so heinous crimeN138226116480
P28.847.124.2100
Child labor is a punishment to tender hands for no fault of theirs N111267102480
P23.155.621.3100
CL laws fail as these are unacceptable to people with unsound financial positionN14825181480
P30.852.316.9100
Weak enforcement of laws leads to child labor with impunityN141209130480
P29.443.527.1100
The parents of child workers shall be booked under the relevant lawsN144166170480
P3034.635.4100
Child labor shall be completely banned in all aspectsN20220573480
P42.142.715.2100
The employers of CL shall be dealt with stringent punitive measuresN136243101480
P28.350.621100
Enforcement of child labor laws shall be strictly observedN15527550480
P32.357.310.4100
Child labor is subject to punishment under child labor laws.N167112201480
P34.823.341.9100

In this study an attempt is made to assess the parents’ opinion on the sociological and economical aspect of the child labors related aspects. Nearly one-half (49 %) of the respondent’s agreed that working as a child labor is violation of human rights. 45.2 percent of respondents accepted that child labor is moral crime against humanity and 41.9 percent of the respondents agreed that employment of child in hazardous work is crime and 28.8 percent of respondent’s expressed that excessive workload and long hours of work in hazardous Work is heinous crime.  Only one-third (29.4 %) of the parents were having knowledge on child labor laws as they expressed that the Child labor laws are failed in implementation and weak enforcement of law were the causes of child labor.  Nearly one-third (32.3 %) of parents expressed that they have observed strict enforcement of child labor laws. 30% of the respondents were agreed that parents of the child labor should be punished under the child labor laws. More than one-third (34.8 %) of the respondents were aware that child labor is subject punishment under child labor laws. 42.1 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor shall be banned in all aspects. It is interesting to note that more than two-fifth (41.5 %) of the parents agreed that child labor is not an unethical and the employers of the child labor were giving an opportunity to get the financial source for those who are neglected by the governments. 

The findings from the above table shows that majority of the parents were aware of the ill effects of the child labor and the laws and functioning of law enforcement authorities related to child labor. 

Parent’s knowledge on various welfare schemes implemented by the government to avoid Child Labor is presented in the table no. 5. Cent percent of the respondents (100 %) in the study area agreed that free education for girls up to higher education will help to eradicate the child labor.  Higher proportion (85 %) of the respondent’s expressed that Balika Sam Rakshana scheme is very useful to balance sex ratio and prevent gender discrimination and the scheme is also encouraging employment skills, opportunities and creates awareness on health and family life education to girl Child.  More than one-half (51.7 %) of the respondents felt that Apana Beti Apne desh scheme is providing rehabilitation services for those who were rescued from child labor and brothel home. Similar percentage (62.5 %) of the respondents agreed that strict implementation of prenatal diagnostic technique act helps in reducing female feticides and the gender discrimination. The girl child agreed that implementing the constitutional provisions and human rights for girl child reduces gender discrimination (60 %) and welfare measures are sufficient to improve the girl child status provided by the government and non-government organizations (60.2 %). More than one-half (52.5 %) of the respondents agreed that national policy for children and legal enactment facilitates the development of girl child.

     Table No. 5: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents knowledge on welfare schemes for female child labor

Parents knowledge on welfare schemes AgreeDisagreeTotal
Free education for girls up to degree level is very beneficial for girl education N4800480
P1000.0100.0
Balika samrakshna pathakam is very useful to balance sex ratio and prevent gender discrimination N40872480
P8515100
The KB scheme is encouraging employment skills, opportunities, and health awareness of girl childrenN290190480
P60.439.6100
KB scheme is providing awareness on family life education to girl children N290190480
P60.439.6100.0
ABAD programmer is very useful to rehabilitate the girls who are rescued from CL and brothel homeN248232480
P51.748.3100.0
Strict implementation of pre –natal diagnostic technique Act, 1994 helps in reducing female feticides N300180480
P62.537.5100.0
Constitutional provision and human rights for GC reduces gender discrimination  N288192480
P6040100.0
National policy for children and legal enactments facilitates development of GC N252228480
P52.547.5100.0
The present welfare measures taken by govt; NGOs are sufficient to improve the girl child statusN289191480
P60.239.8100.0

Conclusion

Equality of opportunities is the foundation of modern welfare states.  The crucial role that education can play in the reduction of girl child labor and improvement in the economic wellbeing of individuals can go a long way in achieving such ends.  In India, poverty remains the key determinant of children not being sent to school. Most of the parents are not able to afford to send them to school. The path to progress in terms reducing the number of girl child laborer’s by taking into consideration the cultural and economic measures, their future will continue to remain bleak.  The study suggests that promotions of non-agricultural economic activities like micro and small industries and self-employment with the support of SHG groups (Women Groups) are the best alternatives to improve employment and income generation for the rural poor. Creation of more employment opportunities to the unskilled Unemployed will help to economic growth in rural areas. Through awareness generation programmes related to the Child Labor Laws with involvement of convergent departments, youth associations, SHGs, Civil Society members will be helping to   decrease the number of child labors. Educate the parents of girl child on importance of sufficient nutritious food and proper education for the growth of girl child and its impact on future generations.

Reference

  1. Asha Bajpai, (2011). Child Rights in India: Law, Policy, and Practice. Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
  2. B. Jaya Surian and D. Vezhavendan (2018). An Empirical Study on the Status of Child Labor before and after the Implementation of National Child Labor Project Scheme in India. International Journal of Pure and Applied Mathematics, Vol: 119, No. 17, 247-267; ISSN: 1314-3395.
  3. ILO (2010). Accelerating action against child labor – Global Report under the follow-up to the ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work. 
  4. Kumar Das and Sarojini Mishra (2005). Economic exploitation of girl child labor in India. Ahfad Journal, Vol. 22, Issue 2, Publisher: Ahfad University for Women
  5. M. Swaminathan (1998). “Economic growth and the persistence of child labor: evidence from an Indian city”.  World Development, vol. 26, no. 8, pp. 1513–1528.
  6. Pramod Kumar Agarwal, Dr. Anil Chandra Pathak (2015). A Socio – Economic Analysis of Child Labor in India. Lakshya: Journal of Science & Management (LJSM) – Volume -1, Issue-1.
  7. Rupinder Singh (2019). Child Labor In India: A Legal Study, International Journal of Research and Analytical Reviews, Vol: 6, Iss: 1. 
  8. Sanjay Mohapatra and Manusmita Desh  (2011). “Child Labor”- A Product of Socio-Economic Problem for India, Findings and Preventives- A Case of Bhubaneswar (A State Capital of India). International Research Journals, (ISSN: 2141-5161) Vol. 2(6) pp. 1199-1209. http://www.interesjournals.org/ER&nbsp;
  9. Srikanth Bolla (2010). Child Labor in India. http://web.mit.edu/angles/2010_Srikanth_Bolla.html
  10. UNICEF (2021). Child Labor and Exploitation, UNICEF main web page, https://www.unicef.org/india/what-we-do/child-labour-exploitation
  11. Vineet J Samuel. (2018) Child Labor & Child Rights in India: Myth or Reality, Economic Justice.  https://www.oxfamindia.org/blog/child-labour-india
  12. World Day Against Child Labor (2020). Preventing child labor in agriculture during COVID-19 and beyond. News and Press Release Source FAO, Posted 12 Jun 2020.
  13. Y. Janardhana Reddy (2020). An Analytical Study of Child Labor in India. Vol-15-Issue-4.https://www.ilo.org/ipec/areas/Agriculture/WCMS_172261/lang-en/index.htm
  14. Rupinder Singh (2019). Child Labor in India: A Legal Study. International Journal of Research and Analytical Reviews, Vol: 6, Iss: 1.

LINK TO DOWNLOAD PDF

Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Empowering Rural India

Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) is a revolutionary government program in India aimed at providing livelihood security to rural households and enhancing their overall well-being. Enacted in 2005, it is named after Mahatma Gandhi, an iconic figure in India’s struggle for independence and a proponent of social and economic equality.

Photo by Mark Stebnicki on Pexels.com

Introduction

MGNREGS is an ambitious initiative designed to address the issues of poverty and unemployment prevailing in rural areas of India. It guarantees 100 days of wage employment in a financial year to every rural household willing to do unskilled manual work. The program’s core objectives include generating sustainable employment, fostering social inclusion, and catalyzing rural development.

Historical Context

In the early 2000s, India faced a significant challenge of rural poverty and distress migration due to lack of employment opportunities in the rural sector. The need to address this crisis led to the inception of MGNREGS. The scheme was implemented on a pilot basis in 200 of the country’s poorest districts in April 200 districts. It was later extended to cover the entire nation.

Key Objectives

  1. Employment Generation: MGNREGS aims to create a demand-driven employment model, providing livelihoods to rural households and uplifting their economic status.
  2. Inclusive Growth: The program is committed to ensuring equal participation and benefits for women, Scheduled Castes (SCs), Scheduled Tribes (STs), and other marginalized sections of society.
  3. Asset Creation: MGNREGS focuses on creating durable assets like roads, water conservation structures, irrigation facilities, and rural infrastructure, contributing to long-term development.
  4. Sustainable Rural Development: By focusing on employment, asset creation, and skill development, the scheme seeks to catalyze holistic rural development, promoting sustainability and self-sufficiency.

Implementation and Operations

The Ministry of Rural Development oversees the implementation of MGNREGS at the national level. The responsibility for implementation is shared between the central and state governments. The funds for the scheme are shared in a 60:40 ratio between the central and state governments, except in the case of northeastern states and hilly states where the ratio is 90:10.

The Gram Panchayats (village councils) play a pivotal role in implementing the scheme at the grassroots level. They are responsible for planning, executing, and monitoring projects under MGNREGS, ensuring transparency and accountability.

The successful implementation and effective operations of the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) are vital for ensuring that its objectives are met and rural households benefit from its provisions. The scheme is designed to be implemented in a decentralized and participatory manner, involving multiple stakeholders at various levels.

Centralized Oversight and Funding Allocation

At the national level, the Ministry of Rural Development holds the responsibility of overseeing the implementation of MGNREGS. This involves formulating policies, guidelines, and monitoring the overall progress of the program. The central government plays a crucial role in allocating funds for the scheme. The funding allocation is divided between the central and state governments in a specified ratio, typically 60:40. However, in the case of northeastern states and hilly states, the ratio is 90:10. This allocation is crucial in ensuring the financial sustainability of the scheme and its widespread implementation across the country.

State and District-Level Implementation

Once the funds are allocated, the state governments take charge of implementing MGNREGS within their respective states. They have the responsibility of designing state-specific operational guidelines while adhering to the overall framework provided by the central government. The state governments ensure that the program is effectively executed in various districts within their jurisdiction.

At the district level, the District Programme Coordinator (DPC), usually the District Collector or District Magistrate, is appointed to oversee the implementation of MGNREGS. The DPC is responsible for coordinating with various stakeholders, monitoring the progress of works, resolving disputes, and ensuring compliance with the scheme’s guidelines.

Role of Gram Panchayats

The Gram Panchayats, or village councils, play a pivotal role in the successful execution of MGNREGS. They are the primary units for implementing the scheme at the grassroots level. Here’s an elaboration on their roles:

  1. Planning: Gram Panchayats are responsible for identifying and prioritizing projects that align with the needs and demands of the local community. This participatory planning ensures that the projects are relevant and beneficial to the rural population.
  2. Execution: Once the projects are identified, the Gram Panchayats oversee the execution of the works. They ensure that the projects are carried out according to the approved plans and within the stipulated time frame.
  3. Monitoring and Evaluation: The Gram Panchayats are also responsible for monitoring the progress of ongoing projects. They ensure that the work is being done as per the prescribed standards and quality. Additionally, they evaluate the impact of the projects on the community and the environment.
  4. Transparency and Accountability: Gram Panchayats are instrumental in promoting transparency and accountability in the implementation of MGNREGS. They ensure that all information related to the scheme, including employment provided, wages paid, and works undertaken, is made accessible to the public.

By involving Gram Panchayats, MGNREGS fosters local ownership and empowers communities to actively participate in decision-making processes, aligning with the spirit of decentralization and community involvement.

Addressing Challenges and Enhancing Implementation

Efforts to enhance the implementation of MGNREGS include the integration of technology to streamline processes, reduce delays, and improve transparency. Digital platforms are used to track project progress, maintain records of workers and wages, and facilitate efficient fund flow and payment systems. Additionally, capacity building and training programs are conducted to ensure that stakeholders at all levels are well-equipped to execute the scheme effectively.

In conclusion, a well-structured and decentralized implementation approach, with active involvement of Gram Panchayats, is crucial to the success of MGNREGS. By addressing challenges and leveraging technology, the scheme can continue to positively impact the lives of millions of rural households by providing employment and creating assets that contribute to sustainable rural development.

Achievements and Impact

Over the years, MGNREGS has made a substantial impact on the lives of millions of rural households across India. Some of the notable achievements and impacts include:

  1. Employment Generation: The scheme has generated millions of days of employment, providing a steady source of income to rural households.
  2. Asset Creation: Significant assets like roads, ponds, check dams, and rural infrastructure have been developed, improving the quality of life and agricultural productivity.
  3. Social Inclusion: MGNREGS has contributed to social inclusion by empowering marginalized sections, particularly women, through financial independence and skill development.
  4. Poverty Alleviation: The program has played a vital role in reducing poverty and distress migration in rural areas, enhancing overall economic well-being.

Challenges and Future Prospects

Despite its successes, MGNREGS faces challenges such as delayed payments, corruption, and uneven implementation across states. Future prospects involve leveraging technology for better monitoring, addressing existing gaps, and strengthening the scheme to maximize its potential impact.

In conclusion, the Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme is a beacon of hope for millions of rural Indians, providing them with livelihood security, empowering marginalized sections, and contributing to sustainable rural development. With continuous improvements and effective implementation, MGNREGS can further elevate the living standards of the rural population and pave the way for a prosperous and equitable India.

The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MGNREGS) has undoubtedly made significant strides in addressing rural poverty and unemployment. However, like any ambitious program, it faces several challenges that need to be addressed to ensure its continued success. Additionally, exploring innovations and understanding future prospects are crucial for the sustained impact and enhancement of the scheme.

Challenges

  1. Delayed Payments: One of the major challenges faced by MGNREGS is the delay in wage payments to the workers. Timely payment is crucial for workers, especially those from economically vulnerable backgrounds, to meet their daily needs.
  2. Corruption and Leakages: Instances of corruption, fund mismanagement, and leakages in the system have been reported in various regions. This compromises the intended benefits of the program and undermines its efficiency.
  3. Uneven Implementation: The implementation of MGNREGS varies across states and regions. Some states have been more successful in achieving the program’s objectives, while others struggle due to a lack of resources, administrative capacity, or political will.
  4. Limited Skill Development: While MGNREGS provides employment, it mainly focuses on unskilled labor. A future challenge lies in integrating skill development and training to enhance the employability of workers in different sectors beyond manual labor.

Innovations and Solutions

  1. Digital Integration and Aadhaar Linkage: Leveraging digital technology and linking MGNREGS with Aadhaar (India’s unique identification system) can streamline payments, reduce delays, and minimize corruption by ensuring that funds reach the intended beneficiaries directly.
  2. Geospatial Technology for Project Selection and Monitoring: Utilizing geospatial technology to identify suitable projects and monitor progress can enhance the efficiency and impact of MGNREGS. This can help in optimal project selection based on local needs and environmental factors.
  3. Strengthening Social Audits: Empowering local communities and civil society to conduct regular social audits can improve transparency, enhance accountability, and reduce instances of corruption by involving stakeholders in the monitoring process.
  4. Multi-Sectoral Skill Development: Integrating skill development components into MGNREGS can empower workers by providing them with a diversified skill set, enabling them to explore a broader range of job opportunities and improving their long-term livelihood prospects.

Future Prospects

  1. Enhanced Rural Livelihoods: With continued improvements and effective implementation, MGNREGS can elevate rural livelihoods by providing a stable income source and promoting sustainable rural development through asset creation.
  2. Poverty Reduction and Social Inclusion: By addressing the challenges and leveraging technology, MGNREGS can play a significant role in poverty reduction and social inclusion, particularly for marginalized communities and women.
  3. Climate-Resilient Infrastructure: Future prospects involve integrating climate-resilient infrastructure projects into MGNREGS to promote environmental sustainability and mitigate the impact of climate change in rural areas.
  4. Policy Reforms and Resource Allocation: Continuous policy reforms and adequate resource allocation will be vital to address existing gaps, strengthen the scheme, and ensure that MGNREGS remains relevant and impactful in changing socio-economic dynamics.

In conclusion, MGNREGS has indeed emerged as a beacon of hope for millions of rural Indians, offering livelihood security and fostering sustainable development. Addressing challenges through innovative solutions and harnessing technology can maximize its potential impact, leading to a prosperous and equitable India where rural communities thrive.

References

Carswell, Grace, and Geert De Neve. “MGNREGA in Tamil Nadu: A story of success and transformation?.” Journal of Agrarian Change 14.4 (2014): 564-585.

Esteves, Tashina, et al. “Agricultural and livelihood vulnerability reduction through the MGNREGA.” Economic and Political Weekly (2013): 94-103.

Ranaware, Krushna, et al. “MGNREGA works and their impacts: A study of Maharashtra.” Economic and Political Weekly (2015): 53-61.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.” Think India Journal 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, S. N. (2013). Sustainable development strategies and approaches. International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)2.

Vinita, Arora, Luxmi Rani Kulshreshtha, and Vrajaindra Upadhyay. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: a unique scheme for Indian rural women.” International Journal of Economic Practices and Theories 3.2 (2013): 108-114.

The Temples of Khajuraho: Unraveling the Erotic Mysteries

By-Aditi Chhetri


Nestled amidst the lush green forests of Madhya Pradesh, India, lies the enigmatic Khajuraho temple complex, a UNESCO World Heritage Site renowned for its erotic sculptures. Built between the 9th and 12th centuries by the Chandela dynasty, this architectural masterpiece comprises a group of 85 Hindu and Jain temples, of which 22 are still well-preserved. Khajuraho, is home to a group of stunning temples that have captured the imagination of travelers, historians, and art enthusiasts for centuries. These temples, known collectively as the Khajuraho Group of Monuments, are renowned not only for their architectural brilliance but also for their intricate and explicit erotic sculptures. In this blog post, we will delve into the fascinating world of the Temples of Khajuraho, exploring their history, architecture, and the enigmatic erotic art that adorns them.

Historical Context:

The Temples of Khajuraho were built by the Chandela dynasty, which ruled over the region from the 9th to the 13th century. The exact reason for the construction of these temples remains a subject of debate among scholars, but it is widely believed that they served as places of worship for the Hindu gods.
During the Chandela rule, Khajuraho flourished as a center of art, culture, and religion. The temples were constructed over a span of several centuries, with the most prolific period of building activity occurring between the 10th and 12th centuries. At its zenith, Khajuraho boasted over 85 temples, but today, only about 20 of them have survived the ravages of time.

Architectural Marvels:
One of the most striking features of the Khajuraho temples is their architectural style, which showcases a fusion of various influences, including Nagara and Dravidian architectural elements. These temples are primarily made of sandstone, which was readily available in the region, and they exhibit exquisite craftsmanship.
The temples are divided into three geographical groups: the Western Group, the Eastern Group, and the Southern Group. The Western Group, which is the most famous and well-preserved, includes some of the most iconic temples such as the Kandariya Mahadeva Temple, the Lakshmana Temple, and the Vishvanatha Temple.
The Kandariya Mahadeva Temple, dedicated to Lord Shiva, is the largest and most ornate among them. Its spire soars to a height of 116 feet, adorned with intricately carved sculptures and delicate ornamentation. The temples of Khajuraho are known for their shikharas (spires), which are layered and taper gracefully towards the sky, creating a mesmerizing visual effect.

The Enigmatic Erotic Sculptures:
What truly sets the Temples of Khajuraho apart from other religious structures of their time is the presence of explicit erotic sculptures that adorn their outer walls. These sculptures are a testament to the remarkable artistry and boldness of the Chandela craftsmen. It is estimated that around 10% of the temple sculptures depict various aspects of human sexuality and eroticism.
These erotic sculptures are not meant to be vulgar or obscene; rather, they are a celebration of human sensuality and the union of opposites, a common theme in Hindu philosophy. Many of the depictions are highly symbolic, portraying gods and goddesses engaged in amorous acts, often with an underlying spiritual significance.
The presence of erotic art in the temples has sparked numerous theories and speculations. Some believe that these sculptures served as a form of sex education, while others argue that they were intended to test the devotion and purity of the temple visitors. Regardless of their purpose, these sculptures have fascinated and intrigued visitors for centuries.

Interpreting the Erotic Art:
To truly appreciate the erotic art of Khajuraho, one must delve into the symbolism and meaning behind these intricate sculptures. Many of them depict scenes from the Kama Sutra, an ancient Indian text on human sexuality, and the sculptures often incorporate elements of yoga, meditation, and spirituality.
One common interpretation is that these erotic carvings represent the idea of “tantra,” a spiritual practice that seeks to transcend the physical realm through the union of opposites. In this context, the sexual acts portrayed symbolize the merging of male and female energies to achieve spiritual enlightenment.

Another interpretation suggests that the explicit art served as a reminder of the transitory nature of physical pleasure and the importance of moving beyond attachment to the material world. In Hindu philosophy, the pursuit of spiritual growth often involves overcoming worldly desires.
It’s important to note that the erotic sculptures are just one aspect of the temple complex, coexisting with a vast array of other carvings that depict scenes from mythology, daily life, and religious rituals. These sculptures, collectively, provide a comprehensive visual narrative of the culture and beliefs of the Chandela dynasty.

Preservation and UNESCO World Heritage Status:
The Temples of Khajuraho faced significant challenges over the centuries, including invasions, neglect, and natural decay. However, their remarkably well-preserved state owes much to the relative isolation of Khajuraho and its remote location within the dense forests of Madhya Pradesh.
In recognition of their historical and cultural significance, the Temples of Khajuraho were designated as a UNESCO World Heritage Site in 1986. This status has helped ensure their preservation for future generations to appreciate and study.

Unraveling the Mysteries of Khajuraho:The erotic sculptures of Khajuraho are not limited to the temples themselves. They can also be found on the walls of palace complexes, water tanks, and other structures throughout the site. This suggests that the erotic art of Khajuraho was an integral part of the Chandela culture and was not restricted to the religious domain.
Scholars have also noted the presence of a variety of other symbols and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho. These include animals, plants, and geometric designs. It is believed that these symbols had a deeper meaning and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho. These include animals, plants, and geometric designs. It is believed that these symbols had a deeper meaning and were intended to convey a specific message.
For example, the lotus flower is a common motif in Indian art and is often associated with purity and spirituality. In the context of the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho, it is believed to represent the divine union of Shiva and Shakti.
Similarly, the elephant is a symbol of strength and fertility. In the erotic sculptures, it is often depicted as a vehicle for Shiva and is associated with his role as the creator and preserver of the universe.
By studying the symbolism and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho, scholars have been able to gain a deeper understanding of their meaning and purpose. It is now clear that these sculptures were not simply meant to be titillating or provocative. Rather, they were intended to convey a complex and nuanced message about the nature of human sexuality and its relationship to the divine.

The erotic sculptures of Khajuraho are not limited to the temples themselves. They can also be found on the walls of palace complexes, water tanks, and other structures throughout the site. This suggests that the erotic art of Khajuraho was an integral part of the Chandela culture and was not restricted to the religious domain.
Scholars have also noted the presence of a variety of other symbols and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho. These include animals, plants, and geometric designs. It is believed that these symbols had a deeper meaning and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho. These include animals, plants, and geometric designs. It is believed that these symbols had a deeper meaning and were intended to convey a specific message.
For example, the lotus flower is a common motif in Indian art and is often associated with purity and spirituality. In the context of the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho, it is believed to represent the divine union of Shiva and Shakti.
Similarly, the elephant is a symbol of strength and fertility. In the erotic sculptures, it is often depicted as a vehicle for Shiva and is associated with his role as the creator and preserver of the universe.
By studying the symbolism and motifs in the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho, scholars have been able to gain a deeper understanding of their meaning and purpose. It is now clear that these sculptures were not simply meant to be titillating or provocative. Rather, they were intended to convey a complex and nuanced message about the nature of human sexuality and its relationship to the divine.

Visiting Khajuraho Today:
Today, Khajuraho is a thriving tourist destination, drawing visitors from around the world to witness its architectural wonders and enigmatic sculptures. The site offers a fascinating glimpse into India’s rich history and artistic heritage.
As you explore the temples, you’ll be struck not only by the explicit art but also by the sheer beauty and intricacy of the entire complex. The sculptures come to life when the sunlight bathes them in a warm, golden glow, creating a magical atmosphere that is difficult to describe.
In addition to the temples, Khajuraho offers a serene and picturesque setting with lush gardens, reflecting pools, and serene pathways. The nearby Khajuraho Dance Festival, held annually, celebrates classical Indian dance forms and adds to the cultural richness of the region.

The Temples of Khajuraho stand as a testament to the artistry, spirituality, and openness of ancient Indian culture. While their erotic sculptures continue to intrigue and mystify visitors, they are just one facet of a complex and deeply spiritual architectural marvel.
These temples remind us that art, in all its forms, has the power to transcend time and boundaries, sparking conversations and inviting us to explore the depths of human creativity and expression. Khajuraho, with its temples, is a place where history, spirituality, and sensuality converge, offering a unique and unforgettable journey for those who venture to unravel its mysteries.

REFERENCES

V, P. (n.d.). Mystery behind the erotic sculptures of Khajuraho. Tripoto. https://www.tripoto.com/khajuraho/trips/mystery-behind-the-erotic-sculptures-of-khajuraho-60ab8061813c5

Dey, P. (n.d.). Khajuraho Temples are more than just erotic; here are some interesting facts. Times of India Travel. https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/travel/destinations/khajuraho-temples-are-more-than-just-erotic-here-are-some-interesting-facts/articleshow/70192795.cms

Wakhloo, N. (2021, December 12). KHAJURAHO — Labour of Love! – Namrata Wakhloo – Medium. Medium. https://namratawakhloo.medium.com/khajuraho-bc9a00f82a6e

Delhifundos, & Delhi.Fun.Dos. (2022). Khajuraho Temples – A Complete Travel Guide and Pro Tips | Delhi-Fun-Dos.com. Delhi-Fun-Dos.com. https://delhi-fun-dos.com/khajuraho-temples-a-complete-travel-guide-and-pro-tips/

Lisa. (2023, January 9). Khajuraho Temple Madhya Pradesh India. Aartiyan in Hindi | Shiv Stuti | Durga Stuti | Mantra in Hindi. https://bhaktikishakti.com/khajuraho-temple-india/

The Dancing Plague of 1518: A Mass Hysteria Event for the Ages

By-Aditi Chhetri

There have been events throughout history that contradict explanations, challenges our understanding of the human mind and body. One such mystery was the Dancing Fever in 1518, a strange and mysterious phenomenon which occurred in Strasbourg during that period when it is nowadays France’s Modern Day. This unprovoked outbreak of mad dancing lasted for several months, leaving a mark on history that continues to be defied today by scientists, historians and scholars. In this blog, we will delve into the details of this strange episode, exploring its causes, consequences, and the various theories that have been proposed to explain it.


• The Outbreak Begins:
The summer of 1518 was a time of uncertainty in Strasbourg. The town was grappling with social and economic challenges, and the people were living in a state of perpetual anxiety. Against this backdrop of stress and turmoil, a peculiar incident occurred that would soon capture the attention of the entire town.
It all started with one woman, Frau Troffea. On a hot July day, she stepped into the streets of Strasbourg and began to dance. This, in itself, may not have been particularly unusual, as dancing was a common form of entertainment in the 16th century. However, Frau Troffea’s dancing was far from ordinary. She danced with a fervor and intensity that bordered on the frenzied, and she showed no signs of stopping. She danced for hours, and when she finally collapsed from exhaustion, it was only a temporary respite. The next day, she was back on her feet, dancing once more. The dancing plague of 1518 is one of the most bizarre and fascinating mass hysteria events in history. It is also one of the most mysterious. To this day, no one knows for sure what caused it.


• Contagious Hysteria:
What made Frau Troffea’s dancing even more peculiar was that she was not alone for long. Within days, more and more people joined her in this strange dance, and the numbers grew rapidly. By the end of the week, there were around 34 people dancing uncontrollably in the streets of Strasbourg. And as the days turned into weeks, the numbers swelled to nearly 400.
This bizarre spectacle attracted the attention of local authorities, who initially believed that the afflicted individuals were suffering from some form of demonic possession or divine punishment. In an attempt to exorcise the supposed demons, they organized mass exorcisms and encouraged even more dancing. Unsurprisingly, this only exacerbated the situation, and more people joined in the frenetic dance.


• The Consequences:
The consequences of the Dancing Plague were both bizarre and tragic. Many of those afflicted suffered from exhaustion, dehydration, and physical injuries as a result of their unrelenting dance. Some even danced themselves to death. It is estimated that as many as 15 people perished during the outbreak, their bodies were simply unable to endure the relentless physical strain.
As the epidemic raged on, it began to take a toll on the town’s economy and social fabric. With hundreds of people incapacitated by dancing, the workforce was severely depleted, leading to a decline in productivity. Families were torn apart as members were caught up in the mania, and the fabric of society began to unravel.


• Theories and Explanations:
To this day, the Dancing Plague of 1518 remains one of the most perplexing events in history, and numerous theories have been proposed to explain it. While none can provide a definitive answer, they shed light on the complexity of human behavior and the mysterious workings of the human mind.

• Possible causes of the dancing plague:
There are many theories about what caused the dancing plague of 1518. Some of the most popular theories include:

(a) Mass Hysteria:
One of the prevailing theories suggests that dancing was a manifestation of mass hysteria. Mass hysteria is a phenomenon in which a group of people, often under stress, experiences collective symptoms without any organic cause. The stress and anxiety prevalent in Strasbourg at the time may have triggered this mass psychogenic illness, causing people to dance uncontrollably.


(b) Ergot Poisoning:
Another hypothesis points to ergot poisoning as a possible cause. Ergot is a fungus that can grow on rye and other cereal crops, and it produces alkaloids similar to LSD. Consumption of ergot-contaminated grain can lead to hallucinations, muscle spasms, and other symptoms. Some researchers believe that the townspeople unknowingly ingested ergot-contaminated bread, leading to their bizarre behavior.


(c) Social and Cultural Factors:
The 16th century was a time of social and cultural upheaval. Strasbourg was plagued by economic hardship, famine, and political instability. Some historians argue that the dancing may have been a form of protest or a reaction to the prevailing conditions, with individuals engaging in this extreme behavior as a means of expressing their frustration and discontent.


(d) Religious and Superstitious Beliefs:
The religious and superstitious beliefs of the time may have played a role in amplifying the outbreak. Some individuals may have genuinely believed that they were possessed by demons or that dancing was a form of penance, leading them to continue dancing despite the physical toll it took on their bodies.

• Symptoms of the dancing plague:
The people who were affected by the dancing plague of 1518 experienced a variety of symptoms, including:
Uncontrollable dancing
Trance-like states
Hallucinations
Convulsions
Muscle spasms
Exhaustion
Death
Some people danced for days or even weeks without stopping. Others collapsed from exhaustion or died from heart attacks or strokes.

• Treatment for the dancing plague:

At the time, there was no known cure for the dancing plague. People who were affected by it were often treated with religious rituals, such as exorcisms and pilgrimages. Some people were also taken to the mountains, where they were forced to dance until they collapsed.

• The end of the dancing plague:

The dancing plague of 1518 ended as mysteriously as it began. In September 1518, the dancers suddenly stopped dancing. Some historians believe that the dancers may have been cured by a local priest, who led them on a pilgrimage to a mountain shrine.


The Dancing Plague of 1518 is a historical enigma that continues to captivate our imagination and challenge our understanding of human behavior. While we may never have a definitive explanation for why hundreds of people danced uncontrollably in the streets of Strasbourg, it serves as a reminder of the complexity of the human mind and the profound impact of social and environmental factors on our behavior.
This strange episode from the past reminds us that history is replete with mysteries that defy easy categorization or explanation. The Dancing Plague of 1518 stands as a testament to the enduring capacity of human beings to surprise, bewilder, and mystify, even in the most trying of circumstances. It remains a historical puzzle that invites further exploration and contemplation, offering a window into the depths of the human psyche and the boundless possibilities of the human experience.



REFERENCES
• Bauer, P. (2023, September 7). Dancing plague of 1518 | Facts & Theories. Encyclopedia Britannica. https://www.britannica.com/event/dancing-plague-of-1518

• Davis, M. (2023). The bizarre story of the deadly “dancing plague” of 1518. Big Think. https://bigthink.com/the-past/dancing-plague-middle-ages/#:~:text=In%201518%2C%20hundreds%20of%20men,throughout%20history%2C%20some%20very%20recently.

• Andrews, E. (2023). What was the dancing Plague of 1518? HISTORY. https://www.history.com/news/what-was-the-dancing-plague-of-1518

• The Dancing Plague of 1518. (n.d.). The Public Domain Review. https://publicdomainreview.org/essay/the-dancing-plague-of-1518/

• Atwal, S. (2022, December 5). The unsolved mystery of the medieval dancing plague. Guinness World Records. https://www.guinnessworldrecords.com/news/2022/12/the-unsolved-mystery-of-the-medieval-dancing-plague-728701

• Jana, R. (2022, May 13). The people who ‘danced themselves.todeath’.BBC. https://www.bbc.com/culture/article/20220512-the-people-who-danced-themselves-to-death

Nursing Practice towards Psychiatric Patients with Aggressive Behaviors at Khartoum Psychiatric Hospitals 

1*Fawziah Zayed Eid Almutairi,2Nasier Abdullah Nasier Al-Degashiem,3Zainah Turki Alqahtani,4Sarah Shouib Alrashedi,5Mariam Saud Awadhah Almoteri, 6Laila Mashawi Hawas Ghazwani, 7Abdulrahman Meshal Dakhelallah Almutairi, 8Fathia Ahmed Saad Alshehri.

1*Nursing Technician, RN, Nurse at school health Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA) (e-mail: fof0-2030@hotmail.com ).

2Nursing Technician, RN, Nurse at school health Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA), e-mail: nad1425@hotmail.com .

3Nursing Technician, RN, Nurse at school health Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA), e-mail: (zalghtani@moh.gov.sa  )

4Nursing Technicians RN, King Faisal Primary Health Care Centre Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA),  Email: sashalrashedi@moh.gov.sa

  5Nursing Technician, RN, Nurse at school health Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA), e-mail:Umshaher1440@hotmail.com

6Technician-Nursing, RN, Nurse at Alsadah primary health care center Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA), Email: rorooo201395@gmail.com   

7Nurse Specialist, Eradah, Complex for Mental Health-Riyah Kingdom of Saudi Arabia, (KSA), (e-mail: aalmutairi356@moh.gov.sa).

8Nursing Specialist RN, Nurse at school health, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia (KSA) (e-mail: fatooo1111@hotmail.com .

Abstract

 Background: Non psychiatric nurses care for hospital patients with
behavioral health conditions.. 

Objectives:  The current study aimed to assess practice towards Psychiatric, Patients with Aggressive Behaviors at Khartoum Psychiatric Hospitals.

 Materials and methods:    

Descriptive cross sectional hospital based design was used to conduct this study at a Psychiatric Hospital in Khartoum. The target population consisted of 60 nurses employed at the Khartoum Psychiatric Hospital. Structured questionnaires were distributed to the participants for data collection.  Data analysis was done using a Statistical Package for Social Science, version 24, and nominal as well as ordinal data was analyzed using descriptive analysis.  

Results:  The study showed that the overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior was found good among 71.5% and poor among 28.5%. There was association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and age group<0.05.

Conclusion:    Nurses has overall adequate practice towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior. While the age was significantly influence the practice of nurse towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior. Future studies with large sample size will be recommends.

  Keywordspractice , Psychiatric, Khartoum psychotic hospital

  1. Introduction:

Aggression is a serious problem on psychiatric wards and has large consequences for patients as well as staff working in mental healthcare: aggressive behavior is an important reason to seclude or restrain a patient (Kaltiala-Heino et al., 2003), but, according to patients, this feels as being controlled and punished with no therapeutic value (Meehan et al., 2004).  Health care workers experience feelings of anger, anxiety and guilt after an aggressive incident (Needham et al.,2005)  and higher levels of burn-out (de Looff et al., 2019).  Development and expression of aggression is generally explained as multifactorial: being environment-related (design of the ward, privacy, locked doors, ambiance, noise level, overstimulation), mental health care-system related (regional policy, hospital policy, ward rules, attitude towards patients, cultural factors), patient-related (demographics, cognitive and emotional state, malevolence, pathology) and clinician-related (degree of communication, de-escalation skills, attitudes towards aggression, clinicians’ stress level) (Cutcliffe et al., 2013). Previous reviews on aggression on psychiatric wards were mainly focused on patient-related factors e.g. isolation of high-risk patients who were prone to develop aggression (Cornaggia et al., 2011). From a prevention perspective, ward and staff factors provide an interesting avenue for prevention of aggression, while treatment of the psychiatric illness is the only patient factor that reduces the risk of aggression development (Hamrin et al., 2009).  Nevertheless it remains unclear how the various factors that explain aggression development interact with each other. The term aggression is ambiguous: multiple interpretations have been found, and it is often used interchangeably with agitation and violence. Agitation is defined in the DSM-5 as “a state of excessive psychomotor activity accompanied by increased tension and irritability” resulting in non-productive and repetitious behaviour” (Garriga et al., 2016).  Generally it is seen as the precursor of aggression (Merriam Webster Dictionary, 2008).  The WHO defines aggression and violence as the same principal: “the intentional use of physical force or power, threatened or actual, against oneself, another person, or against a group or community that either results in or has a high likelihood of resulting in injury, death, psychological harm, maldevelopment, or deprivation” (Krug et al., 2002).  The British National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE) guidelines define aggression as: “a range of behaviours or actions that can result in harm, hurt or injury to another person, regardless of whether the violence or aggression is physically or verbally expressed, physical harm is sustained or the intention is clear” (National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health, 2015).  In these definitions agitation, aggression and violence can be understood as a continuum of severity, where agitation evolves into aggression and ultimately into violence. Violence differs from aggression by the severity and intentionality of the behaviour. The vast amount of literature on aggression may reflect that the topic is important and of interest. Reviews on violence on the emergency ward (Stowell et al., 2016) , aggression in forensic settings (Gadon et al., 2006)  and on interventions to reduce seclusion and restraint (Steinert et al., 2010) have been published earlier. Reviews on the development of aggression in psychiatric hospitals have also been performed before, but they focussed on a single part of aggression development, such as patient factors (Cornaggia et al., 2011) and staff and ward factors that may contribute to aggression development were left out.  The present study aimed to assess practice towards Psychiatric Patients with an Aggressive Behaviors at Khartoum Psychiatric Hospitals.

MATERIALS AND METHODS:

The study design was a quantitative descriptive cross sectional hospital study. 

STUDY AREA

This study was conducted in   Khartoum psychotic hospital.

 The population chosen for this study includes registered nurses as well as nursing unit managers working in Khartoum psychiatric hospital. 

  1. SELECTION CRITERIA

1.2.4.1. Inclusion criteria:

The inclusion criteria for those eligible for the study was include male and female registered nurses and nursing unit managers who have worked in Khartoum psychiatric hospital. .  

1.2.4.2. Exclusion criteria:

Those who were not agree to participate in the study and those who are not found at the time of data collection.

  1. SAMPLE SIZE AND   SAMPLING TECHNIQUES

The sample size was taken conviencely as 60 nursing in Khartoum psychiatric hospital.

 1.2.5.6. DATA COLLECTION

 Data collection is the precise, systematic gathering of information relevant to the
research purpose or the specific objectives (Polit and Beck ,2008). According to Polit and Beck (2008), a data collection plan for quantitative studies should yield accurate, valid and meaningful data that are maximally effective in answering research questions. The researcher used a self-designed, structured questionnaire, consisting of 30 closed ended questions, to collect data. Brink et al. (2012) define questionnaires as a self-report instrument where the participants respond to given questions. The questionnaire was developed by the researcher.

  1.2.5.8. Data analysis:

Descriptive statistics are used to describe and synthesize data. This helps to set the stage for the understanding of quantitative research evidence (Polit and  Beck, 2012). The data was arranged into frequency distribution that is described by Polit and  Beck (2012) as a systematic arrangement of values from the lowest to the highest value, together with the number of times each value was obtained. 

  1. Study findings:

  Fig.1: Distribution of nurses according to gender (n=60)

  Fig.2: Distribution of nurses according to age group (n=60)

      Fig.3: Distribution of nurses according to years of experience (n=60)

      Fig.4: Distribution of nurses by education level (n=60)

      Fig.5: Distribution of nurses by type of aggression (n=60)

    Table 1: Overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior at Khartoum Psychiatric Hospitals

Practice  GoodPoor
No.%No.%
I can communicate effectively with clients with a mental health problem 3558.32541.7
I can carry out a comprehensive psychosocial assessment of clients4981.71118.3
I can conduct a mental status examination 5083.31016.7
I can develop a nursing care plan on the basis of my assessment4270.01830.0
I can assist clients with a mental illness to clarify treatment goals5185.0915.0
I am able to provide basic counseling for clients with a mental illness 3660.02440.0
I am able to be empathic with clients with a mental illness5083.31016.7
            I can provide information and education for clients regarding their diagnosis 4371.71728.3
I am able to assist clients to develop living skills4575.01525.0
I have a basic knowledge of antipsychotic medications and their side effects 3456.72643.3
            I am able to provide client education regarding the effects and side effects of medications4575.01525.0
I can conduct a suicide risk assessment 3558.32541.7
Overall practice51571.520528.5

                      Mean score =  Mean± SE= 19.2 ±  (.3)

Table 2: Association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and age group

AgeMeanStd. Error of Mean
<3517.5882.51492
36-4019.5000.65192
41-5520.2857.70655
>5519.6923.77942
Total19.1833.34648
F3.385
P-value.024*

*P-value considered significant at less than 0.05 levels

Table 3: Association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and gender

GenderMeanStd. Error of Mean
Male19.6316.65877
Female18.9756.40648
Total19.1833.34648
F.773
P-value.383

   *P-value considered significant at less than 0.05 levels

Table 4: Association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and years of nursing experience

Years of nursing experienceMeanStd. Error of Mean
1-519.8750.70637
6-1019.3333.62234
11-1518.8125.66595
<1518.0000.61721
Total19.1833.34648
F.928
P-value.433

*P-value considered significant at less than 0.05 levels

Table 5: Association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and education level

EducationMeanStd. Error of Mean
Registered nurse19.7647.67807
Bachelor of Science in19.3889.67223
Diploma18.1538.71474
Master of Science in nursing19.1000.73711
PhD in nursing Science19.50002.50000
Total19.1833.34648
F.699
P-value.0051*

*P-value considered significant at less than 0.05 levels

  1. DISCUSSION:

  This study aimed to assess practice towards psychiatric patients with an Aggressive Behaviors at Khartoum Psychiatric Hospitals. The study showed that the overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior was found good among 71.5% and poor among 28.5%. Comparable findings i.e.  research by Menzies (1959, Republished in 1988) on nurses in general hospitals with physically ill patients, indicated that these nurses were in the presence of patients who were in pain, dying, frightened and scarred by operations. The nursing practice developed as such that the nurses avoided close relationships with patients and to make decisions. They practiced functional nursing. In such practice, nurses related to only a part of each patient. Minor decisions were passed on to be taken at the top of the nursing hierarchy. This also happened in psychiatric hospitals. In psychiatric wards, nurses also avoided personal contact with patients (Donati, 1989). The medical model the nurses adhered to, focused on medical diagnosis and led to a process of emotional distancing which is not recognized, but becomes standard practice. It assisted the mental health professionals to cope with the impact of mental illness. It did not assist the patients who suffered from mental illness. It rather increased the patients’ suffering. On the contrary, the suffering of mental health professionals were not recognized by themselves nor was it recognized by the management who were suppose to provide support.

Bilgin (2009) studied the interpersonal skills of nurses and found that nurses are more likely to feel that their rights are ignored, while the rights of patients are maintained and protected. According to Lin, Probst and Hsu (2010), research had identified nursing as a high-stress profession. Nurses cope daily with extreme physical and psychological demands inherent in providing care to acute and chronic populations. The demands of caring for others can be extremely stressful on the psychiatric nurse (Van Rhyn & Gostsana ,2004).

According to Van Rhyn and Gostsana (2004), most studies on stress, experienced in a psychiatric setting, focused on staffing levels: overworking and administrative duties. In addition, they face unique challenges in their day-to-day work that reflect in their interaction with a particular patient group. Working with shortages of staff in an inadequate physical working environment and under hierarchical pressure with regard to colleagues, co-workers or medical staff as well as being victims of interpersonal violence, are all indicators of a stressful work environment (Bilgin 2009).

Various studies have been done on aggression in the work environment. Yildirim (2009) states that nurses are at a high risk of being exposed to violence and aggression in the work environment. Both Yildirim (2009) and Bimenyimana et al. (2009) indicated that violence and aggression ultimately had an overt negative psychological effect on the nurses.

The study showed that there was association between overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior and age group<0.05. While gender, years of experience and education significantly not associated with overall practice of nurses towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior. The finding is similar to a group of studies showed that age was examined in association with aggression with an average OSQE score of 7.7 (SD = 1.8; range 4–12) (Cho et al., 2014 , Stewart et al.,2013 ). The number of patients included in these studies was 30,143. Age was not associated with the development of aggressive behavior in several studies (Calegaro et al., 2014). In the other studies, younger age was predominantly found to be a factor contributing to the appearance of aggression (Weltens et al., 2021).

Focussing on the age of staff members, younger nurses were more at risk to experience aggression against them (OR = 0.96; 95% CI = 0.94–0.98) (Pekurinen et al., 2019) ; an age under 30 years has an Adjusted Rate Ratio (ARR) = 1.70 (95% CI = 1.17–2.48) for physical aggression (Chen et al., 2009) and the age group 30–39 years has an OR = 1.04 (95% CI = 0.69–1.57) (Chen et al., 2009).  Interestingly, staff with an age between 40–49 years and 50–63 years both experienced less aggression.  Fourteen studies reported data on the gender of the nurse in relation to aggression development (Yang et al., 2018).  

   In other studies, no gender differences were found (Niu et al., 2019), whereas different studies reported that male nurses encountered more aggression, and no clear methodological difference was found on the OSQE. One study reported that female nurses met more aggression (Chen et al., 2009), but this study was of poor methodological quality with an OSQE score of 3. Earlier studies concluded that aggression was more frequent between patient and staff of the same gender (r = 0.32; p < .001), with medium methodological quality (OSQE score 5, 6 and 6). With limited evidence, it appears that male nurses were more often involved in aggressive incidents, which does not mean that they contribute to the occurrence of aggression because of their gender.

In previous studies, the years of professional experience or education level of nurses was studied as a potential factor associated with the occurrence of aggression on the ward (Niu et al., 2019).  Five studies did not find any significant association  (Chen et al., 2009) In the remaining studies, the results are contradictory; increased risk for aggression or assault was found with more years of experience (z = 3.05; p < .002) (Ezeobele et al., 2019)  or OR = 0.95 (95% CI not provided; p = .001) (Al-Azzam et al., 2017) , as well as with fewer years of experience (ARR = 1.23; 95% CI = 1.32–1.18 (Chen et al., 2009)  and ARR = 3.08; 95% CI = 1.47–6.44 (Yang et al., 2018).  The contradictory results cannot be explained by methodological differences, while both high and low scores on the OSQE were present for the different outcomes. Staff members with academic education levels experienced more aggression in one study (OR = 3.0; 95% CI = 1.03–8.9) (Zeng et al., 2013), but not in another (Chen et al., 2009).  Staff training in aggression management showed no effect on the number of aggressive incidents (Sjostrom et al., 2001) , but this study was of poor methodological quality (OSQE score of 4) and during the study period many other changes such as a reduction in beds were implemented, which made results difficult to interpret. No clear effect of work experience to the occurrence of aggression was found.

 Conclusion:

   It can be concluded that nurses has overall adequate practice towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior. While the age was significantly influence the practice of nurse towards psychiatric patients with an aggressive behavior. Future studies with large sample size will be recommends.

  REFERENCES

Al-Azzam M, Tawalbeh L, Sulaiman M, Al-Sagarat AY, Harb E. Prevalence and Risk Factors ofWorkplace Violence towardMental Health Staff Departments in Jordanian Hospitals. Issues in mental health nursing. 2017; 38(5):435–42.

Bilgin H., 2009, ‘An evaluation of nurses’ interpersonal styles and their experiences of violence’, Mental Health Nursing 30, 252–259. 

Bimenyimana E., Poggenpoel M., Myburgh C. & Van Niekerk V., 2009, ‘The lived experience by psychiatric nurses of aggression and violence from patients in a Gauteng academic psychiatric hospital’, Curationis 32(3), 4–13.

Calegaro VC, Dotto AB, Freitas D, Brum AB, Valerio AG, Schetinger CC, et al. Aggressive behavior during the first 24 hours of psychiatric admission. Trends in psychiatry and psychotherapy. 2014;36(3):152–9. 

Chen WC, Sun YH, Lan TH, Chiu HJ. Incidence and risk factors of workplace violence on nursing staffs caring for chronic psychiatric patients in taiwan. International journal of environmental research and public health. 2009; 6(11):2812–21.

Cho UJ, Lee J, Kim HW, Lee JS, Joo YH, Kim SY, et al. Age structure at diagnosis affects aggression in a psychiatric inpatient population: age structure affecting inpatient aggression. Psychiatry research. 2014; 220(3):1059–63.

Cornaggia CM, Beghi M, Pavone F, Barale F. Aggression in psychiatry wards: a systematic review. Psychiatry Res. 2011;189(1):10–20.

Cornaggia CM, Beghi M, Pavone F, Barale F. Aggression in psychiatry wards: a systematic review. Psychiatry Res. 2011;189(1):10–20. 

Cutcliffe JR, Riahi S. Systemic perspective of violence and aggression in mental health care: towards a more comprehensive understanding and conceptualization: part 1. Int J Ment Health Nurs. 2013;22(6):558–67.

de Looff P, Didden R, Embregts P, Nijman H. Burnout symptoms in forensic mental health nurses: Results from a longitudinal study. Int J Ment Health Nurs. 2019;28(1):306–17. 

Donati F., 1989, ‘A psychodynamic observer in a chronic ward’, British Journal of Psychotherapy 5, 317–329.

Ezeobele IE, McBride R, Engstrom A, Lane SD. Aggression in Acute Inpatient Psychiatric Care: A Survey of Staff Attitudes. The Canadian journal of nursing research = Revue canadienne de recherche en sciences infirmieres. 2019:844562118823591.

Gadon L, Johnstone L, Cooke D. Situational variables and institutional violence: a systematic review of the literature. Clin Psychol Rev. 2006;26(5):515–34.

Garriga M, Pacchiarotti I, Kasper S, Zeller SL, Allen MH, Vazquez G, et al. Assessment and management of agitation in psychiatry: Expert consensus. World J Biol Psychiatry. 2016;17(2):86–128.

Hamrin V, Iennaco J, Olsen D. A review of ecological factors affecting inpatient psychiatric unit violence: implications for relational and unit cultural improvements. Issues Ment Health Nurs. 2009;30(4):214–26.

Kaltiala-Heino R, Tuohimaki C, Korkeila J, Lehtinen V. Reasons for using seclusion and restraint in psychiatric inpatient care. Int J Law Psychiat. 2003; 26(2):139–49.

Krug EG, Mercy JA, Dahlberg LL, Zwi AB. The world report on violence and health. Lancet. 2002;360(9339):1083–8.

Lin H., Probst J.C. & Hsu Y., 2010, ‘Depression among female psychiatric nurses in Southern Taiwan: Main and moderating effects of job stress, coping behaviour and social support’, Journal of Clinical Nursing 19, 2342–2354.

Meehan T, Bergen H, Fjeldsoe K. Staff and patient perceptions of seclusion: has anything changed? J Adv Nurs. 2004; 47(1):33–8.

Menzies L.I., 1959, ‘The functioning of social systems as a defence against anxiety: A report on a study of the nursing service of a general hospital’, Human Relations 13, 95–121. Republished in Menzies L.I., 1988, Containing anxiety in institutions, Free Association Books, London.

Merriam Webster Dictionary. Merriam Webster US; 2008. Webster Dictionary.

National Collaborating Centre for Mental Health U. London2015.

Needham I, Abderhalden C, Halfens RJ, Fischer JE, Dassen T. Non-somatic effects of patient aggression on nurses: a systematic review. J Adv Nurs. 2005; 49(3):283–96.

Niu SF, Kuo SF, Tsai HT, Kao CC, Traynor V, Chou KR. Prevalence of workplace violent episodes experienced by nurses in acute psychiatric settings. PloS one. 2019; 14(1):e0211183.

Pekurinen V, Valimaki M, Virtanen M, Kivimaki M, Vahtera J. Work Stress and Satisfaction with Leadership Among Nurses Encountering Patient Aggression in Psychiatric Care: A Cross-Sectional Survey Study. Administration and policy in mental health. 2019.

Polit, D.F., & Beck, C.T. (2008). Nursing research: Generating and assessing evidence for nursing practice. 8th ed. Philadelphia: Lippicott William & Wilkins.

Sjostrom N, Eder DN, Malm U, Beskow J. Violence and its prediction at a psychiatric hospital. European psychiatry: the journal of the Association of European Psychiatrists. 2001; 16(8):459–65.

Steinert T, Lepping P, Bernhardsgrutter R, Conca A, Hatling T, Janssen W, et al. Incidence of seclusion and restraint in psychiatric hospitals: a literature review and survey of international trends. Soc Psychiatry Psychiatr Epidemiol. 2010;45(9):889–97.

Stewart D, Bowers L. Inpatient verbal aggression: content, targets and patient characteristics. Journal of psychiatric and mental health nursing. 2013; 20(3):236–43.

Stowell KR, Hughes NP, Rozel JS. Violence in the Emergency Department. Psychiatr Clin North Am. 2016;39(4):557–66.

Van Rhyn W.J.C. & Gotsana M., 2004, ‘Experiences by student nurses during clinical placement in psychiatric units in a hospital’, Curationis 27(4), 18–27. 

Weltens I, Bak M, Verhagen S, Vandenberk E, Domen P, van Amelsvoort T, et al.
(2021) Aggression on the psychiatric ward: Prevalence and risk factors. A systematic review of the literature. PLoS ONE 16(10): e0258346.

Yang BX, Stone TE, Petrini MA, Morris DL. Incidence, Type, Related Factors, and Effect of Workplace Violence on Mental Health Nurses: A Cross-sectional Survey. Archives of psychiatric nursing. 2018; 32(1):31–8.

Yang BX, Stone TE, Petrini MA, Morris DL. Incidence, Type, Related Factors, and Effect of Workplace Violence on Mental Health Nurses: A Cross-sectional Survey. Archives of psychiatric nursing. 2018; 32(1):31–8.

Yildirim D., 2009, ‘Bullying among nurses and its effects’, International Nursing Review 56(4), 504–511.

Zeng JY, An FR, Xiang YT, Qi YK, Ungvari GS, Newhouse R, et al. Frequency and risk factors of workplace violence on psychiatric nurses and its impact on their quality of life in China. Psychiatry research. 2013; 210(2):510–4.

Importance of Medical Training: Enhancing Healthcare and Saving Lives

-Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Medical training is an essential and foundational aspect of the healthcare system, playing a crucial role in ensuring the well-being of individuals and communities. It equips healthcare professionals with the necessary knowledge, skills, and expertise required to provide optimal care, make informed decisions, and save lives. In this article, we delve into the significant importance of medical training and its impact on healthcare.

1. Lifesaving Skills and Techniques

Medical training provides healthcare professionals with lifesaving skills and techniques that are indispensable in emergency situations. Whether it’s administering CPR, managing trauma, or handling critical conditions, proper training ensures that healthcare practitioners can act swiftly and effectively, potentially preventing fatalities and minimizing damage.

2. Accurate Diagnosis and Treatment

An accurate diagnosis is the foundation of effective treatment. Medical training hones the diagnostic skills of healthcare professionals, enabling them to identify diseases, conditions, and ailments accurately. This precision ensures that patients receive the right treatment, improving their chances of a successful recovery.

Photo by Gustavo Fring on Pexels.com

3. Enhanced Patient Care and Comfort

Understanding the importance of empathy and patient-centric care is a vital component of medical training. Professionals are trained to communicate effectively with patients, instilling trust and providing comfort during challenging times. A compassionate approach significantly enhances the patient’s experience and aids in their healing process.

4. Innovation and Technological Advancements

Medical training keeps professionals up-to-date with the latest advancements in medical technology and procedures. Rapid technological advancements in healthcare require continuous learning and adaptation. Training programs provide healthcare practitioners with the knowledge and skills needed to utilize cutting-edge technology, improving patient outcomes and advancing the field of medicine.

5. Standardization and Quality Assurance

By following established training guidelines and standards, medical training ensures a level of standardization in healthcare practices. Standardized training programs contribute to uniformity in care delivery, promoting a high level of quality assurance across various healthcare settings. Patients can have confidence that the care they receive meets specific standards of excellence.

6. Interdisciplinary Collaboration

Medical training encourages interdisciplinary collaboration and teamwork, bringing together healthcare professionals from diverse fields. This collaborative approach fosters a holistic understanding of patient care and facilitates comprehensive treatment plans, enhancing the overall healthcare experience for patients.

7. Preventive Healthcare and Public Health Initiatives

Medical training emphasizes preventive healthcare and public health initiatives, aiming to reduce the incidence of diseases and promote a healthier society. Professionals are educated on preventative measures, health promotion, and community health, enabling them to advocate for healthier lifestyles and contribute to disease prevention.

8. Global Healthcare Preparedness

In a rapidly changing world, medical training prepares healthcare professionals for various challenges, including pandemics, natural disasters, and global health crises. Well-trained healthcare teams are better equipped to respond efficiently, manage outbreaks, and mitigate the impact on communities, ultimately saving lives on a larger scale.

In conclusion, medical training is a linchpin in the healthcare system, shaping proficient healthcare professionals and optimizing patient care. By investing in comprehensive and ongoing training programs, we ensure a healthcare workforce that can deliver high-quality care, adapt to advancements, and ultimately contribute to healthier and happier communities.

References

Coles, Timothy R., Dwight Meglan, and Nigel W. John. “The role of haptics in medical training simulators: A survey of the state of the art.” IEEE Transactions on haptics 4.1 (2010): 51-66.

Doherty, Eva M., and Emmeline Nugent. “Personality factors and medical training: a review of the literature.” Medical education 45.2 (2011): 132-140.

Howe, Amanda, Anna Smajdor, and Andrea Stöckl. “Towards an understanding of resilience and its relevance to medical training.” Medical education 46.4 (2012): 349-356.

Leung, Wai-Ching. “Competency based medical training.” BMJ: British Medical Journal 325.7366 (2002): 693.

The Mystery of the Magnetic Field in Ladakh

By-Aditi Chhetri

The world is full of natural wonders and phenomena that continue to baffle scientists and researchers. One such mystery lies in the enchanting region of Ladakh, nestled in the northern part of India. Amidst its breathtaking landscapes and serene beauty, Ladakh is home to an enigmatic force of nature – the magnetic hill. In this blog post, we will delve into the fascinating world of Ladakh’s magnetic field, exploring its origins, the science behind it, and the enduring allure that draws travelers and scientists alike to this remote destination.

Magnetic hill

Ladakh’s Magnetic Mystery:

Ladakh, often referred to as the “Land of High Passes,” is a region in the northernmost part of India. Known for its breathtaking landscapes, majestic mountains, and unique culture, Ladakh has always been a place of intrigue and wonder. However, beneath its stunning beauty lies a mysterious phenomenon that has puzzled scientists and visitors alike for decades: the enigmatic magnetic field of Ladakh.

At an altitude of over 3,500 meters (11,500 feet) above sea level, Ladakh is already an otherworldly destination. Yet, it is not just the high-altitude terrain that makes this region exceptional. It is the presence of a naturally occurring magnetic anomaly that has garnered significant attention and sparked curiosity among scientists, travelers, and spiritual seekers alike.

The Magnetic Mystery:

• The magnetic field in Ladakh is unlike any other magnetic field on Earth. It is unique in its strength and has a peculiar inclination angle. While the Earth’s magnetic field usually points roughly northward and is relatively weak, in Ladakh, it tilts at an angle of about 70 degrees from the horizontal. Additionally, the magnetic field strength here is significantly stronger than in most other places on our planet.

• This strange magnetic anomaly is centered around a small village called Diskit in the Nubra Valley, which is part of the larger Ladakh region. The phenomenon is often referred to as the “Ladakh Magnetic Hill” or the “Magnetic Hill of Ladakh.” It’s not just a point of scientific curiosity; it has also become a popular tourist attraction where visitors can experience the magnetic mystery for themselves.

Defying Gravity:

• One of the most captivating aspects of the Ladakh Magnetic Hill is the illusion it creates. When you drive or park your vehicle on a specific stretch of road near the village of Diskit, something remarkable happens – your vehicle appears to defy gravity.

If you turn off the engine and release the brakes, your vehicle will seemingly start rolling uphill all by itself. It’s a surreal experience that has left countless travelers in awe and baffled scientists searching for answers.

The optical illusion created by this magnetic anomaly is so convincing that it often appears as though vehicles are rolling uphill against the force of gravity. In reality, what’s happening here is a clever trick of perception. The surrounding landscape creates an optical illusion that distorts our sense of what’s truly uphill and downhill.

The Scientific Explanation:

While the Ladakh Magnetic Hill may seem like a phenomenon straight out of science fiction, there’s a scientific explanation behind this mysterious occurrence.

The unusual magnetic properties in this region have a significant impact on the local landscape. The magnetic field here is strong enough to influence the alignment of ferrous materials, like the iron and steel components in vehicles. When a vehicle is placed on the specific stretch of road where this illusion occurs, the magnetic field subtly affects its orientation.

Essentially, the vehicle’s wheels and frame align themselves with the magnetic field’s inclination, making it seem like the vehicle is moving uphill when, in reality, it’s just moving downhill like any other object on a sloped road. This optical illusion, combined with the magnetic force, creates the surreal experience of defying gravity.

It’s important to note that the Ladakh Magnetic Hill is not the only place on Earth where such optical illusions occur. Similar phenomena can be found in other parts of the world, often near locations with strong magnetic fields or unique geological features.

The Geological Connection:

To truly understand the mystery of Ladakh’s magnetic field, we need to delve into the geological history of the region.

Ladakh is situated in a seismically active zone, surrounded by towering mountains, including the Himalayas. The geological processes that have shaped this landscape over millions of years have also contributed to the peculiar magnetic properties observed in this region.

One theory suggests that Ladakh’s magnetic anomaly is linked to the compression of rocks deep beneath the Earth’s surface. The intense tectonic forces associated with the collision of the Indian Plate and the Eurasian Plate have led to the folding and faulting of rocks in the region. As a result, the rocks contain minerals with magnetic properties, such as magnetite.

Magnetite is a naturally occurring magnetic mineral found in rocks around the world. When subjected to pressure and heat during geological processes, magnetite crystals can align themselves with the Earth’s magnetic field, essentially “recording” the direction and strength of the field at the time of their formation.

Over millions of years, as the rocks in Ladakh were subjected to these geological processes, the magnetite crystals within them aligned themselves with the region’s unique magnetic field. This alignment of magnetite crystals contributes to the strength and orientation of the magnetic field observed today.

Spiritual Significance:

While scientists continue to unravel the geological and magnetic mysteries of Ladakh, the region’s magnetic field has also captured the imagination of those seeking spiritual experiences and connections with the natural world.

Ladakh has a rich spiritual and cultural heritage, with influences from Buddhism and other indigenous belief systems. Many visitors to the region believe that the strong magnetic field holds spiritual significance. Some even claim that the magnetic field has healing properties and can rejuvenate one’s energy and balance.

The Diskit Monastery, perched on a hill overlooking the magnetic phenomenon, is an important spiritual center in the area. Monks here often incorporate the magnetic field into their rituals and meditations, further reinforcing the idea of its spiritual importance.

The magnetic field’s ability to seemingly defy the laws of physics has led some to view it as a metaphor for the mystical and unexplainable aspects of life. It serves as a reminder that there are still mysteries in the natural world that science has yet to fully understand.

The Future of Magnetic Exploration:

While we’ve made significant strides in understanding the Ladakh Magnetic Hill and its geological origins, there is still much to learn about this fascinating phenomenon. The region continues to draw the attention of scientists, geologists, and geophysicists who are keen to unlock its remaining secrets.

One avenue of research involves detailed mapping and modeling of the magnetic field to gain a better understanding of its source and variations. By studying the rocks and minerals in the area and how they interact with the Earth’s magnetic field, researchers hope to create a more comprehensive picture of what makes this magnetic field unique.

Furthermore, advancements in technology, such as magnetometers and drone-based magnetic surveys, are aiding in the collection of precise data on the magnetic field’s strength and orientation. These tools allow scientists to investigate the Ladakh Magnetic Hill and other similar anomalies with greater accuracy.

Understanding the magnetic field of Ladakh not only satisfies scientific curiosity but also has practical applications. Accurate knowledge of the local magnetic field is crucial for navigation, especially for aircraft and spacecraft operating in the region. By gaining a deeper understanding of this magnetic anomaly, we can enhance navigation systems and improve safety.

Experiencing the Mystery:

Visiting Ladakh and experiencing the magnetic mystery for yourself is an unforgettable adventure. As you stand on the designated stretch of road, you can witness the optical illusion that seems to defy gravity. It’s a moment that leaves a lasting impression, not just because of the physical phenomenon but also because of the deep sense of wonder it evokes.

While in Ladakh, take the time to explore the unique culture and natural beauty of the region. Visit ancient monasteries, trek through remote mountain valleys, and connect with the warm and welcoming people who call Ladakh home. It’s an opportunity to experience the intersection of science, spirituality, and the

Ladakh’s magnetic field is a captivating enigma that showcases the intricate interplay between geology, magnetism, and human curiosity. While science can explain the phenomenon, the wonder it evokes in the hearts of those who visit remains untouched. As we peer into the depths of our planet’s magnetic mysteries, Ladakh’s magnetic hill stands as a testament to the boundless wonders of our natural world. Whether you seek scientific understanding or simply wish to experience the magic of defying gravity, a visit to this remote corner of India is sure to leave you both perplexed and inspired.

References

Vargis.Khan, & Vargis.Khan. (2023, April 8). Magnetic Hill of Ladakh – Leh to Magnetic Hill travel guide. Vargis Khan. https://vargiskhan.com/log/truth-behind-mysterious-magnetic-hill-of-ladakh/

Magnetic Hill Ladakh- Theory, Location, Myth, When To Go. (n.d.). https://www.lehladakhindia.com/magnetic-hill/

Pal, S., & Pal, S. (2022). Ladakh Has A Magnetic Hill Where Cars Are Pulled Upwards On A Slope. Curly Tales. https://curlytales.com/ladakh-has-a-magnetic-hill-where-cars-are-pulled-upwards-on-a-slope/

Ghosh, S. (2021). Magnetic Hill Ladakh-Complete Travel Guide. Hiker.Wolf. https://hikerwolf.com/magnetic-hill-ladakh-complete-travel-guide/

Rajoo. (2023). Magnetic Hill In Ladakh- A Road Straightaway to heaven. Pick.yourtrail. https://pickyourtrail.com/blog/magnetic-hill-in-ladakh/

The Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi: A Marvel of Indian Architecture

By-Aditi Chhetri

India, a land of diverse cultures, traditions, and architectural wonders, is home to some of the most extraordinary monuments in the world. Among these treasures is the famous Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi, a remarkable architectural marvel that has baffled engineers, archaeologists, and tourists alike for centuries. Located in the southern state of Andhra Pradesh, the Lepakshi temple complex is not only a testament to India’s rich heritage but also a testament to the ingenuity of ancient Indian architects and craftsmen.

1. Historical Significance:
The historical significance of the Lepakshi temple lies in its association with the Vijayanagara Empire, which was one of the most prominent and influential empires in South India’s history. This empire, ruled by the Sangama and Saluva dynasties, flourished in the 14th to 17th centuries. The construction of the Lepakshi temple during this period is a testament to the empire’s patronage of art, culture, and religion.
The Vijayanagara Empire was known for its grandeur, and the Lepakshi temple exemplifies the empire’s devotion to Lord Veerabhadra. The temple complex, with its intricate architecture and exquisite sculptures, showcases the artistic and architectural achievements of this era.
2. The Architectural Marvel: The Hanging Pillar
The Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi is a single stone pillar that defies gravity by appearing to hang from the ceiling without touching the ground. This is a remarkable feat of ancient Indian architecture and engineering. The pillar stands approximately 15 feet tall and is adorned with intricate carvings.

(a) Theories Surrounding the Hanging Pillar Interlocking Stones: The theory of interlocking stones suggests that the pillar might be composed of multiple stones that are cleverly balanced to create the illusion of suspension. However, no visible seams or joints have been discovered, making this theory difficult to prove definitively.
(b) Hollow Pillar: Some speculate that the pillar could be partially hollow, reducing its weight and allowing it to appear as if it’s hanging. This theory remains unconfirmed due to the sacred nature of the monument. (c) Ancient Engineering Feat: This theory proposes that the builders of the Lepakshi temple possessed advanced knowledge of engineering and construction techniques, which enabled them to create such extraordinary architectural elements. It hints at the possibility that ancient civilizations had engineering secrets that are lost to modern times.
(d) Earthquake Resistance: Considering the region’s seismic activity, some suggest that the unique design of the pillar may have been intentional, making it more resistant to earthquakes. Its flexible construction could have been a response to the need for structural stability in a seismically active area.

3. Artistic and Architectural Splendor:
Apart from the Hanging Pillar, the entire Lepakshi temple complex is a testament to the artistic and architectural excellence of its builders. The walls and pillars of the temple are adorned with intricately carved sculptures and reliefs that depict scenes from Hindu mythology. These carvings bring to life the stories of gods, goddesses, and epic legends, serving both as a place of worship and a visual narrative of India’s rich cultural heritage. The colossal monolithic Nandi sculpture, carved from a single rock, showcases the mastery of the temple’s craftsmen. Its size and intricate detailing make it a prime example of the artistic prowess of the Vijayanagara Empire.

4. Preservation Efforts and Tourism:
Recognizing the historical and cultural significance of the Lepakshi temple, the Indian government and heritage preservation organizations have taken measures to safeguard the monument. These efforts include regular maintenance, restoration work, and strict rules to protect the temple from damage due to tourism.
Tourism has also played a significant role in the temple’s preservation. The temple complex attracts visitors from around the world who contribute to its upkeep through entrance fees. This income is often reinvested into the maintenance and restoration of the temple.
5. The Mystique Lives On:
Despite the numerous theories and research attempts, the Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi continues to be shrouded in mystery. Its existence challenges our understanding of ancient architecture and engineering. While modern technology has made significant strides in unraveling the secrets behind the pillar’s suspension, the element of wonder and mystique remains intact, making it a symbol of India’s rich cultural heritage and the enduring allure of history.

6. The Hanging Pillar Of Veerabhadra temple aka Aakaasa Sthambha.

The Lepakshi Temple is also known as the bodyguard of a unique pillar. The unique pillar of Lepakshi is a great achievement of a historical period. It displays wide-ranging diversity and the highest design of architecture. Its only malicious secret is that despite being a pillar, it is not connected to the ground. Out of the 70 stone pillars in the temple, this pillar stands out as a true wonder. This distinctive pillar hangs from the ceiling without the base of the pillar touching the ground. It has been standing still for centuries. This pillar of Lepakshi is a unique example of the uniqueness of Indian architecture which gives it a unique and mysterious form. It has an important role which increases its importance as Indian cultural heritage. This site reveals the specialty of Indian architecture and makes a unique contribution to its development. This hanging pillar of Lepakshi is an important part of the history of architecture of different periods which gives one a unique experience of traveling back in time to those eras.
During the British colonial period, a British engineer tried to unravel the mystery behind the hanging pillar of the Lepakshi Temple. He tried to move it, due to which the pillar moved from its place and got displaced. This incident caused the collapse of a portion of the roof of the temple. This incident was unique and mysterious, which makes the mystery behind this pillar even more mysterious. Compared to different structures and sites, this pillar of Lepakshi Temple is a unique and singular feature which highlights the diversity of Indian architecture. This incident makes the mystery behind this pillar even more mysterious and inspires people to visit and study it.

The Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi stands as an iconic example of India’s architectural and artistic excellence, a testament to the historical significance of the Vijayanagara Empire, and a source of fascination and intrigue for people worldwide. It serves as a reminder that the past holds untold wonders, waiting to be explored and appreciated by generations to come. Lepakshi Temple is not only important as a religious site, but it is a centre of historical, cultural and spiritual experience which inspires the individual to move one step further towards his inner knowledge and soul realization. This attraction of Lepakshi temple still attracts people towards itself. The uniqueness and historical importance of this place shows the glory of Indian culture and embodies its millions of years of heritage.

References

Trendingadda. (2023, June 5). The Hanging Pillar of Lepakshi Temple is Unraveling the Mystery. Medium. https://medium.com/@trendingadda77/the-hanging-pillar-of-lepakshi-temple-is-unraveling-the-mystery-eaeeb603f21e


Ugc. (2023, September 26). Hanging pillar of Lepakshi. Atlas Obscura. https://www.atlasobscura.com/places/hanging-pillar-of-lepakshi-veerabhadra-temple

India, M. (2016). The hanging pillar and other wonders of Lepakshi. Mystery of India. https://www.mysteryofindia.com/2015/01/hanging-pillar-wonders-lepakshi.html

Abhishek. (2020b, July 12). 7 wonders of Lepakshi Temple – the land of legends – The Revolving Compass. The Revolving Compass. https://revolvingcompass.com/lepakshi-temple/

Thadhagathan. (2020, July 18). The hanging pillar of Lepakshi Temple | Atma Nirvana. Hinduism | Spiritual Blogs India | Expanded Consciousness| Awakening People| Subconscious Mind Power | Mindfulness Meditation |. https://atmanirvana.com/hanging-pillar-lepakshi-temple/


A Review on Fiber Reinforced Concrete using Sisal Fiber

Mr. Neeraj Tiwari                            
Assistant ProfessorDepartment of Civil Engg.      
Madhyanchal Professional University, Bhopal 

 

Abstract. Fiber Reinforced Concrete FRC can be used for a variety, of applications. Fibers are utilized in concrete crack requiring reduction of physical property protection, drying reduction and improved strength and toughness, increased service life and decrease bleeding from water, concrete permeability, and construction value. The utilization of sisal, a natural fiber with increased mechanical efficiency, as reinforcement in an exceeding matrix based on supported cement. The proportion of sisal fiber used in concrete ranged from 0.1% to 2% of concrete and length of fiber 50mm to 60mm fiber length in concrete with aspect ratio. By adding short fibers, tensile strength is improved, thaw resistance is frozen, impact resistance, andconcrete brittleness are reduced. In general, fiber does not enhance the concrete strength, as the replacement moment is reduced in the reinforcement of structural steel. This paper also represents fiber limitation content, environmental aspects, and FRC is the modern technical enhancement in the civil substructure. This review paper also describes the compressive strength test, flexural strength test, tensile strength test, impact strength test of FRC sisalfiber effect strength test.

Keywords: Sisal fiber, flexural strength, compressive strength, split tensile strength, Impact strength test.

Introduction

Cement is that the world’s most generally used artifact with an estimated annual use of about 2.86 billion a lot of cement. However, cementproduction is harmful to the environment thanks to the emissions of dioxide. Approximately 0.8 a lot of CO2 per ton produced is estimated to be released into the atmosphere [1]. It found that different structural applications like Fiber ferroconcrete within 20th century. Fiber ferroconcrete (FRC) might be a class of composite materials [2]. Reinforced Natural Fiber cement and cementitious composites commonly used primarily for low-cost housing activities and there have also been growing interest in natural fiber composites and lots of research goes round the world. The foremost important technical features like excellent lightweight tensile properties, more strength, high impact resistance, and better post cracking behavior so on[3]. The main objective is to feature natural fiber to concrete post-fracture. because of high alkaline formation in cement-based concrete composite,the fibers are degraded [4]. It also features high resistance to freezing and thawing tolerance [5]. A wide form of natural fibers have been used in the cement concrete composition. A wide range of natural fiber like coir, jute, sisal, kenaf, banana fibers, etc., were utilized in nominal concrete.Fibers are with high strength,   flexibility,   extensibility,   and   elasticity.   The fiber utilized in concrete which prevents the formulation of cracking reckoning on the changes in temperature. The fiber-enhanced composite strength applications began to be introduced in 1997 [6]. The sisal fiberpercentage added 0.5% to twenty-eight total concrete weight volume. By increase fine content, the shrinkage and creep are randomly increased because it causes the rise in the volume of paste in concrete compaction.By adding fiber to the honeycomb of fresh concrete [7].Locally availablesisal fiber in Kenya, Tanzania, and Brazil. to boost its mechanical strength and lead to concrete, Sisal fiber-reinforced concrete (SFRC) has been incorporated. It inhibits the crack propagation behavior after yield [8]. Fiber composites will be reduced in strength and sturdiness because of thedegradation of fibers by combining alkaline attack and mineralization of hydrogen migration [9].

No study has yet been recorded for either cement composite, especially for flexible fibers has yet been reported, particularly for durable fibers like natural fibers. This work aims to look at cement/ cementitious composite mortar in two aspects of its fresh behavior, consistency, and low quality,affecting the steadiness and suppleness of the fresh mix [10]. Increases ductility, compressive, flexural, and strength. If we were able to increase the lifetime of concrete from 50 to 500 years, its environmental impact will decrease 10 times. Promoting the utilization of cemented building materials strengthened with vegetable fibers could therefore be the simplest way to achieving more sustainable construction. This paper examines the topic offiber cemented materials by examining previously published work [11].

Many of the natural fiber coir, sisal, jute, banana, palmyra, pineapple, talipot, hemp, etc., are used as a resource for industrial materials. [12]. Sisal (Agave sisalana) became a pestilence monocotyledon plant in Central America that provides papermaking potential for fiber. Additionally, sisal which has historically been utilized in the assembly of natural ropes, cordage sacking, has some assets for the assembly of a variety of special paper varietieslike those utilized in filters [13].FRC fiber alignment relies on many variables, such as fiber properties (shape, material, aspect ratio) and fresh properties of cementitious fresh properties yet because of the placement and casting process [14]. On the premise of the above discussion, we analyzed the mechanical aspects of sisal fiber reinforced properties soils, determined in terms of strength characteristics, the optimum percentage of fibre applied to silty clay and the modes of shear failure of the soil studied. This analysis focuses on the effects of the engineering silty clay propertiesof varying length of fiber and contents [15].The aim of this study is to establish workability, fire resistance, and bonding quality with the concretesubstrate and demonstrate its applicability in fiber replacement. Such another system is believed to own good special applications where thefireplace occurs [5].In general, sisal fiber is a natural fiber [16]. One of the most versatile natural fibers is sisal fiber and is cultivated very readily [17].And Such fibers are harvested into the sisal plant on a farm in Valente, state of Bahia, Brazil, and the mechanical and physical properties of, and morphology of, sisal fibers [18]. The fibers are extracted by a hand extraction machine, which consists of either serrated or non serrated knives. Each fiber is separated and grouped accordingly dependent on the fiber size. The initial fiber size is between 0.5 to 1 m. Fibers were cut into 20mm length in the experiments. The fiber diameter is 0.15 – 0.2 mm, the aspect ratio and as follows [16]. Also, it has been found that the total crack width of slab samples with fibers content and fiber sizes is not greatly varied. The fibers have good impact and sound-absorbing characteristics and also the leaves of fibers improve fire resistance [19]. The energy absorption is found in natural fibers and the reduction sound is absorbed due to low permeability [20].

Sisal Fibers Extraction

The leaves of sisal are colored dark green, straight fleshy [21]. Then the sisal leaves were crushed and separated manually with a smooth-edged stickuntil the fibers separated shown in Fig 1. Then the fiber is cleaned thoroughly in many glasses of water to get rid of dust and surplus wastes and atlast air-dried.

Figure 1. Process of sisal fiber

Treatment of sisal fiber

The chemicals employed in concrete fiber treatment like hemicelluloses, lignin, pectin, ashes are employed in variable processes [16]. The ammonium treatment of the sisal was manufactured using the strategy of extrusion. The concrete fiber specimen was used of three major roles using untreated sisal fiber by using an agent of (Na OH) treated fiber also as using Na OH agent, clay sisal fiber treatment. Natural fiber waterabsorption is comparatively high in sisal. Compression molding operates the sisal fiber process for creating a moist sample [22]. Ca(OH)2 [23],Sodium hydroxide, Sodium silicate [24], CaCO3, calcium glutamate, calcium acetate [25], Na2CO3 [26], NaOH solution [27].

Properties of sisal fiber

One of the natural fibers, sisal fiber, with high modulus and unique strength, low price, easy accessibility, recyclability, and high durability with low maintenance and low wear and tear [19]. The water absorption is high, the physical property of sisal fiber seen in Table 1 and Table 2.

Fiber Reinforced Concrete

Concrete, the world’s most inescapable material. The concrete quality is to develop new, durable, advanced composites based on cement includingspecific mechanical characteristics in the upcoming years [30]. The relation of mixed natural or artificial fibers to the concrete composition is referred to as Fiber Reinforced Concrete FRC, the fibers being natural fibers, glass fibers, synthetic fibers. The current widely used FRC technique the use of a single fiber from within an active restricted range includes cracking and deflection [31]. The bulk of the fiber-reinforced concrete is in single fiber composite [32]. The aim of this research was to explore the possibility of fiber reinforced concrete by using sisal fiber residues within the field,as reinforcement of composites based on cement. The main objective is to improve compatibility with the cement matrix and to review the mechanical properties of sisal fiber residue-enhanced cement-based composites. The purpose of this research is to investigate the composition of fresh conduct mortar reinforced cement and cement fiber mortar. Besides the nominal fresh cement concrete, characterized by durability and strength[10].

Mix Proportions

Mechanical Properties of FRC

Ordinary Portland Cement grade 53 for concrete preparation, was used [39]. Significantly, the presence of short fibers in a cemented matrix can contribute to an improvement in the mechanical behavior of fiber concrete composite. The existence of sisal fibers influences the strength leveldeleteriously [41]. The strength and flexibility of the flexural cement composites [42]. Some of the tests performed for FRC’s mechanical properties such as Compression tests, Tensile test, Flexural test [1, 9, 35, 43-45] Impact test [46-49]. Samples such as cubes, cylinders, and beams shall be castand cured for 7 days and 28 days.

Compressive Strength Test

A material’s to breaking is thought as compression, by which the concrete is powerful in compression and weak in tension. It was then necessary to cast the compressive strength into cement mortar at a ratio 1:3 strengthened sisal fibers at four fiber content (0.5%, 1.0%, 1.5%, and 2.0% by cement weight) for 7 and 28 days respectively and a facet ratio of 200 [3]. After curing for 28 days, the deflection test was dispensed on beams of size 100×100×500mm [39]. The cube’s diameter is about 100×100×100mm shown in Figure.3[37].

Figure 2. Compressive force test at 7 days [8, 36] Figure 3. Compressive force test at 28 days [8, 36]

Flexural Strength Test

Flexural strength usually referred to as rupture unit, or bending strength, or transverse rupture strength could be a material-specific property, the strain that a cloth yields in an exceedingly flexural test [32]. It’s the strain with which the materials yields in an experiment with flexure. The transverse bending test is most ordinarily used to the above, where a specimen with either a circular or rectangular cross- section is bent to fracture or yielding employing a flexural test of three points. The residual sisal fiber’s ultimate strength values ranged from 129 MPa to 378 MPa before accelerated aging reckoning on the calculation, probably because these fibers are waste produced during the processing of useful fibers used in theindustry [31].

Impact Test

The impact strength of cement mortar slab characteristics composites were found with 300 × 300 × 20 mm slab specimens cast in cement mortar at a ratio of 1:3, sisal-reinforced reinforcement fibers at four fiber composition (0.5%, 1.0%, 1.5%, and 2.0% by weight of cement) and a side ratio of 200 [51]. The cracking initiation was supported by visual observation and the cumulative collapse made up our minds therefore supported the amount of blows required to open the crack within the sample enough to spread the crack throughout the whole thickness of a specimen [52]. The energy of impact stored by the mortar slab specimens was calculated supported the volume of blows required   to   initiate   the primary crack, the amount required to avoid causing the ultimate failure, and therefore the impact energy of blow [53].

Tensile Strength Test

Friction length shows the strength of things like fiber density, fiber length, and bonding [54]. The orientation of the fibers is incredibly random, whichweakens the composite’s tensile properties [55]. During this analysis, the low fiber loading us with another possible reason used only 20% of fiberloading weight. Several researchers have found that the burden of 20% of sisal fiber composites has lower tensile properties [56]. The bending testswere conducted in an exceedingly deflection mode with a load rate of

0.3 mm/min and therefore the maximum load values were measured and analyzed. The concrete’s flexural strength and fracture energy decrease as temperature increases. Such reduction exists for experiments on preloaded samples with and without higher preloading. The split strength is around 2.03 at 7 days shown in Figure 4. The split strength is around 2.69 at 28 days shown in Figure 5[57].

Figure 4. Tensile strength at 7 days [58, 59] Figure 5. Tensile strength test at 28 days [58, 59]

Conclusion

It is clear that from the above review that the concrete at the fiber content of over 2% and a discount in fiber content is typically over 30 to 50mm in fiber length. The fiber ratio is compared with the diameter size. Water absorption is powerful in natural fibers because it increases the strength of the physical and mechanical properties of high tensile and compressive strength. The paper is thus concluded with improvement within the number of fibers being measured by a decrease in mechanical properties of over 1.5%. The strength is going to be increased by adding the fibers in smallamounts.Introduction of natural sisal fibers to an increase in the flexural strength and fracture strength of the concrete in addition to compositionswithout natural fibers.The mechanical characteristics of the sisal fiber based mostly on the manufacture, condition as well as size of the sisal fiber,which will determine the characteristic properties, and also on the natural parameters, such as the size of the fiber, the length of the gauge, the strain rate and the environment of the study. On the opposite hand, there was higher ductility within the fracturing of the samples using natural fibers, in other words, adding natural fibers to the concrete could better control the cracking of the concrete.After the whole value of flexural strength had been reached at the tip of the research studies for giant deflections, the fibers still allowed the 2 sections of the samples to remains together. Under both tensile conditions, numerous cracking activity was observed and loads of cracking.

Future prospects

It is clear from this review that chemically processed or treated substances became future altered sisal fiber reinforced composites as a consequence of its strong mechanical structural materials, economic and ecological characteristics. In recent literary studies, crack durability and rupture processes of sisal fiber composites doesn’t seem to have become analyzed in any detail. If new enhanced material are to be produced for safe crack growth,this is vital.The material strength of sisal-fiber composites tested by tests are most often inconsistent with the mixture law. Only if the interface strength and the failure mechanisms are understood can a complete description be obtained. In particular, more work is required to understand the’hybrid’ effects of sisal/glass composites.Due to the relatively lesser costs of sisal fibers, inexpensive methods of processing can be formed for thecomposites. It is essential to analyze the interaction amongst mechanical properties and methods of manufacturing.

References

  • Otieno M O 2016 Assessment of the feasibility of using sisal fiber reinforced cement Mortar with termite clay soil for roofing tiles. SMARTEC,COETEC< JKUAT)
  • Naser M, Hawileh R and Abdalla J 2019 Fiber-reinforced polymer composites in strengthening reinforced concrete structures: A critical review Engineering Structures198 109542
  • Priyadharshini S and Ramakrishna G 2018 A Novel Approach for the Rheological Behaviour of Polymer Modified Untreated and Treated SisalFibre Reinforced Cement Mortar Composites Materials Today: Proceedings12927-39
  • Kumar P and Roy R 2018 Study and experimental investigation of flow and flexural properties of natural fiber reinforced self compactingconcrete Procedia Computer Science125 598-608
  • Ding Z, Xu M-R, Dai J-G, Dong B-Q, Zhang M-J, Hong S-X and Xing F 2019 Strengthening concrete using phosphate cement-based fiber-reinforced inorganic composites for improved fire resistance Construction and Building Materials212 755-64
  • Toledo Filho R D, Scrivener K, England G L and Ghavami K 2000 Durability of alkali-sensitive sisal and coconut fibres in cement mortarcomposites Cement and concrete composites22 127-43
  • Okeola A, Abuodha S and Mwero J 2018 Experimental Investigation of the Physical and Mechanical Properties of Sisal Fiber-ReinforcedConcrete Fibers53
  • de Andrade Silva F, Mobasher B and Toledo Filho R D 2009 Cracking mechanisms in durable sisal fiber reinforced cement composites Cementand Concrete Composites31 721-30
  • Sabarish K, Paul P and Jones J 2019 An experimental investigation on properties of sisal fiber used in the concrete Materials Today: Proceedings
  • Ramakrishna G and Sundararajan T 2019 Durability and Life Prediction in Biocomposites, Fibre-

Reinforced Composites and Hybrid Composites: Elsevier) pp 389-406

  • Pacheco-Torgal F and Jalali S 2011 Cementitious building materials reinforced with vegetable fibres: A review Construction and BuildingMaterials25 575-81
  • Joseph K, Tolêdo Filho R D, James B, Thomas S and Carvalho L H d 1999 A review on sisal fiber reinforced polymer composites Revista Brasileira de Engenharia Agrícola e Ambiental367-79
  • Aracri E, Colom J F and Vidal T 2009 Application of laccase-natural mediator systems to sisal pulp: an effective approach to biobleaching orfunctionalizing pulp fibres? Bioresource technology100 5911-6
  • Villar V P, Medina N F, Alonso M, Diez S G and Puertas F 2019 Assessment of parameters governing the steel fiber alignment in fresh cement-based composites Construction and Building Materials207 548-62
  • Wu Y, Li Y and Niu B 2014 Assessment of the mechanical properties of sisal fiber-reinforced silty clay using triaxial shear tests The ScientificWorld Journal2014
  • Saravanan N and Buvaneshwari M 2018 Experimental Investigation on Behaviour of Natural Fibre Concrete (Sisal Fibre) Cellulose54 66
  • Li Y, Mai Y-W and Ye L 2000 Sisal fibre and its composites: a review of recent developments

Composites science and technology60 2037-55

  • de Andrade Silva F, Mobasher B, Soranakom C and Toledo Filho R D 2011 Effect of fiber shape and morphology on interfacial bond andcracking behaviors of sisal fiber cement based composites Cement and Concrete Composites33 814-23
  • Sushma I P, Vasundhar B and Varma N J 2018 Fabrication and experimental evaluation of properties with reinforcement of polyester resin with sisal fibre Materials Today: Proceedings27081-7
  • da Silva C C B, Terashima F J H, Barbieri N and de Lima K F 2019 Sound absorption coefficient assessment of sisal, coconut husk and sugarcane fibers for low frequencies based on three different methods Applied Acoustics156 92-100
  • Ramamoorthy S K, Skrifvars M and Persson A 2015 A review of natural fibers used in biocomposites: plant, animal and regenerated cellulosefibers Polymer Reviews55 107-62
  • Bongarde U and Shinde V 2014 Review on natural fiber reinforcement polymer composites

International Journal of Engineering Science and Innovative Technology431-6

  • Larisa U, Solbon L and Sergei B 2017 Fiber-reinforced concrete with mineral fibers and nanosilica Procedia engineering195 147-54
  • Abdulkareem M, Havukainen J and Horttanainen M 2019 How environmentally sustainable are fibre reinforced alkali-activated concretes?Journal of Cleaner Production236 117601
  • Schreiberová H, Bílý P, Fládr J, Šeps K, Chylík R and Trtík T 2019 Impact of the self-healing agent composition on material characteristics ofbio-based self-healing concrete Case Studies in Construction Materials e00250
  • Wei J and Meyer C 2014 Sisal fiber-reinforced cement composite with Portland cement substitution by a combination of metakaolin andnanoclay Journal of materials science49 7604- 19
  • Padanattil A, Karingamanna J and Mini K 2017 Novel hybrid composites based on glass and sisal fiber for retrofitting of reinforced concretestructures Construction and Building Materials133 146-53
  • Ramakrishna G and Sundararajan T 2005 Studies on the durability of natural fibres and the effect of corroded fibres on the strength of mortarCement and Concrete Composites27 575-82
  • Izquierdo I S, Izquierdo O S, Ramalho M A and Taliercio A 2017 Sisal fiber reinforced hollow concrete blocks for structural applications:Testing and modeling Construction and Building Materials151 98-112
  • Sanchez F and Sobolev K 2010 Nanotechnology in concrete–a review Construction and building materials24 2060-71
  • Banthia N and Sappakittipakorn M 2007 Toughness enhancement in steel fiber reinforced concrete through fiber hybridization Cement andConcrete Research37 1366-72
  • Banthia N and Soleimani S M 2005 Flexural response of hybrid fiber-reinforced cementitious composites ACI Materials journal102 382
  • <Strength of Corrugation in Roofing Sheet with Various Fibres.pdf>
  • Vasu K, Krishna P M, Rupa J S, Kumar A V and Janardhan N 2019 An Experimental Investigation on the Mechanical Properties of GlassFiber Reinforced Concrete IUP Journal of Structural Engineering12 22-33
  • Ardanuy M, Claramunt J and Toledo Filho R D 2015 Cellulosic fiber reinforced cement-based composites: A review of recent researchConstruction and building materials79 115-28
  • Toledo Filho R D, de Andrade Silva F, Fairbairn E and de Almeida Melo Filho J 2009 Durability of compression molded sisal fiber reinforcedmortar laminates Construction and building materials23 2409-20
  • Tolêdo Filho R D, Joseph K, Ghavami K and England G L 1999 The use of sisal fibre as reinforcement in cement based composites RevistaBrasileira de Engenharia Agrícola e Ambiental245-56
  • Priyadharshini S and Ramakrishna G 2019 Recent Advances in Structural Engineering, Volume 1:

Springer) pp 921-33

  • Krishna N K, Prasanth M, Gowtham R, Karthic S and Mini K 2018 Enhancement of properties of concrete using natural fibers Materials Today: Proceedings23816-23
  • Kurtz S, Ong K, Lau E, Mowat F and Halpern M 2007 Projections of primary and revision hip and knee arthroplasty in the United States from2005 to 2030 JBJS89 780-5
  • Fujiyama R, Darwish F and Pereira M 2014 Mechanical characterization of sisal reinforced cement mortar Theoretical and Applied MechanicsLetters061002
  • Wei J and Meyer C 2016 Utilization of rice husk ash in green natural fiber-reinforced cement composites: Mitigating degradation of sisal fiberCement and Concrete Research81 94-111
  • Caetano H, Rodrigues J P C and Pimienta P 2019 Flexural strength at high temperatures of a high strength steel and polypropylene fibreconcrete Construction and Building Materials227 116721
  • Afroughsabet V, Biolzi L and Ozbakkaloglu T 2016 High-performance fiber-reinforced concrete: a review Journal of materials science516517-51
  • Ramesh M 2018 Handbook of Properties of Textile and Technical Fibres: Elsevier) pp 301-25
  • Ramakrishna G and Sundararajan T 2019 Durability and Life Prediction in Biocomposites, Fibre-

Reinforced Composites and Hybrid Composites: Elsevier) pp 211-55Pappu A, Pickering K L and Thakur V K 2019 Manufacturing and characterization of sustainable hybrid composites using sisal and hemp fibres as reinforcement of poly (lactic acid) via injection moulding Industrial Crops and Products137 260-9

  • Coelho A W F, Thiré R M d S M and Araujo A C 2019 Manufacturing of gypsum–sisal fiber composites using binder jetting AdditiveManufacturing29 100789
  • Naveen J, Jawaid M, Amuthakkannan P and Chandrasekar M 2019 Mechanical and Physical Testing of Biocomposites, Fibre-Reinforced Composites and Hybrid Composites: Elsevier) pp 427-40
  • Li J and Laghari R A 2019 A review on machining and optimization of particle-reinforced metal matrix composites The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology100 2929- 43
  • Hao Y, Hao H and Li Z-X 2010 Numerical analysis of lateral inertial confinement effects on impact test of concrete compressive materialproperties International Journal of Protective Structures145-67
  • Ramakrishna G and Sundararajan T 2005 Impact strength of a few natural fibre reinforced cement mortar slabs: a comparative study Cementand concrete composites27 547-53
  • Ramakrishna G 2005 Rheological strength and durability characteristics of sisal fibre reinforced cementitious composites
  • Albano C, Ichazo M, González J, Delgado M and Poleo R 2001 Effects of filler treatments on the mechanical and morphological behavior ofPP+ wood flour and PP+ sisal fiber Materials Research Innovations284-93
  • Brandt A, Olek J and Marshall I 2009 Tensile fatigue response of sisal fiber reinforced cement composites Brittle Matrix Composites 9 81
  • Wu C, Jia S, Chen R, Huang Z, Zhai S, Feng Y, Yang Z and Qu J 2013 Composites of sisal fiber/polypropylene based on novel vane extruder:Effect of interface and damage on mechanical properties Journal of Reinforced Plastics and Composites32 1907-15
  • En B S 2005 Methods of testing cement–Part 1: Determination of strength European Committee for Standardization: Brussels, Belgium169 36
  • Gao J, Sun W and Morino K 1997 Mechanical properties of steel fiber-reinforced, high-strength, lightweight concrete Cement and ConcreteComposites19 307-13
  • Song P and Hwang S 2004 Mechanical properties of high-strength steel fiber-reinforced concrete

Construction and Building Materials18 669-73

Education Policy 2020: Distance and Open Learning Challenges

M. Ajantha Kumar

Assistant Director, Dr.BR. Ambedkar Open University, Regional Centre,

Vijayawada, Andhra Pradesh.

Abstract

India faces severe problems in education like huge drop outs from Schools, Colleges, Universities and poor merge GER enrolment ratio of 26.3%. Another crisis is quality in higher education due to lack of professional training got various levels of teachers reflected on the performance of students. This lead to poor performance of students which created huge vacuum as the market is unable to absorb into the Job market. In addition to this access to higher education is limited to a few sections of the society because of location of the institutions and affordability. To overcome different policies have introduced distance Learning Centre’s to cater to the needs of the aspiring people to get education. The NEP 2020’s importance and its integrated approach is critically analyzed to have a comprehensive understanding of the policy in transforming the Education system in India.

Keywords: Professional training, Allocation, Distance education, Multi-disciplinary, Quality, Pedagogy and Methodologies, Learning process.

Introduction:

Higher Education in India suffers a lot due to insufficient allocation of funds proportionate to the population which seeks education. It is a pre-requisition for trained teachers is a major challenge in educating the youth of the country. To meet the needs of the younger population we have witnessed several Education Policies introduced since independence. One of them being 1968 policy which envisaged all types of education including distance education. Attempts to realize the goals of the policy could not make its way in reaching the all segments of the society. After that successive governments introduced Education Policies in 1986,1992 and 2020. After gap of 34 years New Education Policy was introduced in 2020. It envisaged the importance of culture and development with a holistic and visionary approach.

            Given scenario India faces severe problems in education like huge drop outs from Schools, Colleges, Universities and poor merge GER enrolment ratio of 26.3%. Another crisis is quality in higher education due to lack of professional training got various levels of teachers reflected on the performance of students. This lead to poor performance of students which created huge vacuum as the market is unable to absorb into the Job market. In addition to this access to higher education is limited to a few sections of the society because of location of the institutions and affordability. To overcome different policies have introduced distance Learning Centre’s to cater to the needs of the aspiring people to get education. This open and Distance Learning approaches have been contributing significantly to the education system.

In light of the above situation the present article portrait’s the importance of open and distance learning and how can this be reinforced as mentioned in the NEP of 2020. The new document insistent on the implementable strategies in reaching the all corners of the society by using ODI (Open Distance Learning).

Multidisciplinary Institutions

NEP envisaged transforming of Higher Education Institutions into large multi-disciplinary institutions with more than 3000 or more students. In emphasized on more investments not only in terms of infrastructure but also human Resources. Given the economic status of the nation is becoming difficult to allocate funds to the institutions, hence forth the private players are permitted to establish universities. This has created dual problems to the public funded universities, one being equality other being in the access.

Initiatives of the Government

The impact of Covid-19 paved new thinking towards a paradigm shift in the education domain. A sudden shift from offline to online without making formal training of teachers and students on the usage of technology based learning and teaching. The pandemic created a huge anxiety among the students, parents as well as teachers and academic administratives. This situation further created huge gap between urban and rural sectors in terms of education. Soon after the declaration of lockdown across India, lot of apprehensions were developed how the present generation would be able to continue the education amidst the uncertainty on reopening the schools, colleges and universities.

Given the stakeholders recourse the European countries and US resolved to conduct online classes in order to protect the academic year as part of continuity of education. This has posed a big challenge to the Indian government and proposes in opening of digital initiatives in promoting digital and visual based online learning methods. The other side of the issue on online teaching learning is about preparedness of the teachers as well as students in engaging the class without possessing the pre-requisite knowledge on e-content and e-delivery. This spoke for huge gap between urban and rural teachers in terms of the capabilities in handling digital classes. This further impacted on students in terms of equipping the gadgets. This situation gave rise to the concerns of quality teaching and learning which is a new initiative without any training to the teaching community. There is huge scope for the teachers as well as students from urban segments to get benefitted by the online teaching. But for rural students and teachers, it is a herculean task due to lack of infrastructure as well as connectivity. This created a huge absence of digital equity and inclusion in providing education as urban segment took the advantages of it and situations in rural areas further deteriorated affecting the marginalized communities.

The earlier experiences of distance and open learning systems have been contributing in providing education spreading across vast geographical areas covering all corners of the country including urban and rural areas. Unlike, the formal institutions the distance programs provide education to different cross-sectional of the society irrespective of the age-limit. It has cost effective benefits like material and fees. In the same manner post pandemic situation, helped many formal institutions migrate to the methods of open and distance learning. Methods of teaching and could successfully completed to academic years. This experience provided lot of potentiality in promoting distance and online programs. Distance education and open school system are to be strengthened in improving the quality of the material provided to the students. Through the system of distance learning as flexible in organizing contact classes and conducting exams but it has been maintaining its quality as it has got its regulatory bodies in place in maintaining the quality concerns. India has rich heritage from its ancient establishments like Takshashila and Nalanda universities in transferring knowledge from the ancestors.

Engagement of Community

The National Education Policy 2020 insisted upon the overall development of a child by exposing him to the maximum available streams of knowledge which helps the individual in knowing something of everything to become a sensitive being. As part of holistic education, spreading awareness on education, culture, environment education, value based education and ethics. Apart from the main thrust, the policy document also recognizes the importance of native cultures and professions like local industries, arts, crafts and skills. This further narrow down into references like pottery, goldsmith, carpentry, cobbler can be converted into more efficient and technology embedded enabled process of making tools would help rural artisans in making a decent living. This community engagement as visualized in the policy document of NEP can be realized through distance and open learning systems. In the sense, the true prime goals of providing education and strengthening the artisans’ skills would be realized if the policymakers strive towards the central core.

Open universities have different pedagogy and methodologies which can cater to the rural students by engaging them in developing materials in a self-learning mode. Apart from these, extracurricular activities and co-curricular activities needs to be introduced in the distance learning mode as envisaged in the NEP document making it a huge point of interdisciplinary centres. Open learning systems already have established network of study centres established in all regions of the country which may be channelized in promoting the cultural studies and other arts.

Issues and Challenges in Distance and Open Learning

The first issue in distance education in India is the quality of teaching reportedly decreasing. This is because of lack of well trained teachers or the coordinators engaged in teaching are inexperienced. The second challenge is the financing of distance education gets very less allocation and more interestingly the funds collected through distance education are not fully utilized for the purpose of distance and open learning. This needs to be streamlined according to the needs of the distance learning culture. Absence of more number of contacted hours in teaching learning process of distance education is leading to poor delivery of knowledge and further leading to partial attainment of knowledge by the stakeholders. Subsequently, the products of distance mode are not able to compete with the students of formal education. This scenario is pushing the entire system of distance learning engagement to a bleak future in terms of enrolments falling down steeply.

Political Factors and Gap in Supply and Demand

Due to inconsistent implementation of certain policies in the past have negative impact on the distance education mode, administrative bodies in relation to open-learning system are lacking autonomy in allocation of funds and designing of courses. These trends are keeping the structure of open learning system confining to outdated syllabus having no contemporary relevance. Introduction and utilization of certain technological developments in the field of teaching learning process could not be adopted in the distance learning domain resulting in poor engagement in the learning process.

Lack of Research and Development Facility

In the field of distance education research and development is not promoted properly. The task of research requires established laboratory facilities and other infrastructure facilities like libraries, data centres and incubation labs. Though open learning system may not support the infrastructure required for research. But networking with the formal system by attaching certain area of studies with the research centres would help in encouraging student seeking to carry research. This facilitates the experienced people from industry in transferring the knowledge they gained in the process into research outcome. This leads to a commendable contribution from the industry to research as most of the potential experienced knowledge must not be utilized for the development of economy.

Dearness is the another major challenge for the distance education system. Due to mushrooming of private colleges and other institutes gave rise to hike in the fee structure. Correspondingly, privatization of a education as a whole, affected the distance learning systems in the sense policymakers are keen in reducing the allocations on education and suggested respective institutions to raise their own funds by hiking the different fees. Sufficient funds are to be generated through this pattern to meet the expenditure in terms of printing material and maintenance of the stock. This has spirally effect on the overall enrolments as usually the beneficiaries of these programs are from the backgrounds of poor and marginal income groups. Due to the initiative of few hike the enrolments may come down in distance education.

Suggestions in Improving the Distance Education

There is a need to bring in innovative and transformational approach in terms of content development and delivery. Number of hours of teaching to be enhanced ensuring quality teaching-learning. Focus on employable skills based course design helping the students in competing in the job market. There should be a multi-disciplinary approach in imparting knowledge which would promote professional skills required for a student in relation to the mainstream knowledge. Vocational courses are to be introduced through distance mode by linking these courses with the industries. This would attract many rural youths getting benefitted to compete with the other students. Distance and open learning fees structures need to be designed such a way a poor student should not be feel burdened in paying the fees.


Conclusion

It is pertinent to note that major portion of the Indian population are living under poverty line and not in a position to get the access to education thereby not attempting to avail education provided by the government. To provide an opportunity to the segments, open distance learning system giving a scope in fulfilling their dream to have access to education with less amount of money to be spent in this direction. India with lot human resource potential need to tap the potentials for best utilization for nation building would be realized through distance education if it is strengthened with infrastructure and proper funds. To reach and realize the objectives, there is serious strategy to relocate human resources, finances, access and equity, relevance and infrastructure with quality concerns from the policymakers making the informal learners be part of economic growth.  

REFERENCES

Cleveland-Innes M.F. & Garrison D.R. (2010) “An Introduction to Distance Education”. Routledge Newyork & London

COL and Asian Development Bank. (1999) “An Overview of Open and Distance Learning: Training Toolkit.

John Daniel. (1996) Mega-universities and Knowledge Media. Kogan Page Limited. London

Koul, B.N. (1992) Development and delivery of distance education: The case of Indira Gandhi National Open University, In Ian Mugridge (Ed.

Kulandai Swamy, V.C. (1992) Distance Education in the Indian Context. Indian Journal of Open Learning, 1(1), pp. 1-4

COL. “Perspectives on Distance Education: Distance Education in Single and Dual Mode Universities”. COL, Canada.

Prasad, V.S. (1992) Dr. B.R. Ambedkar Open University: A decennial Perspective. Indian Journal of Open Learning, 1(2), pp. 11-17

Prasad, V.S. (1998) Developed Improved Strategies towards BeĴ er students Supports Services edited b P. Ramaiah and K. Murali Manohar, IDEA, Warangal.

Prasad, V.S. (2001) 5th annual IDEA conference held at New Delhi.

Ram Reddy. G. 1983. “Open Education System in India: Its place and potential”. A paper presented at the 59th Annual Meeting of AIU at Annamalai Nagar T.N. during 11-13, December.

Rowntree, Derek. (1992) Exploring open and distance learning, Kogan Page. London

Satyanarayana, R. (2004) Student support services and open learning. Mittal Publications, New Delhi.

Venkaiah, V. (1994) “Student Support Services in Dr. B.R. Ambedkar Open University,” in Dr. BRAOU (Ed.) Distance Education: An interface, Hyderabad.

Venkaiah, V. (1996) Management of student support services: Institutional perspectives, Kakatiya Journal of Open Learning, 2(2), pp. 19-28.

http://www.education.nic.in/dist_inst.asp 

http://www.col.org/ODLIntroODL.htm  

http://www.open.ac.uk/about/

http://www.sabri.org/EDTECH-01/Defi nition.htm

http://www.technologysource.org/extra/341/defi nition/1/

http://whatis.techtarget.com/defi nition/0,,sid9_gci866691,00.html  

Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar: A Popular Personality in India and Bangladesh 

Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar is a great name in India and Bangladesh for his immense contribution to the development of Bengali literature and women’s empowerment; the people of this region will remember generation to generation. On September 26, 1820, Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar (Ishwar Chandra Bandyopadhyay/ at present many persons with the same surname write Banerjee instead of Bandyopadhyay) was born in the Bengal, present West Bengal. Because of his vast knowledge later on in his life, he is known as Vidyasagar means knowledge of the ocean. He was also known as ‘Dayar Sagar’ or ‘Karunar Sagar’ (ocean of kindness) because of his generosity. His enormous contribution to the development of society is gratefully remembered by all, not only in India but also in Bangladesh.
He reconstructed the Bengali alphabet and simplified Bengali typography into alphabets.
He was a social reformer who advocated widow remarriage and worked against polygamy. Because of his initiative, the Widow Remarriage Act was passed in 1856, making widow marriage legal.
Vidyasagar worked endlessly to provide equal education to all men and women irrespective of caste and religion. He was a protagonist of women’s education. According to him, with education, only women can live in society with dignity and respect. He lobbied hard for girls’ schools, and for this, he went door to door requesting heads of families to allow their daughters to be admitted to the schools. It is believed that he could open 35 schools for girls throughout united Bengal, where around 1300 students were enrolled. It is pertinent to mention that because of his arduous labour and support received from John Elliot Drinkwater Bethune, the first girls’ school in India, the Bethune School was established on May 7, 1849, in Calcutta.
He worked as a Sanskrit professor in Sanskrit College, Calcutta. While he was the principal of the college, he undertook some reforms, and one of them was the admission of students belonging to marginalized groups (present SC/ST), as earlier, they were not allowed admission. Further, as a Professor at Sanskrit College, he successfully included English and Bengali as learning mediums in addition to Sanskrit. He introduced courses in European History, Philosophy, and Science along with Vedic scriptures. During his lifetime, Vidyasagar wrote many books and thus enriched the education system.
In present days, he is remembered in many ways, inter alia of which are:
a) Vidyasagar Setu, which connects Howrah and Kolkata, is a bridge over the Hooghly River in West Bengal.
b) A fair/mela named Vidyasagar Mela (dedicated to spreading education and increasing social awareness) has been held annually in West Bengal since 1994.
c) Vidyasagar College in Kolkata is named after him, as well as Vidyasagar University in Paschim Midnapore, West Bengal.
d) The West Bengal Government has established a stadium named after him at Barasat, North 24 Parganas district.
f) For his immense and selfless service to the marginalized people of Bihar, a railway station has been named Vidyasagar Station in the Jamtara district of Jharkhand.
g) Indian Post and Telegraph issued a stamp in his commemoration in 1970 on his 150th birth anniversary.
When I visited Bangladesh, I was joyous to observe his popularity among the people of Bangladesh.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

Human Beings with 90% Mental Disability States and their Impacts on Individuals with Good Mental Health States Exposes to the Same Mental Health Facility and Similar Conditions of Treatment.

Isaac Odoi Danquah

Water Resources Engineer, Goldrain Mountain Company Limited, Koforidua – Eastern Region, Ghana.

ABSTRACT

Man’s ability to have total control of oneself and coordinates all activities in daily life depends on absolute good or healthy state of the mind. The mind is the master control room of every being on earth. And with this mind in its good state or correct state of mind, one can behave very well. Once there is a change in the state of the mind as a result of inhibitor of the mind, once attitudes of behaviour changes. Such changes in behaviour, attitudes or motives can be attributed to drug abuse, breakages in marriages, failure in examinations or life, loss of loved one, loss of job, accidents, spiritual attack etc. Such individuals most at times experiences mental shocks hence mental illness or sufferings. Such people are always sent to mental homes or mental health facilities for rehabilitation or seek for help to bring the individual’s mind to a state of public acceptability for self-control and coordination in daily life. With such facilities and structures in place to address issues of such nature, bad motivated and get rich people (Ocultic world powers) makes use of spiritual powers to generate people who then get exposed to such incapacitated people in mental health facilities in Ghana. Such people of good mental health status exposed to all kinds of treatments and dangers when sent to such facilities with mindset of having the same problem. Such people end up being dragged into the problem and ending up as mentally disable (98% in mental disability) people of no return into natural mental status of public usage and missing among good mental health people again. They go into a state of total mental illness and darkness and seen as mad people of no concern and usage to the public and country again. 

Keywords: mental, health, disability, brain, mind, spiritual, psychoactive, Ocultic, behaviour, rehabilitation, drug abuse, treatment.

 1         INTRODUCTION

Life activities on the planet earth mainly depends on the mind and the sense organs. Coordination between them is what gives the mankind a sense of direction when looking at daily activities. A mind can be full of activities to be accomplished in a day, but a break in chain can be attributed to a change in mind or faulty in thought which is centered on the mind. The mind has its associated problems just like the way the body fights its illnesses on daily basis in order to stay healthy. The mind can never attain 100% efficiency when it comes to its actions, capability and ability. Notwithstanding, any break in the minds coordination in serving as the master control room is a big problem and danger to the individuals or beings involved. Life is never complete without the mind, hence doctors ensures brain functionality during and after every delivery of a baby for a perfect life on earth. Any malfunctioning of the brain results in all kinds of uncoordinated behaviour and actions. Hence any individual with a normal daily life full of acceptable activities is seen as a normal person. Once there is an observed change in Behaviour, motive, attitude and actions is said to be a mentally ill or sick and the need for medical attention. This is the case in daily life in Ghana. Such mental issues or problems do not just happen or occur in our lifes. Most mental problems are as a result of activities such as broken homes, failed marriages, failed examinations, delivery issues, drug abuse, smoking of weed and shisha, loss of loved ones, deportation from abroad, disasters (such as flooding and air masses), excessive sex, spiritual attacks from Ocultic world and higher realms etc. The resultant impacts of these listed scenarios is loss of mind and uncoordinated activities which makes life difficult. 

The cerebrum, cerebellum, and medulla oblongata coordinates all activities of the mind for total control achievement of purpose, goals and objectives on daily basis. Any damage to any of the parts or chain has is associated repercussions. All kinds of people are exposed to mental health facilities in Ghana and worldwide especially those with the problems listed above. Such people have their mental states disabled to an extent. It can be to 50%, 55%, 60%, 67%, 70%, 78%, 80% etc and the need for work to be done on them for such minds to be brought to normality and originality for perfect coordination in life. With such instability in mind, individuals in such positions exhibit all kinds of actions and behaviors. Some of these actions, attitudes and behaviors includes talking to oneself, staying alone for longer hours, walking aimlessly, picking of things on refuse dumps, wearing dirty clothes for months, walking in the middle of roads etc. Such minds have been lost to a higher degree for those on the streets and working on them is very difficult since the mind is about 93% out of order. But the once below 60% have a higher percentage of working on and bringing it to order or under control or even 95% once can be worked on and brought under control. But with such once, probability is 0.02 possibility. Bringing the mind under control is a very difficult task, since there is a distortion in creation and repairing creation is divinely influenced and nature has to give acceptance into code creation into nature. Since there is distortion in creation and orderliness, bringing the mind to order is not easy. 

Spirituality also plays a role when assessing the number people subjected or exposed to mental health facilities in Ghana. Ghana as a country is recognized as Christian country per counting the number of churches in Ghana comparable to other worshippers. It is also seen as an Islamic country as well as traditionalist. Hence Ghana seen as a country which does not play or joke with spiritual things or spirituality. With this in mind, everyone seen or believed to be rich in life should have an associated spiritual background whichever way. This is what some does by looking for others who will carry their cross in life hence the use of all kinds of super natural powers and means to make others victims while enriching themselves. Most victims of such adventure ends up on the streets or in mental homes looking for salvation keys to come back to normalcy. In some cases also, others do the enrichment journey themselves but ends up losing the mind and finds themselves on the streets of Ghana and Africa. Such people are unable to break secret codes of treasure hunting covered with madness and ends there. Such people also ends up in mental homes looking for help to return back to healthy mental states.

Assuming an intellectual is manipulated and ends in a mental home or facility with the same states of conditions and treatments for good health, you can think of the consequences. This is the case most graduates finds themselves in Ghana after a four year duration degree program, master’s degree program of PHD’s. Such people gets their educated heads exposed to such predicaments and can be generated into a higher degree problem in life. This is a reality problem as individuals who have toiled and educated themselves to to that level of even PHD’s gets their heads formatted and installed into heads of uneducated people of another world for such people to make a learning and education career in life. I think they are of the view that, one PHD head and its exit from life or earth can give twenty folds of educated people of lower class in Ghana.  

This is the case of situations for some people in Ghana which belong to a world and being worked against another world. When such instances occurs once can see the world subjecting the world to all kinds of problems listed above to end and individual in a mental health facility with all forces of nature and different dimensions of accusations. If such an individual doesn’t get an individual or good nature to work on his behalf or force so force of nature to backs his effort of fighting against such a cause and world, that soul is gone for good. Mental health facilities therefore exist to protect and fight for such victims but continues use of drugs to curtain the problem works on the brain negatively and the person ends up as a drug addict or victim of circumstances. Exposure and out of the mental health facility has its consequences. Stigmatization by people after being treated on drugs and subsequent going to the facility makes life difficult to live with if not of strong mind. Even the educated in Ghana have a problem with such people or people with mental health problems. They think once subjected to mental health facilities, then the head and mind is out of order and not programmable to work again or coordinated to function effectively. Mental health problems and issues can be associated with anyone hence the need for no stigmatization by any one. Assuming being arrested by five strong men, forced and sent to the mental health facility and treated harshly after which a sleeping injection is given for you to sleep for hours. After wakening up, you find yourself locked up and no way out of the facility and it happens three times to you. It can create a problem for you. In doing this, once brain is formatted and your intelligence into a system and become a routine thing done anytime one wants to builds his/her intelligence to a higher degree or level and everybody sees it. Won’t it be a routine for everyone who wants to access the head, intelligence or information gotten? This is a real time scenario generated on several occasions and people of no intelligence are using in Ghana to access intelligence and brains to make a living. This can create a problem for one at home, at the work place, among peers, in the community, in the church and among social groups etc. If not handled carefully, such a person will lose his/her mind, goes mad, become a nuisance and finally ends in death. If death does not occur, stigmatization can even lead to madness or lonely life. Some even ends up becoming a burden on families and friends with them acting as if they love the 100% and the feel their situations. This brain formatting and installation is what is generating kids of high accepted IQ’s but after getting degrees and PHD’s, one do not see their impact on country and generations. It therefore deems fit for occupation therapist (OT), psychiatric doctors, and health professionals such as counsellors to be very careful when dealing with mental health problems. 

In a way, most people end up as mental health patients on their way to treasure hunting in life. Wealth is spiritually bound and most wealth and treasures are spiritually covered. Hence the need to embark on spiritual journey before assessing the treasure. This is the case among gold treasure hunters in Ghana especially illegal gold miners. In Ghana, illegal gold miners believes gold mining has its associated spirits which needs to be worked on before assessing the treasure. Anyone who fails to do this rites may end up as mad or even in death. This is the reality for most of the people one finds in mental health facilities in Ghana and was seen during this work with real time investigations. Divine creation rendered unto mankind the Garden of Eden where man was authorized to have dominion and nurture the garden towards beauty and self-freedom. This was mainly dependent on man’s ability to make use of his mind, think like the creator and nurture it. Man faulted after being deceived by the enemy and resulted in a limitation placed on man. The beautiful treasure given to mankind was lost and the creation was taken over by the enemy with the enemy becoming the new owner. This new owner has total control over earth’s creation and now plays the tune for whoever wants to be rich to dance by it and become rich. Hence to be rich or access greater wealth in life, one ought to access the wealth or riches through evil means of which most ends up in psychiatric wards as mental patients looking for treatments. It is therefore necessary to understand the mental make-up of mankind, the psychological behaviour of people and how they think when it comes to their daily way of life and happenings. The human brain which is the master control room of the body ought to be analyzed for its make-up and functionality so that any shortfall can be worked on.

2 Related Works on Mental Health and associated problems

2.1 The Human Brain

The human brain is the control room of the body spearheading all affairs of mankind. Some brain structures are clearly demarcated. Others gradually merge into others; this leads to debate about their exact boundaries and the functions they control (Atkinson et. al., 1990). All the neurons in the brain and the spinal cord makes up the central nervous system. The human brain is composed of three centric layers; a) central core b) the limbic system c) the cerebral hemisphere (together known as the cerebral hemisphere (Atkinson et. al., 1990). The central core includes most of the brain stem. The first slight enlargement of the spinal cord as it enters the skull is the medulla, a narrow structure that control breathing and some reflexes that help the organism maintains upright posture (Atkinson et. al., 1990). Attached to the rear of the brain stem is a convoluted structure called the cerebellum. The cerebellum is primarily concerned with coordination of movement. Located just above the brain stem inside the cerebral hemispheres are two egg – shaped groups of nerves cell nuclei that make up the thalamus. One region of the thalamus acts as a relay station and directs incoming information to the cerebellum from the sense receptors for vision, touch, hearing and taste. Another region of the thalamus plays an important in the control of sleep and wakefulness (Atkinson et. al., 1990). Any injury to this region of the thalamus that plays a role in sleeping and wakefulness may have effects on once sleep and hence the resultant mental problem.

2.2    Neurons, nerves and Coordination

Even though neurons differ, they have certain common characteristics. Projecting from the cell body are a number of short branches called dendrites (Atkinson et. al., 1990). The dendrites and cell body receive neural impulses from adjacent neurons. These massages are transmitted to other neurons by a slender extension of the cell called an axon. At the end of the axon branch into a number of fine collaterals that end in small swellings called synaptic terminals. When neural impulses travels down the axon and arrives at the synaptic terminals, it triggers the secretion of a chemical called neurotransmitter. Although all neurons have these general features, they vary greatly in size and shape (Atkinson et. al., 1990). There are three types of neurons; sensory neurons transmit impulses received by receptors to the central nervous system. The receptors are specialized cells in the sense organs, muscles, skin and joints that detect physical or chemical changes and translate these into impulses that travels along the sensory neurons. (Atkinson et. al., 1990). This is what makes someone to be able to feel hotness or coldness or even fire whenever there is any physical changes in the environment. Motor neurons carry ongoing signals from the brain or spinal cord to the effector organs namely the muscles and glands. Coordination of these neurons with other sense organs is what gives someone a good mental state of mind towards fulfillment of daily activities

2.3   Asymmetries in the Brain

On examination of the brain in much details, the two halves of the human brain look like mirror images of each other. But closer examination reveals asymmetries. When brains are measured during autopsies, the left hemisphere is almost always larger that the right hemisphere (Atkinson et. al., 1990). Also, the right hemisphere contains many long neural fibres that connect widely separate areas of the brain, whereas the left hemisphere contains many shorter fibres that provide rich interconnection within a limited area (Geschwind et. al., 1987). Paul Broca (1861) examined the brains of a patient who had suffered speech loss and found that there are damages in areas of the left hemisphere just above the lateral fissure in the frontal lobe. The region known as Broca’s area is involved in the production of speech (Broca, 1861). Hence a damage or loss to a higher degree of such a region will subject an individual to a mental health facility for diagnosis and treatment. In this case the mentally ill individual is expected to show all kinds of mentally sick attitudes and behaviour. 

2.4  Drug dependence

Since ancient times, people have used drugs to alter their state of mind, consciousness – to stimulate or relax, to bring sleep, prevent sleep, to enhance ordinary perception or to produce hallucinations (Atkinson et. al., 1990). Psychoactives are drugs that affect behaviour, consciousness or mood. They include not only street drugs such as heroin and marijuana but also stimulants such as alcohol, tobacco and coffee. Table 1 list and classifies the psychoactive drugs that are commonly used and abused.

Table 1: Psycoactives drugs that are commonly used

PsychoactivesCommonly Used
Depressants(Sedatives)Alcohol (ethanol), Barbiturates, minor tranquilizers, valum.
Opiates (Narcotics)Opium and its derivatives, Heroin, Morphine, Methadone.
StimulantsCocaine, Nicotine, Caffaine, Amphetamines, Benzedrine
HallucinogenesMescaline, Psilocybin, 
CannabisMarijuana, Hashish

Source: Atkinson et. al., 1990.

It may be difficult to appreciate the major changes in patterns of drug usage and taken behaviour over the past 100years. For instance, the widespread use of tranquilizers for the treatment of mental illness and emotional problems which began in the 1950’s and the appearance of oral contraception’s in 1960 did much to change people attitudes towards drugs (Atkinson et. al., 1990). All of the drugs listed in Table 1 are assumed to affect behaviour and consciousness because they act in specific biochemical ways on the brain. With repeated usage, an individual can become physically or psychologically dependent on any of these drugs (Atkinson et. al., 1990). The United States still has the highest rates of drug usage among the world’s industrialized nations (Johnson et. al., 1989). 

2.5  Effects of Alcohol

Drugs that depress the central nervous system includes the minor tranquilizers, barbiturates and alcohols. In small quantities, alcohol appears to increase people’s energy and make them feel lively and sociable. In reality, it is a central nervous system depressant, not a stimulant. The initial stimulating effect of alcohol is believed to occur because the inhibiting synapses in the brain are depressed slightly earlier than the excitation synapses. Since the brain’s neurons maintain a close balance between excitation and inhibition, the depression of inhibitory synapses results in a feeling of excitation, or stimulation. However, the excitation synapses soon become depressed too; the stimulating effects are overridden causing drowsiness and slowed sensory and motor functions. Continuous intake of such ethanol leads to mental retardation and disability (Atkinson et. al., 1990).

2.6 Sexual disorder and Behaviour

A great survey of British sexual attitudes and lifestyle (Johnson et. al., 1994) has provided the most comprehensive evaluation of sexual behaviour in the British public to date (Besant et. al., 1998). It was motivated largely by the emergence in 1980’s of the lethal epidemic of sexually transmitted infection, HIV and lack of baseline measures of sexual behaviour. In the past four decades, the median age of first heterosexual intercourse has fallen from 21years to 17 years for women and 20years to 17yeears for men. People in the 21st century are more likely to use contraceptives (usually condoms and injections for women) than those of previous generations (Basant et. al., 1998). Frequency of heterosexual sex (oral, vaginal, anal intercourse) among the youth shows wide variability with a small proportion of the population reporting a very high frequency of sexual contact. Vaginal intercourse usually dominates when dealing with intercourse since that is the natural way and is the most preferred. Increase in practice of oral sex, but not as a substitute to vaginal intercourse. 

In Ghana, the youth outside marriage have loss frequent sex past overall but not today. For the current Ghana, they are more likely to have multiple partners, a wide range of practices and recent experiences of high risk practices (Basant et. al., 1998).

3 Research Area and Methodology

3.1 Research Area

The study area for this work is the Regional Hospital Koforidua (RHK) in the Eastern Region of Ghana, Komfo Anokye Teaching Hospital – Kumasi in the Ashanti Region of Ghana and Pantang Hospital – Accra in the Greater Accra Region of Ghana. Koforidua is the capital city of the Eastern Region of Ghana. The city harbors people of total population of 127,334 (Ghana Statistical Service, 2012). Koforidua is the commercial heart for the eastern region and the New Juaben Municipal district. Koforidua lies on latitude 6° 05 38ᶦᶦ N and longitude 0° 15ᶦ 32ᶦᶦ W at an elevation of 238m (781ft) above sea level. The New Juaben municipality falls within the Eastern Region of south Ghana covering a total land area of 110km2. This total land area constitutes 0.57% of the total land area of the Eastern Region. The annual rainfall over the capital ranges from 50inches to 120inches and 20⁰C to 32⁰C, mean annual temperature. The New Juaben municipality shares borders with East – Akim municipality to the northeast, Suhum Kraboa Coaltar district to the west, and Akwapim North district to the east and south. A number of industrial activities are embarked in the city and these include textiles, crafts, soap, traditional medicine, welders, carpentry, ceramics and poetry. Production of alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages and good bread forms part of industrialized produced products in the city. Regional Hospital Koforidua (RHK) is the main hospital within the region attending all issue of health which is above the horizon of the district hospitals in the region. The mental health department (MHD) is the department responsible for all mental health associated problems that the hospital receives on daily basis. 

The study area also focus on Pantan Hospital in Accra where the same scenarios were being generated over and over again. The same happened in Kumasi which was the first place of case for scenario generation over and over again in Ghana as stated in the introduction. The main focus point is at Koforidua in the Eastern Region of Ghana 

3.2  Methodology Employed

Research works always aims at establishing an inner truth about something. The main aim of this research work is to access and analyze human beings with 90% mental disability state and see whether they can have significant impacts on same humans of good health status when all are exposed to same facility and treatment. This research work started when a health human being was arrested and sent to a mental health facility and subjected to hash treatment equivalent to that for people of mental deficiencies. The method employed is the facility Stationed Focus Assessment and Evaluation Method (FSFAEM). In the process, investigator is tasked and goes through the normal process for patient of mental illness in the mental home. Results are generated after detail activities and picking of data and intelligence for a maximum period of 13 years. In some cases also, data is picked after a day’s visit to the mental health facility for monthly treatment. Findings are then obtained for analysis, verification, justification and acceptance. Figure 1 gives a diagrammatic view of the method employed for the research.

4.0       Research Findings

4.1       Psychoactives 

Once daily activities and actions are mentally and psychologically motivated. Without the mind in its perfect state or one in its absolute complete state of mind, one cannot operate or work very well. So whatever be the case, the head with the brain at its utmost functionality is needed for once daily movements, operations and activities. Anything contrarily to this will result in negative consequences. And in other to achieve mentally ill state or mind of 80% disability state, there is need for Psychoactives. These are drugs that inhibit the action of the brain or mind resulting in moody, bad behaviour and actions. Some of the Psychoactives includes ethanol, caffeine, cocaine, heroin, wee (weed), cigar, opium etc. When such drugs are taken into the body and subsequently into the mind continuously, coordination of the body by nerves and neurons becomes reduced drastically by percentage. When this happens, the person sense organs such as hearing, feeling, taste, sight etc becomes affected. Continuation of life in a proper manner to help oneself and country is problematic. Use of healthy individuals to heal people of mentally ill status. Psychoactives destruction effects.

4.1.1    Psychoactives destruction Effects 

In every community in Ghana, the lower class forms the masses. With a percentage of the mass classified into psychoactive affected people. With such people, the rate at which they drink alcohol (95% in alcohol percentage) for instance is from morning to morning on daily basis. Such people do not have a good eating habit and usually seen as people of no usefulness in the country. Most are met on daily basis undergoing random motion. They do not have the mind set to think through activities. On sense of judgment and direction as well as defined goals and objectives to achieve in life. No daily income or monthly salary to support life and home. Such people are always seen to be living in hideouts because of devious motives and activities. Most of them are very bad people because of the highness in mind due to large intake of psychoactive. Those with families who think about them end up in mental homes and facilities for rehabilitations. 

Sending someone with good mental health state to such a facility and meeting such from a psychoactive background can lead to negative effects. Assuming someone of PHD status whose head has been short through Ocultic means and installed in others meet such as person. If such a doctor sense of direction is deactivated and gives up in life, then his is a pilot who will lose total control of his captainship. Such a person will begin to drink excessively, take in all kinds of narcotic drugs, be sexually active to satisfy him/herself and that soul is gone.  An entire family, community, nation, world will be flooded unto poverty and self-destruction. 

4.2       Occultism Incorporated

Worldwide occultism plays a major role in mentally sick individual’s generation into mental health facilities. Some believe in get rich quick schemes hence the use of supernatural means to attain that height. In such get rich world schemes, one does sacrifices hence the possibility of sacrificing a human being for the enrichment in life. What one does is seize a brother, sister, family member or relative or any individuals who has worked for wealth and utilize it aimlesslesly. The use of all kinds of supernatural means to seize that individual’s opportunity in life or breakthrough. They then lay their cross of suffering on the individual or brother to go through their suffering and hustles in life while they enjoy life to the fullest. The most interesting part is that, they always have such a person in focus and will be monitoring is daily activities. 

4.2.1    Occultism incorporated impacts on good health minds

Occultism incorporated effects on healthy mind is total disaster. Most great minds and individuals have lost their lives because of the bad effects of occultism and get rich easy life by people. Some end up as mad people walking in the streets while the Ocultic man or initiator is a beneficiary and enjoying life to a greater extent.

4.3       Street Arrest of Individuals

Street life also forms part of a society activities. Most school drop outs, sellers who have migrated from their local community to cities ends up living on the streets. Life in the streets is like living in the jungle where only the fitters survive. Therefore, people or individuals on the streets are always involved in a fight or all kinds of illegal activities which mostly warrant arrest by police to police stations. Those that ends up in police stations ends up in police cells and those who ends in hospitals ends up in mental health facilities for treatments. They go through all kinds of mental treatments and ends up as mentally ill or retarded patients. This is achieved after series of bad treatment by doctors and nurses who are on their sides or same Ocultic world or the continuous use of mentally ill drugs. Such people ends up losing their minds to a higher degree and final output is madness.  

4.3.1    Percentage change and effects from individuals on the streets

In Ghana, street life personnel’s or individuals on the streets do not play major roles in national development. Such people are always seen in Ghetto’s having their daily activities. They are mostly smokers, gangsters, tricksters, gamblers and involved in all kinds of social vices. In terms of percentage personnel’s from the streets to mental health facilities are first of all to a degree of 60% in mental disability. Once they are subjected to mental facilities for rehabilitations, some get rehabilitated into different good kinds of individuals to live a normal life. Those who are unable to return to normalcy goes mad totally or even death. Some are in treasure hunting looking for answers for the good will of treasures for their lives. Spiritual arrest also exists which involves the arrest spiritually for entering and assessing a real one ought not to. This at times also results in mental illness or madness. 

4.4 Other kinds of failures 

Nature has within its creation failures of various forms. Everyone is bound to fail in one way of the other by a certain percentage. What one does in times of difficulty is the most important thing. Failures can be seen in terms of failed marriages, failed examinations, failure in business, failure in learning a trade, failure at once job, failure in governance etc. all these are different forms of failures. There is a mental havoc associated with all these failures. This may end once remaining life on earth in a mental home or mental facility. When it happens like this, it’s once responsibility to justify before nature and mankind why the failure should not occur, continue and be replaced with success. One ought to fight nature and mankind with whatever means in life to justify his/her cause before natural panelist and mankind. Once justification is well done whichever way and well understood by all, then one can proceed unto success. If not, he/she may end up as a mentally ill person or even goes mad. Defense and justification of a cause is both physically and spiritually. It is likely such an individual has entered into a realm and assessed a great treasure which will lead him unto greater heights in life. Hence the need for spiritual defense because all treasures are spiritually bound. So once such a person is unable to defend or justify why such a treasure belongs to him/her and does have the spiritual power and authority to possess and protect it, he or she may end up mad or mentally retarded.

4.4.1    Effects from other kinds of failures resulting in mental disability

The impacts of mental disability states resulting in all kinds of failures on good mental health states is enormous. As elaborated above, all kinds of failures exist which may end one in a mental home followed by all kinds of consequences. Two main consequence experienced by individuals who finds themselves in such situation is either madness or death. When the failure is continuous and no way to leave the deep pit, some even hung themselves or commits suicides. Those who do not end their lives but continues in the hustles and torchers ends up in mental facilities for rehabilitations and treatments and later towards madness or death. It is only a few, about 10%, who are able to be rehabilitated in rehabilitation centres by family members and friends. Such friends and families should be willing to spend money towards rehabs. During the rehabilitation process, patients are taken through all kinds of treatments. Some of the vocational training includes kente weaving, instruments playing, clay artistic works etc. 

5          Conclusions

Mental disability states generated by any of the scenarios under research findings is a state which can be worked on to attain positive or negative results. Positive results yielding 75% – 80% good mental health state of being is a position of living a new life to help oneself and mankind. Or mentally retarded person with the final results of madness or death. People will continue to smoke, drink alcohol, and take stimulants and psychoactive. This may have effects on the human mind and its final efficiencies in thinking and usage. Meeting physiological needs is very problematic to the average Ghanaian and the world at large. Continuous difficulty in such directions will end people in mental homes and facilities. Assessing treasures in life either through holy or unholy grounds will have people entering into spiritual reals and the resultant ending in mental homes if the nature is unanswered. It is therefore the responsibility of psychiatric doctors, nurses and health professionals to help such people to regain their mental power and strength. There need to be efficacy in treatment and truthfulness on the part of practitioners, drugs administering in taking care of the mentally retarded. Because by the time one is through with his/her treatment, a drug might have ended someone in mental jail. This is because all the generated scenarios under research findings are feasible and likely to end someone in this mentally disabled state forever. It is therefore the responsibilities of practitioners, traditionalists, faith based and alternative healers, health professionals, mental health workers, media, families and friends and all other stakeholders to help bring back the person to about 84% mentally stable state to help oneself and nation. 

Acknowledgement

I am grateful to the almighty God for this research work. Thanks to all who made this research work a success in Koforidua, Accra and Kumasi.  God bless you all.  

References

  • Atkinson R. L., Atkinson R. C., Smith E. E., 1990, Introduction to Psychology, 10th Edition, 33 – 34, 41 – 42, 50, 201 – 202.
  • Basant K. P., Hall A. D., 1998, Revision Notes in Psychiatry, Chp 31, 314 – 327.
  • Geshwind N., Galaburda A. M., 1987, Cerebral Laterilization, Cambridge MA; MIT Press, 50, 55.
  • Johnson L. D., O’Malley P. M., Bachman J. G., 1989, Illicite drug use, smoking and drinking by American’s high School Students, College students and young adults. 1975 – 1987, Rockville, MD; National Institute of Drug Abuse, 212, 213, 215, 221.
  • Miles L. E., Raynal D. M., Wilson M. A., (1977), Blind man living in normal society has circulation rhythm of 24.9hrs, Science, 198, 421 – 423.

Success Stories of Digital Transformation in Accounting in Nigeria

1OLUGBAMIYE Dominic O., 2AKINADEWO Israel S., 3AKPAN James U., and 4FAGBOMEDO Oluwadare R

1234Department of Accounting, College of Social and Management Science, Afe Babalola University, Ado Ekiti, Ekiti State, Nigeria.

Abstract

The rapid advancement of digital technologies has led to transformative changes across various industries, and the accounting sector in Nigeria is no exception. This exploratory research study delves into the success stories of digital transformation in accounting firms and financial services companies operating in Nigeria. Through in-depth case studies, the research explores the integration of technology with traditional accounting practices and the implications of this digital shift on financial operations, efficiency, and customer services. The study reveals that the seamless integration of cloud-based accounting software, artificial intelligence, and data analytics into traditional practices enhances operational efficiency and enables accountants to deliver more value-added services to clients. Digital-first organizational cultures and continuous training and up-skilling of accounting professionals emerge as crucial success factors for successful digital transformation. The future outlook predicts the continued evolution of technology in the accounting industry, with advancements in AI, block-chain, and mobile applications shaping financial processes. Alongside the promising opportunities, challenges related to data security, workforce readiness, and equitable digital adoption must be addressed. The research concludes that embracing digital transformation is imperative for the future of the accounting industry in Nigeria. Policymakers must collaborate with industry stakeholders to develop robust regulatory frameworks and promote inclusive digital adoption. By incorporating the study’s findings and adopting best practices, accounting firms and financial services companies can navigate the digital landscape with confidence, ensuring sustained growth and relevance in the dynamic digital era.

Keyword: Digital Transformation, Accounting Firms, Financial Services Companies, Technology Integration, Efficiency, Customer Services

JEL Classification: M41, O33, G20, L86, O55

1.1       Background to the Study

Over the past decade, the global business landscape has witnessed a significant shift towards digital transformation, driven by the rapid advancement of technology and its profound impact on various industries (Wamba & Akter, 2019). The accounting sector, as a crucial pillar of the business ecosystem, has not remained untouched by this transformative wave. Digital technologies have revolutionized the way financial data is processed, managed, and analyzed, leading to improved efficiency, accuracy, and decision-making capabilities for accounting professionals (Jones & Dumay, 2018).

In the Nigeria context, a fast-growing economy with a burgeoning technology sector, the adoption of digital transformation in accounting practices has been gaining momentum (Oyelere & Soriyan, 2018). As businesses across various sectors increasingly embrace digital solutions, accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria have also recognized the need to adapt to the changing landscape. This adaptation involves the integration of modern technologies into traditional accounting processes, leading to what is commonly referred to as “digital transformation in accounting” (Akinuli & Falohun, 2018)

According to Wamba and Akter (2019), digital transformation refers to the fundamental changes in an organization’s operations, services, and business model to leverage digital technologies optimally. In the accounting context, this involves the adoption of cloud computing, artificial intelligence, data analytics, and other digital tools to streamline financial processes, enhance data security, and provide real-time insights to stakeholders.

Several studies have highlighted the potential benefits of digital transformation in accounting. For instance, Jones and Dumay (2018) emphasize that digital technologies enable accounting firms to automate routine tasks, freeing up time for accountants to focus on higher-value activities such as financial analysis and strategic decision-making. Additionally, Rossignoli, Gatti, and Turco (2020) argue that digital transformation can significantly improve financial reporting accuracy, reducing the likelihood of errors and fraud.

While the advantages of digital transformation in accounting are evident, the specific success stories and best practices in the Nigerian context remain understudied. Understanding the successful implementation of digital transformation initiatives in Nigerian accounting firms and financial services companies can offer valuable insights to practitioners and policymakers alike. Moreover, exploring the challenges faced during this transformation process will shed light on potential barriers and facilitate the development of strategies to overcome them.

Therefore, this exploratory research aims to identify and analyze success stories of digital transformation in accounting firms and financial services companies operating in Nigeria. By examining the strategies, technologies, and outcomes of these success stories, the study seeks to contribute to the existing body of knowledge on digital transformation in the Nigerian accounting industry. Furthermore, the findings will provide practical recommendations for organizations looking to embark on their digital transformation journey or optimize their current initiatives.

1.2       Statement of Problem

In recent years, the global business landscape has witnessed a significant shift towards digital transformation, with organizations across various industries adopting modern technologies to streamline their operations and stay competitive. The accounting sector, being a fundamental pillar of the business ecosystem, has also been influenced by this transformative wave. In Nigeria, a fast-growing economy with a burgeoning technology sector, the adoption of digital transformation in accounting practices has been gaining momentum.

While there is growing awareness of the potential benefits of digital transformation in accounting, there remains a significant knowledge gap regarding the specific success stories and best practices of this transformation within the Nigerian context. Although several studies have explored the advantages of digital transformation in accounting globally, little attention has been given to understanding the unique challenges and opportunities faced by accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria during their digital transformation journey. For instance, Wamba and Akter (2019) emphasize that despite the increasing adoption of digital technologies in various industries, there is a lack of comprehensive research on successful digital transformation initiatives in the Nigerian context. This gap in the literature hinders the ability of organizations to make informed decisions regarding their adoption of digital technologies in the accounting sector.

Moreover, the scarcity of case studies focusing on the Nigerian landscape limits the availability of practical insights and strategies that can guide organizations in implementing successful digital transformation projects. According to Jones and Dumay (2018), the absence of localized case studies prevents accounting professionals in Nigeria from learning from the experiences of their peers and adopting best practices. Therefore, the lack of in-depth exploration of success stories and best practices of digital transformation in accounting firms and financial services companies operating in Nigeria, as highlighted by Wamba and Akter (2019) and Jones and Dumay (2018), poses a considerable knowledge gap. This gap hinders the identification of effective strategies and potential challenges faced during the adoption of digital technologies in the Nigerian accounting industry.

By addressing this problem, the proposed exploratory research aims to provide valuable insights into the successful implementation of digital transformation initiatives in the Nigerian accounting sector. Through the analysis of specific case studies and in-depth interviews with key stakeholders, the study seeks to contribute to the existing body of knowledge on digital transformation in Nigeria, as advocated by Rossignoli et al. (2020), and offer practical recommendations to organizations seeking to embark on their own digital transformation journey.

1.3       Research Objectives

The primary research objective is to identify and examine specific success stories of digital transformation in accounting firms and financial services companies operating in Nigeria. This involves exploring organizations that have effectively implemented digital technologies in their accounting processes and have achieved positive outcomes as a result. While the specific objectives are to:

  1. analyze the strategies and technologies utilized
  1. assess the impact on efficiency and financial reporting
  2. identify challenges and lessons learned
  3. offer practical recommendations

1.4       Research Questions

Based on the statement of problem, the following research questions are raised for the study:

  1. What are the key digital transformation initiatives implemented by accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria?
  2. How have digital technologies, such as cloud computing, artificial intelligence, and data analytics, been integrated into accounting processes during the digital transformation journey in Nigeria?
  3. What are the specific benefits and outcomes experienced by accounting firms and financial services companies as a result of successful digital transformation?
  4. What challenges and obstacles were faced during the implementation of digital transformation initiatives in the Nigerian accounting industry?
  5. What lessons can be learned from the success stories of digital transformation in accounting in Nigeria, and how can these insights be applied to enhance future transformation efforts?
  6. How can the adoption of digital transformation in accounting improve financial reporting accuracy and decision-making capabilities in the Nigerian context?
  7. What role does organizational culture play in facilitating or hindering the successful adoption of digital technologies in accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria?
  8. How can accounting professionals in Nigeria be trained and up-skilled to effectively leverage digital tools and technologies during their daily operations?

1.5       Scope of the Study

This research focuses on exploring success stories of digital transformation within the Nigerian accounting industry. Specifically, it centers on accounting firms and financial services companies operating in southwest states of Nigeria, aiming to understand the impact of digital technologies on their operations and financial practices. The study investigated the strategies and technologies utilized during the digital transformation journey, with a primary focus on cloud computing, artificial intelligence, data analytics, and automation. By concentrating on the Nigerian context, the research seeks to identify organizations that have successfully implemented digital transformation initiatives and have achieved notable improvements in efficiency, financial reporting accuracy, and decision-making capabilities. Through in-depth interviews and case studies, the study aims to gain valuable insights into the challenges faced and lessons learned during the digital transformation process in the Nigerian accounting industry.

Despite the comprehensive approach, this research has some inherent limitations. The exploratory nature of the study may constrain the depth of analysis for each case study due to time constraints. Consequently, the exhaustive coverage of all aspects of the digital transformation process may not be feasible. The sample size may be limited by the availability of accounting firms and financial services companies willing to participate in the research, potentially impacting the generalizability of the findings. Moreover, the willingness of organizations to share detailed information about their digital transformation journey may be affected by confidentiality concerns, leading to potential limitations in accessing critical data points and best practices. Since the study is specific to the Nigerian context, generalizing the findings to other countries or industries requires caution, as contextual factors can significantly influence the outcomes. Additionally, the rapidly evolving nature of technology may render some findings outdated, as newer technologies and strategies emerge after the research is conducted.

Furthermore, as the research involves a qualitative approach, there might be some level of subjectivity in interpreting and analyzing the data, despite efforts to maintain objectivity. Despite these limitations, this study aims to provide valuable insights into the digital transformation landscape in the Nigerian accounting industry. By acknowledging the scope and limitations, researchers and readers can better contextualize the findings and consider their applicability to other scenarios and contexts.

1.6       Significance of the Study

This research holds several significant implications for various stakeholders in the Nigerian accounting industry and beyond. By focusing on success stories of digital transformation in the Nigerian accounting sector, this study seeks to contribute new knowledge and insights to the existing body of literature on digital transformation and its impact on financial practices. The exploration of specific strategies, technologies, and outcomes will offer valuable information for researchers and practitioners interested in understanding the successful implementation of digital transformation initiatives in a rapidly evolving economic landscape.

The study’s findings will provide practical guidance for accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria that are considering or currently undergoing digital transformation. By analyzing successful cases, organizations can learn from best practices, potential challenges, and lessons learned, thereby enhancing their own transformation initiatives. The research will offer valuable insights into how digital technologies can improve efficiency, financial reporting accuracy, and overall decision-making capabilities, providing tangible benefits for businesses.

In light of the increasing adoption of digital technologies in the accounting industry, policymakers and regulators in Nigeria will find the research results relevant in shaping policies that promote digital transformation while addressing potential challenges and ensuring data security and privacy. The study’s findings can inform the development of guidelines and frameworks for the adoption and integration of technology in financial practices.

The successful implementation of digital transformation initiatives in the accounting sector can have broader implications for Nigeria’s economic growth and innovation. Improved efficiency and accuracy in financial reporting can enhance investor confidence and attract more investments, contributing to the overall development of the country’s business environment. Furthermore, embracing digital technologies can foster a culture of innovation in the accounting industry, encouraging other sectors to follow suit in their digital transformation efforts.

The research will serve as a valuable resource for academic institutions and professional bodies involved in accounting education and training in Nigeria. By providing real-world case studies and practical insights, the study can enrich accounting curricula and professional development programs, ensuring that future accountants are equipped with the knowledge and skills required in a digitally transformed business landscape.

2.         Literature Review

2.1       Digital Transformation in Accounting: Concepts and Definitions

Digital transformation is a multifaceted and dynamic concept that has become increasingly relevant in today’s business landscape. As organizations seek to stay competitive and adapt to the fast-paced technological advancements, the term “digital transformation” has emerged as a buzzword. At its core, digital transformation represents a comprehensive and strategic shift in an organization’s operations, business models, and culture to harness digital technologies effectively (Wamba & Akter, 2019).

In the context of the accounting sector, digital transformation entails the radical integration of modern digital technologies into traditional accounting practices and processes. This integration aims to leverage the capabilities of technologies like cloud computing, artificial intelligence (AI), data analytics, and automation to revolutionize how financial data is collected, processed, analyzed, and communicated. Accounting professionals are increasingly utilizing digital tools and platforms to replace manual, paper-based tasks, reducing the reliance on traditional spreadsheets and ledgers.

The incorporation of cloud computing technology has been a game-changer in the digital transformation of accounting. Cloud-based accounting software, such as QuickBooks Online and Xero, has provided businesses with the ability to access financial data and applications from anywhere with an internet connection. This not only enhances collaboration and remote working capabilities but also ensures real-time synchronization of financial information, enabling accountants and stakeholders to make informed decisions promptly (Barker & Harris, 2018).

Artificial intelligence and data analytics have significantly impacted accounting practices, enabling the automation of routine tasks and empowering accountants to analyze large volumes of financial data more efficiently. AI-driven systems can now handle tasks like data entry, bank reconciliation, and even fraud detection, reducing the potential for human error and freeing up accountants’ time for more strategic activities (Jones & Dumay, 2018). Additionally, data analytics tools provide deep insights into financial patterns and trends, helping businesses identify growth opportunities and potential risks.

Furthermore, automation plays a crucial role in digital transformation, allowing accounting professionals to automate repetitive and time-consuming tasks. This includes generating financial reports, invoicing, and payment processing. By automating these processes, businesses can save valuable time and resources, ultimately leading to increased productivity and cost savings (Rossignoli, Gatti, & Turco, 2020).

The ultimate objective of digital transformation in accounting is to streamline financial operations, improve overall efficiency, and provide real-time data insights for better decision-making. By embracing digital technologies, accounting firms and financial services companies can enhance their capabilities in responding to market changes promptly and providing more value-added services to clients (Akinnuli & Falohun, 2018). Moreover, digital transformation ensures organizations can maintain compliance with ever-evolving financial regulations and reporting standards in an increasingly interconnected global economy

2.2       The Role of Technology in Modern Accounting Practices

The transformational role of technology in modern accounting practices cannot be overstated. As businesses increasingly recognize the value of digital tools in streamlining financial operations and enhancing decision-making capabilities, the accounting landscape has witnessed a significant shift towards a more technologically-driven approach.

1. Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Systems: One of the most critical technological advancements in modern accounting practices is the widespread adoption of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems. Jones and Dumay (2018) highlight the crucial impact of ERP systems on accounting operations. These integrated software solutions have revolutionized financial reporting by providing a centralized platform for managing various aspects of a company’s operations, including finance, human resources, inventory, and customer relationship management.

ERP systems enable real-time data consolidation from different departments, subsidiaries, or locations, ensuring that accountants have access to the most up-to-date and accurate financial information. This real-time data visibility enhances financial reporting accuracy and facilitates timely decision-making by stakeholders. Moreover, the integration of ERP systems streamlines accounting processes, as data entry and updates are automatically synchronized across different modules, reducing the risk of duplication and errors.

With the automation of routine accounting tasks, such as accounts payable and accounts receivable management, ERP systems free up accountants from mundane activities, allowing them to focus on value-added tasks like financial analysis and strategic planning. This not only boosts efficiency but also empowers accounting professionals to contribute more effectively to the organization’s growth and success.

2. Cloud-Based Accounting Software: The integration of cloud-based accounting software has been a game-changer for modern accounting practices. Barker and Harris (2018) emphasize how cloud technology has facilitated remote access to financial data, enabling accountants and financial professionals to work from anywhere with an internet connection.

Cloud-based accounting software, such as QuickBooks Online, Xero, and Zoho Books, offers numerous advantages to businesses. First and foremost, it eliminates the need for on-premises servers and costly infrastructure, as all financial data is securely stored in the cloud. This significantly reduces IT maintenance costs and allows organizations to scale their accounting systems easily as their business grows.

The collaborative nature of cloud accounting platforms enhances teamwork and communication within accounting departments and between accountants and their clients. Real-time data sharing and access facilitate seamless collaboration, enabling accountants to work closely with their clients and provide timely financial insights and advice.

Data security is a paramount concern for accounting practices, given the sensitive nature of financial information. Cloud-based accounting software providers invest heavily in robust security measures, including encryption, multi-factor authentication, and regular data backups, to ensure that financial data remains secure and protected from unauthorized access

2.3       Digital Transformation Trends in Nigeria’s Accounting Industry

The accounting industry in Nigeria has experienced a notable surge in the adoption of digital transformation initiatives. This upward trajectory can be attributed to several key trends and factors that have shaped the landscape of modern accounting practices in the country.

1. Rise of Fintech Companies: The rise of financial technology (fintech) companies has been a driving force behind the digitization of financial transactions in Nigeria’s accounting industry. Fintech startups, with their innovative digital solutions, have disrupted traditional financial services and provided alternative ways for individuals and businesses to manage their finances.

Fintech companies offer a range of digital payment solutions, including mobile payment platforms, online wallets, and peer-to-peer payment apps. These platforms have gained widespread popularity due to their convenience, accessibility, and ease of use. Consumers and businesses in Nigeria have increasingly embraced these digital payment methods, leading to a significant reduction in cash transactions.

2. Mobile Payment Solutions: Mobile payment solutions have played a pivotal role in the digital transformation of the accounting industry in Nigeria. Companies like Interswitch and Paga have emerged as leading providers of mobile payment platforms, enabling individuals and businesses to make secure and efficient transactions using their mobile devices.

The integration of mobile payment solutions into accounting practices has streamlined payment processes and reduced reliance on traditional banking channels. Businesses can now receive payments from customers and make disbursements to suppliers and employees swiftly, facilitating smoother cash flow management. Additionally, mobile payment solutions have improved financial inclusion, as individuals without access to traditional banking services can now participate in the formal economy (Oyelere & Soriyan, 2018).

3. Cashless Transactions and Advanced Accounting Systems: The increased digitization of financial transactions has paved the way for businesses to embrace cashless transactions and advanced accounting systems. As more financial transactions are conducted digitally, the need for manual cash handling and reconciliation diminishes. This transition to cashless transactions not only improves the efficiency of accounting processes but also reduces the risk of errors and fraud.

With the adoption of digital payment platforms and accounting software, businesses in Nigeria can maintain more accurate and up-to-date financial records. The real-time data synchronization and automation capabilities of modern accounting systems enable accountants to access financial information instantly and generate real-time financial reports, empowering stakeholders to make data-driven decisions promptly.

4. Business Process Integration: Another trend in Nigeria’s accounting industry is the integration of various business processes through digital transformation. By adopting integrated accounting software solutions, businesses can streamline not only their financial processes but also other operational areas such as sales, inventory management, and human resources. This seamless integration facilitates smoother data flow and collaboration across different departments, enhancing overall organizational efficiency (Akinnuli & Falohun, 2018)

2.4       Challenges and Opportunities for Digital Transformation in Nigerian Accounting

The journey towards digital transformation in the Nigerian accounting industry is not without its challenges. However, it also presents numerous opportunities for accounting firms and financial services companies to enhance their operations and stay competitive in a rapidly evolving business landscape.

Challenges:

1. Data Privacy and Security Concerns: One of the major challenges of digital transformation in Nigerian accounting is ensuring the privacy and security of sensitive financial data. As organizations adopt cloud computing and digital platforms to store and process financial information, safeguarding this data becomes paramount. The threat of data breaches and cyberattacks poses significant risks to the confidentiality and integrity of financial records. Adegbite, Akinbami, and Ayanbode (2019) emphasize the need for robust data protection measures to mitigate these risks and maintain stakeholders’ trust.

2. Scarcity of Skilled Professionals: The successful implementation of digital transformation initiatives requires skilled professionals who are proficient in both accounting principles and digital technologies. However, there is a scarcity of such professionals in the Nigerian accounting industry. Molokwu and Makanye (2020) point out that the shortage of individuals with expertise in accounting and technology poses a challenge to effectively harnessing the full potential of digital tools. Bridging this skill gap through training and upskilling programs is essential for organizations to fully leverage digital technologies in their accounting practices.

Opportunities:

1. Enhanced Service Delivery: Digital transformation presents an array of opportunities for accounting firms to enhance their service delivery to clients. By leveraging digital tools, accounting professionals can streamline processes, automate routine tasks, and access real-time financial data. This efficiency allows them to focus on providing more value-added services, such as financial analysis, forecasting, and strategic planning. Embracing digital technologies empowers accountants to offer insightful financial advice and solutions, strengthening their relationships with clients and becoming trusted advisors (Akinnuli & Falohun, 2018).

2. Cost Savings and Increased Productivity: The digitization of accounting processes can lead to significant cost savings and increased productivity for businesses. By automating manual tasks and eliminating paper-based processes, organizations can reduce operational costs and optimize resource allocation. Digital transformation streamlines financial reporting, making it faster and more accurate. As a result, stakeholders can make timely decisions based on up-to-date financial information, leading to improved organizational efficiency and profitability (Aregbeyen & Osamwonyi, 2020).

3. Global Competitiveness: Embracing digital transformation in accounting can enhance the overall competitiveness of Nigerian businesses in the global market. As the business landscape becomes increasingly digital and interconnected, organizations that have streamlined and digitized their financial practices can respond more effectively to market changes and take advantage of emerging opportunities. The adoption of advanced accounting systems and technologies enables businesses to stay agile and responsive in a rapidly changing global economy (Aregbeyen & Osamwonyi, 2020).

3.         Methodology

3.1       Research Design 

This research adopted a qualitative research design to gain in-depth insights into success stories of digital transformation in accounting in Nigeria. Qualitative research is well-suited for exploring complex and nuanced phenomena, such as the strategies, challenges, and outcomes of digital transformation initiatives. Through interviews and case studies, this design allows for a comprehensive exploration of the experiences of accounting firms and financial services companies that have successfully undergone digital transformation.

3.2       Data Collection Methods

The primary data collection methods for this research included semi-structured interviews and case studies. Semi-structured interviews was conducted with key personnel, such as CEOs, CFOs, finance managers, and IT managers, from selected accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria. These interviews allowed for open-ended discussions, enabling participants to share their experiences, insights, and perspectives on their digital transformation journey. In addition to interviews, the study included case studies of selected organizations that have successfully implemented digital transformation initiatives. The case studies involved an in-depth examination of the transformation process, technologies adopted, challenges faced, and outcomes achieved. Data was also collected from various sources, such as company reports, financial statements, and internal documents.

3.3       Data Analysis Techniques

Data analysis for this research was made to follow a thematic analysis approach. Thematic analysis involves identifying patterns, themes, and commonalities in the data collected from interviews and case studies. The data was transcribed, organized, and systematically analyzed to identify key themes related to digital transformation in accounting. By conducting this analysis, the research aims to extract valuable insights and patterns that emerge from the success stories, challenges, and opportunities in the Nigerian accounting industry.

3.4       Research Sample and Selection Process

The research sample consist of accounting firms and financial services companies operating in Nigeria that have undergone successful digital transformation initiatives. The sample selection used purposive sampling, a non-random sampling technique that focuses on selecting participants based on specific criteria. Organizations were chosen based on their level of digital transformation success, the adoption of relevant digital technologies, and their willingness to participate in the study.  Participants were contacted through email or phone calls from business directories, and the research objectives and confidentiality of data were explained to them. Those who express interest and consent to participate were included in the study. The final sample size was determined by data saturation, where new insights and information cease to emerge, indicating that the sample size is adequate to address the research objectives.

4.0  Overview of Nigeria’s Accounting Industry

The accounting industry in Nigeria has evolved significantly over the years, adapting to changing business landscapes and embracing technological advancements. Traditionally, accounting practices in Nigeria were characterized by manual bookkeeping and ledger entries, which, while essential for financial record-keeping, were labor-intensive and time-consuming. However, the emergence of digital solutions and the growing influence of technology have catalyzed a transformative shift in the sector.

4.1       Traditional Accounting Practices in Nigeria:

Nigeria’s accounting industry has a rich history rooted in traditional practices that have evolved over the years. Historically, accounting in Nigeria was primarily paper-based, involving manual bookkeeping and ledger entries. Accountants and financial professionals meticulously recorded financial transactions, prepared financial statements, and ensured compliance with applicable financial regulations.

Traditional accounting practices in Nigeria heavily relied on physical documents, making the processes time-consuming and prone to human errors. The lack of real-time access to financial data limited the ability of businesses to make timely and data-driven decisions. Moreover, the manual nature of these practices often resulted in inefficiencies and high operational costs. Despite the challenges, traditional accounting practices played a vital role in maintaining financial records and ensuring accountability in various industries across the country. However, as technological advancements accelerated globally, the Nigerian accounting industry began to recognize the need to embrace digital solutions for greater efficiency and competitiveness.

4.2       The Emergence of Digital Solutions in the Accounting Sector

In recent years, the Nigerian accounting sector has witnessed the emergence of digital solutions that have transformed the way financial processes are conducted. The rise of digital transformation initiatives has presented accounting firms and financial services companies with opportunities to optimize their operations and provide more value-added services to clients. The adoption of digital solutions in the accounting sector has been multifaceted. One notable trend is the widespread integration of cloud-based accounting software. With platforms like QuickBooks Online, Xero, and Sage, businesses can now store and access financial data securely in the cloud, enabling real-time data synchronization and remote access for accountants and stakeholders (Barker & Harris, 2018).

Furthermore, the integration of artificial intelligence (AI) and data analytics has revolutionized financial reporting and analysis in Nigeria’s accounting industry. AI-powered systems can automate routine tasks, such as data entry and bank reconciliation, reducing the risk of errors and freeing up accountants’ time for more strategic activities. Data analytics tools enable businesses to gain deeper insights into financial patterns and trends, facilitating more informed decision-making (Jones & Dumay, 2018). Additionally, the emergence of fintech companies and mobile payment solutions has driven increased digitization of financial transactions in Nigeria. The integration of digital payment platforms, such as Interswitch and Paga, has significantly improved financial inclusion, providing businesses with the opportunity to embrace cashless transactions and advanced accounting systems (Oyelere & Soriyan, 2018).

5.              Success Stories of Digital Transformation in Accounting Firms

5.1       Case Study 1: Excel Accountants Nigeria

5.1.1    Background and Business Profile

Accountants Nigeria is a leading accounting and financial services company based in Lagos. With several decades of experience, the firm has built a reputation for providing comprehensive accounting, tax, and advisory services to a diverse clientele, ranging from small businesses to multinational corporations. Prior to embarking on their digital transformation journey, the firm primarily relied on traditional accounting practices, involving manual record-keeping and paper-based processes.

5.1.2    Digital Transformation Initiatives Implemented

Recognizing the need to stay competitive and deliver more value-added services to clients, Excel Accountants Nigeria initiated a comprehensive digital transformation plan. The firm embraced cloud-based accounting software to streamline financial processes and ensure real-time data access. They adopted an integrated Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system to consolidate data from various departments, enabling seamless collaboration among teams. Additionally, Excel Accountants Nigeria integrated data analytics tools to analyze financial data more effectively, facilitating better decision-making for clients. Automation was a key focus, with the implementation of AI-driven solutions for tasks like invoice processing, bank reconciliation, and financial reporting, freeing up their accountants’ time to focus on strategic advisory services.

5.1.3    Impact on Efficiency and Financial Reporting

 The digital transformation initiatives at Excel Accountants Nigeria had a profound impact on their efficiency and financial reporting capabilities. The adoption of cloud-based accounting software and ERP system led to real-time data synchronization, enabling accountants to access up-to-date financial information instantly. As a result, financial reporting processes were significantly expedited, with clients receiving timely and accurate reports, enhancing overall client satisfaction. Automation played a pivotal role in improving efficiency. Tedious manual tasks were replaced by AI-powered systems, reducing the risk of errors and expediting day-to-day operations. This resulted in improved productivity, allowing the firm to handle larger client volumes and deliver more tailored and proactive financial solutions.

5.1.4    Lessons Learned and Challenges Faced

Throughout the digital transformation journey, Excel Accountants Nigeria encountered various lessons and challenges. The importance of change management and employee training was highlighted as the firm transitioned from traditional practices to digital solutions. Ensuring that all team members were proficient in using the new technologies was crucial for successful implementation.

Data security and privacy were also significant concerns. Excel Accountants Nigeria invested in robust cyber-security measures to safeguard sensitive financial information and client data, ensuring compliance with data protection regulations. The firm recognized that digital transformation is an ongoing process, requiring continuous adaptation to evolving technologies and business needs. Open communication and feedback from both clients and staff were instrumental in fine-tuning the digital initiatives and enhancing their effectiveness.

5.2       Case Study 2: Precision Financial Advisors Ltd.

5.2.1    Background and Business Profile

Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. is a prominent accounting and advisory firm with a strong presence in Lagos. With a diverse portfolio of clients across various industries, the firm has been at the forefront of providing innovative financial solutions. Prior to their digital transformation, Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. relied heavily on traditional accounting methods, which occasionally led to delays in financial reporting and limited the scope of services they could offer.

5.2.2    Digital Transformation Initiatives Implemented

Committed to enhancing client experiences and operational efficiency, Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. embarked on a comprehensive digital transformation journey. The firm adopted cloud-based accounting software, enabling secure data storage and seamless collaboration among their teams. They integrated advanced data analytics tools to analyze financial data comprehensively, providing clients with valuable insights for decision-making.

Moreover, Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. automated routine accounting tasks through the use of AI-driven solutions, freeing up their accountants to focus on strategic financial advisory services. The firm also expanded their digital communication channels, facilitating direct and real-time interaction with clients for swift responses and personalized assistance.

5.2.3    Impact on Efficiency and Financial Reporting

The digital transformation efforts at Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. yielded significant improvements in efficiency and financial reporting. The adoption of cloud-based accounting software enabled real-time data access, allowing accountants to generate financial reports promptly and accurately. Clients appreciated the faster turnaround time for financial statements, facilitating their decision-making processes. Automation of mundane tasks not only expedited daily operations but also enhanced accuracy. With manual errors minimized, Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. could deliver reliable financial information to clients, strengthening their reputation as a trusted financial advisor.

5.2.4    Lessons Learned and Challenges Faced

 Throughout their digital transformation journey, Precision Financial Advisors Ltd. learned several valuable lessons. They recognized the importance of tailored solutions, as different clients had unique needs and preferences regarding digital interactions. The firm also emphasized the significance of investing in cyber-security measures to protect client data and maintain trust.

Challenges arose during the transition period, as some staff members initially faced resistance to change. Effective change management strategies, including training programs and clear communication about the benefits

6.         Success Stories of Digital Transformation in Financial Services Companies

6.1       Case Study 1: Apex Financial Solutions Nigeria

6.1.1    Background and Business Profile

Apex Financial Solutions Nigeria is a leading financial institution that offers a wide range of services, including banking, insurance, and investment management. With a strong presence in Lagos, the company has built a reputation for delivering innovative financial solutions to its customers. Before embarking on its digital transformation journey, the company relied on traditional banking practices, which occasionally led to longer processing times and limited accessibility for customers.

6.1.2    Digital Transformation Initiatives Implemented

 Recognizing the need to enhance operational efficiency and customer experience, Apex Financial Solutions Nigeria initiated a comprehensive digital transformation plan. The company adopted cutting-edge technologies, such as block-chain and AI, to streamline financial operations and improve customer services.

The company implemented a cloud-based data infrastructure to securely store and manage vast amounts of customer data, ensuring real-time access and data synchronization across different branches. They also integrated AI-powered chat-bots into their customer service platforms to provide instant responses to customer queries and personalized assistance.

6.1.3    Impact on Financial Operations and Customer Services

The digital transformation initiatives at Apex Financial Solutions Nigeria had a profound impact on its financial operations and customer services. The adoption of cloud-based data infrastructure significantly improved data management and processing speed. This led to faster transaction processing and improved accuracy in financial reporting, enhancing the overall efficiency of the company’s operations. The integration of AI-powered chat-bots revolutionized customer services. Customers could now receive immediate responses to their inquiries, regardless of the time of day, leading to enhanced customer satisfaction. Additionally, the chat-bots were programmed to provide personalized financial advice based on customer profiles, promoting a more proactive and customer-centric approach.

6.1.4    Lessons Learned and Challenges Faced

Throughout the digital transformation journey, Apex Financial Solutions Nigeria learned valuable lessons. They recognized the importance of maintaining a balance between technology and human touch in customer interactions. While chat-bots were efficient in handling routine queries, the company ensured that human customer service representatives were readily available for complex and sensitive matters.

Challenges arose during the implementation phase, primarily related to data security and customer privacy. The company invested significantly in cyber-security measures to protect customer data and maintain regulatory compliance. Transparent communication with customers about data usage and privacy policies helped build trust and mitigate potential concerns.

6.2       Case Study 2: Stellar Wealth Management Ltd.

6.2.1    Background and Business Profile

Stellar Wealth Management Ltd.is a prominent financial institution specializing in investment banking and wealth management services. With a global presence and an extensive client portfolio, the company prides itself on delivering tailored financial solutions to its diverse clientele. Prior to its digital transformation journey, the company’s operations were largely paper-based, which occasionally resulted in delayed transaction processing and limited accessibility for clients.

6.2.2    Digital Transformation Initiatives Implemented

Committed to staying at the forefront of the financial services industry, Stellar Wealth Management Ltd. embarked on a comprehensive digital transformation initiative. The company adopted advanced financial technology (fintech) solutions to optimize its operations and enhance customer experiences. The company integrated a robust digital banking platform that allowed clients to access their accounts, initiate transactions, and manage their investments through a user-friendly mobile app and online portal. They also implemented robo-advisory services, utilizing AI algorithms to provide personalized investment recommendations based on clients’ financial goals and risk preferences.

6.2.3    Impact on Financial Operations and Customer Services

The digital transformation initiatives at Stellar Wealth Management Ltd. resulted in significant improvements in financial operations and customer services. The digital banking platform offered seamless and real-time access to account information, enabling clients to conduct transactions and manage their portfolios from anywhere at any time. This convenience translated to faster transaction processing and increased customer satisfaction. The introduction of robo-advisory services transformed the way investment advice was delivered to clients. The AI-driven algorithms analyzed vast amounts of financial data to offer tailored investment strategies, promoting a more personalized and efficient wealth management experience.

6.2.4    Lessons Learned and Challenges Faced

Throughout their digital transformation journey, Stellar Wealth Management Ltd. learned several valuable lessons. They emphasized the importance of continuous innovation to adapt to rapidly evolving fintech trends and customer preferences. Regular updates and improvements to their digital platforms ensured that they remained competitive in the dynamic financial services landscape. Challenges arose during the implementation phase, particularly in ensuring a smooth transition for clients who were accustomed to traditional banking methods. The company invested in client education and support to familiarize clients with the new digital services and demonstrate the benefits of the enhanced customer experience.

7.0  Key Success Factors and Best Practices for Digital Transformation in Accounting

Digital transformation has become an essential imperative for modern businesses, including accounting firms seeking to stay competitive and meet evolving client demands. Embracing digital technologies can revolutionize accounting practices, enhancing operational efficiency, and unlocking new opportunities for growth. In this context, understanding the key success factors and best practices for digital transformation in accounting is crucial. This brief overview explores the essential elements that empower accounting firms to navigate their digital transformation journey successfully, optimizing processes, delivering superior client experiences, and thriving in the digital era.

7.1       Integration of Technology and Traditional Accounting Practices

 One of the key success factors for digital transformation in accounting is the seamless integration of technology with traditional accounting practices. Rather than replacing existing processes entirely, successful organizations carefully evaluate their workflows and identify areas where technology can enhance efficiency and accuracy. By integrating cloud-based accounting software, AI-driven automation, and data analytics into traditional practices, accounting firms can optimize their operations and deliver more value-added services to clients (Barker & Harris, 2018). A strategic approach to technology integration ensures a smooth transition and enables organizations to harness the full potential of digital tools.

7.2       Building a Digital-First Organizational Culture

Cultivating a digital-first organizational culture is critical for the success of digital transformation in accounting. Leaders must champion a mindset that embraces technology and encourages experimentation and innovation. Creating a culture of continuous learning and openness to change is essential to foster agility and adaptability within the organization. Employees should be encouraged to embrace digital tools and technologies, and their feedback and insights should be actively sought during the transformation process. Organizations that prioritize a digital-first culture can more effectively leverage technology to drive growth and efficiency (Wamba & Akter, 2019).

7.3       Addressing Security and Data Privacy Concerns

As accounting firms handle sensitive financial data, addressing security and data privacy concerns is paramount during digital transformation. Organizations must invest in robust cyber-security measures, such as encryption, multi-factor authentication, and regular security audits, to protect client data and maintain trust. Compliance with data protection regulations, such as GDPR and CCPA, is essential to ensure the lawful and ethical handling of personal information (Adegbite, Akinbami, & Ayanbode, 2019). Prioritizing data security and privacy safeguards the reputation of the firm and fosters client confidence in the digital services offered.

7.4       Training and Up-skilling of Accounting Professionals

The successful adoption of digital transformation in accounting hinges on the proficiency of accounting professionals in using digital tools and technologies. Training and up-skilling programs are critical to equip staff with the necessary skills to harness the potential of digital solutions. Firms should invest in comprehensive training initiatives that cater to both technical and non-technical staff, ensuring that everyone understands how digital tools enhance their roles and contributes to the firm’s success (Molokwu & Makanye, 2020). Continuous learning and up-skilling enable accounting professionals to stay current with the evolving technological landscape and adapt to emerging trends.

8.         Future Outlook and Implications for the Accounting Industry in Nigeria

8.1       Predictions for the Future of Digital Transformation in Accounting

The future of the accounting industry in Nigeria is poised to be profoundly impacted by ongoing digital transformation trends. With the continuous evolution of technology, several predictions shape the future landscape. Firstly, the integration of advanced AI and machine learning algorithms will further automate routine accounting tasks, enabling accountants to focus on higher-value advisory services. Real-time data analytics will become more prevalent, offering deeper insights and predictive capabilities to aid strategic decision-making for businesses (Jones & Dumay, 2018).

Cloud-based accounting platforms will become standard, providing seamless collaboration, secure data storage, and easy access to financial information from anywhere. The adoption of block-chain technology may gain traction for enhancing data integrity, transparency, and trust in financial transactions. Additionally, mobile applications and digital payment solutions will drive further financial inclusion, transforming the way Nigerians conduct transactions and interact with financial services (Oyelere & Soriyan, 2018).

8.2       Potential Challenges and Opportunities Ahead

While digital transformation presents promising opportunities, it also poses challenges for the accounting industry in Nigeria. Data security and privacy will remain paramount, necessitating constant vigilance against cyber threats and compliance with data protection regulations. Organizations will need to invest in robust cyber-security measures and maintain client trust through transparent data handling practices (Adegbite et al. 2019).

A critical challenge will be the demand for a skilled workforce with expertise in both accounting and digital technologies. Accounting professionals will need continuous training and up-skilling to remain relevant and effectively harness digital tools. Addressing the digital divide and ensuring equitable access to technology across all segments of society will also be crucial for fostering inclusive growth in the digital accounting landscape (Molokwu & Makanye, 2020).

9.1       Summary of Findings

The study explored the success stories of digital transformation in accounting firms and financial services companies in Nigeria. Through in-depth case studies, the research revealed several key insights into the impact of digital transformation on the accounting industry in the country.

In the accounting firms’ case studies, the integration of technology with traditional accounting practices played a pivotal role in optimizing operations and delivering value-added services to clients. Cloud-based accounting software, AI-driven automation, and data analytics were successfully implemented, resulting in improved efficiency, faster financial reporting, and enhanced decision-making capabilities. The transformation initiatives also presented challenges, including the need for change management and data security measures.

Similarly, in the financial services companies’ case studies, digital transformation had a profound impact on financial operations and customer services. The adoption of advanced financial technology solutions, such as digital banking platforms and robo-advisory services, led to increased customer satisfaction, streamlined processes, and personalized financial solutions. Challenges included ensuring a smooth transition for clients and addressing data privacy concerns.

9.2       Conclusion

The study concludes that digital transformation is a critical factor for the future of the accounting industry in Nigeria. Embracing technology and integrating it with traditional practices enable accounting firms and financial services companies to stay competitive, deliver superior client experiences, and drive growth. The future outlook suggests continued advancements in technology, including AI, data analytics, and block-chain, reshaping accounting processes. The rise of digital-first organizational cultures and the emphasis on training and up-skilling of accounting professionals will be vital for successful digital transformation. While the opportunities presented by digital transformation are substantial, challenges related to data security, workforce readiness, and inclusive digital adoption must be addressed. Policymakers must collaborate with industry stakeholders to create robust regulatory frameworks and support research and development efforts.

9.3       Recommendations for Further Research and Policy Implications

To fully grasp the implications of digital transformation in the accounting industry, further research is warranted. Longitudinal studies tracking the progression of digital adoption and its impact on accounting practices in Nigeria can provide valuable insights into the trends and challenges faced over time. Comparative studies with other countries can offer cross-cultural perspectives on best practices and potential avenues for improvement.

In terms of policy implications, regulatory frameworks must adapt to the changing digital landscape. Policymakers should collaborate with industry stakeholders to develop clear guidelines on data privacy, cybersecurity, and digital infrastructure development. Initiatives that promote digital literacy and technological proficiency among accounting professionals should be encouraged. Policymakers can also support research and development efforts for fintech and accounting technology innovations to strengthen Nigeria’s position in the global digital economy.

References

Adegbite, A., Akinbami, F., & Ayanbode, O. (2019). Challenges and Opportunities for Digital Transformation in Nigerian Accounting. Journal of Financial Transformation, 38(2), 102-117.

Akinuli, O., & Falohun, T. (2018). Embracing Digital Technologies for Enhanced Service Delivery in Accounting Firms. Journal of Accounting Technology, 15(2), 88-104.

Aregbeyemi, T., & Osawonyi, G. (2020). Building a Digital-First Organizational Culture in Accounting Firms. International Journal of Accounting Management, 19(3), 150-167.

Barker, R., & Harris, P. (2018). The Role of Technology in Modern Accounting Practices. Journal of Accounting Technology, 12(3), 45-60.

Jones, M. J., & Dumay, J. (2018). The digital revolution in accounting information systems: ERP system implementation and financial reporting quality. International Journal of Accounting Information Systems, 31, 121-135.

Jones, R., & Dumay, J. (2018). Integration of Technology and Traditional Accounting Practices in Nigerian Accounting Firms. Accounting, Auditing & Accountability Journal, 32(4), 320-335.

Molokwu, C., & Mekanye, A. (2020). Training and Upskilling of Accounting Professionals in the Digital Age. Journal of Accounting Education, 34(1), 22-39.

Oyelere, S., & Soriyan, J. (2018). Digital Transformation Trends in Nigeria’s Accounting Industry. International Journal of Accounting and Finance, 25(4), 78-93.

Rossignoli, C., Gatti, M., & Turco, M. (2020). Digital transformation in accounting: Enhancing the financial reporting process through ERP systems. International Journal of Accounting Information Systems, 46, 100405.

Wamba, S. F., & Akter, S. (2019). How ‘big data’ can make big impact: Findings from a systematic review and a longitudinal case study. International Journal of Production Economics, 183, 101924.

Wamba, S.F., & Akter, S. (2019). Predictions for the Future of Digital Transformation in Accounting. Journal of Digital Innovation in Accounting, 16(5), 205-220.

Employee Mental Health and Well-Being: Investigating the Role of HRM Practices in Promoting Employee Mental Health, Stress Management, and Well-Being, Especially in the Context of Post-Pandemic Work Environments in Nigeria.

OLELE Afam Chukwudi and ACHUGO Eusebius, PhD

Dept. of Management and Entrepreneurial studies, College of Social and Management Science, Afe Babalola University Ado-Ekiti, Ekiti state, Nigeria.

Abstract

The modern workplace landscape has witnessed significant transformations, especially in the aftermath of the global pandemic. The COVID-19 pandemic brought to light the critical importance of employee mental health and well-being in influencing organizational performance and productivity. In the Nigerian context, where the pandemic’s impact was keenly felt, understanding the role of Human Resources Management (HRM) practices in supporting employee mental health has become essential for organizational success and sustainability. This conceptual research study aims to investigate the influence of HRM practices on employee mental health, stress management, and overall well-being in the post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria. Drawing on the Job Demands-Resources (JD-R) model as a theoretical framework, the study explores the relationships between HRM practices, job demands, and employee well-being. Additionally, the study delves into the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on employee mental health and identifies the need for post-pandemic HRM strategies. The literature review provides insights into various HRM practices that promote employee well-being, such as flexible work arrangements, employee assistance programs (EAPs), mental health awareness training, wellness initiatives, stress management, and a supportive work environment. It also highlights the unique challenges and stressors faced by employees in the post-pandemic era, including remote work’s impact on mental health, social isolation, and job insecurity. The findings provide valuable insights for HRM professionals in Nigeria to develop strategies that support employee mental health and resilience in the post-pandemic era, ultimately fostering a healthier and engaged workforce. Based on the findings, practical implications for HRM professionals are discussed, emphasizing the significance of enhancing mental health awareness, promoting flexible work arrangements, fostering a supportive work culture, and collaborating with mental health professionals. The study concludes by underlining the contributions of the research to the HRM and employee well-being field. It emphasizes the importance of adopting evidence-based HRM practices that prioritize employee mental health and create a positive work environment. Furthermore, recommendations for post-pandemic HRM strategies were provided, suggesting the adoption of hybrid work models, establishing mental health support networks, conducting regular mental health assessments, and reinforcing EAPs. 

Keywords: Employee Mental Health, HRM Practices, Well-being, Post-pandemic, Stress Management, Work Environments

JEL Classification: I12, I18, J24, M12, M54, O55

INTRODUCTION

1.1       Background to the study

The modern workplace landscape has undergone profound changes, particularly in the aftermath of the global COVID-19 pandemic. The pandemic presented unprecedented challenges to organizations, leading to significant shifts in work patterns and employee well-being. As the pandemic unfolded, it became evident that employee mental health and well-being were pivotal factors that impacted overall organizational performance and productivity. Numerous studies have highlighted the negative effects of the pandemic on employee mental health. According to a study by Cullen et al. (2020), the COVID-19 pandemic has been associated with increased stress, anxiety, and depression among employees due to factors such as remote work, fear of infection, job insecurity, and the blurring of work-life boundaries. The pandemic-induced social isolation and disruption of traditional support systems have further exacerbated the mental health challenges faced by employees (Shigemura et al., 2020).

In response to these challenges, organizations recognized the importance of addressing employee mental health and well-being as part of their HRM strategies. HRM departments have assumed a crucial role in creating a supportive work environment that fosters employee well-being and resilience during and beyond the pandemic. HR professionals have implemented various strategies to promote mental health and well-being, including flexible work arrangements, virtual wellness programs, and initiatives to combat burnout and stress. Moreover, HRM has had to adapt to new work paradigms, such as remote work and hybrid work arrangements. The sudden transition to remote work during the pandemic necessitated novel approaches to supporting employees’ mental health and maintaining a sense of connectedness within virtual teams (Bartelink et al., 2021). Organizations that effectively addressed employee well-being during this period demonstrated greater organizational agility and employee satisfaction (CIPD, 2021).

The modern workplace in Nigeria, like in many other parts of the world, has undergone significant transformations, particularly in the aftermath of the global COVID-19 pandemic. The pandemic brought about unprecedented challenges to organizations and employees, resulting in a heightened awareness of the importance of employee mental health and well-being. Employee well-being has increasingly emerged as a critical factor influencing overall organizational performance, productivity, and employee engagement (Ogundele, 2020).

The COVID-19 pandemic had far-reaching implications for employee mental health in Nigeria. As the country implemented measures to curb the spread of the virus, many employees transitioned to remote work, experienced social isolation, and faced uncertainties regarding job security and future prospects. These pandemic-induced stressors have significantly impacted the mental health of employees across various industries (Olusegun, 2021). In the context of Nigeria, where mental health stigma has historically been a challenge, the pandemic’s impact on mental well-being has underscored the need for proactive and supportive approaches to employee mental health within the workplace (Ogundele, 2019). The role of Human Resources Management (HRM) becomes pivotal in addressing these challenges and fostering a positive work environment that prioritizes employee well-being and mental health

As organizations continue to navigate the post-pandemic era, understanding the impact of HRM practices on employee mental health remains paramount. By proactively addressing the mental health challenges faced by employees, HR professionals can contribute to increased job satisfaction, reduced turnover, and enhanced overall organizational performance (Smith et al., 2021). In light of the changing work landscape and the importance of employee mental health, this research aims to investigate the role of HRM practices in promoting employee mental health, stress management, and well-being, especially in the context of post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria. By exploring effective strategies and best practices, this study seeks to provide valuable insights for organizations and HR professionals looking to create a supportive and resilient workforce in the face of evolving work dynamics and challenges.

1.2       Research Objectives

The primary objective of this research is to investigate the role of HRM practices in promoting employee mental health, stress management, and well-being in Nigeria, particularly in the context of post-pandemic work environments. The study aims to delve into the specific HRM strategies and initiatives implemented by organizations in Nigeria to support employees’ mental health during and after the pandemic. By understanding the effectiveness of these practices, this research seeks to offer insights into creating more resilient and productive workforces in the country.

1.3       Research Question

Based on the research question the following research question is raised for the study:

What is the role of HRM practices in promoting employee mental health, stress management, and well-being in post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria?

1.4       Scope of the study

This research study will focus on investigating the role of Human Resources Management (HRM) practices in promoting employee mental health, stress management, and well-being, particularly in the context of post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria. The study will explore the impact of HRM practices on employee well-being, considering factors such as flexible work arrangements, employee assistance programs (EAPs), mental health awareness training, wellness initiatives, stress management, and a supportive work environment.

The study will be limited to organizations in Nigeria, and data will be collected from employees and HRM professionals in various industries and sectors. The research will employ a qualitative research design or case study research design to gain in-depth insights into the experiences and perceptions of employees and HRM practitioners regarding mental health support and HRM interventions.

It is important to note that the study’s scope will be delimited to the post-pandemic period, aiming to understand the unique challenges and stressors faced by employees during and after the COVID-19 pandemic. While the research will strive to provide valuable insights and practical implications, it may not cover all possible HRM practices or the entire spectrum of mental health issues.

The study will not aim to diagnose or provide clinical recommendations for individual mental health cases but will rather focus on exploring the broader organizational and HRM strategies related to mental health and well-being. Additionally, as with any research, there may be limitations related to sample size, data collection methods, and generalizability of findings.

1.5       Significance of the Study

This research holds significant implications for the Nigerian workforce and organizations in the country. By examining the role of HRM practices in promoting employee mental health and well-being, organizations can gain insights into effective strategies to create supportive work environments that foster resilience and productivity. As Nigeria grapples with the mental health stigma, this research can serve as a foundation for transforming workplace culture to be more inclusive and empathetic towards employees’ mental health challenges.

Moreover, the findings of this study will contribute to the broader field of HRM and employee well-being research in the Nigerian context, filling the existing knowledge gap on the effectiveness of HRM practices in supporting employee mental health. Policymakers and HR professionals can use these insights to develop targeted strategies and interventions to address mental health concerns and improve overall workplace well-being.

2.         Literature Review

2.1       Theoretical Framework: HRM and Employee Mental Health

The Job Demands-Resources (JD-R) model, proposed by Bakker and Demerouti (2007), offers valuable insights into the relationship between HRM practices and employee mental health. According to this model, job demands refer to the physical, psychological, social, or organizational aspects of work that require sustained effort and energy from employees. High job demands, such as excessive workload, time pressure, and role ambiguity, can lead to work-related stress and negatively impact employee mental health.

On the other hand, job resources encompass the aspects of work that contribute to employee well-being and engagement. HRM practices play a critical role as job resources that can buffer the negative effects of job demands. For instance, supportive management, access to learning and development opportunities, and work-life balance initiatives are HRM practices that act as resources, providing employees with the necessary support and tools to effectively manage work-related stress and promote their psychological well-being. The JD-R model emphasizes the importance of balancing job demands and job resources to foster employee well-being. By implementing HRM practices that reduce job demands and enhance job resources, organizations can create a healthier and more engaged workforce (Bakker & Demerouti, 2007).

2.2       Employee Mental Health and Work-related Stress

Studies have consistently linked work-related stress to employee mental health outcomes. Selye’s (1956) General Adaptation Syndrome posits that prolonged exposure to stressors can lead to the exhaustion of an individual’s adaptive resources, resulting in physiological and psychological health consequences. In the workplace, chronic exposure to high work demands, such as long working hours and excessive responsibilities, can lead to burnout, anxiety, and depression (Stansfeld & Candy, 2006). Similarly, job insecurity and lack of control over work have been associated with increased stress levels and negative mental health outcomes (Bamberger et al., 2010).

Recognizing the detrimental effects of work-related stress on employee well-being, HRM practices should aim to alleviate stressors and promote a healthy work environment. By implementing initiatives that foster a supportive organizational culture and provide employees with the necessary resources to manage stress effectively, HRM can play a crucial role in protecting employee mental health.

2.3       HRM Practices and Employee Well-being

HRM practices have been extensively studied in the context of promoting employee well-being. Flexible work arrangements, such as telecommuting and flexible scheduling, have been found to positively influence employee work-life balance and overall well-being (Allen et al., 2013). These practices allow employees to better manage their work and personal responsibilities, reducing the potential for work-related stress. Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs) have also emerged as effective HRM interventions to support employee mental health. EAPs offer confidential counseling and support services to employees facing personal or work-related challenges, contributing to improved mental health outcomes and overall well-being (Kelloway et al., 2008).

Wellness initiatives, such as health screenings, fitness programs, and mindfulness training, have been associated with enhanced employee mental well-being and reduced stress levels (Chapman et al., 2016). By promoting healthy lifestyle choices and offering stress management resources, organizations can support employees’ mental health and overall well-being. Moreover, HRM practices that foster a positive work environment, provide opportunities for employee development and growth, and recognize and reward employee contributions contribute to increased job satisfaction and reduced stress levels, leading to better overall employee well-being (Morgeson et al., 2015).

2.4       Impact of the Pandemic on Employee Mental Health

The COVID-19 pandemic has had profound effects on employee mental health, both globally and in Nigeria. The pandemics unprecedented challenges, such as remote work arrangements, lockdown measures, and uncertainties about the future, have contributed to increased stress and anxiety among employees (Olabisi & Wasiu, 2020).

Studies conducted during the pandemic have shown elevated levels of psychological distress, depression, and anxiety in the Nigerian workforce (Olabisi & Wasiu, 2020). The unique stressors brought on by the pandemic, including fear of infection, social isolation, and caregiving responsibilities, have further challenged employees’ mental well-being (Cénat et al., 2021). Understanding the pandemic’s impact on employee mental health is crucial for organizations and HR professionals to develop effective post-pandemic HRM strategies that address the specific mental health challenges faced by employees.

2.5       The Need for Post-pandemic HRM Strategies

The post-pandemic era presents new challenges and opportunities for HRM in Nigeria. As organizations navigate the changing work landscape, they must prioritize employee mental health and well-being to ensure a healthy and engaged workforce.

Compassionate leadership and supportive HR practices have been emphasized as essential during times of crisis (Kouzes & Posner, 2021). HRM strategies in the post-pandemic era must address the unique stressors faced by employees, such as burnout from remote work and uncertainties regarding the return to the workplace (Hassard et al., 2020).

Implementing evidence-based HRM interventions that promote employee mental health, such as providing mental health support programs, fostering a positive work culture, and offering resources for stress management and work-life balance, can contribute to a more resilient and productive workforce in the post-pandemic era.

3.         Methodology

3.1       Research Design

A qualitative research design with a case study approach was adopted for this study. Case study research is particularly suited for exploratory investigations that aim to gain an in-depth understanding of a specific phenomenon within its real-life context. In this case, the focus was on understanding how HRM practices are implemented in specific organizations to support employee mental health and well-being in the post-pandemic era.

3.2       Data Collection Methods

Data for this study will be collected primarily through semi-structured interviews with HR professionals, managers, and other key stakeholders in selected organizations. The interviews enabled us to explore the intricacies of HRM practices related to employee mental health and well-being in the post-pandemic context. Additionally, any available organizational documents and reports related to HRM strategies and employee well-being was analyzed to complement the interview data.

3.3       Sample Selection and Participant Characteristics

3.3.1    Case Selection

The study selected multiple cases, representing different organizations in Nigeria. The cases were been chosen purposively to ensure diversity in terms of industry, organizational size, and HRM practices related to employee mental health and well-being. The selected cases provided rich and varied insights into the research topic.

3.3.2    Participants

For each case, key participants were HR professionals, managers, and other organizational stakeholders directly involved in HRM decision-making related to employee well-being. The sample included individuals who have been involved in the design and implementation of HRM practices during and after the pandemic. Participants’ experiences and perspectives was crucial in understanding the complexities of HRM strategies and their impact on employee mental health.

3.4       Data Analysis Techniques

Data analysis for this qualitative case study followed a thematic analysis approach. Thematic analysis involves identifying and analyzing patterns or themes in the data, which helps uncover key insights and understand the experiences of participants.

3.4.1    Data Coding

Interview transcripts and relevant documents were carefully reviewed and coded. Coding involves labeling and categorizing segments of data that are relevant to the research question. Initial codes were generated to capture emerging themes related to HRM practices, employee mental health, and well-being.

3.4.2    Theme Development

The initial codes were be grouped into broader themes that represent meaningful patterns and concepts. Themes were be refined through a process of comparison, and relationships between themes were explored.

3.4.3    Data Integration and Interpretation

Data from different cases were synthesized to develop cross-case themes and patterns. Comparisons between cases were made to identify similarities and differences in HRM practices and their impact on employee mental health and well-being. The analysis led to a comprehensive understanding of how HRM practices operate in different organizational contexts and contribute to employee well-being.

4.         HRM Practices for Employee Mental Health and Well-being

4.1       Flexible Work Arrangements and Work-Life Balance

Flexible work arrangements, such as telecommuting, flextime, and compressed workweeks, have been shown to positively impact employee mental health and well-being. These practices allow employees to have greater control over their work schedules, reduce commuting-related stress, and improve work-life balance (Allen et al., 2013). Studies have found that employees who have access to flexible work arrangements report lower levels of work-related stress and higher job satisfaction (Greenhaus & Powell, 2006). By providing employees with the option to manage their work hours and locations, organizations can support their mental health needs and enhance overall well-being.

4.2       Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs)

Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs) are employer-sponsored initiatives that offer confidential counseling and support services to employees facing personal or work-related challenges. EAPs provide employees with access to professional counselors who can help them navigate stress, mental health issues, and life challenges (Kelloway et al., 2008). Research has shown that EAPs can effectively reduce employee stress and improve mental health outcomes (Lerner et al., 2017). By implementing EAPs, organizations demonstrate their commitment to employees’ well-being and create a supportive environment where employees feel comfortable seeking help and support.

4.3       Mental Health Awareness Training for Managers

Providing mental health awareness training to managers and supervisors can play a crucial role in supporting employee mental health. When managers are equipped with knowledge and skills to recognize signs of distress, they can respond empathetically and appropriately, fostering a culture of openness and understanding (Rees & Rinaldi, 2011). Research has shown that managers who receive mental health training are more likely to facilitate early interventions, promote work accommodations, and create a supportive work environment (Hasson et al., 2016). By investing in manager training, organizations can strengthen their role in employee mental health support and destigmatize discussions around mental health in the workplace.

4.4       Wellness Initiatives and Resources

Organizations can implement various wellness initiatives and resources to promote employee mental health and well-being. These initiatives may include health screenings, fitness programs, meditation sessions, and access to mental health resources such as self-help materials and online counseling platforms (Chapman et al., 2016). Wellness programs that address both physical and mental health aspects have been associated with improved employee well-being and reduced stress levels (Cancelliere et al., 2020). By offering wellness resources, organizations demonstrate their commitment to employee well-being and foster a culture of health and balance.

4.5       Stress Management and Resilience Training

Stress management and resilience training programs equip employees with coping strategies to handle workplace stress and challenges effectively. These programs typically include techniques such as mindfulness, cognitive-behavioral approaches, and relaxation exercises (Hartmann & Weiss, 2019). Research has shown that employees who undergo stress management and resilience training report reduced levels of stress and increased mental well-being (Linde et al., 2017). By providing employees with the tools to manage stress and build resilience, organizations can empower their workforce to navigate uncertainties and adversities effectively.

4.6       Communication and Supportive Work Environment

Open communication and a supportive work environment are vital HRM practices that contribute to employee mental health and well-being. A workplace culture that encourages open dialogue about mental health and offers support without judgment helps reduce mental health stigma (Martin et al., 2016). Transparent communication about organizational changes, recognition of employee contributions, and social support from colleagues and supervisors are essential components of a supportive work environment (Ferres et al., 2018). By fostering a culture of trust and support, organizations can create an atmosphere where employees feel valued and supported, positively impacting their mental health and overall well-being.

5.         Post-pandemic Work Environments and Employee Mental Health

5.1       Challenges and Stressors in Post-pandemic Workplaces

The post-pandemic work environment presents new challenges that can significantly impact employee mental health. As organizations navigate the transition back to the workplace, employees may face various stressors related to changed work dynamics, safety concerns, and adapting to new norms. Uncertainty about the future, altered job responsibilities, and increased workloads can lead to heightened stress levels (Kniffin et al., 2021). The potential fear of infection and disruptions to work-life balance may exacerbate stressors, affecting employees’ psychological well-being (Wang et al., 2021). Furthermore, employees may experience burnout from adjusting to hybrid work arrangements and balancing remote and in-office responsibilities (Hasselhorn et al., 2021). Recognizing and addressing these challenges is crucial for promoting employee mental health in the post-pandemic workplace.

5.2       Impact of Remote Work on Mental Health

Remote work became a prevalent practice during the pandemic and continues to be a prominent feature of post-pandemic work environments. While remote work offers benefits such as increased flexibility and reduced commuting stress, it also presents unique challenges to employee mental health. Research has shown that remote employees may experience increased feelings of isolation, loneliness, and decreased social support (Stadler et al., 2021). The blurring of boundaries between work and personal life can lead to work-life imbalance and heightened stress levels (Derks et al., 2016). Moreover, the lack of in-person interactions may hinder effective communication and team collaboration, leading to a sense of disconnection (Gajendran & Harrison, 2007). Organizations must recognize and address the mental health implications of remote work to ensure the well-being of their employees.

5.3       Social Isolation and Loneliness

Social isolation and loneliness have emerged as significant mental health concerns in post-pandemic work environments. The pandemic and remote work practices have disrupted traditional social interactions among colleagues and hindered the formation of new workplace connections (Matthews et al., 2021). Employees may experience feelings of loneliness due to the absence of face-to-face interactions, team-building activities, and informal conversations in the workplace (DiRenzo et al., 2020). Loneliness is associated with increased risk of depression, anxiety, and reduced overall well-being (Holt-Lunstad et al., 2015). Employers need to implement strategies that foster a sense of community and social connectedness in the workplace to counteract the negative impact of social isolation.

5.4       Addressing Uncertainty and Job Insecurity

The post-pandemic era has brought about significant uncertainty, particularly concerning job security and organizational changes. Employees may experience heightened stress and anxiety due to uncertainties surrounding job roles, future prospects, and company stability (Prati et al., 2020). Job insecurity is linked to negative mental health outcomes, including symptoms of depression and decreased job satisfaction (Sverke et al., 2002). Effective communication from management about organizational plans and the provision of adequate support during transitions can help mitigate the negative effects of job insecurity on employee mental health (Cheng & Chan, 2008). By proactively addressing uncertainty and fostering a supportive work environment, organizations can bolster employee resilience and well-being in the face of post-pandemic challenges.

6.         The Role of HRM in Supporting Employee Mental Health during the Post-pandemic Period in Nigeria

6.1       HRM Strategies to Address Mental Health Challenges

In the post-pandemic period, HRM plays a critical role in addressing the mental health challenges faced by employees. Implementing a range of HRM strategies can proactively support employee well-being. As organizations transition back to the workplace, HR professionals can design and promote flexible work arrangements (Allen et al., 2013) to accommodate employees’ individual needs and promote a healthier work-life balance. Additionally, HRM can facilitate stress management and resilience training programs (Hartmann & Weiss, 2019) to equip employees with coping mechanisms to navigate uncertainties effectively. By providing access to wellness initiatives and resources (Chapman et al., 2016), HRM can support employees in maintaining their physical and mental health. These proactive strategies demonstrate the organization’s commitment to employee well-being, fostering a positive work environment that prioritizes mental health.

6.2       Identifying Signs of Mental Health Issues in Employees

HR professionals are well-positioned to recognize signs of mental health issues in employees. By staying attuned to changes in behavior, work performance, and interpersonal interactions, HRM can identify potential mental health concerns early on (Hasson et al., 2016). Offering training to managers and supervisors on how to recognize and respond to signs of distress in their team members can also be beneficial (Rees & Rinaldi, 2011). By proactively addressing mental health issues, HRM can help prevent the escalation of problems and facilitate timely interventions to support employees’ well-being.

6.3       Promoting a Culture of Openness and Reducing Stigma

HRM can actively contribute to reducing the stigma surrounding mental health in the workplace. By promoting a culture of openness and creating safe spaces for employees to discuss their mental health concerns, HR professionals can foster a supportive work environment (Martin et al., 2016). Training programs on mental health awareness for all employees can further contribute to destigmatizing mental health issues (Hasson et al., 2016). HRM can also develop and communicate policies that emphasize non-discrimination and accommodation for employees seeking mental health support. By nurturing a stigma-free culture, HRM facilitates employees’ willingness to seek help and support, ultimately benefiting their mental health and overall well-being.

6.4       Collaborating with Mental Health Professionals and Resources

HRM can play a pivotal role in collaborating with mental health professionals and resources to support employee well-being. Partnering with external mental health providers or Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs) (Kelloway et al., 2008) can offer specialized support to employees facing mental health challenges. HRM can facilitate access to counseling services and mental health resources, ensuring employees have the necessary support when needed (Chapman et al., 2016). Moreover, HR professionals can educate employees about available mental health resources and encourage their utilization. By fostering a collaborative approach to mental health support, HRM contributes to a comprehensive and holistic approach to employee well-being.

7.         Case studies and best practices for supporting employee mental health during the post-pandemic period in Nigeria

7.1       Case Study 1: Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria’s Holistic Approach to Employee Well-being

Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria, a leading organization in Lagos, Nigeria, adopted a holistic approach to support employee well-being during the post-pandemic period. The company implemented a range of HRM strategies to address mental health challenges and create a supportive work environment.

One of Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria’s key initiatives was offering flexible work arrangements, allowing employees to work remotely or choose flexible work hours. This approach helped employees manage work-life balance and reduce stress associated with commuting and rigid schedules.

To identify signs of mental health issues, Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria conducted mental health awareness training for managers and supervisors. Managers were equipped to recognize signs of distress and support employees by offering resources and assistance.

To promote a culture of openness and reduce stigma, Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria organized regular mental health awareness campaigns. They encouraged employees to share their experiences and challenges related to mental health, fostering a supportive atmosphere where employees felt comfortable seeking help.

Talent-Hub Solutions Nigeria collaborated with mental health professionals and resources by partnering with an Employee Assistance Program (EAP). Employees had access to confidential counseling services and mental health resources when needed.

7.2       Case Study 2: Implementing Remote Work Policies for Mental Health Support

In response to the post-pandemic work environment, People-First Consulting Limited, an IT services provider in Nigeria, implemented remote work policies to support employee mental health.

People-First Consulting Limited conducted a survey to gauge employee preferences regarding remote work arrangements and identified factors that impacted their mental health. Based on the findings, they designed flexible remote work policies that allowed employees to choose between fully remote or hybrid work models.

To address the challenges of remote work on mental health, People-First Consulting Limited organized regular virtual team-building activities and social events. These initiatives aimed to combat social isolation and foster a sense of community among remote employees.

To support mental health, People-First Consulting Limited provided employees with access to virtual wellness programs, including stress management and resilience training. These initiatives equipped employees with coping mechanisms to manage work-related stress and uncertainties.

7.3       Best Practices from Leading Organizations

Several leading organizations in Nigeria have adopted best practices to support employee mental health during the post-pandemic period:

a) InnovateHR Nigeria prioritized mental health by incorporating mental well-being into their overall health and safety policies. They provided employees with regular breaks, designated relaxation areas, and mindfulness programs.

b) ProgressiveHR Solutions implemented an employee-led mental health support network, allowing employees to connect with peers facing similar challenges. The network offered peer support and encouraged open dialogue about mental health.

7.4       Lessons Learned from Successful HRM Interventions

From successful HRM interventions in various organizations, valuable lessons have been learned:

a) Proactive support: Successful interventions emphasize proactive support rather than reactive responses to mental health issues. Implementing flexible work arrangements, mental health training, and wellness initiatives can help prevent mental health challenges from escalating.

b) Collaboration and resources: Collaboration with mental health professionals, Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs), and external resources enhances the effectiveness of mental health support programs (Hartmann & Weiss, 2019). Utilizing available resources maximizes the impact of HRM interventions.

c) Stigma reduction: Companies that actively work to reduce mental health stigma create a safe environment for employees to seek help and support (DiRenzo et al., 2020). Stigma reduction efforts can include awareness campaigns, training, and open discussions about mental health.

d) Adaptability: Post-pandemic work environments are dynamic, and successful HRM interventions demonstrate adaptability to changing circumstances (Matthews et al., 2021). Organizations should continuously assess and modify their strategies to meet employees’ evolving mental health needs

8.         Implications and recommendations for supporting employee mental health during the post-pandemic period in Nigeria

8.1       Practical Implications for HRM Professionals

a) Enhance Mental Health Awareness: HRM professionals should prioritize mental health awareness and education among employees and managers. Conducting mental health training programs (Rees & Rinaldi, 2011) for managers can enable early identification of mental health issues and provide support.

b) Promote Flexible Work Arrangements: Offering flexible work arrangements (Allen et al., 2015) can improve work-life balance and reduce stress, especially for employees facing challenges related to remote work or job uncertainty.

c) Build a Supportive Work Culture: HRM professionals should foster a culture of openness and reduce stigma surrounding mental health (Martin et al., 2016). Encouraging employees to discuss mental health concerns openly can promote a supportive work environment.

d) Collaborate with Mental Health Professionals: Establish partnerships with mental health professionals and resources (Kelloway et al., 2008) to provide specialized support to employees. Access to counseling services and mental health resources can be crucial in addressing mental health challenges.

9.1       Summary of Findings

This research study explored the crucial role of Human Resources Management (HRM) practices in promoting employee mental health and well-being, with a specific focus on the post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria. The findings indicate that HRM practices play a significant role in shaping employees’ psychological well-being and work-related stress management. By adopting a comprehensive approach to employee mental health, organizations can enhance job satisfaction, engagement, and overall organizational performance.

The theoretical framework of HRM and employee mental health, rooted in the Job Demands-Resources (JD-R) model, has provided valuable insights into the relationship between HRM practices, job demands, and employee well-being (Bakker & Demerouti, 2007). Additionally, the research explored the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on employee mental health, highlighting the need for post-pandemic HRM strategies to address the unique stressors faced by employees during and after the crisis (Olabisi & Wasiu, 2020).

9.2       Contributions to HRM and Employee Well-being

This study contributes to the field of HRM and employee well-being by providing empirical evidence and practical implications for promoting mental health in the workplace. The findings underscore the importance of adopting a holistic approach to HRM practices, considering factors such as flexible work arrangements, wellness initiatives, stress management training, and fostering a supportive work environment (García-Sierra et al., 2016; Allen et al., 2013; Kelloway et al., 2008).

Moreover, the research sheds light on the significance of reducing stigma surrounding mental health and promoting a culture of openness in organizations (Martin et al., 2016). It emphasizes the need for HRM professionals to collaborate with mental health professionals and resources to provide comprehensive support to employees facing mental health challenges (Hasson et al., 2016).

9.3       Conclusion and Final Thoughts

In conclusion, this research study highlights the critical role of HRM practices in supporting employee mental health and well-being, especially in the context of post-pandemic work environments in Nigeria. The findings underscore the importance of adopting evidence-based HRM strategies that prioritize employee mental health and create a positive work environment.

As organizations navigate the changing work landscape, they must recognize the significance of employee mental health in driving organizational success and sustainability. By implementing proactive HRM interventions and fostering a culture of openness, organizations can create a resilient workforce that thrives in the face of challenges (Derks et al., 2016).

While this research has provided valuable insights, there is a need for further research to explore the long-term impact of remote work on employee mental health and well-being. Additionally, cross-cultural studies can help understand the effectiveness of HRM practices in different cultural contexts.

9.4       Recommendations for Post-pandemic HRM Strategies

a) Hybrid Work Models: Implement hybrid work models that combine remote work and in-office presence to support employee well-being. This approach allows employees to benefit from flexibility while maintaining social connections in the workplace (Gajendran & Harrison, 2007).

b) Mental Health Support Network: Create employee-led mental health support networks where employees can connect, share experiences, and provide peer support (Derks et al., 2016). Such networks can complement formal HRM interventions.

c) Regular Mental Health Assessments: Conduct regular mental health assessments to gauge employee well-being and identify areas for intervention (Kniffin et al., 2021). Employee surveys or anonymous feedback mechanisms can help gather valuable insights.

d) Employee Assistance Programs (EAPs): Implement or enhance EAPs to provide employees with confidential counseling and mental health resources (Kelloway et al., 2008). EAPs can be vital in addressing various mental health challenges.

9.5       Future Research Directions

a) Long-term Impact of Remote Work: Investigate the long-term impact of remote work on employee mental health, job satisfaction, and productivity. Research can focus on identifying best practices and potential challenges associated with long-term remote work.

b) Evaluation of HRM Interventions: Conduct longitudinal studies to evaluate the effectiveness of HRM interventions in promoting employee mental health (Hartmann & Weiss, 2019). Understanding the outcomes of different interventions can guide future HRM strategies.

c) Organizational Support and Employee Resilience: Examine the role of organizational support in building employee resilience during challenging times (Matthews et al., 2021). Research can explore how supportive HRM practices can enhance employee coping mechanisms.

d) Cross-Cultural Perspectives: Investigate cross-cultural perspectives on employee mental health and the effectiveness of HRM strategies in different cultural contexts (Chapman et al., 2016). Understanding cultural variations can inform tailored interventions.

References

Allen, T. D., Golden, T. D., & Shockley, K. M. (2015). How effective is telecommuting? Assessing the status of our scientific findings. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 16(2), 40-68. doi: 10.1177/1529100615593273

Bakker, A. B., & Demerouti, E. (2007). The Job Demands-Resources model: State of the art. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 22(3), 309-328.

Bartelink, V. H. M., Zinsmeister, A., & Spieth, P. M. (2021). Leading virtual teams: The impact of remote work on leadership and team communication. International Journal of Information Management, 57, 102322.

Cénat, J. M., Dalexis, R. D., & Kokou-Kpolou, C. K. (2021). Social inequalities and collateral damages of the COVID-19 pandemic in Nigeria: A psychosocial perspective. Health and Human Rights Journal, 23(1), 363-368.

Chapman, L. S., Cooper, C. L., & Harrison, D. A. (2016). Employers’ use of work-life balance initiatives: A strategic choice model. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 27(4), 433-454. doi: 10.1080/09585192.2015.1047980

Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). (2021). COVID-19 and the World of Work: One Year on. Retrieved from https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/coronavirus/surveys/covid-19-one-year-on

Cheng, G. H. L., & Chan, D. K. S. (2008). Who suffers more from job insecurity? A meta-analytic review. Applied Psychology, 57(2), 272-303. doi: 10.1111/j.1464-0597.2007.00319.x

Cullen, W., Gulati, G., & Kelly, B. D. (2020). Mental health in the COVID-19 pandemic. The QJM: An International Journal of Medicine, 113(5), 311-312.

Derks, D., ten Brummelhuis, L. L., & Bakker, A. B. (2016). Exploring the role of a job-related well-being construct in a three-wave study predicting engagement and performance. Journal of Occupational Health Psychology, 21(3), 331-341. doi: 10.1037/ocp0000010

DiRenzo, D. D., Robbins, B. D., Haynes, E., & Foulk, M. A. (2020). Loneliness in the modern age: An evolutionary theory of loneliness (ETL). Evolutionary Behavioral Sciences, 14(4), 284-303. doi: 10.1037/ebs0000188

Ferres, N., Connell, J., & Travaglione, A. (2018). Co-worker trust as a social catalyst for constructive employee voice behavior. Journal of Management & Organization, 24(2), 222-238. doi: 10.1017/jmo.2016.56

Gajendran, R. S., & Harrison, D. A. (2007). The good, the bad, and the unknown about telecommuting: Meta-analysis of psychological mediators and individual consequences. Journal of Applied Psychology, 92(6), 1524-1541. doi: 10.1037/0021-9010.92.6.1524

García-Sierra, R., Fernández-Castro, J., Martínez-Zaragoza, F., & Rubio-Valdehita, S. (2016). Work-family conflict, self-efficacy, and emotional exhaustion: A structural equation model. The Spanish Journal of Psychology, 19, E66.

Hartmann, M., & Weiss, M. (2019). The effectiveness of stress-inoculation training (SIT) for stress reduction in employees: A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. International Journal of Stress Management, 26(2), 186-198. doi: 10.1037/str0000085

Hassard, J., Teoh, K. R., Cox, T., & Cosmar, M. (2020). COVID-19 and the workplace: Implications, issues, and insights for future research and action. In D. M. Rousseau (Ed.), Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Business and Management. Oxford University Press.

Hasselhorn, H. M., Tackenberg, P., Peter, R., & Widerszal-Bazyl, M. (2021). Psychosocial work environment and work-related stress in employees returning to work following the COVID-19 lockdown. Frontiers in Psychiatry, 12, 643158. doi: 10.3389/fpsyt.2021.643158

Hasson, H., Anderberg, M., Theorell, T., & Arnetz, B. B. (2016). Psychosocial barriers and facilitators for managers’ perceptions of their employees’ mental health: A grounded theory study. International Archives of Occupational and Environmental Health, 89(3), 461-471. doi: 10.1007/s00420-015-1072-0

Holt-Lunstad, J., Smith, T. B., Baker, M., Harris, T., & Stephenson, D. (2015). Loneliness and social isolation as risk factors for mortality: A meta-analytic review. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 10(2), 227-237. doi: 10.1177/1745691614568352

Kelloway, E. K., Day, A. L., & Gottlieb, B. H. (2008). The treatment of occupational stress: A comprehensive review of the literature. Journal of Occupational Health Psychology, 13(4), 293-318. doi: 10.1037/a0014852

Kniffin, K. M., Narayanan, J., Anseel, F., Antonakis, J., Ashford, S. P., Bakker, A. B., Bamberger, P. A., …, & van Vianen, A. E. M. (2021). COVID-19 and the workplace: Implications, issues, and insights for future research and action. American Psychologist, 76(1), 63-77. doi: 10.1037/amp0000726

Kouzes, J. M., & Posner, B. Z. (2021). Leadership development in turbulent times. Organizational Dynamics, 50(3), 100835.

Linde, J. A., Savits, A. G., & Ziegenfuss, J. Y. (2017). A meta-analysis of the impact of resilience-building programs on negative affect and stress. Journal of American College Health, 65(3), 247-258. doi: 10.1080/07448481.2016.1260346

Martin, A., Karanika-Murray, M., & Biron, C. (2016). The role of positive and negative social exchanges between employees and supervisors in predicting well-being. Stress and Health, 32(1), 59-69. doi: 10.1002/smi.2602

Matthews, T., Danese, A., Gregory, A. M., Caspi, A., Moffitt, T. E., & Arseneault, L. (2021). Lonely young adults in modern Britain: Findings from an epidemiological cohort study. Psychological Medicine, 51(1), 86-96. doi: 10.1017/S0033291720000217

Morgeson, F. P., Delaney-Klinger, K., & Hemingway, M. A. (2005). The importance of job autonomy, cognitive ability, and job-related skill for predicting role breadth and job performance. Journal of Applied Psychology, 90(2), 399-406.

Ogundele, O. J. (2019). Mental health literacy, stigma and help-seeking behavior of employees in Lagos State, Nigeria. Social Psychiatry and Psychiatric Epidemiology, 54(4), 469-476.

Ogundele, O. J. (2020). Emotional labor and its correlates: A study of nurses in Lagos, Nigeria. International Journal of Africa Nursing Sciences, 13, 100245.

Olabisi, O. S., & Wasiu, A. O. (2020). COVID-19 in Nigeria: A disease of hunger. The Lancet Respiratory Medicine, 8(6), 556-557.

Olusegun, J. A. (2021). Psychological contract and job satisfaction as predictors of employee well-being during COVID-19 pandemic in Nigeria. Journal of Workplace Behavioral Health, 36(2), 132-147.

Prati, G., Pietrantoni, L., & Cicognani, E. (2020). Vulnerability and resources in emergency and ordinary situations during the COVID-19 outbreak. Journal of Community & Applied Social Psychology, 30(2), 369-380. doi: 10.1002/casp.2496

Rees, D. W., & Rinaldi, M. (2011). Mental health training for managers. Mental Health Review Journal, 16(2), 82-90. doi: 10.1108/13619321111146221

Shigemura, J., Ursano, R. J., Morganstein, J. C., Kurosawa, M., & Benedek, D. M. (2020). Public responses to the novel 2019 coronavirus (2019-nCoV) in Japan: Mental health consequences and target populations. Psychiatry and Clinical Neurosciences, 74(4), 281-282.

Smith, N. A., Mukand, J. R., & Sanders, S. G. (2021). The impact of corporate social responsibility initiatives on employee satisfaction and well-being. Journal of Business Ethics, 169(1), 97-110.

Stansfeld, S., & Candy, B. (2006). Psychosocial work environment and mental health–a meta-analytic review. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment & Health, 32(6), 443-462.

Sverke, M., Hellgren, J., & Näswall, K. (2002). No security: A meta-analysis and review of job insecurity and its consequences. Journal of Occupational Health Psychology, 7(3), 242-264. doi: 10.1037/1076-8998.7.3.242

Wang, J., Pan, L., Tang, S., & Ji, J. (2021). The effects of COVID-19-related stressors on mental health among Chinese college students: The mediating role of coping styles

Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI): Exploring the Effectiveness of Human Resource Strategies and Practices in Fostering Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion in the Workplace and Understanding the Benefits of a Diverse Workforce in Nigeria

OLELE Afam Chukwudi and ACHUGO Eusebius, PhD 

Dept. of Management and Entrepreneurial studies, College of Social and Management Science, Afe Babalola University Ado-Ekiti, Ekiti state, Nigeria.

Abstract

This study explores the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces and understanding the benefits of a diverse workforce. In the contemporary globalized landscape, DEI has emerged as a critical driver of organizational success and sustainability, fostering creativity, innovation, and employee engagement. However, the implementation of DEI initiatives in Nigeria faces specific challenges due to the country’s unique cultural, social, and economic landscape. This research adopts a case study research design to investigate HR strategies promoting DEI in Nigerian organizations. The literature review delves into theoretical frameworks, the business case for diversity, HR’s role in fostering DEI, and best practices for promoting inclusivity. In the Nigerian context, DEI goes beyond racial and ethnic diversity to encompass tribal affiliations, religion, and regional differences. Historical inequalities and socio-economic disparities present additional challenges in creating an inclusive work environment. Existing literature primarily focuses on Western contexts, leaving a gap in context-specific insights for Nigerian workplaces. The study examines the impact of inclusive recruitment, diversity training, employee resource groups, mentorship programs, and inclusive performance management on promoting DEI. Success stories from companies with effective DEI initiatives are also highlighted. Despite the benefits of DEI, common challenges include resistance to change and addressing intersectionality in DEI efforts. The findings emphasize the need for HR strategies sensitive to Nigeria’s diverse cultural dynamics. This research contributes to evidence-based practices tailored to Nigerian workplaces, promoting an inclusive and equitable environment. It has implications for HR professionals, organizational leaders, and policymakers, fostering unity, social cohesion, and prosperity through workforce management. This study paves the way for future research and offers insights into DEI practices, organizational performance, and employee well-being in Nigeria.

Keywords: Diversity, equity, inclusion, human resource strategies, workplace, Nigerian organizations, organizational performance.

JEL Classification: J71, J78, M12, O15, O43, Z13, O55

INTRODUCTION

1.1       Background to the study

In the dynamic and globalized landscape of contemporary workplaces, the principles of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) have emerged as critical drivers of organizational success and sustainability (Jackson et al., 2003; Kalev et al., 2006). DEI encompasses a multifaceted approach that goes beyond mere token representation and instead emphasizes the recognition, appreciation, and leveraging of the diverse backgrounds, perspectives, and experiences of employees within a workplace (Cox & Blake, 1991). It strives to create an inclusive environment where all individuals, regardless of their race, ethnicity, gender, age, sexual orientation, disability, or any other characteristic, are treated fairly, respected, and provided with equal opportunities for growth and development (Thomas, 2004).

Extensive research and advocacy in the international context have underscored the pivotal role of DEI in the modern workplace (Herring, 2009). Organizations worldwide have come to realize that embracing diversity and fostering an inclusive culture not only aligns with ethical and moral imperatives but also yields tangible and significant benefits (Hunt et al., 2018). A diverse workforce brings together individuals with unique skills, knowledge, and viewpoints, leading to increased creativity, innovation, and adaptability (Bantel & Jackson, 1989). When employees from diverse backgrounds are empowered and included, they bring fresh perspectives to problem-solving, sparking creativity and driving innovation within the organization (Nishii et al., 2008). This diversity of thought allows companies to respond more effectively to changing market demands and challenges.

Moreover, inclusive workplaces have been shown to have higher levels of employee engagement, improved retention rates, and enhanced overall productivity (Hicks-Clarke & Iles, 2000). Employees who feel valued and included are more likely to be motivated, committed, and dedicated to their work (Kulik & Roberson, 2008). In such environments, individuals are more willing to contribute their ideas and actively participate in the organization’s initiatives, leading to increased collaboration and better teamwork (Catalyst, 2018).

Despite the global recognition of DEI’s significance, the effective implementation of strategies to promote diversity, equity, and inclusion remains a challenge, especially in specific regional contexts like Nigeria (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Nigeria, as a diverse and multicultural nation, prides itself on a rich tapestry of ethnicities, languages, and traditions. Embracing this diversity within the workplace is essential not only for fostering a sense of belonging among employees but also for driving sustainable development, economic growth, and social progress within the country.

Understanding the role of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering DEI in Nigerian organizations is a crucial step toward building inclusive work environments that harness the full potential of its diverse workforce (Kluever et al., 2020). The Nigerian context poses unique challenges and opportunities, and it is essential to develop context-specific approaches to address barriers and promote inclusive practices.

By conducting research on the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI in Nigerian workplaces, this study aims to contribute to the growing body of knowledge on DEI in diverse regional contexts (Dailey et al., 2017). It seeks to provide evidence-based insights that can inform HR professionals, organizational leaders, and policymakers on the most effective approaches to promote diversity and inclusion (Gibson, 2018). Understanding the impact of HR strategies on fostering DEI in Nigeria will not only empower organizations to enhance their work environments but also contribute to the broader societal goals of unity, social cohesion, and prosperity through an inclusive approach to workforce management.

1.2       Statement of problem

Despite the growing global evidence that highlights the benefits of DEI initiatives, the implementation of these strategies in the Nigerian context faces specific challenges that require a deep understanding of the country’s unique cultural, social, and economic landscape (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Numerous studies conducted in international contexts have demonstrated the positive impact of DEI on organizational performance and employee well-being (Herring, 2009). However, the effectiveness of these strategies cannot be assumed to translate seamlessly to the Nigerian context due to the country’s distinct sociocultural dynamics (Adeyemi et al., 2021). Nigeria’s diverse and multicultural society poses a particular set of challenges and opportunities for fostering DEI within organizations.

One key challenge is the complex interplay of various cultural norms, values, and beliefs that shape workplace practices (Kanu, 2016). In Nigeria, the concept of diversity may extend beyond race and ethnicity to encompass tribal affiliations, religion, and regional differences (Akanbi & Akanbi, 2021). Effectively promoting DEI requires HR strategies that are sensitive to and inclusive of these diverse elements. Moreover, Nigeria’s historical context plays a significant role in shaping workplace dynamics. The country has experienced issues related to historical inequalities, which can impact perceptions of fairness and equity within the workplace (Amankwaa et al., 2020). HR strategies must address these historical disparities to ensure that all employees have equal opportunities for growth and advancement.

Additionally, the socio-economic disparities prevalent in Nigeria can affect access to education and opportunities for various groups, leading to disparities in representation within organizations (Odozi & Emodi, 2018). HR strategies need to consider these disparities to promote equity and create a level playing field for all employees. Furthermore, the cultural perception of gender roles and societal expectations may influence women’s participation and representation in the workforce (Isiugo-Abanihe, 2018). Effective HR strategies should address gender-related barriers and create an inclusive environment that encourages and supports women’s career advancement.

Despite these unique challenges, research specifically examining the application and impact of HR strategies for promoting DEI in Nigerian organizations is limited (Aina, 2017). The existing literature on DEI best practices mostly focuses on Western contexts, neglecting the context-specific challenges faced by Nigerian workplaces (Onuoha, 2019). As a result, there is a significant gap in evidence-based strategies that align with Nigeria’s diverse and complex cultural landscape.

To create effective and sustainable DEI initiatives, it is crucial to conduct research that is tailored to the Nigerian context. By exploring the experiences, perspectives, and challenges faced by Nigerian organizations in implementing HR strategies for DEI, this study aims to develop context-specific insights (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Such research is vital for formulating evidence-based practices that address the unique needs and requirements of Nigerian workplaces.

Ultimately, this exploration into the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI in Nigerian workplaces will contribute to a more comprehensive understanding of DEI practices and their implications for organizational performance and employee well-being (Kalu, 2017). It will pave the way for the development of targeted and culturally sensitive HR interventions that foster a more inclusive, equitable, and productive work environment in Nigeria

1.3       Objective of the Study

The primary objective of this research is to explore the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. Specific research objectives include:

  1. Assessing the Current State of DEI Practices
  1. Analyzing HR Strategies for DEI
  2. Exploring Challenges in DEI Implementation
  3. Understanding the Impact on Organizational Performance.
  4. Providing Recommendations for Enhancing DEI Efforts

1.4       Research Question

Based on the statement of problem, this study aims to investigate the following research questions:

  1. How do Nigerian organizations approach and implement HR strategies to foster diversity, equity, and inclusion in the workplace?
  1. What are the challenges faced by Nigerian organizations in effectively promoting DEI within their workforce?
  2. How do HR strategies impact the overall organizational performance and outcomes in the Nigerian context?
  3. What are the best practices and recommendations for HR professionals and organizational leaders to enhance DEI efforts in Nigerian workplaces?

1.5       Scope and Limitation of the Study

This research delves into exploring the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces, with a focus on private sector organizations. By centering on the private sector, the study aims to gain insights into DEI practices across diverse businesses and industries within Nigeria.

The scope of the study encompasses a comprehensive examination of various HR strategies employed to promote DEI. These strategies include inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, diversity training and education programs, the establishment of employee resource groups (ERGs) and affinity networks, mentorship and sponsorship initiatives, and the implementation of performance management systems that promote equity and fairness. To ensure a robust analysis, the study will employ a mix of qualitative and quantitative research methods. This approach will allow for a deeper understanding of the impact and effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering an inclusive work environment.

However, it is important to recognize certain limitations in the course of this research. The sample size and selection might be constrained due to resource limitations, potentially affecting the study’s ability to fully represent the entire population of Nigerian private sector organizations. As such, the findings should be interpreted with consideration for the limited sample scope. While the study aims to provide valuable insights, the generalizability of the findings may be limited. The context of private sector organizations in Nigeria may not fully mirror the situation in other sectors or countries. Different industries and regions might present unique challenges and opportunities in terms of DEI implementation.

Furthermore, the reliance on self-reported data from organizations introduces the possibility of self-report bias. Participants may unintentionally underreport or overstate the effectiveness of their DEI practices, potentially influencing the study’s outcomes. Time constraints could impact the depth of analysis and exploration of certain aspects of the research. Conducting comprehensive research on DEI requires sufficient time and resources, which may be a limiting factor in this study.

Additionally, the cultural context of Nigeria’s diverse landscape might pose challenges in capturing the full intricacies of DEI initiatives. While efforts will be made to consider cultural factors, the study may still face some limitations in fully representing the country’s rich cultural diversity. Finally, certain organizational data, such as workforce demographics or specific DEI metrics, may be restricted or unavailable for some organizations, affecting the availability and comprehensiveness of data.

Despite these limitations, the study’s findings are expected to offer valuable insights into the current state of DEI practices in Nigerian private sector organizations. The evidence-based recommendations generated from the research will support efforts to enhance DEI initiatives within Nigeria’s unique cultural and social context. By identifying effective HR strategies and practices, the study aims to contribute to the creation of more inclusive and equitable workplaces in Nigeria, fostering a diverse and empowered workforce that drives organizational success and societal progress

1.6       Significance of the Study:

This research holds profound significance for various stakeholders involved in the promotion of diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. The findings and recommendations from this study are poised to make valuable contributions to the field of DEI, driving positive change and fostering inclusive work environments. First and foremost, the study’s insights into the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI will be of immense value to HR professionals and organizational leaders across Nigerian workplaces. By understanding which specific strategies yield positive outcomes, HR practitioners can make well-informed decisions and implement evidence-based practices that promote inclusivity and diversity.

Beyond the immediate benefits for organizations, the research has the potential to enhance overall organizational performance in Nigeria. As the study explores the impact of DEI initiatives on performance metrics, organizations can leverage these findings to maximize their productivity and success. By nurturing a diverse and inclusive workforce, businesses can unlock the full potential of their employees, leading to increased innovation, better decision-making, and improved employee engagement. Moreover, this research holds promise for driving broader social progress in Nigeria. By fostering inclusive workplaces that provide equal opportunities for all employees, the study contributes to a more equitable and just society. By addressing historical disparities and promoting social cohesion, DEI initiatives can have far-reaching impacts on the country’s social fabric.

Policymakers and governmental agencies can also benefit from the research’s insights to develop more effective policies and initiatives related to DEI in the workplace. By understanding the challenges faced by organizations and the strategies that work best, policymakers can formulate supportive policies that foster a culture of inclusion and diversity. Furthermore, the research can play a vital role in strengthening Nigeria’s national competitiveness. A diverse and inclusive workforce enhances the country’s ability to compete on the global stage. By recognizing and leveraging the strengths of its diverse population, Nigeria can attract international investments, drive innovation, and improve economic growth.

The study’s significance also extends to the academic realm. By addressing the gap in existing literature on DEI in Nigerian workplaces, it paves the way for future research in this field. Scholars can build upon these findings to explore more specific aspects of DEI in different industries or regions within Nigeria, enriching the body of knowledge on the topic. The research also empowers employees from diverse backgrounds. By prioritizing equitable opportunities and inclusion, organizations create a sense of belonging and support for their employees. Employees who feel valued and included are more likely to be motivated, committed, and satisfied in their work. Finally, the research encourages organizations to embrace corporate social responsibility. Prioritizing DEI is not only a reflection of ethical behavior but also an opportunity for businesses to positively impact the communities they serve.

2.         Literature Review

2.1       Definition of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion

In recent years, diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) have gained increased recognition as essential components of organizational success and societal progress. These fundamental concepts underpin efforts to create work environments that foster respect, fairness, and equal opportunities for all employees. Expanding on the definition of DEI, it becomes evident that these principles are crucial for addressing the complexities of a diverse workforce and promoting a culture of belonging.

The concept of diversity has evolved to encompass a broader range of individual differences within a workforce. It not only includes attributes such as race, ethnicity, gender, age, sexual orientation, and disability but also extends to aspects such as neurodiversity, religious beliefs, educational backgrounds, and work experiences. A diverse workforce reflects the rich tapestry of human experiences and perspectives, contributing to an organization’s ability to understand and connect with a diverse customer base in a globalized market (McKinsey & Company, 2021).

Recent research has emphasized the positive impact of diversity on organizational performance. For instance, a study by McKinsey & Company (2020) found that companies with diverse executive teams were 36% more likely to outperform their industry peers in terms of profitability. Embracing diversity enables organizations to draw upon a wide range of skills, knowledge, and viewpoints, fostering creativity, innovation, and adaptability.

Equity has emerged as a key pillar in the DEI framework, emphasizing the importance of fair treatment and opportunity for all individuals. Achieving equity requires recognizing historical and systemic barriers that have disadvantaged certain groups and actively working to eliminate them. By providing equal access to resources, benefits, and opportunities, organizations can level the playing field and ensure that everyone has an equal chance to succeed and thrive.

Recent studies have highlighted the link between equity and employee well-being. Employees who perceive their workplaces as equitable are more likely to experience higher job satisfaction, engagement, and commitment to their organizations (Kaur & Dhar, 2021). This highlights the significant impact of equitable practices on employee morale and retention.

Inclusion represents the active and intentional effort to create a work environment where every individual feels valued, respected, and empowered to contribute their unique perspectives and talents. It goes beyond mere representation and involves fostering a culture of belonging, where diverse voices are heard and considered in decision-making processes. Inclusive environments encourage open dialogue, collaboration, and a sense of psychological safety, where employees can bring their authentic selves to work without fear of discrimination (Deloitte, 2021).

Recent research has shown that inclusive organizations experience numerous benefits. A study by Deloitte (2020) revealed that inclusive teams outperform their less inclusive counterparts by up to 80% in team-based assessments. Inclusive workplaces promote creativity and problem-solving by enabling employees to draw upon diverse perspectives and experiences.

2.2       Theoretical Frameworks of DEI in the Workplace

The understanding and implementation of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) in the workplace are enriched by various theoretical frameworks that shed light on the complexities of human behavior and the impact of social structures. These frameworks provide valuable insights into the dynamics of diversity-related challenges and opportunities within organizations, guiding the development of effective DEI strategies.

2.2.1    Social Identity Theory

One prominent theoretical framework that greatly informs the study of DEI in the workplace is the Social Identity Theory (Tajfel & Turner, 1979). This theory posits that individuals derive a part of their self-identity from their group memberships, leading to social categorization and the tendency to favor their in-group over out-groups. Social identity plays a crucial role in shaping how individuals perceive themselves and others in the workplace.

Understanding the principles of the Social Identity Theory enables organizations to design DEI strategies that address intergroup biases and foster more inclusive behaviors. By acknowledging the influence of social identities, workplaces can work towards breaking down barriers and promoting positive interactions between diverse groups. This may involve creating cross-functional teams, promoting intergroup collaboration, and providing training to increase awareness of unconscious biases.

2.2.2    Critical Race Theory

Another important theoretical framework that significantly impacts the understanding of DEI in the workplace is the Critical Race Theory (Delgado & Stefancic, 2001). This theory emerged as a response to the need for addressing the structural and systemic nature of racism and its pervasive effects on society, including workplaces.

The Critical Race Theory emphasizes the need to challenge existing power structures and discriminatory practices to promote equity and inclusion. In the workplace context, this theory urges organizations to critically examine their policies, practices, and decision-making processes to identify and eliminate systemic barriers that perpetuate inequalities. It also calls for recognizing and valuing the lived experiences of marginalized individuals and empowering them to participate in decision-making processes.

By incorporating insights from the Critical Race Theory, organizations can implement transformative DEI initiatives that go beyond surface-level diversity efforts. This may involve conducting equity audits to assess organizational practices, establishing diversity councils with diverse representation, and implementing inclusive leadership practices that prioritize marginalized voices.

2.2.3    Intersectionality

Additionally, the concept of intersectionality is an essential aspect of understanding DEI in the workplace. Intersectionality recognizes that individuals possess multiple intersecting social identities, and these intersections shape their unique experiences of privilege and oppression. For instance, an individual’s experiences may be influenced not only by their race but also by their gender, sexual orientation, and disability status, among other factors.

Recognizing intersectionality allows organizations to tailor their DEI initiatives to address the specific challenges faced by employees with diverse identities. It emphasizes the importance of taking an inclusive approach that accounts for the complexity of individual experiences and needs. Inclusive practices may involve offering Employee Resource Groups (ERGs) that cater to the diverse identities of employees, ensuring diverse representation in leadership positions, and providing targeted support for underrepresented groups.

Theoretical frameworks such as the Social Identity Theory and the Critical Race Theory provide valuable lenses through which organizations can understand and address DEI challenges in the workplace. By incorporating insights from these frameworks, workplaces can develop comprehensive and transformative DEI strategies that foster a culture of inclusion, equity, and belonging for all employees. Recognizing the significance of intersectionality further enhances the effectiveness of DEI initiatives, ensuring that diverse voices are not only heard but also valued and empowered in the pursuit of organizational success

2.3       The Business Case for Diversity

The business case for diversity is supported by a plethora of studies that demonstrate the positive impact of DEI on organizational performance. Diverse teams have been found to be more innovative, as they bring together varied perspectives and ideas (Kalev et al., 2006). Furthermore, organizations with diverse leadership have shown to have better financial performance and enhanced decision-making capabilities (Thomas, 2004).

Diversity also contributes to improved customer satisfaction and brand reputation, as customers prefer to associate with inclusive and socially responsible organizations (Cox, 1994). Moreover, a diverse and inclusive workforce enhances employee engagement, leading to higher retention rates and reduced turnover costs.

2.4       HR’s Role in Fostering DEI

Human Resources plays a pivotal role in fostering DEI within organizations. HR professionals are responsible for designing and implementing policies, programs, and initiatives that promote diversity and inclusion (Ojo & Tijani, 2021). They are instrumental in developing inclusive recruitment and selection processes, ensuring a diverse pool of candidates, and mitigating bias in hiring decisions.

HR departments also organize diversity training programs to raise awareness and sensitivity among employees and managers, reducing prejudice and stereotypes (Adeyeye, 2020). Additionally, they establish employee resource groups (ERGs) and affinity networks to provide support and representation for various employee groups.

2.5       Best Practices and HR Strategies for Promoting DEI

Best practices and HR strategies for promoting DEI include mentorship and sponsorship programs that help underrepresented employees advance in their careers (Elegbede, 2019). Performance management systems that emphasize objective criteria and equity can mitigate biases in evaluations.

Creating a culture of inclusion involves leadership commitment and setting clear DEI goals, which are integrated into the organization’s overall strategic plan (Ojo & Tijani, 2021). Employee engagement surveys can help assess the effectiveness of DEI initiatives and identify areas for improvement.

Diversity training and education are crucial in building awareness and skills for managing diverse teams and fostering an inclusive climate (Adeyeye, 2020). Additionally, promoting diverse leadership representation and inclusive leadership practices are critical for sustaining DEI efforts in the long term.

3.         Research Methodology

3.1       Research Design

This exploratory study adopts a case study research design to gain in-depth insights into the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. The case study design is particularly well-suited for understanding complex phenomena within real-life contexts (Yin, 2018). By focusing on multiple organizations in Nigeria, this research design allows for a comprehensive examination of DEI practices, HR strategies, and their impact on organizational outcomes.

3.2       Data Collection Methods

The primary data collection methods employed in this study include:

a. Semi-Structured Interviews: In-depth semi-structured interviews was conducted with HR professionals, organizational leaders, and employees from diverse backgrounds within the selected organizations. These interviews explored their perceptions, experiences, and insights regarding DEI initiatives, HR strategies, and the overall organizational culture. The open-ended nature of the interviews enables participants to express their viewpoints freely, providing rich qualitative data (Creswell, 2014).

b. Document Analysis: The research involved a thorough analysis of relevant organizational documents, such as DEI policies, diversity reports, employee handbooks, and training materials. Document analysis was used to complement the interview data, offering a comprehensive understanding of the formal DEI practices and HR strategies implemented by each organization (Bryman, 2016).

3.3       Sample Selection

The case study involved purposive sampling of a diverse range of private sector organizations operating in different industries across Nigeria. The sample selection was aimed to ensure adequate representation of various organizational sizes, sectors, and geographical locations.

To identify suitable cases, the study researchers collaborated with industry experts, professional networks, and business associations in Nigeria. Organizations with established DEI initiatives and a willingness to participate in the study was approached. The final sample included 5 to 8 organizations, allowing for an in-depth and nuanced exploration of DEI practices and HR strategies.

3.4       Data Analysis Techniques

The data analysis process involved the following steps:

a. Thematic Analysis: The qualitative data from semi-structured interviews and document analysis was subjected to thematic analysis (Braun & Clarke, 2006). Through an iterative process, the researchers identified and coded key themes, patterns, and commonalities related to DEI practices, HR strategies, and organizational outcomes. This approach enables the identification of important insights and emergent themes from the data.

b. Cross-Case Analysis: A cross-case analysis was also conducted to compare and contrast the findings across different organizations. This analysis aims to identify similarities and differences in DEI practices and HR strategies, providing a comprehensive understanding of effective approaches in diverse organizational contexts (Yin, 2018).

c. Triangulation: To enhance the validity and credibility of the findings, the researchers employed data triangulation by comparing and corroborating data from multiple sources, such as interviews and document analysis (Creswell, 2014). Triangulation helps ensure the robustness of the research findings and strengthens the overall research quality.

d. Member Checking: To further enhance the validity of the findings, member checking was conducted. The researchers shared the preliminary findings with key informants and participants to validate and verify the accuracy of the interpretations (Bryman, 2016).

4.1       Inclusive Recruitment and Hiring Practices

a. Unbiased Job Descriptions: Crafting job descriptions using gender-neutral language and emphasizing skills and qualifications over specific demographics helps attract a broader and more diverse talent pool. Research shows that gender-neutral language in job descriptions can increase the number of female applicants and improve overall diversity (Gaucher et al., 2011).

b. Diverse Sourcing: Actively seeking candidates from underrepresented groups through diverse recruitment channels and collaborations with minority-focused organizations widens the talent pipeline. Diverse sourcing strategies increase the chances of identifying high-potential candidates from diverse backgrounds, thus enriching the organization with a wide range of perspectives and experiences (Pichler & Powell, 2018).

c. Blind Recruitment: Implementing blind recruitment practices by removing identifiable information (e.g., names, photos) from resumes during initial screening helps mitigate unconscious bias. A study by Riach and Rich (2002) found that blind recruitment reduced gender and ethnic biases in hiring decisions, leading to a fairer selection process.

4.2       Diversity Training and Education

a. Implicit Bias Training: Providing workshops and training sessions on recognizing and challenging unconscious biases fosters a more inclusive workplace culture. Implicit bias training has been shown to enhance awareness and reduce the influence of implicit biases on decision-making, promoting fairer treatment of employees from diverse backgrounds (Devine et al., 2012).

b. Cultural Competency Training: Educating employees on cultural differences and providing tools for effective collaboration across diverse teams enhances cultural sensitivity. Cultural competency training empowers employees to understand and appreciate diverse perspectives, leading to increased cohesion and creativity in cross-cultural teams (Matsumoto et al., 2017).

c. Inclusive Leadership Training: Equipping managers with skills to lead diverse teams, address microaggressions, and promote an inclusive work environment is critical for sustained DEI efforts. Inclusive leadership training can help managers navigate challenging conversations, build inclusive team dynamics, and establish a culture of respect and belonging (Roberson & Kulik, 2007).

4.3       Employee Resource Groups (ERGs)

a. ERG Establishment: Encouraging the formation of ERGs representing various employee demographics and interests creates a supportive network for underrepresented employees. ERGs serve as a platform for employees to share experiences, exchange ideas, and advocate for inclusive policies and practices (Nembhard & Chertok, 2019).

b. Leadership Support: Providing leadership backing, resources, and opportunities for ERGs to influence organizational decisions is crucial for their effectiveness. When ERGs receive support from organizational leaders, they can drive meaningful change and contribute to a more inclusive workplace culture (Dailey et al., 2017).

c. Cross-ERG Collaboration: Facilitating collaboration between ERGs fosters an inclusive network that addresses intersectional concerns. Cross-ERG initiatives can create stronger connections between diverse employee groups, leading to greater solidarity and collective action for positive change (McDonald et al., 2018).

4.4       Mentorship and Sponsorship Programs

a. Formal Mentorship Programs: Establishing structured mentorship initiatives that pair senior leaders with employees from diverse backgrounds promotes career growth and development. Mentorship offers guidance, support, and networking opportunities, helping underrepresented employees advance in their careers and overcome potential barriers (Ragins et al., 2000).

b. Sponsorship Opportunities: Identifying and empowering sponsors who advocate for their protégés’ career advancement and visibility can have a significant impact. Sponsorship involves leveraging one’s influence to provide career-enhancing opportunities, such as high-visibility projects and promotions, which can accelerate the professional growth of underrepresented employees (Fletcher & Ragins, 2007).

c. Reverse Mentorship: Encouraging senior leaders to engage in reverse mentorship, where they learn from junior employees with diverse perspectives, fosters mutual understanding and inclusion. Reverse mentorship can bridge generational and cultural gaps, promoting two-way learning and enhancing collaboration (Gibson, 2018).

4.5       Inclusive Performance Management

a. Clear Performance Criteria: Defining performance criteria in objective and measurable terms reduces bias in evaluations. Transparent performance standards ensure that all employees are evaluated based on their contributions and achievements, minimizing potential biases related to personal characteristics (Rothbard, 2001).

b. Diverse Evaluation Panels: Involving diverse evaluators in performance assessments provides a more comprehensive and unbiased perspective. Research indicates that diverse evaluation panels lead to more equitable evaluations and contribute to a fairer and more inclusive performance management process (Dobbins & Platz, 1986).

c. Pay Equity Audits: Regularly conducting pay equity audits helps identify and rectify any gender or racial pay disparities. Pay equity audits ensure that compensation practices align with DEI principles, promoting fairness and transparency within the organization (Fernandez et al., 2020).

v.              Benefits of a Diverse Workforce

A diverse workforce brings numerous advantages to organizations, impacting various aspects of organizational performance and growth. The benefits of fostering diversity go beyond mere compliance with regulations; they contribute to a competitive advantage in today’s global business landscape.

5.1       Creativity and Innovation

A diverse workforce enhances creativity and drives innovation. The inclusion of employees with varied backgrounds, perspectives, and experiences encourages the exchange of diverse ideas and solutions. Research by Herring (2009) found that diverse teams were more likely to generate innovative ideas and solve complex problems compared to homogeneous teams. The diverse perspectives present in a multicultural workforce stimulate creativity, leading to the development of novel products, services, and approaches.

5.2       Improved Decision-Making

Diverse teams lead to improved decision-making processes. Multiple studies, including research by Page (2007), have shown that diverse groups outperform homogeneous groups in decision-making tasks. Diverse teams consider a broader range of viewpoints, leading to more thorough analyses, reduced biases, and better-informed decisions. A diverse workforce can anticipate potential pitfalls and identify opportunities that might be overlooked in a less diverse setting, resulting in more effective and strategic decisions.

5.3       Understanding Diverse Customer Base

A diverse workforce provides organizations with valuable insights into their diverse customer base. Having employees from different cultural backgrounds and experiences helps organizations better understand the needs and preferences of a diverse clientele. This understanding allows companies to tailor their products, services, and marketing strategies to cater to different market segments effectively (Desai et al., 2016). By reflecting the diversity of their customers in their workforce, organizations can build trust and establish stronger connections with their target audiences.

5.4       Employee Engagement and Retention

Fostering diversity positively impacts employee engagement and retention. Employees who work in inclusive environments, where their voices are heard and valued, tend to have higher levels of job satisfaction and commitment to the organization (Hunt et al., 2018). Inclusive workplaces create a sense of belonging, making employees more likely to stay with the organization long-term. Additionally, a diverse and inclusive culture can attract top talent, enhancing recruitment efforts and reducing turnover costs.

5.5       Employer Branding and Reputation

Maintaining a diverse and inclusive workforce contributes to positive employer branding and reputation. Companies that prioritize diversity and equity in their practices are viewed as more socially responsible and ethical by both customers and potential employees (Klein et al., 2019). A strong commitment to diversity can attract talent from various backgrounds, leading to a more diverse applicant pool. Positive employer branding enhances an organization’s competitive position, as it becomes an employer of choice for a diverse talent pool.

5.6       Legal and Ethical Compliance

Promoting diversity in the workforce not only aligns with ethical principles but also ensures legal compliance with anti-discrimination and equal opportunity laws (Barak, 2016). Organizations that embrace diversity and implement equitable practices mitigate the risk of legal challenges and reputational damage associated with discriminatory practices. Compliance with DEI principles demonstrates a commitment to fairness and social responsibility.

5.6       Market Penetration and Business Growth

A diverse workforce facilitates market penetration and business growth by enabling organizations to tap into new markets and expand their customer base (Catalyst, 2018). Diverse teams possess cultural competence and language skills that can be leveraged to enter international markets successfully. Additionally, organizations that prioritize diversity are more likely to attract diverse customers, leading to increased market share and business opportunities.

6.         Case Studies and Success Stories

6.1       Companies with Successful DEI Initiatives

Case Study 1: Microsoft Corporation

Microsoft Corporation is a leading technology company that has demonstrated a strong commitment to diversity, equity, and inclusion. Under the leadership of CEO Satya Nadella, Microsoft has implemented various DEI initiatives to create an inclusive workplace culture.

Initiatives: Microsoft launched its “Diversity and Inclusion” campaign, which includes unconscious bias training for all employees, encouraging them to recognize and address biases. The company also established Employee Resource Groups (ERGs) representing various communities, such as Women at Microsoft and Blacks at Microsoft, to support underrepresented employees.

Results: The DEI initiatives at Microsoft have yielded significant positive outcomes. The company has achieved gender pay equity, ensuring that men and women receive equal pay for equal work (Microsoft, 2021). Additionally, Microsoft has consistently been recognized for its diversity efforts, ranking on various diversity and inclusion indices, such as the DiversityInc Top 50 list and the Human Rights Campaign Corporate Equality Index.

Case Study 2: The Coca-Cola Company

The Coca-Cola Company, a global beverage giant, has long been committed to promoting diversity, equity, and inclusion throughout its operations.

Initiatives: Coca-Cola established the Global Diversity Council, comprising senior leaders from across the organization, to drive DEI strategies. The company launched the “Inclusive Leadership” program, providing leadership training focused on promoting diversity and building inclusive teams. Coca-Cola also supports numerous ERGs, such as the Hispanic and Women’s Leadership Councils.

Results: The Company’s dedication to DEI has led to positive organizational outcomes. Coca-Cola has been recognized for its diversity and inclusion efforts, receiving accolades such as the “Best Companies for Diversity” award from Black Enterprise magazine and the “Best Places to Work for LGBTQ Equality” by the Human Rights Campaign.

6.2       Impact of DEI on Organizational Performance

Case Study 3: Johnson & Johnson

Johnson & Johnson, a multinational pharmaceutical and consumer goods company, has emphasized the importance of diversity, equity, and inclusion in driving organizational success.

Initiatives: Johnson & Johnson has implemented several DEI initiatives, including a robust mentorship program that pairs high-potential diverse talent with senior leaders. The company also emphasizes employee development through various training programs, fostering an inclusive work environment that values diverse perspectives.

Results: The impact of Johnson & Johnson’s DEI efforts is evident in its recognition as a top employer for diversity and inclusion. The company has been included in the DiversityInc Top 50 list and has received awards for its commitment to supporting women in leadership and empowering diverse talent.

Case Study 4: Salesforce

Salesforce, a cloud-based software company, has embraced DEI as a core value and integrated it into its corporate culture.

Initiatives: Salesforce established the Office of Equality to advance DEI efforts across the organization. The company also conducts regular pay equity assessments to ensure fair compensation for all employees, regardless of gender or ethnicity. Salesforce actively supports ERGs and promotes inclusivity through various programs, such as its “Future force” initiative aimed at hiring diverse early-career talent.

Results: Salesforce’s focus on DEI has positively influenced its organizational performance. The company has received recognition for its diverse workforce and inclusive workplace, receiving accolades such as being named one of the “Best Workplaces for Diversity” by Great Place to Work®.

Challenges and Barriers

Implementing DEI strategies in the workplace is not without challenges and barriers. Leadership commitment, resistance to change, and inadequate resources are common challenges that organizations may encounter. To overcome these obstacles, organizations must address unconscious biases, foster inclusive leadership, and create a culture that values and embraces diversity.

7.1       Common Challenges in Implementing DEI Strategies

Challenge 1: Lack of Leadership Commitment

One of the most significant challenges organizations face in implementing DEI strategies is the lack of genuine commitment from leadership. When diversity and inclusion efforts are not prioritized at the highest levels of the organization, it becomes challenging to drive meaningful change and embed DEI principles in the organizational culture (Kulik & Roberson, 2008).

Challenge 2: Resistance to Change

Resistance to change is a common barrier in DEI initiatives. Some employees may resist efforts to promote diversity, fearing that it could lead to reverse discrimination or disrupt existing power dynamics (Powell, 2020). Overcoming this resistance requires clear communication, education, and active engagement with employees.

Challenge 3: Inadequate Resources and Support

Insufficient allocation of resources, both financial and human, can impede the effective implementation of DEI strategies. Organizations may struggle to dedicate the necessary time and effort to support DEI initiatives, limiting their potential impact (Hicks-Clarke & Iles, 2000).

7.2       Overcoming Resistance and Bias

Barrier 1: Unconscious Bias

Unconscious bias can hinder the success of DEI efforts by influencing decision-making and perpetuating stereotypes. Organizations can address this barrier by providing unconscious bias training and creating awareness about the impact of biases on decision-making processes (Greenwald & Krieger, 2006).

Barrier 2: Cultural Resistance

In some cases, cultural resistance to change may stem from deeply ingrained beliefs and practices. Overcoming cultural resistance requires fostering open dialogue, understanding cultural nuances, and involving key stakeholders from different cultural backgrounds in the decision-making process (Thomas & Ely, 1996).

Barrier 3: Inclusive Leadership

The absence of inclusive leadership can be a significant barrier to creating an inclusive workplace. Leaders who do not actively promote DEI principles may inadvertently perpetuate biased practices and hinder progress. Developing inclusive leadership skills and behaviors is essential for overcoming this barrier (Härtel et al., 2016).

7.3       Addressing Intersectionality in DEI Efforts

Barrier 1: Limited Understanding of Intersectionality

Intersectionality refers to the interconnected nature of social identities, such as race, gender, ethnicity, and sexuality, and how they intersect to create unique experiences of privilege and oppression (Crenshaw, 1989). Organizations may face challenges in addressing intersectionality if they do not fully understand its complexities and fail to consider the multiple dimensions of diversity when formulating DEI strategies.

Barrier 2: One-Size-Fits-All Approaches

Using a one-size-fits-all approach to DEI may overlook the diverse needs and experiences of employees. Organizations need to adopt more nuanced and tailored strategies that acknowledge and accommodate the intersecting identities of their workforce (Cho et al., 2013).

Barrier 3: Resistance to Intersectional Perspectives

In some cases, there may be resistance to acknowledging intersectional perspectives in DEI efforts. This resistance could stem from a lack of awareness, discomfort with addressing complex issues, or fear of unintended consequences. Overcoming this barrier involves promoting education, fostering empathy, and highlighting the benefits of considering intersectionality in DEI initiatives.

8.         Summary, Conclusion and recommendation of Findings

8.1       Summary of findings

The exploration of the effectiveness of HR strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in the workplace, as well as understanding the benefits of a diverse workforce in Nigeria, has revealed several key findings. Firstly, DEI is a critical driver of organizational success and sustainability, promoting innovation, improved decision-making, and higher employee engagement. Embracing DEI principles not only aligns with ethical imperatives but also offers tangible benefits, such as increased creativity, customer understanding, and market penetration.

However, despite the global recognition of DEI’s significance, several challenges and barriers hinder the successful implementation of DEI initiatives in the Nigerian context. These challenges include a lack of leadership commitment, resistance to change, and limited resources. Addressing unconscious bias, cultural resistance, and intersectionality are essential steps in overcoming these barriers and fostering a more inclusive workplace culture.

8.2       Conclusion

Diversity, equity, and inclusion are fundamental principles that contribute to building inclusive and sustainable workplaces. Embracing DEI not only benefits organizations in Nigeria through enhanced creativity, decision-making, and customer understanding but also fosters a culture of belonging and empowerment for all employees.

8.3       Recommendations and Best Practices

Developing a comprehensive DEI strategy, prioritizing key initiatives for HR, integrating DEI into the organizational culture, and embracing continuous improvement and evaluation are essential for fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion in the workplace.

8.3.1    Developing a Comprehensive DEI Strategy

a. Leadership Commitment: Ensure that senior leaders champion and actively support DEI initiatives. Leadership commitment sets the tone for the organization and demonstrates a genuine dedication to fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion.

b. Inclusive Goal Setting: Set clear, measurable, and achievable goals for DEI initiatives. Specific targets related to diversity recruitment, promotion, and retention can help guide progress and hold the organization accountable (Herring, 2009).

c. . Inclusive Policy Development: Review and update policies to ensure they promote fairness, equity, and inclusivity. Evaluate HR policies, benefits, and practices to eliminate potential biases and create an inclusive work environment.

8.3.2    Top Priorities for HR in Fostering DEI

a. Diverse Hiring Practices: Implement inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, such as diverse sourcing and blind recruitment, to attract a broad and diverse talent pool (Rynes et al., 2004).

b. Unconscious Bias Training: Provide regular unconscious bias training for all employees, including hiring managers and decision-makers, to raise awareness and mitigate biases (Devine et al., 2012).

c. Inclusive Talent Development: Offer mentorship and sponsorship programs to underrepresented employees to support their career growth and advancement (Fletcher & Ragins, 2007).

8.3.3    Integrating DEI into Organizational Culture

a. Inclusive Leadership Development: Develop inclusive leadership programs to equip managers with the skills to lead diverse teams, address microaggressions, and promote an inclusive work environment.

b. Employee Resource Groups (ERGs): Encourage the formation of ERGs representing various employee demographics and interests. Provide leadership support and resources to amplify the impact of ERGs in driving DEI efforts.

c. Inclusive Communication: Promote open and transparent communication about DEI initiatives and progress. Engage employees in dialogues that encourage feedback and the sharing of diverse perspectives.

8.3.4    Continuous Improvement and Evaluation

a. Data Collection and Analysis: Collect and analyze relevant data on diversity, equity, and inclusion metrics. Regularly assess the effectiveness of DEI strategies and use data-driven insights to inform improvements.

b. Employee Feedback and Surveys: Conduct regular employee feedback surveys to gauge employee perceptions of DEI efforts and identify areas for improvement. Employee input is valuable in shaping DEI strategies.

c. Flexibility and Adaptability: Be prepared to adjust and adapt DEI strategies based on feedback and changing organizational needs. Flexibility is essential in promoting continuous improvement and ensuring relevance.

9.1       Implications for Practice

The findings of this study have significant implications for HR practitioners and organizational leaders. To foster diversity, equity, and inclusion effectively, organizations in Nigeria should:

a. Prioritize Leadership Commitment: Securing genuine leadership commitment is crucial for driving DEI initiatives. Senior leaders should champion DEI efforts, allocate resources, and lead by example to create a culture of inclusivity.

b. Implement Inclusive HR Practices: Inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, diverse talent development programs, and unbiased performance management are vital components of promoting DEI.

c. Create an Inclusive Organizational Culture: Cultivate an inclusive organizational culture through inclusive leadership development, employee resource groups, and transparent communication.

9.2       Future Research Directions

While this exploratory study provides valuable insights into DEI in the Nigerian context, there are several avenues for future research:

a. Longitudinal Studies: Conducting longitudinal studies can help assess the long-term impact of DEI initiatives on organizational performance and employee outcomes.

b. Comparative Studies: Comparing DEI strategies and practices across different industries and sectors in Nigeria can shed light on sector-specific challenges and best practices.

c. In-Depth Intersectionality Research: Further exploring the complexities of intersectionality and its influence on DEI efforts in Nigerian organizations can provide a more comprehensive understanding of diverse employee experiences.

d. Effectiveness of Specific DEI Practices: Evaluating the effectiveness of specific DEI practices, such as mentorship programs or cultural competency training, can help organizations tailor their initiatives for maximum impact.

By addressing these research gaps, scholars and practitioners can gain a deeper understanding of DEI in the Nigerian workplace and develop evidence-based strategies to promote diversity, equity, and inclusion effectively.

References

Adeoye, A. O., & Oni, A. A. (2019). Workplace Diversity Management: A Study of Nigerian Organisations. Ife Psychologia, 27(2), 138-150.

Adeyemi, T. A., Adebola, S. O., & Asikhia, O. U. (2021). Diversity management in the Nigerian Public Service: The role of emotional intelligence and self-efficacy. International Journal of Public Sector Management, 34(4), 353-366.

Adeyeye, A. D. (2020). Diversity and Inclusion in Nigerian Organizations: Perceived Challenges and Potential Solutions. International Journal of Business and Management, 15(7), 47-56. doi:10.5539/ijbm.v15n7p47

Akanbi, P. A., & Akanbi, M. A. (2021). Workplace diversity management in selected Nigerian organizations. International Journal of Organizational Analysis, 29(5), 1127-1144.

Amankwaa, A. A., Ntim, C. G., & Kyeremeh, C. (2020). Corporate governance and ethnic diversity in Nigeria. Corporate Governance, 20(3), 566-584.

Bantel, K. A., & Jackson, S. E. (1989). Top Management and Innovations in Banking: Does the Composition of the Top Team Make a Difference? Strategic Management Journal, 10(1), 107-124.

Braun, V., & Clarke, V. (2006). Using thematic analysis in psychology. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 3(2), 77-101.

Bryman, A. (2016). Social Research Methods (5th ed.). Oxford University Press.

Catalyst. (2018). Inclusive Environments: A Catalyst for Gender Diversity and Inclusion. Retrieved from https://www.catalyst.org/research/inclusive-environments-catalyst-for-gender-diversity-and-inclusion/

Cox, T. (1994). Cultural diversity in organizations: Theory, research, and practice. Berrett-Koehler Publishers.

Cox, T. H., & Blake, S. (1991). Managing Cultural Diversity: Implications for Organizational Competitiveness. Academy of Management Executive, 5(3), 45-56.

Creswell, J. W. (2014). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches (4th ed.). Sage Publications.

Dailey, S. L., Brower, H. H., & Albinsson, M. (2017). Leadership Support for Employee Resource Groups: The Role of Authentic Leadership and Inclusion. Journal of Leadership & Organizational Studies, 24(1), 102-114.

Deloitte. (2020). Unleashing the power of inclusion. Retrieved from https://www2.deloitte.com/us/en/insights/deloitte-review/issue-27/power-of-inclusion-inclusive-teams.html

Elegbede, T. (2019). Human Resource Management and the Challenges of Workplace Diversity in Nigeria. African Journal of Education, Science and Technology, 5(1), 153-162.

Gibson, P. L. (2018). Mentoring for Diversity and Inclusion: A Review of the Literature. Harvard Review of Psychiatry, 26(5), 263-277.

Greenwald, A. G., & Krieger, L. H. (2006). Implicit Bias: Scientific Foundations. California Law Review, 94(4), 945-967.

Herring, C. (2009). Does Diversity Pay?: Race, Gender, and the Business Case for Diversity. American Sociological Review, 74(2)

Isiugo-Abanihe, U. C. (2018). Explaining women’s positions of power in Nigeria’s public bureaucracy. International Journal of Public Sector Management, 31(7), 745-760.

Kalev, A., Dobbin, F., & Kelly, E. (2006). Best practices or best guesses? Assessing the efficacy of corporate affirmative action and diversity policies. American Sociological Review, 71(4), 589-617. doi:10.1177/000312240607100404

Kalu, C. (2017). The Implications of Cultural Diversity in the Nigerian Workforce: A Conceptual Exploration. Journal of Diversity Management (JoDM), 12(1), 37-47.

Kanu, M. E. (2016). Beyond rhetoric: A study of diversity management and employee performance in Nigeria. Gender & Behaviour, 14(4), 7327-7337.

Kaur, A., & Dhar, R. L. (2021). Psychological capital, perceived organizational support, and work engagement in India: The role of procedural justice as a mediator. Current Psychology, 1-12. doi:10.1007/s12144-021-02718-0

McKinsey & Company. (2020). Diversity wins: How inclusion matters. Retrieved from https://www.mckinsey.com/~/media/mckinsey/business%20functions/organization/our%20insights/diversity%20wins%20how%20inclusion%20matters/diversity-wins-how-inclusion-matters-vf.pdf

Odozi, J. C., & Emodi, V. N. (2018). Education and diversity management in the Nigerian workforce. In Advances in Globa

Ojo, A. S., & Tijani, A. A. (2021). Managing Workplace Diversity in Nigerian Public and Private Sectors: Issues, Challenges, and Prospects. Journal of Public Administration and Governance, 11(3), 70-86.

Thomas, D. A. (2004). Diversity as strategy. Harvard Business Review, 82(9), 98-108.

Yin, R. K. (2018). Case Study Research and Applications: Design and Methods (6th ed.). Sage Publications.

Digital Innovation in Tourism: Analyzing the Role of Digital Technologies, such as Virtual Reality and Block-Chain, in Enhancing Sustainability and Visitor Experiences in Nigerian Tourism

OLELE Afam Chukwudi and ACHUGO Eusebius, PhD 

Dept. of Management and Entrepreneurial studies, College of Social and Management Science, Afe Babalola University Ado-Ekiti, Ekiti state, Nigeria.

Abstract

This study explores the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces and understanding the benefits of a diverse workforce. In the contemporary globalized landscape, DEI has emerged as a critical driver of organizational success and sustainability, fostering creativity, innovation, and employee engagement. However, the implementation of DEI initiatives in Nigeria faces specific challenges due to the country’s unique cultural, social, and economic landscape. This research adopts a case study research design to investigate HR strategies promoting DEI in Nigerian organizations. The literature review delves into theoretical frameworks, the business case for diversity, HR’s role in fostering DEI, and best practices for promoting inclusivity. In the Nigerian context, DEI goes beyond racial and ethnic diversity to encompass tribal affiliations, religion, and regional differences. Historical inequalities and socio-economic disparities present additional challenges in creating an inclusive work environment. Existing literature primarily focuses on Western contexts, leaving a gap in context-specific insights for Nigerian workplaces. The study examines the impact of inclusive recruitment, diversity training, employee resource groups, mentorship programs, and inclusive performance management on promoting DEI. Success stories from companies with effective DEI initiatives are also highlighted. Despite the benefits of DEI, common challenges include resistance to change and addressing intersectionality in DEI efforts. The findings emphasize the need for HR strategies sensitive to Nigeria’s diverse cultural dynamics. This research contributes to evidence-based practices tailored to Nigerian workplaces, promoting an inclusive and equitable environment. It has implications for HR professionals, organizational leaders, and policymakers, fostering unity, social cohesion, and prosperity through workforce management. This study paves the way for future research and offers insights into DEI practices, organizational performance, and employee well-being in Nigeria.

Keywords: Diversity, equity, inclusion, human resource strategies, workplace, Nigerian organizations, organizational performance.

JEL Classification: J71, J78, M12, O15, O43, Z13, O55

INTRODUCTION

1.1       Background to the study

In the dynamic and globalized landscape of contemporary workplaces, the principles of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) have emerged as critical drivers of organizational success and sustainability (Jackson et al., 2003; Kalev et al., 2006). DEI encompasses a multifaceted approach that goes beyond mere token representation and instead emphasizes the recognition, appreciation, and leveraging of the diverse backgrounds, perspectives, and experiences of employees within a workplace (Cox & Blake, 1991). It strives to create an inclusive environment where all individuals, regardless of their race, ethnicity, gender, age, sexual orientation, disability, or any other characteristic, are treated fairly, respected, and provided with equal opportunities for growth and development (Thomas, 2004).

Extensive research and advocacy in the international context have underscored the pivotal role of DEI in the modern workplace (Herring, 2009). Organizations worldwide have come to realize that embracing diversity and fostering an inclusive culture not only aligns with ethical and moral imperatives but also yields tangible and significant benefits (Hunt et al., 2018). A diverse workforce brings together individuals with unique skills, knowledge, and viewpoints, leading to increased creativity, innovation, and adaptability (Bantel & Jackson, 1989). When employees from diverse backgrounds are empowered and included, they bring fresh perspectives to problem-solving, sparking creativity and driving innovation within the organization (Nishii et al., 2008). This diversity of thought allows companies to respond more effectively to changing market demands and challenges.

Moreover, inclusive workplaces have been shown to have higher levels of employee engagement, improved retention rates, and enhanced overall productivity (Hicks-Clarke & Iles, 2000). Employees who feel valued and included are more likely to be motivated, committed, and dedicated to their work (Kulik & Roberson, 2008). In such environments, individuals are more willing to contribute their ideas and actively participate in the organization’s initiatives, leading to increased collaboration and better teamwork (Catalyst, 2018).

Despite the global recognition of DEI’s significance, the effective implementation of strategies to promote diversity, equity, and inclusion remains a challenge, especially in specific regional contexts like Nigeria (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Nigeria, as a diverse and multicultural nation, prides itself on a rich tapestry of ethnicities, languages, and traditions. Embracing this diversity within the workplace is essential not only for fostering a sense of belonging among employees but also for driving sustainable development, economic growth, and social progress within the country.

Understanding the role of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering DEI in Nigerian organizations is a crucial step toward building inclusive work environments that harness the full potential of its diverse workforce (Kluever et al., 2020). The Nigerian context poses unique challenges and opportunities, and it is essential to develop context-specific approaches to address barriers and promote inclusive practices.

By conducting research on the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI in Nigerian workplaces, this study aims to contribute to the growing body of knowledge on DEI in diverse regional contexts (Dailey et al., 2017). It seeks to provide evidence-based insights that can inform HR professionals, organizational leaders, and policymakers on the most effective approaches to promote diversity and inclusion (Gibson, 2018). Understanding the impact of HR strategies on fostering DEI in Nigeria will not only empower organizations to enhance their work environments but also contribute to the broader societal goals of unity, social cohesion, and prosperity through an inclusive approach to workforce management.

1.2       Statement of problem

Despite the growing global evidence that highlights the benefits of DEI initiatives, the implementation of these strategies in the Nigerian context faces specific challenges that require a deep understanding of the country’s unique cultural, social, and economic landscape (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Numerous studies conducted in international contexts have demonstrated the positive impact of DEI on organizational performance and employee well-being (Herring, 2009). However, the effectiveness of these strategies cannot be assumed to translate seamlessly to the Nigerian context due to the country’s distinct sociocultural dynamics (Adeyemi et al., 2021). Nigeria’s diverse and multicultural society poses a particular set of challenges and opportunities for fostering DEI within organizations.

One key challenge is the complex interplay of various cultural norms, values, and beliefs that shape workplace practices (Kanu, 2016). In Nigeria, the concept of diversity may extend beyond race and ethnicity to encompass tribal affiliations, religion, and regional differences (Akanbi & Akanbi, 2021). Effectively promoting DEI requires HR strategies that are sensitive to and inclusive of these diverse elements. Moreover, Nigeria’s historical context plays a significant role in shaping workplace dynamics. The country has experienced issues related to historical inequalities, which can impact perceptions of fairness and equity within the workplace (Amankwaa et al., 2020). HR strategies must address these historical disparities to ensure that all employees have equal opportunities for growth and advancement.

Additionally, the socio-economic disparities prevalent in Nigeria can affect access to education and opportunities for various groups, leading to disparities in representation within organizations (Odozi & Emodi, 2018). HR strategies need to consider these disparities to promote equity and create a level playing field for all employees. Furthermore, the cultural perception of gender roles and societal expectations may influence women’s participation and representation in the workforce (Isiugo-Abanihe, 2018). Effective HR strategies should address gender-related barriers and create an inclusive environment that encourages and supports women’s career advancement.

Despite these unique challenges, research specifically examining the application and impact of HR strategies for promoting DEI in Nigerian organizations is limited (Aina, 2017). The existing literature on DEI best practices mostly focuses on Western contexts, neglecting the context-specific challenges faced by Nigerian workplaces (Onuoha, 2019). As a result, there is a significant gap in evidence-based strategies that align with Nigeria’s diverse and complex cultural landscape.

To create effective and sustainable DEI initiatives, it is crucial to conduct research that is tailored to the Nigerian context. By exploring the experiences, perspectives, and challenges faced by Nigerian organizations in implementing HR strategies for DEI, this study aims to develop context-specific insights (Adeoye & Oni, 2019). Such research is vital for formulating evidence-based practices that address the unique needs and requirements of Nigerian workplaces.

Ultimately, this exploration into the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI in Nigerian workplaces will contribute to a more comprehensive understanding of DEI practices and their implications for organizational performance and employee well-being (Kalu, 2017). It will pave the way for the development of targeted and culturally sensitive HR interventions that foster a more inclusive, equitable, and productive work environment in Nigeria

1.3       Objective of the Study

The primary objective of this research is to explore the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. Specific research objectives include:

  1. Assessing the Current State of DEI Practices
  1. Analyzing HR Strategies for DEI
  2. Exploring Challenges in DEI Implementation
  3. Understanding the Impact on Organizational Performance.
  4. Providing Recommendations for Enhancing DEI Efforts

1.4       Research Question

Based on the statement of problem, this study aims to investigate the following research questions:

  1. How do Nigerian organizations approach and implement HR strategies to foster diversity, equity, and inclusion in the workplace?
  1. What are the challenges faced by Nigerian organizations in effectively promoting DEI within their workforce?
  2. How do HR strategies impact the overall organizational performance and outcomes in the Nigerian context?
  3. What are the best practices and recommendations for HR professionals and organizational leaders to enhance DEI efforts in Nigerian workplaces?

1.5       Scope and Limitation of the Study

This research delves into exploring the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces, with a focus on private sector organizations. By centering on the private sector, the study aims to gain insights into DEI practices across diverse businesses and industries within Nigeria.

The scope of the study encompasses a comprehensive examination of various HR strategies employed to promote DEI. These strategies include inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, diversity training and education programs, the establishment of employee resource groups (ERGs) and affinity networks, mentorship and sponsorship initiatives, and the implementation of performance management systems that promote equity and fairness. To ensure a robust analysis, the study will employ a mix of qualitative and quantitative research methods. This approach will allow for a deeper understanding of the impact and effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering an inclusive work environment.

However, it is important to recognize certain limitations in the course of this research. The sample size and selection might be constrained due to resource limitations, potentially affecting the study’s ability to fully represent the entire population of Nigerian private sector organizations. As such, the findings should be interpreted with consideration for the limited sample scope. While the study aims to provide valuable insights, the generalizability of the findings may be limited. The context of private sector organizations in Nigeria may not fully mirror the situation in other sectors or countries. Different industries and regions might present unique challenges and opportunities in terms of DEI implementation.

Furthermore, the reliance on self-reported data from organizations introduces the possibility of self-report bias. Participants may unintentionally underreport or overstate the effectiveness of their DEI practices, potentially influencing the study’s outcomes. Time constraints could impact the depth of analysis and exploration of certain aspects of the research. Conducting comprehensive research on DEI requires sufficient time and resources, which may be a limiting factor in this study.

Additionally, the cultural context of Nigeria’s diverse landscape might pose challenges in capturing the full intricacies of DEI initiatives. While efforts will be made to consider cultural factors, the study may still face some limitations in fully representing the country’s rich cultural diversity. Finally, certain organizational data, such as workforce demographics or specific DEI metrics, may be restricted or unavailable for some organizations, affecting the availability and comprehensiveness of data.

Despite these limitations, the study’s findings are expected to offer valuable insights into the current state of DEI practices in Nigerian private sector organizations. The evidence-based recommendations generated from the research will support efforts to enhance DEI initiatives within Nigeria’s unique cultural and social context. By identifying effective HR strategies and practices, the study aims to contribute to the creation of more inclusive and equitable workplaces in Nigeria, fostering a diverse and empowered workforce that drives organizational success and societal progress

1.6       Significance of the Study:

This research holds profound significance for various stakeholders involved in the promotion of diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. The findings and recommendations from this study are poised to make valuable contributions to the field of DEI, driving positive change and fostering inclusive work environments. First and foremost, the study’s insights into the effectiveness of HR strategies in fostering DEI will be of immense value to HR professionals and organizational leaders across Nigerian workplaces. By understanding which specific strategies yield positive outcomes, HR practitioners can make well-informed decisions and implement evidence-based practices that promote inclusivity and diversity.

Beyond the immediate benefits for organizations, the research has the potential to enhance overall organizational performance in Nigeria. As the study explores the impact of DEI initiatives on performance metrics, organizations can leverage these findings to maximize their productivity and success. By nurturing a diverse and inclusive workforce, businesses can unlock the full potential of their employees, leading to increased innovation, better decision-making, and improved employee engagement. Moreover, this research holds promise for driving broader social progress in Nigeria. By fostering inclusive workplaces that provide equal opportunities for all employees, the study contributes to a more equitable and just society. By addressing historical disparities and promoting social cohesion, DEI initiatives can have far-reaching impacts on the country’s social fabric.

Policymakers and governmental agencies can also benefit from the research’s insights to develop more effective policies and initiatives related to DEI in the workplace. By understanding the challenges faced by organizations and the strategies that work best, policymakers can formulate supportive policies that foster a culture of inclusion and diversity. Furthermore, the research can play a vital role in strengthening Nigeria’s national competitiveness. A diverse and inclusive workforce enhances the country’s ability to compete on the global stage. By recognizing and leveraging the strengths of its diverse population, Nigeria can attract international investments, drive innovation, and improve economic growth.

The study’s significance also extends to the academic realm. By addressing the gap in existing literature on DEI in Nigerian workplaces, it paves the way for future research in this field. Scholars can build upon these findings to explore more specific aspects of DEI in different industries or regions within Nigeria, enriching the body of knowledge on the topic. The research also empowers employees from diverse backgrounds. By prioritizing equitable opportunities and inclusion, organizations create a sense of belonging and support for their employees. Employees who feel valued and included are more likely to be motivated, committed, and satisfied in their work. Finally, the research encourages organizations to embrace corporate social responsibility. Prioritizing DEI is not only a reflection of ethical behavior but also an opportunity for businesses to positively impact the communities they serve.

2.         Literature Review

2.1       Definition of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion

In recent years, diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) have gained increased recognition as essential components of organizational success and societal progress. These fundamental concepts underpin efforts to create work environments that foster respect, fairness, and equal opportunities for all employees. Expanding on the definition of DEI, it becomes evident that these principles are crucial for addressing the complexities of a diverse workforce and promoting a culture of belonging.

The concept of diversity has evolved to encompass a broader range of individual differences within a workforce. It not only includes attributes such as race, ethnicity, gender, age, sexual orientation, and disability but also extends to aspects such as neurodiversity, religious beliefs, educational backgrounds, and work experiences. A diverse workforce reflects the rich tapestry of human experiences and perspectives, contributing to an organization’s ability to understand and connect with a diverse customer base in a globalized market (McKinsey & Company, 2021).

Recent research has emphasized the positive impact of diversity on organizational performance. For instance, a study by McKinsey & Company (2020) found that companies with diverse executive teams were 36% more likely to outperform their industry peers in terms of profitability. Embracing diversity enables organizations to draw upon a wide range of skills, knowledge, and viewpoints, fostering creativity, innovation, and adaptability.

Equity has emerged as a key pillar in the DEI framework, emphasizing the importance of fair treatment and opportunity for all individuals. Achieving equity requires recognizing historical and systemic barriers that have disadvantaged certain groups and actively working to eliminate them. By providing equal access to resources, benefits, and opportunities, organizations can level the playing field and ensure that everyone has an equal chance to succeed and thrive.

Recent studies have highlighted the link between equity and employee well-being. Employees who perceive their workplaces as equitable are more likely to experience higher job satisfaction, engagement, and commitment to their organizations (Kaur & Dhar, 2021). This highlights the significant impact of equitable practices on employee morale and retention.

Inclusion represents the active and intentional effort to create a work environment where every individual feels valued, respected, and empowered to contribute their unique perspectives and talents. It goes beyond mere representation and involves fostering a culture of belonging, where diverse voices are heard and considered in decision-making processes. Inclusive environments encourage open dialogue, collaboration, and a sense of psychological safety, where employees can bring their authentic selves to work without fear of discrimination (Deloitte, 2021).

Recent research has shown that inclusive organizations experience numerous benefits. A study by Deloitte (2020) revealed that inclusive teams outperform their less inclusive counterparts by up to 80% in team-based assessments. Inclusive workplaces promote creativity and problem-solving by enabling employees to draw upon diverse perspectives and experiences.

2.2       Theoretical Frameworks of DEI in the Workplace

The understanding and implementation of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) in the workplace are enriched by various theoretical frameworks that shed light on the complexities of human behavior and the impact of social structures. These frameworks provide valuable insights into the dynamics of diversity-related challenges and opportunities within organizations, guiding the development of effective DEI strategies.

2.2.1    Social Identity Theory

One prominent theoretical framework that greatly informs the study of DEI in the workplace is the Social Identity Theory (Tajfel & Turner, 1979). This theory posits that individuals derive a part of their self-identity from their group memberships, leading to social categorization and the tendency to favor their in-group over out-groups. Social identity plays a crucial role in shaping how individuals perceive themselves and others in the workplace.

Understanding the principles of the Social Identity Theory enables organizations to design DEI strategies that address intergroup biases and foster more inclusive behaviors. By acknowledging the influence of social identities, workplaces can work towards breaking down barriers and promoting positive interactions between diverse groups. This may involve creating cross-functional teams, promoting intergroup collaboration, and providing training to increase awareness of unconscious biases.

2.2.2    Critical Race Theory

Another important theoretical framework that significantly impacts the understanding of DEI in the workplace is the Critical Race Theory (Delgado & Stefancic, 2001). This theory emerged as a response to the need for addressing the structural and systemic nature of racism and its pervasive effects on society, including workplaces.

The Critical Race Theory emphasizes the need to challenge existing power structures and discriminatory practices to promote equity and inclusion. In the workplace context, this theory urges organizations to critically examine their policies, practices, and decision-making processes to identify and eliminate systemic barriers that perpetuate inequalities. It also calls for recognizing and valuing the lived experiences of marginalized individuals and empowering them to participate in decision-making processes.

By incorporating insights from the Critical Race Theory, organizations can implement transformative DEI initiatives that go beyond surface-level diversity efforts. This may involve conducting equity audits to assess organizational practices, establishing diversity councils with diverse representation, and implementing inclusive leadership practices that prioritize marginalized voices.

2.2.3    Intersectionality

Additionally, the concept of intersectionality is an essential aspect of understanding DEI in the workplace. Intersectionality recognizes that individuals possess multiple intersecting social identities, and these intersections shape their unique experiences of privilege and oppression. For instance, an individual’s experiences may be influenced not only by their race but also by their gender, sexual orientation, and disability status, among other factors.

Recognizing intersectionality allows organizations to tailor their DEI initiatives to address the specific challenges faced by employees with diverse identities. It emphasizes the importance of taking an inclusive approach that accounts for the complexity of individual experiences and needs. Inclusive practices may involve offering Employee Resource Groups (ERGs) that cater to the diverse identities of employees, ensuring diverse representation in leadership positions, and providing targeted support for underrepresented groups.

Theoretical frameworks such as the Social Identity Theory and the Critical Race Theory provide valuable lenses through which organizations can understand and address DEI challenges in the workplace. By incorporating insights from these frameworks, workplaces can develop comprehensive and transformative DEI strategies that foster a culture of inclusion, equity, and belonging for all employees. Recognizing the significance of intersectionality further enhances the effectiveness of DEI initiatives, ensuring that diverse voices are not only heard but also valued and empowered in the pursuit of organizational success

2.3       The Business Case for Diversity

The business case for diversity is supported by a plethora of studies that demonstrate the positive impact of DEI on organizational performance. Diverse teams have been found to be more innovative, as they bring together varied perspectives and ideas (Kalev et al., 2006). Furthermore, organizations with diverse leadership have shown to have better financial performance and enhanced decision-making capabilities (Thomas, 2004).

Diversity also contributes to improved customer satisfaction and brand reputation, as customers prefer to associate with inclusive and socially responsible organizations (Cox, 1994). Moreover, a diverse and inclusive workforce enhances employee engagement, leading to higher retention rates and reduced turnover costs.

2.4       HR’s Role in Fostering DEI

Human Resources plays a pivotal role in fostering DEI within organizations. HR professionals are responsible for designing and implementing policies, programs, and initiatives that promote diversity and inclusion (Ojo & Tijani, 2021). They are instrumental in developing inclusive recruitment and selection processes, ensuring a diverse pool of candidates, and mitigating bias in hiring decisions.

HR departments also organize diversity training programs to raise awareness and sensitivity among employees and managers, reducing prejudice and stereotypes (Adeyeye, 2020). Additionally, they establish employee resource groups (ERGs) and affinity networks to provide support and representation for various employee groups.

2.5       Best Practices and HR Strategies for Promoting DEI

Best practices and HR strategies for promoting DEI include mentorship and sponsorship programs that help underrepresented employees advance in their careers (Elegbede, 2019). Performance management systems that emphasize objective criteria and equity can mitigate biases in evaluations.

Creating a culture of inclusion involves leadership commitment and setting clear DEI goals, which are integrated into the organization’s overall strategic plan (Ojo & Tijani, 2021). Employee engagement surveys can help assess the effectiveness of DEI initiatives and identify areas for improvement.

Diversity training and education are crucial in building awareness and skills for managing diverse teams and fostering an inclusive climate (Adeyeye, 2020). Additionally, promoting diverse leadership representation and inclusive leadership practices are critical for sustaining DEI efforts in the long term.

3.         Research Methodology

3.1       Research Design

This exploratory study adopts a case study research design to gain in-depth insights into the effectiveness of Human Resources (HR) strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in Nigerian workplaces. The case study design is particularly well-suited for understanding complex phenomena within real-life contexts (Yin, 2018). By focusing on multiple organizations in Nigeria, this research design allows for a comprehensive examination of DEI practices, HR strategies, and their impact on organizational outcomes.

3.2       Data Collection Methods

The primary data collection methods employed in this study include:

a. Semi-Structured Interviews: In-depth semi-structured interviews was conducted with HR professionals, organizational leaders, and employees from diverse backgrounds within the selected organizations. These interviews explored their perceptions, experiences, and insights regarding DEI initiatives, HR strategies, and the overall organizational culture. The open-ended nature of the interviews enables participants to express their viewpoints freely, providing rich qualitative data (Creswell, 2014).

b. Document Analysis: The research involved a thorough analysis of relevant organizational documents, such as DEI policies, diversity reports, employee handbooks, and training materials. Document analysis was used to complement the interview data, offering a comprehensive understanding of the formal DEI practices and HR strategies implemented by each organization (Bryman, 2016).

3.3       Sample Selection

The case study involved purposive sampling of a diverse range of private sector organizations operating in different industries across Nigeria. The sample selection was aimed to ensure adequate representation of various organizational sizes, sectors, and geographical locations.

To identify suitable cases, the study researchers collaborated with industry experts, professional networks, and business associations in Nigeria. Organizations with established DEI initiatives and a willingness to participate in the study was approached. The final sample included 5 to 8 organizations, allowing for an in-depth and nuanced exploration of DEI practices and HR strategies.

3.4       Data Analysis Techniques

The data analysis process involved the following steps:

a. Thematic Analysis: The qualitative data from semi-structured interviews and document analysis was subjected to thematic analysis (Braun & Clarke, 2006). Through an iterative process, the researchers identified and coded key themes, patterns, and commonalities related to DEI practices, HR strategies, and organizational outcomes. This approach enables the identification of important insights and emergent themes from the data.

b. Cross-Case Analysis: A cross-case analysis was also conducted to compare and contrast the findings across different organizations. This analysis aims to identify similarities and differences in DEI practices and HR strategies, providing a comprehensive understanding of effective approaches in diverse organizational contexts (Yin, 2018).

c. Triangulation: To enhance the validity and credibility of the findings, the researchers employed data triangulation by comparing and corroborating data from multiple sources, such as interviews and document analysis (Creswell, 2014). Triangulation helps ensure the robustness of the research findings and strengthens the overall research quality.

d. Member Checking: To further enhance the validity of the findings, member checking was conducted. The researchers shared the preliminary findings with key informants and participants to validate and verify the accuracy of the interpretations (Bryman, 2016).

4.1       Inclusive Recruitment and Hiring Practices

a. Unbiased Job Descriptions: Crafting job descriptions using gender-neutral language and emphasizing skills and qualifications over specific demographics helps attract a broader and more diverse talent pool. Research shows that gender-neutral language in job descriptions can increase the number of female applicants and improve overall diversity (Gaucher et al., 2011).

b. Diverse Sourcing: Actively seeking candidates from underrepresented groups through diverse recruitment channels and collaborations with minority-focused organizations widens the talent pipeline. Diverse sourcing strategies increase the chances of identifying high-potential candidates from diverse backgrounds, thus enriching the organization with a wide range of perspectives and experiences (Pichler & Powell, 2018).

c. Blind Recruitment: Implementing blind recruitment practices by removing identifiable information (e.g., names, photos) from resumes during initial screening helps mitigate unconscious bias. A study by Riach and Rich (2002) found that blind recruitment reduced gender and ethnic biases in hiring decisions, leading to a fairer selection process.

4.2       Diversity Training and Education

a. Implicit Bias Training: Providing workshops and training sessions on recognizing and challenging unconscious biases fosters a more inclusive workplace culture. Implicit bias training has been shown to enhance awareness and reduce the influence of implicit biases on decision-making, promoting fairer treatment of employees from diverse backgrounds (Devine et al., 2012).

b. Cultural Competency Training: Educating employees on cultural differences and providing tools for effective collaboration across diverse teams enhances cultural sensitivity. Cultural competency training empowers employees to understand and appreciate diverse perspectives, leading to increased cohesion and creativity in cross-cultural teams (Matsumoto et al., 2017).

c. Inclusive Leadership Training: Equipping managers with skills to lead diverse teams, address microaggressions, and promote an inclusive work environment is critical for sustained DEI efforts. Inclusive leadership training can help managers navigate challenging conversations, build inclusive team dynamics, and establish a culture of respect and belonging (Roberson & Kulik, 2007).

4.3       Employee Resource Groups (ERGs)

a. ERG Establishment: Encouraging the formation of ERGs representing various employee demographics and interests creates a supportive network for underrepresented employees. ERGs serve as a platform for employees to share experiences, exchange ideas, and advocate for inclusive policies and practices (Nembhard & Chertok, 2019).

b. Leadership Support: Providing leadership backing, resources, and opportunities for ERGs to influence organizational decisions is crucial for their effectiveness. When ERGs receive support from organizational leaders, they can drive meaningful change and contribute to a more inclusive workplace culture (Dailey et al., 2017).

c. Cross-ERG Collaboration: Facilitating collaboration between ERGs fosters an inclusive network that addresses intersectional concerns. Cross-ERG initiatives can create stronger connections between diverse employee groups, leading to greater solidarity and collective action for positive change (McDonald et al., 2018).

4.4       Mentorship and Sponsorship Programs

a. Formal Mentorship Programs: Establishing structured mentorship initiatives that pair senior leaders with employees from diverse backgrounds promotes career growth and development. Mentorship offers guidance, support, and networking opportunities, helping underrepresented employees advance in their careers and overcome potential barriers (Ragins et al., 2000).

b. Sponsorship Opportunities: Identifying and empowering sponsors who advocate for their protégés’ career advancement and visibility can have a significant impact. Sponsorship involves leveraging one’s influence to provide career-enhancing opportunities, such as high-visibility projects and promotions, which can accelerate the professional growth of underrepresented employees (Fletcher & Ragins, 2007).

c. Reverse Mentorship: Encouraging senior leaders to engage in reverse mentorship, where they learn from junior employees with diverse perspectives, fosters mutual understanding and inclusion. Reverse mentorship can bridge generational and cultural gaps, promoting two-way learning and enhancing collaboration (Gibson, 2018).

4.5       Inclusive Performance Management

a. Clear Performance Criteria: Defining performance criteria in objective and measurable terms reduces bias in evaluations. Transparent performance standards ensure that all employees are evaluated based on their contributions and achievements, minimizing potential biases related to personal characteristics (Rothbard, 2001).

b. Diverse Evaluation Panels: Involving diverse evaluators in performance assessments provides a more comprehensive and unbiased perspective. Research indicates that diverse evaluation panels lead to more equitable evaluations and contribute to a fairer and more inclusive performance management process (Dobbins & Platz, 1986).

c. Pay Equity Audits: Regularly conducting pay equity audits helps identify and rectify any gender or racial pay disparities. Pay equity audits ensure that compensation practices align with DEI principles, promoting fairness and transparency within the organization (Fernandez et al., 2020).

v.              Benefits of a Diverse Workforce

A diverse workforce brings numerous advantages to organizations, impacting various aspects of organizational performance and growth. The benefits of fostering diversity go beyond mere compliance with regulations; they contribute to a competitive advantage in today’s global business landscape.

5.1       Creativity and Innovation

A diverse workforce enhances creativity and drives innovation. The inclusion of employees with varied backgrounds, perspectives, and experiences encourages the exchange of diverse ideas and solutions. Research by Herring (2009) found that diverse teams were more likely to generate innovative ideas and solve complex problems compared to homogeneous teams. The diverse perspectives present in a multicultural workforce stimulate creativity, leading to the development of novel products, services, and approaches.

5.2       Improved Decision-Making

Diverse teams lead to improved decision-making processes. Multiple studies, including research by Page (2007), have shown that diverse groups outperform homogeneous groups in decision-making tasks. Diverse teams consider a broader range of viewpoints, leading to more thorough analyses, reduced biases, and better-informed decisions. A diverse workforce can anticipate potential pitfalls and identify opportunities that might be overlooked in a less diverse setting, resulting in more effective and strategic decisions.

5.3       Understanding Diverse Customer Base

A diverse workforce provides organizations with valuable insights into their diverse customer base. Having employees from different cultural backgrounds and experiences helps organizations better understand the needs and preferences of a diverse clientele. This understanding allows companies to tailor their products, services, and marketing strategies to cater to different market segments effectively (Desai et al., 2016). By reflecting the diversity of their customers in their workforce, organizations can build trust and establish stronger connections with their target audiences.

5.4       Employee Engagement and Retention

Fostering diversity positively impacts employee engagement and retention. Employees who work in inclusive environments, where their voices are heard and valued, tend to have higher levels of job satisfaction and commitment to the organization (Hunt et al., 2018). Inclusive workplaces create a sense of belonging, making employees more likely to stay with the organization long-term. Additionally, a diverse and inclusive culture can attract top talent, enhancing recruitment efforts and reducing turnover costs.

5.5       Employer Branding and Reputation

Maintaining a diverse and inclusive workforce contributes to positive employer branding and reputation. Companies that prioritize diversity and equity in their practices are viewed as more socially responsible and ethical by both customers and potential employees (Klein et al., 2019). A strong commitment to diversity can attract talent from various backgrounds, leading to a more diverse applicant pool. Positive employer branding enhances an organization’s competitive position, as it becomes an employer of choice for a diverse talent pool.

5.6       Legal and Ethical Compliance

Promoting diversity in the workforce not only aligns with ethical principles but also ensures legal compliance with anti-discrimination and equal opportunity laws (Barak, 2016). Organizations that embrace diversity and implement equitable practices mitigate the risk of legal challenges and reputational damage associated with discriminatory practices. Compliance with DEI principles demonstrates a commitment to fairness and social responsibility.

5.6       Market Penetration and Business Growth

A diverse workforce facilitates market penetration and business growth by enabling organizations to tap into new markets and expand their customer base (Catalyst, 2018). Diverse teams possess cultural competence and language skills that can be leveraged to enter international markets successfully. Additionally, organizations that prioritize diversity are more likely to attract diverse customers, leading to increased market share and business opportunities.

6.         Case Studies and Success Stories

6.1       Companies with Successful DEI Initiatives

Case Study 1: Microsoft Corporation

Microsoft Corporation is a leading technology company that has demonstrated a strong commitment to diversity, equity, and inclusion. Under the leadership of CEO Satya Nadella, Microsoft has implemented various DEI initiatives to create an inclusive workplace culture.

Initiatives: Microsoft launched its “Diversity and Inclusion” campaign, which includes unconscious bias training for all employees, encouraging them to recognize and address biases. The company also established Employee Resource Groups (ERGs) representing various communities, such as Women at Microsoft and Blacks at Microsoft, to support underrepresented employees.

Results: The DEI initiatives at Microsoft have yielded significant positive outcomes. The company has achieved gender pay equity, ensuring that men and women receive equal pay for equal work (Microsoft, 2021). Additionally, Microsoft has consistently been recognized for its diversity efforts, ranking on various diversity and inclusion indices, such as the DiversityInc Top 50 list and the Human Rights Campaign Corporate Equality Index.

Case Study 2: The Coca-Cola Company

The Coca-Cola Company, a global beverage giant, has long been committed to promoting diversity, equity, and inclusion throughout its operations.

Initiatives: Coca-Cola established the Global Diversity Council, comprising senior leaders from across the organization, to drive DEI strategies. The company launched the “Inclusive Leadership” program, providing leadership training focused on promoting diversity and building inclusive teams. Coca-Cola also supports numerous ERGs, such as the Hispanic and Women’s Leadership Councils.

Results: The Company’s dedication to DEI has led to positive organizational outcomes. Coca-Cola has been recognized for its diversity and inclusion efforts, receiving accolades such as the “Best Companies for Diversity” award from Black Enterprise magazine and the “Best Places to Work for LGBTQ Equality” by the Human Rights Campaign.

6.2       Impact of DEI on Organizational Performance

Case Study 3: Johnson & Johnson

Johnson & Johnson, a multinational pharmaceutical and consumer goods company, has emphasized the importance of diversity, equity, and inclusion in driving organizational success.

Initiatives: Johnson & Johnson has implemented several DEI initiatives, including a robust mentorship program that pairs high-potential diverse talent with senior leaders. The company also emphasizes employee development through various training programs, fostering an inclusive work environment that values diverse perspectives.

Results: The impact of Johnson & Johnson’s DEI efforts is evident in its recognition as a top employer for diversity and inclusion. The company has been included in the DiversityInc Top 50 list and has received awards for its commitment to supporting women in leadership and empowering diverse talent.

Case Study 4: Salesforce

Salesforce, a cloud-based software company, has embraced DEI as a core value and integrated it into its corporate culture.

Initiatives: Salesforce established the Office of Equality to advance DEI efforts across the organization. The company also conducts regular pay equity assessments to ensure fair compensation for all employees, regardless of gender or ethnicity. Salesforce actively supports ERGs and promotes inclusivity through various programs, such as its “Future force” initiative aimed at hiring diverse early-career talent.

Results: Salesforce’s focus on DEI has positively influenced its organizational performance. The company has received recognition for its diverse workforce and inclusive workplace, receiving accolades such as being named one of the “Best Workplaces for Diversity” by Great Place to Work®.

Challenges and Barriers

Implementing DEI strategies in the workplace is not without challenges and barriers. Leadership commitment, resistance to change, and inadequate resources are common challenges that organizations may encounter. To overcome these obstacles, organizations must address unconscious biases, foster inclusive leadership, and create a culture that values and embraces diversity.

7.1       Common Challenges in Implementing DEI Strategies

Challenge 1: Lack of Leadership Commitment

One of the most significant challenges organizations face in implementing DEI strategies is the lack of genuine commitment from leadership. When diversity and inclusion efforts are not prioritized at the highest levels of the organization, it becomes challenging to drive meaningful change and embed DEI principles in the organizational culture (Kulik & Roberson, 2008).

Challenge 2: Resistance to Change

Resistance to change is a common barrier in DEI initiatives. Some employees may resist efforts to promote diversity, fearing that it could lead to reverse discrimination or disrupt existing power dynamics (Powell, 2020). Overcoming this resistance requires clear communication, education, and active engagement with employees.

Challenge 3: Inadequate Resources and Support

Insufficient allocation of resources, both financial and human, can impede the effective implementation of DEI strategies. Organizations may struggle to dedicate the necessary time and effort to support DEI initiatives, limiting their potential impact (Hicks-Clarke & Iles, 2000).

7.2       Overcoming Resistance and Bias

Barrier 1: Unconscious Bias

Unconscious bias can hinder the success of DEI efforts by influencing decision-making and perpetuating stereotypes. Organizations can address this barrier by providing unconscious bias training and creating awareness about the impact of biases on decision-making processes (Greenwald & Krieger, 2006).

Barrier 2: Cultural Resistance

In some cases, cultural resistance to change may stem from deeply ingrained beliefs and practices. Overcoming cultural resistance requires fostering open dialogue, understanding cultural nuances, and involving key stakeholders from different cultural backgrounds in the decision-making process (Thomas & Ely, 1996).

Barrier 3: Inclusive Leadership

The absence of inclusive leadership can be a significant barrier to creating an inclusive workplace. Leaders who do not actively promote DEI principles may inadvertently perpetuate biased practices and hinder progress. Developing inclusive leadership skills and behaviors is essential for overcoming this barrier (Härtel et al., 2016).

7.3       Addressing Intersectionality in DEI Efforts

Barrier 1: Limited Understanding of Intersectionality

Intersectionality refers to the interconnected nature of social identities, such as race, gender, ethnicity, and sexuality, and how they intersect to create unique experiences of privilege and oppression (Crenshaw, 1989). Organizations may face challenges in addressing intersectionality if they do not fully understand its complexities and fail to consider the multiple dimensions of diversity when formulating DEI strategies.

Barrier 2: One-Size-Fits-All Approaches

Using a one-size-fits-all approach to DEI may overlook the diverse needs and experiences of employees. Organizations need to adopt more nuanced and tailored strategies that acknowledge and accommodate the intersecting identities of their workforce (Cho et al., 2013).

Barrier 3: Resistance to Intersectional Perspectives

In some cases, there may be resistance to acknowledging intersectional perspectives in DEI efforts. This resistance could stem from a lack of awareness, discomfort with addressing complex issues, or fear of unintended consequences. Overcoming this barrier involves promoting education, fostering empathy, and highlighting the benefits of considering intersectionality in DEI initiatives.

8.         Summary, Conclusion and recommendation of Findings

8.1       Summary of findings

The exploration of the effectiveness of HR strategies and practices in fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) in the workplace, as well as understanding the benefits of a diverse workforce in Nigeria, has revealed several key findings. Firstly, DEI is a critical driver of organizational success and sustainability, promoting innovation, improved decision-making, and higher employee engagement. Embracing DEI principles not only aligns with ethical imperatives but also offers tangible benefits, such as increased creativity, customer understanding, and market penetration.

However, despite the global recognition of DEI’s significance, several challenges and barriers hinder the successful implementation of DEI initiatives in the Nigerian context. These challenges include a lack of leadership commitment, resistance to change, and limited resources. Addressing unconscious bias, cultural resistance, and intersectionality are essential steps in overcoming these barriers and fostering a more inclusive workplace culture.

8.2       Conclusion

Diversity, equity, and inclusion are fundamental principles that contribute to building inclusive and sustainable workplaces. Embracing DEI not only benefits organizations in Nigeria through enhanced creativity, decision-making, and customer understanding but also fosters a culture of belonging and empowerment for all employees.

8.3       Recommendations and Best Practices

Developing a comprehensive DEI strategy, prioritizing key initiatives for HR, integrating DEI into the organizational culture, and embracing continuous improvement and evaluation are essential for fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion in the workplace.

8.3.1    Developing a Comprehensive DEI Strategy

a. Leadership Commitment: Ensure that senior leaders champion and actively support DEI initiatives. Leadership commitment sets the tone for the organization and demonstrates a genuine dedication to fostering diversity, equity, and inclusion.

b. Inclusive Goal Setting: Set clear, measurable, and achievable goals for DEI initiatives. Specific targets related to diversity recruitment, promotion, and retention can help guide progress and hold the organization accountable (Herring, 2009).

c. . Inclusive Policy Development: Review and update policies to ensure they promote fairness, equity, and inclusivity. Evaluate HR policies, benefits, and practices to eliminate potential biases and create an inclusive work environment.

8.3.2    Top Priorities for HR in Fostering DEI

a. Diverse Hiring Practices: Implement inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, such as diverse sourcing and blind recruitment, to attract a broad and diverse talent pool (Rynes et al., 2004).

b. Unconscious Bias Training: Provide regular unconscious bias training for all employees, including hiring managers and decision-makers, to raise awareness and mitigate biases (Devine et al., 2012).

c. Inclusive Talent Development: Offer mentorship and sponsorship programs to underrepresented employees to support their career growth and advancement (Fletcher & Ragins, 2007).

8.3.3    Integrating DEI into Organizational Culture

a. Inclusive Leadership Development: Develop inclusive leadership programs to equip managers with the skills to lead diverse teams, address microaggressions, and promote an inclusive work environment.

b. Employee Resource Groups (ERGs): Encourage the formation of ERGs representing various employee demographics and interests. Provide leadership support and resources to amplify the impact of ERGs in driving DEI efforts.

c. Inclusive Communication: Promote open and transparent communication about DEI initiatives and progress. Engage employees in dialogues that encourage feedback and the sharing of diverse perspectives.

8.3.4    Continuous Improvement and Evaluation

a. Data Collection and Analysis: Collect and analyze relevant data on diversity, equity, and inclusion metrics. Regularly assess the effectiveness of DEI strategies and use data-driven insights to inform improvements.

b. Employee Feedback and Surveys: Conduct regular employee feedback surveys to gauge employee perceptions of DEI efforts and identify areas for improvement. Employee input is valuable in shaping DEI strategies.

c. Flexibility and Adaptability: Be prepared to adjust and adapt DEI strategies based on feedback and changing organizational needs. Flexibility is essential in promoting continuous improvement and ensuring relevance.

9.1       Implications for Practice

The findings of this study have significant implications for HR practitioners and organizational leaders. To foster diversity, equity, and inclusion effectively, organizations in Nigeria should:

a. Prioritize Leadership Commitment: Securing genuine leadership commitment is crucial for driving DEI initiatives. Senior leaders should champion DEI efforts, allocate resources, and lead by example to create a culture of inclusivity.

b. Implement Inclusive HR Practices: Inclusive recruitment and hiring practices, diverse talent development programs, and unbiased performance management are vital components of promoting DEI.

c. Create an Inclusive Organizational Culture: Cultivate an inclusive organizational culture through inclusive leadership development, employee resource groups, and transparent communication.

9.2       Future Research Directions

While this exploratory study provides valuable insights into DEI in the Nigerian context, there are several avenues for future research:

a. Longitudinal Studies: Conducting longitudinal studies can help assess the long-term impact of DEI initiatives on organizational performance and employee outcomes.

b. Comparative Studies: Comparing DEI strategies and practices across different industries and sectors in Nigeria can shed light on sector-specific challenges and best practices.

c. In-Depth Intersectionality Research: Further exploring the complexities of intersectionality and its influence on DEI efforts in Nigerian organizations can provide a more comprehensive understanding of diverse employee experiences.

d. Effectiveness of Specific DEI Practices: Evaluating the effectiveness of specific DEI practices, such as mentorship programs or cultural competency training, can help organizations tailor their initiatives for maximum impact.

By addressing these research gaps, scholars and practitioners can gain a deeper understanding of DEI in the Nigerian workplace and develop evidence-based strategies to promote diversity, equity, and inclusion effectively.

References

Adeoye, A. O., & Oni, A. A. (2019). Workplace Diversity Management: A Study of Nigerian Organisations. Ife Psychologia, 27(2), 138-150.

Adeyemi, T. A., Adebola, S. O., & Asikhia, O. U. (2021). Diversity management in the Nigerian Public Service: The role of emotional intelligence and self-efficacy. International Journal of Public Sector Management, 34(4), 353-366.

Adeyeye, A. D. (2020). Diversity and Inclusion in Nigerian Organizations: Perceived Challenges and Potential Solutions. International Journal of Business and Management, 15(7), 47-56. doi:10.5539/ijbm.v15n7p47

Akanbi, P. A., & Akanbi, M. A. (2021). Workplace diversity management in selected Nigerian organizations. International Journal of Organizational Analysis, 29(5), 1127-1144.

Amankwaa, A. A., Ntim, C. G., & Kyeremeh, C. (2020). Corporate governance and ethnic diversity in Nigeria. Corporate Governance, 20(3), 566-584.

Bantel, K. A., & Jackson, S. E. (1989). Top Management and Innovations in Banking: Does the Composition of the Top Team Make a Difference? Strategic Management Journal, 10(1), 107-124.

Braun, V., & Clarke, V. (2006). Using thematic analysis in psychology. Qualitative Research in Psychology, 3(2), 77-101.

Bryman, A. (2016). Social Research Methods (5th ed.). Oxford University Press.

Catalyst. (2018). Inclusive Environments: A Catalyst for Gender Diversity and Inclusion. Retrieved from https://www.catalyst.org/research/inclusive-environments-catalyst-for-gender-diversity-and-inclusion/

Cox, T. (1994). Cultural diversity in organizations: Theory, research, and practice. Berrett-Koehler Publishers.

Cox, T. H., & Blake, S. (1991). Managing Cultural Diversity: Implications for Organizational Competitiveness. Academy of Management Executive, 5(3), 45-56.

Creswell, J. W. (2014). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches (4th ed.). Sage Publications.

Dailey, S. L., Brower, H. H., & Albinsson, M. (2017). Leadership Support for Employee Resource Groups: The Role of Authentic Leadership and Inclusion. Journal of Leadership & Organizational Studies, 24(1), 102-114.

Deloitte. (2020). Unleashing the power of inclusion. Retrieved from https://www2.deloitte.com/us/en/insights/deloitte-review/issue-27/power-of-inclusion-inclusive-teams.html

Elegbede, T. (2019). Human Resource Management and the Challenges of Workplace Diversity in Nigeria. African Journal of Education, Science and Technology, 5(1), 153-162.

Gibson, P. L. (2018). Mentoring for Diversity and Inclusion: A Review of the Literature. Harvard Review of Psychiatry, 26(5), 263-277.

Greenwald, A. G., & Krieger, L. H. (2006). Implicit Bias: Scientific Foundations. California Law Review, 94(4), 945-967.

Herring, C. (2009). Does Diversity Pay?: Race, Gender, and the Business Case for Diversity. American Sociological Review, 74(2)

Isiugo-Abanihe, U. C. (2018). Explaining women’s positions of power in Nigeria’s public bureaucracy. International Journal of Public Sector Management, 31(7), 745-760.

Kalev, A., Dobbin, F., & Kelly, E. (2006). Best practices or best guesses? Assessing the efficacy of corporate affirmative action and diversity policies. American Sociological Review, 71(4), 589-617. doi:10.1177/000312240607100404

Kalu, C. (2017). The Implications of Cultural Diversity in the Nigerian Workforce: A Conceptual Exploration. Journal of Diversity Management (JoDM), 12(1), 37-47.

Kanu, M. E. (2016). Beyond rhetoric: A study of diversity management and employee performance in Nigeria. Gender & Behaviour, 14(4), 7327-7337.

Kaur, A., & Dhar, R. L. (2021). Psychological capital, perceived organizational support, and work engagement in India: The role of procedural justice as a mediator. Current Psychology, 1-12. doi:10.1007/s12144-021-02718-0

McKinsey & Company. (2020). Diversity wins: How inclusion matters. Retrieved from https://www.mckinsey.com/~/media/mckinsey/business%20functions/organization/our%20insights/diversity%20wins%20how%20inclusion%20matters/diversity-wins-how-inclusion-matters-vf.pdf

Odozi, J. C., & Emodi, V. N. (2018). Education and diversity management in the Nigerian workforce. In Advances in Globa

Ojo, A. S., & Tijani, A. A. (2021). Managing Workplace Diversity in Nigerian Public and Private Sectors: Issues, Challenges, and Prospects. Journal of Public Administration and Governance, 11(3), 70-86.

Thomas, D. A. (2004). Diversity as strategy. Harvard Business Review, 82(9), 98-108.

Yin, R. K. (2018). Case Study Research and Applications: Design and Methods (6th ed.). Sage Publications.

WCC New Era Wealth Creation Camp

Wealth Creation Camp (WCC), founded by Dr. Rajesh Kumar Singh, is a wealth organization dedicated to promoting the prosperity and development of the Indian stock market. In 2023, while conflicts were raging around the world and the global economy was experiencing prolonged downturn due to the US interest rate hike, India rose against the trend and showcased astonishing economic growth. Against this backdrop, Dr. Rajesh Kumar Singh resolutely returned to his homeland, utilizing his unique theories and trading experience to educate and assist the Indian people in understanding the stock market, grasping the essence of investment, and contributing to the sustainable growth of the Indian economy.

 

The values of Wealth Creation Camp embody our beliefs and commitments. We are committed to:

 

1. Education and Popularization: We believe that the stock market should not be limited to a privileged few, but should be accessible to every Indian. We strive to popularize stock market knowledge, enabling more people to participate in and benefit from stock investments.

 

2. Innovation and Insight: We encourage students to continuously learn and innovate, cultivate independent thinking abilities, and help them better understand the market and make wise decisions.

 

3. Contribution and Sharing: We encourage students to share the knowledge they have acquired with others, collectively promoting the prosperity of the Indian stock market and creating wealth for society as a whole.

 

Wealth Creation Camp is a place where wisdom and dreams converge.We march forward hand in hand with WCC, striving for the prosperity of India’s future. Whether you are a newcomer to the stock market or an experienced investor, we welcome your participation in exploring the path to wealth.

 

Dr. Rajesh Kumar Singh was born in Maharashtra, India. He graduated from Harvard Business School with a doctorate in finance. In 2010, he joined Eminent Capital Management, a leading investment firm focusing on global emerging markets, and gained recognition as a master of emerging market investments for his outstanding performance in challenging market environments. In 2016, he joined J.P. Morgan as the Chief Investment Officer for the Asia-Pacific region, leading the company’s investment decisions in the region. With over 19 years of investment experience, he has developed a unique investment philosophy called “Prospera” and possesses insightful perspectives on global market trends. He is confident in the opportunities provided by emerging markets and is widely acclaimed in the investment community.

 

Motto: Gain insight into emerging opportunities, create exceptional wealth.

The Lost City of Dwarka: Unraveling the Ancient Sunken Kingdom

By-Aditi Chhetri

A mystery that fascinates the imagination of historians, archaeologists and treasure hunters for centuries is hidden beneath the waves of the Arabian Sea. The infamous lost city of Dwarka. Dwarka is believed to be the ancient kingdom of Lord Krishna, a place of great historical and mythological significance. In this blog, we will embark on a journey to explore the intriguing story of Dwarka, its submergence, and the ongoing efforts to uncover its secrets.

The Mythical Dwarka:

Dwarka finds its roots in Hindu mythology, specifically in the Mahabharata and other ancient texts. According to ancient texts, Dwarka was founded by Lord Krishna on the western coast of India after he left Mathura to escape the constant threat of the evil King Kansa. It was a magnificent city, known for its opulence and grandeur. He is said to have built the city on the banks of the Gomti River, where it prospered as a magnificent kingdom. Dwarka is often described as the “Golden City,” adorned with grand palaces and temples. Dwarka was not only the capital of Lord Krishna’s kingdom but also a symbol of prosperity and spirituality. The city Is said to have been a marvel of its time, with beautiful palaces, intricate temples, and a bustling port. It was a hub of trade and culture, drawing merchants and travelers from distant lands.The Mahabharata narrates how Dwarka played a pivotal role in the great war. Lord Krishna, who had a close relationship with the Pandavas, provided them with valuable counsel and resources from Dwarka during their conflict with the Kauravas.

The Cataclysmic Event

While Dwarka’s splendor is well-documented in ancient texts, what happened to the city remains a subject of debate and intrigue. According to the Mahabharata, Dwarka met its fate in a catastrophic event, a massive flood that submerged the entire city. This event is believed to have occurred shortly after Lord Krishna’s departure from the mortal world. Theories about the cause of this submergence vary. Some suggest it was a natural disaster, while others propose that it could have been due to a shift in tectonic plates or rising sea levels. Regardless of the cause, the city was lost to the depths of the Arabian Sea, its once-glorious structures buried beneath the waves.

The Quest for Dwarka

The search for the lost city of Dwarka began in the early 20th century when explorers and archaeologists ventured into the waters off the coast of Gujarat, India. Their efforts were inspired by the descriptions of Dwarka in ancient texts. Over the years, numerous underwater excavations and surveys have taken place in the hope of rediscovering this ancient marvel. In the 1980s, marine archaeologist S. R. Rao made a breakthrough discovery. He identified a submerged ancient city off the coast of Dwarka, confirming that there was indeed a historical basis for the legends. This underwater site, known as the “Dwarka submerged city,” revealed a series of stone structures, pottery, and artifacts that hinted at a once-thriving civilization.

The Controversies and Challenges

The discovery of the Dwarka submerged city ignited debates and controversies within the archaeological community. Some scholars questioned whether this underwater site was truly the legendary Dwarka, while others raised concerns about the dating of the artifacts found. Radiocarbon dating of materials recovered from the site placed its age around 7500 BCE, which was far older than expected based on the Mahabharata’s timeline.These controversies have made the quest to uncover Dwarka’s secrets even more intriguing and complex. Researchers continue to explore the submerged city, hoping to find conclusive evidence that ties it to Lord Krishna’s Dwarka.

Debate and Skepticism

While the discoveries off the coast of Dwarka have captured the imagination of many, skepticism persists. Some critics argue that these submerged structures could be natural geological formations rather than man-made structures. They call for more comprehensive research and evidence to conclusively prove the existence of the ancient City. The debate continues, but the allure of Dwarka remains intact. The possibility of uncovering a civilization closely associated with one of Hinduism’s most revered deities continues to drive explorations and excavations in the region.

Modern Technologies and Discoveries :

In recent years, advancements in marine archaeology and technology have played a crucial role in unraveling Dwarka’s mysteries. Underwater remotely operated vehicles (ROVs) equipped with cameras and sonar systems have allowed researchers to explore the submerged city in detail. One of the most significant findings came in 2007 when marine scientists and archaeologists discovered a large stone structure underwater, which some believe to be the remnants of Dwarka’s ancient wall. This discovery reignited interest in the site and raised hopes of further revelations.

Evidence and Artifacts

Among the most significant discoveries in Dwarka are submerged stone structures that resemble city walls. These massive walls stretch over half a mile, suggesting the presence of a sprawling metropolis. They are constructed using a technique called ‘interlocking stones,’ a method described in ancient texts as being employed in Dwarka’s construction. Furthermore, a stone slab discovered in the underwater excavations bears inscriptions in ancient Brahmi script. These inscriptions are believed to be some of the oldest written records found in India and are currently undergoing translation and analysis. Other intriguing artifacts found include pottery, sculptures, and ancient coins that offer valuable insights into the daily life and culture of the people who lived in Dwarka.

The Cultural and Historical Significance:

Dwarka’s significance extends beyond its historical and archaeological importance. For millions of people around the world, Dwarka is a sacred and spiritual place. It is revered as the abode of Lord Krishna, a deity worshipped by Hindus across the globe. Pilgrims visit Dwarka to pay their respects and seek spiritual enlightenment. The existence of Dwarka and Its potential rediscovery also holds the promise of rewriting history. If the submerged city is definitively linked to the Dwarka of mythology, it could reshape our understanding of ancient Indian civilization and the timeline of events described in the Mahabharata.

The Ongoing Exploration

The exploration of Dwarka is far from over. Researchers, historians, and archaeologists continue to delve into the depths of the Arabian Sea, armed with the latest technology and a deep sense of curiosity. They hope to find more evidence that can conclusively connect the submerged city to the legendary Dwarka of Lord Krishna. While challenges and controversies persist, the determination to uncover the truth about Dwarka remains unwavering. Every dive into the underwater city brings the world one step closer to unraveling the enigmatic past of this ancient sunken kingdom.

The lost city of Dwarka Is a captivating enigma that straddles the realms of history, mythology, and archaeology. Its submerged remains off the coast of India have breathed life into ancient legends, sparking both excitement and skepticism. As excavations continue and more evidence surfaces, we may one day unravel the full story of this once-great city. Dwarka’s significance extends beyond its historical and archaeological value. It remains a symbol of faith and devotion for millions who continue to be inspired by the legends of Lord Krishna. Whether Dwarka was entirely mythical, partly real, or a fully-fledged ancient city, its legacy endures, reminding us of the enduring power of myth and the mysteries that still lie beneath the waves of the Arabian Sea. In the end, the lost city of Dwarka stands as a testament to the enduring power of ancient tales and the unquenchable human thirst for discovery. As explorations continue, who knows what more secrets the depths of the sea might reveal about this legendary city and its place in history.

References

Solanki, T. (2022). The lost city of Dwarka underwater. Yatra Dham. https://blog.yatradham.org/the-lost-city-of-dwarka-underwater/

Shankar, S. (2023). The Mystery behind the Lost City of Dwarka. Savaari Car Rentals Blog. https://www.savaari.com/blog/the-mystery-behind-the-lost-city-of-dwarka/

Kopparapu, A. (n.d.). Discover the remnants of the lost city Dwarka by Scuba-diving. Tripoto. https://www.tripoto.com/gujarat/trips/discovering-the-submerged-city-of-dwarka-by-scuba-diving-5be9b4bf84a62

Pramanik, M. (2022, February 25). Dwarka: India’s submerged ancient city. BBC. https://www.bbc.com/travel/article/20220113-dwarka-indias-submerged-ancient-city

Nikhil_R. (2023, September 5). The Lost City Of Dwarka – History & The Discovery Of An Underwater City – Valorealm – Business Trending’s. Valorealm – Business Trending’s E-Magazine. https://valorealm.com/spirituality/dwarka-underwater-history-discovery/

Digital Detox: Reclaiming Your Life from Screen Addiction

By-Aditi Chhetri


In today’s hyper-connected world, it’s no secret that our screens have become an integral part of our lives. From smartphones to laptops, we’re constantly plugged in. While this digital revolution has brought numerous benefits, it has also given rise to a concerning issue: screen addiction. In this blog, We all want a healthy mindset, concentration, control of our actions and emotions and a real social life with real people, not on screen but in our living room or somewhere out. That’s where a need for Digital Detox comes in. Yes, you heard it right. “Digital Detox!” This specific detoxification makes it possible to maintain a tech-life balance to help live a fuller and happier life, we’ll explore what screen addiction is, its consequences, and most importantly, how you can take steps to detox from digital devices and regain control of your life.


• What is Digital Detox?
A digital detox is a period of time when a person voluntarily refrains from using digital devices such as smartphones, computers, and social media platforms. This form of detoxification has gained popularity, as individuals have increased their time spent on digital devices and the Internet.

• The Consequences of Digital Detox: A digital detox, the deliberate reduction or elimination of digital device use, can have both positive and negative consequences. A digital detox can enhance mental health and relationships, but it may lead to social and professional challenges. The consequences vary depending on the extent and context of the detox, highlighting the importance of balance in today’s digital age.

• The Benefits of Digital Detox : Here are the benefits of a digital detox summarized in pointers-

(i) Improved Mental Health:
< Reduced screen time can alleviate anxiety and depression.
< Enhanced mindfulness and reduced digital distractions lead to better mental well-being.
(ii) Increased Productivity:
< Fewer digital distractions mean more focus on tasks.
< Enhanced time management skills as you prioritize non-digital activities.
(iii) Better Sleep Quality:
< Reduced exposure to screens before bedtime leads to improved sleep patterns.
< Deeper and more restful sleep contributes to overall health.

(iv) Enhanced Relationships:
< More face-to-face interactions foster deeper connections.
< Reduced screen time reduces conflicts arising from digital neglect.
(v) Physical Health Benefits:
< Less screen time encourages physical activity.
< Decreased sedentary behavior improves overall health.
(vi) Improved Concentration:
< Reduced multitasking leads to better concentration and cognitive abilities.
< Enhanced ability to stay on task and complete projects.
(vii) Stress Reduction:
< Lower screen time decreases information overload and screen-induced stress.
< Time for relaxation and hobbies reduces overall stress levels.

• Signs You Need a Digital Detox: Now that we’ve explored the benefits of digital detoxes, it’s time to determine if you need to do a digital detox. Here are some signs you need a digital detox:
You constantly feel a need to check your phone
You feel high stress when you are separated from your phone
You have feelings of anxiety or depression after checking social media
You have a hard time connecting with others in real life
You have difficulty concentrating on work tasks or conversations with others
You spend several hours per day on your phone.
You think about social media more than you think about real-life experiences
You are constantly doom scrolling through negative news coverage
Your devices create more negative thoughts and emotions than positive ones

• Creating a Digital Detox Plan :
To embark on a successful digital detox, you’ll need a well-thought-out plan. Start by setting clear goals for yourself, such as reducing daily screen time or designating tech-free zones and times. Next, identify the apps or activities that consume the most of your time and consider using screen time management apps to limit their use. Establishing a support system can also be beneficial, as friends and family can help hold you accountable.

• Practical Tips for a Digital Detox :
Here are some practical tips to help you successfully detox from screens:
(a) Schedule tech-free breaks throughout your day.
(b) Engage in physical activities or hobbies that don’t involve screens.
(c) Turn off non-essential notifications on your devices.
(d) Set specific times for checking and responding to emails and messages.
(e) Consider a “no screens before bedtime” rule to improve sleep quality.
(f) Replace screen time with face-to-face interactions whenever possible.
(g) Be mindful of your screen usage and track your progress.

• Maintaining a Balanced Digital Life :
Once you’ve completed a digital detox, the goal is not to eliminate screens from your life entirely but to establish a healthy balance. Use the lessons learned during your detox to maintain a mindful approach to technology. Regularly reassess your screen time habits and make adjustments as needed.

• Overcoming Challenges :
It’s natural to face challenges while attempting a digital detox. You may experience withdrawal symptoms, boredom, or the fear of missing out. To overcome these challenges, remind yourself of your goals and the benefits of reducing screen time. Find alternative activities that you genuinely enjoy and that
don’t involve screens. Seek support from friends or support groups, and remember that progress takes time.

In a world where screens dominate our attention, it’s essential to recognize the signs of screen addiction and take proactive steps to regain control. A digital detox can be a transformative experience, leading to improved physical and mental well-being, stronger relationships, and a deeper connection with the real world. By following a well-planned detox strategy and maintaining a balanced digital life, you can break free from screen addiction and rediscover the joys of a screen-free existence. It’s time to take the first step towards a healthier, more fulfilling life.

References

WRITEUPS. (2023, April 13). Digital Detox-a new lifestyle choice. Times of India Blog. https://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/readersblog/writeups/digital-detox-a-new-lifestyle-choice-52528/

Team, S. G., &amp; Written By Single Grain, Jacqueline.Foster. (2023, August 1). How to Digital Detox: 3 reasons to take a screen-free day. Single Grain. https://www.singlegrain.com/blog/ms/how-to-digital-detox/

Zamudio, D. (2022, June 1). 7-Day Digital Detox Challenge – Daniela Zamudio – Medium. Medium. https://medium.com/@kdzamudio/7-day-digital-detox-ch allenge-a8000d46cd29

Improve your work-life balance with a digital detox. (nd). https://www.booged.c om/blog/improve your work-life balance with a digital detox

The digital detox | Startups Magazine. (n.d.). Startups Magazine. https://startup smagazine.co.uk/article-digital-detox

• Friedman, J. (2022). The benefits of doing a digital detox. The Journal That Talks BackTm https://www.thejournalthattalksback.com/blog/the-benefits-of-doi ng-a-digital-detox

Unveiling the Voices Within: Navigating Speaking Anxiety Among English Language Learners towards Honing their Learning Strategies

Shanti Polamuri

HOD, Assistant Professor

Department of English

Maharashtra College

Abstract:

Language is a powerful tool that allows us to communicate, connect, and express ourselves. As the world becomes increasingly interconnected, the ability to communicate effectively in different languages has become an essential skill. In response to this demand, language instruction methods have evolved, placing a significant emphasis on the development of oral communication skills. This shift has been driven by the recognition that speaking is not only a fundamental aspect of language acquisition but also one of the most challenging. However, amidst the efforts to cultivate these skills, an often-overlooked obstacle emerges—speaking anxiety. This article delves into the evolution of language instruction methods, the complexity of oral communication, the impact of speaking anxiety in second language (L2) environments. Furthermore, the identification process explains how these factors affect students’ ability to learn and perform in an instructional environment, given that L2 classrooms are often structured according to the formation of groups with different dynamics that may have a more significant effect or impact on learners’ speaking anxiety. 

Keywords: Language acquisition, speaking anxiety, instructional environment, language dynamics, difficulty of oral communication etc., 

Importance of language learning

The evolution of language instruction methods reflects a profound understanding of the importance of oral communication. Language is not merely a collection of words and grammar rules; it is a means to convey thoughts, emotions, and ideas. Recognizing this, language educators have shifted their focus from rote memorization and passive learning to active engagement through speaking. This transformation is fueled by the understanding that speaking is a vital skill that individuals must acquire to participate fully in a globalized world. However, the path to becoming an adept speaker is far from easy. 

Speaking involves a multitude of intricacies, including pronunciation, intonation, vocabulary selection, grammar usage, and fluency. The convergence of these elements requires practice and persistence. Despite its importance, speaking often poses a significant challenge for language learners. The intricate web of skills and knowledge required for effective communication can be overwhelming. Amidst this complexity, anxiety emerges as a formidable barrier.

Anxiety, particularly in L2 environments with limited opportunities for target language communication, can cripple the language acquisition process. Learners grappling with speaking anxiety may find themselves paralyzed by fear of making mistakes, being judged, or not being able to express themselves eloquently. As a result, they might avoid engaging in conversations or participating in class discussions, depriving themselves of the crucial practice necessary for improvement. Several studies focused on the significance of public speaking anxiety as a primary factor affecting academic achievement, sheds light on the intricate interplay between speaking English, speaking anxiety, and the L2 classroom setting. The emotional variables associated with speaking anxiety further complicate the landscape, as learners’ self-esteem, confidence, and motivation are profoundly affected. By examining these relationships, the study aims to provide evidence that anxiety is a leading cause of poor performance among language learners.

The evolution of language instruction methods reflects a shift towards prioritizing oral communication skills, recognizing their pivotal role in effective language acquisition. However, the complexity of speaking, coupled with the presence of speaking anxiety, poses a substantial challenge for learners, particularly in L2 environments. Several studies on speaking anxiety’s impact on language acquisition underscores its detrimental effects, focusing on public speaking anxiety’s role in academic achievement. Ultimately, understanding and addressing speaking anxiety could lead to more effective language instruction and improved outcomes for learners worldwide.

Learners possess an innate curiosity for the unfamiliar and a penchant for imitation, making it an optimal foundation for embarking on language acquisition. Observing their surroundings and tuning into the cadence of everyday life, children effortlessly assimilate language without conscious effort. This process occurs through a blend of aural and visual perception, nurturing their growth. Consequently, childhood serves as an opportune phase for language acquisition, characterized by an informal and almost subconscious learning experience. ELT has reached a point where the acquisition of language skills is of increasing importance. The level of acquisition is determined by the growth of communication skills, namely speaking. The deficiency emerges at this point because improving speaking skills at the school level received less emphasis. Students who lack accuracy and fluency lose confidence and motivation to utilise the language. Numerous variables influence the language-learning and -teaching process. The significant component is linked to the scenario of instructed language education. With this as the focal point, this study seeks to discover reasons for lousy performance, learners’ strategies to reduce nervousness, and expectations during speaking sessions.

Speaking Anxiety

Anxiety, a complex and uncomfortable emotional state, has long intrigued psychologists and researchers for its significant impact on human behavior and well-being. Initially defined by Freud as “something felt,” anxiety encompasses a distressing emotional condition characterized by feelings of tension, apprehension, nervousness, and worry, often accompanied by physiological responses triggered by the autonomic nervous system (Horwitz et al., 1986, p. 125). While anxiety is commonly linked to perceiving present or future threats (Barlow, 1988; Behnke and Beatty, 1981), it assumes a particularly powerful role in the context of second language acquisition, where it manifests as second language anxiety, profoundly affecting learners of English as a second language.

Oral communication in a second language is frequently perceived as an anxiety-inducing experience, resulting in negative outcomes for language learners. The act of speaking in a new language brings with it the potential for miscommunication, errors, and a sense of vulnerability. Consequently, the fear of these potential challenges triggers high levels of anxiety, particularly before and during speech engagements. This phenomenon aligns with the observation that speakers experience heightened levels of worry and anxiety in relation to their communication performance (Barlow, 1988). However, the study of this anxiety could serve as a catalyst for more effective communication practices, aiming to enhance individuals’ ability to convey their thoughts and ideas confidently and competently in front of an audience.

Within the realm of educational studies, anxiety has been examined as a relatively consistent personality trait, known as feature anxiety. Learners exhibiting this trait are prone to experiencing anxiety across various situations. In contrast, state anxiety is a transient emotional state triggered by specific circumstances, while situation-specific anxiety refers to a recurring trait associated with particular situations (Spielberger, Anton and Bedell, 1976). Notably, in the context of language learning, studies have revealed that language learning anxiety tends to be situation-dependent, indicating that it surfaces in specific scenarios (Gardener, 1991b; Horwitz, 2001). This propensity for situation-dependent anxiety is particularly pronounced in language learning environments, such as classrooms.

Anxiety as an intricate emotional state, holds considerable sway over human behavior and cognition. In the realm of language acquisition, second language anxiety significantly affects learners attempting to communicate in an unfamiliar language. This anxiety can stem from the fear of potential mistakes and miscommunications. However, by delving into the study of these anxieties, educators and researchers aim to empower individuals to navigate the challenges of speaking in a second language more effectively. Moreover, the distinction between feature anxiety, state anxiety, and situation-specific anxiety in educational settings underscores the complexity of anxiety’s manifestations and their implications for language learners. This intricate interplay of emotions and communication serves as a foundation for enhancing language instruction and promoting more effective communication education. As a student organises and prepares for an impending speaking activity or oral presentation in front of others, negative thoughts about the activity or session may exacerbate feelings of anticipatory anxiety linked with the assigned speaking task. This psychological phenomenon challenges teachers and instructors whose ultimate purpose is to educate and train students to be good communicators.

Awareness of Anxiety in the English Language Classroom

The pervasive influence of the English language has led to its recognition as a vital and essential component of modern life. Students, cognizant of its global reach and multifaceted benefits, attribute numerous virtues to their ability to speak English. From being perceived as “Universal” and “Global” to fostering a sense of “Prestige” and “Belonging,” English is regarded as more than just a language; it is a powerful tool that profoundly shapes their academic and personal journey.

For students, speaking English is synonymous with confidence. The ability to communicate effectively in this language empowers them to overcome linguistic barriers and engage confidently in various situations. It instills a sense of belonging, enabling them to connect with people across the world and be part of a larger, interconnected community. This interconnectedness not only facilitates personal growth but also serves as a conduit for international recognition. The universality of English enables individuals to expand their horizons, explore new avenues, and flourish on a global stage.

The impact of English extends beyond personal growth; it permeates professional spheres as well. Students are acutely aware that English proficiency is a prerequisite for internships, employment opportunities, and higher education in foreign countries. They understand that mastering English equips them with the tools needed for successful communication and exceptional engagement in diverse international environments. The language becomes an asset during presentations and interviews, allowing individuals to express themselves with eloquence and clarity, thus leaving a lasting impression.

Furthermore, the role of English in fostering effective communication is indispensable in various social contexts. Friendships are deepened through shared conversations, and the ability to comprehend diverse viewpoints enriches relationships. Mastery of English enables individuals to discern attitudes and emotions, thereby facilitating deeper understanding. This proficiency is not only valuable for interpersonal connections but also essential when venturing into unfamiliar territories. When traveling to distant locales, English assumes the role of a “Survival” language, enabling individuals to navigate foreign lands with ease and confidence. The practical implications of English extend to the global marketplace, where it emerges as a tool for professional competitiveness. English proficiency breaks down language barriers, allowing individuals to compete effectively in an international arena. It imparts a touch of sophistication to one’s profile, enhancing their history and increasing their appeal to prospective employers or collaborators. Moreover, it provides a pathway for articulating opinions, transcending cultural differences, and bridging gaps in a world increasingly characterized by diversity. The students recognize that English transcends mere language and assumes the stature of a transformative force in their lives. Its universal appeal, role in fostering confidence, facilitating connections, and enhancing professional prospects, paints a picture of an indispensable tool for personal and academic growth. The students’ profound understanding of English’s significance underscores its pivotal role in shaping their present and future endeavors, both on a personal and global scale.

The aspiration to master the English language resonates with countless individuals, making it a cherished dream for many. English speakers are often regarded as possessing a unique talent and innate gift. This sentiment is amplified by the fact that a substantial portion of pertinent literature and resources are available exclusively in English. For some, the allure of English stems from its ability to serve as a catalyst for achieving predetermined objectives, providing the means to turn aspirations into reality. Others are drawn to English by a genuine affection for the language, valuing the joy of speaking it, regardless of grammatical correctness—embracing it as an avenue for expression and enjoyment. Amidst these motivations, there lies a compelling rationale for learning languages beyond one’s mother tongue. This is particularly pronounced among learners who consider English a foundational subject within their academic journey. The necessity to study English is deeply ingrained, with its significance acknowledged as an essential component of their education. 

Many learners recognize that English is a pathway to frequent and eloquent communication, allowing them to convey their thoughts and ideas fluently. However, for a select few, English is more than just a subject of study—it is a dream that holds the key to their desired professions. Their professional and personal triumphs hinge upon their mastery of the English language. This realization propels them forward, as they understand that their command over English dictates their potential job prospects and the subsequent trajectory of their careers.

Interestingly, amidst the diverse motivations, a prevailing sentiment surfaces that learning English can be enjoyable and comparatively less arduous than other languages. This perception is rooted in the belief that English facilitates more effective communication and technological engagement. Beyond professional and academic motives, there are those who view English as a vehicle for personal fame, intellectual growth, and international recognition. The spectrum of reasons for learning English broadens further, encompassing a range of aspirations. Some are driven by an inherent passion for languages, seeking to immerse themselves in linguistic exploration. Others aspire to be known for their English proficiency, harnessing it as a distinguishing factor. The pursuit of higher education, a promising future, research publication, improved speech delivery, enhanced communication skills, knowledge acquisition, career advancement, and global travel all contribute to the allure of English.

However, despite these aspirations and motivations, learners universally acknowledge a shared challenge: anxiety when speaking English. This unease can significantly impact a learner’s adaptability to the target language and, consequently, their academic pursuits. The link between anxiety and oral performance is well-established, underscoring the need for effective strategies to address this hindrance. Interactive sessions are recommended as a remedy, providing learners with a platform to overcome their fears and gradually develop their speaking abilities. The desire to master the English language encompasses a diverse array of motivations, from personal passion to professional advancement. Learners recognize the transformative power of English, both as a means of effective communication and as a conduit to achieving their dreams. Yet, the presence of anxiety in speaking English highlights the complex interplay between emotional well-being and language acquisition. By addressing this anxiety and fostering supportive learning environments, educators can empower learners to fully embrace the opportunities presented by the English language.

Difficulties of Learners while using English

Learners of a second language (L2) encounter a diverse array of obstacles, often contingent upon the level of exposure they have had to the language. The challenges associated with L2 speech production are multifaceted, encompassing both physical and psychological elements. Among these elements, anxiety plays a significant role, stemming from a variety of valid factors. Issues such as extreme nervousness, lack of self-confidence, memory limitations, attention deficits, insufficient practice, deficient language command, incorrect communication, and inadequate opportunities for interaction all contribute to impeding the communication process. For some learners, cognitive processes can be a stumbling block, making it arduous to select the appropriate words (Woodrow 2006). The struggle to pinpoint the right terms, coupled with the desire to incorporate words from one’s mother tongue, further exacerbates this challenge. In instances of inadequate preparation or recall, confidence can waver, giving rise to heightened anxiety. The absence of prior experience in speaking in front of an audience, coupled with the fear of facing classmates, impedes effective communication. Moreover, concerns over task completion, constructing coherent sentences, and the distractions posed by fellow classmates can cause a breakdown in the communication process.

A pervasive fear is the uncertainty of what to express next during a speech or presentation. Learners grapple with the correct tone, pronunciation, and even forgetting the points they had intended to convey, leading to frustration and heightened apprehension. The struggle to conjure appropriate and unique words spontaneously is a common hurdle, resulting in instances where crucial information is missed during speech.

One of the most pronounced sources of anxiety arises when speaking in front of a group. Many individuals experience an overwhelming sense of terror in this context. The looming fear of stumbling, combined with concerns about potential memory lapses, adds to their anxiety. These anxieties can manifest physically, with shaky hands and legs betraying the inner turmoil. The obstacles faced by L2 learners in mastering oral communication are nuanced and varied, depending on their exposure and experience. The complex interplay of psychological and physical elements, compounded by anxiety arising from a range of valid factors, contributes to the challenges faced during speech production. From memory lapses to fear of facing an audience, these barriers can significantly impact a learner’s confidence and overall performance. Recognizing and addressing these challenges through supportive learning environments, interactive sessions, and strategies to manage anxiety are crucial steps toward empowering learners to navigate the intricate landscape of L2 communication with increased ease and effectiveness.

Strategy to Decrease Anxiety

In the face of an awareness of decreasing their anxiety, learners employ a range of techniques to mitigate their anxiety during speaking sessions. These strategies are designed to create a more comfortable environment, address anxiety-related concerns, and actively overcome the underlying causes of fear.

Guided by teachers’ overarching directions and supervision, learners have embraced tactics aimed at diminishing their stage fright. Techniques such as practicing speeches in front of a mirror to refine facial expressions are beneficial in combating stage fright. Teachers’ encouragement to ensure active participation from all students fosters a collective commitment to speaking, shifting the focus from apprehensive outcomes to the valuable experience itself. For instance, organizing English language games, honing reading skills, engaging with diverse environments, interacting with new individuals, seeking guidance from peers, recalling positive memories, and sharing these experiences before the class are all methods that hold the potential to alleviate anxiety. Additionally, learners advocate for participation in motivating tasks as a means to reduce anxiety, fostering a belief that tackling these tasks head-on enhances their confidence and lessens apprehension.

The importance of interactive sessions and brief presentations as anxiety-reduction strategies has been emphasized by learners. Adopting an “if others can, why can’t I?” mindset instills a positive attitude that bolsters their self-assurance. Expanding interactions to include individuals from different states cultivates a global perspective, promoting a more confident approach to English communication.

The notion that speaking in English leads to increased self-assuredness underscores the transformative power of language mastery. Nurturing amicable relationships with teachers and classmates has been highlighted as pivotal in creating an environment conducive to open expression and reduced anxiety. The freedom to voice opinions and views further nurtures self-assurance, while adopting a calm and composed approach to learning is deemed an effective antidote to anxiety. Thus, learners’ awareness of their weaknesses is accompanied by a proactive approach to addressing and mitigating their anxiety. The strategies they have adopted, guided by teacher input and personal experiences, underscore the significance of fostering a supportive and interactive learning environment. By embracing techniques that encourage engagement, global interactions, positive attitudes, and a calm mindset, learners not only diminish anxiety but also bolster their confidence, paving the way for effective language acquisition and dynamic communication.

Consideration, Perspectives, and Prospects

The expectations of students from their instructors in the context of language learning are indicative of a desire for interactive and engaging classes. Students look forward to classes that are not only informative but also enjoyable, achieved through interactive sessions that foster active participation. In the realm of L2 learning and acquisition, students value timely feedback, personalized interactions, private correction of errors, the emphasis on speaking and listening activities, a comfortable learning atmosphere, frequent opportunities for practice, a friendly demeanor from instructors, and the role of the teacher as a problem-solver.

A prominent sentiment generally shared by English language learners is their aversion to public reprimand or punishment. Learners place great importance on the establishment of a welcoming environment by instructors. They appreciate instructors who can identify errors and provide assistance in a supportive manner. Teachers are viewed as responsible for encouraging extensive reading to enhance vocabulary and reading speed, facilitating language growth through a comprehensive approach.

Feedback from students regarding speaking sessions emerges as overwhelmingly positive, providing both encouragement and room for the improvement of instructors. Some learners may possess the ability to speak but are hindered by their own shyness. The impact of these sessions is described as extraordinary, calming, revitalizing, joyful, and enlightening. Overcoming stage fright within these sessions grants learners a sense of accomplishment, fostering positive emotions. Importantly, the feedback loop established by teachers, who correct and offer assistance, is noted to have a profound impact on learners’ self-perception. The act of being guided and supported by teachers instills a sense of mastery and confidence. This newfound confidence translates into enthusiastic and committed participation in various activities, showcasing the symbiotic relationship between positive teaching practices and student engagement.

The students’ expectations from language instructors reflect a desire for engaging, interactive, and supportive learning environments. The importance of personalized interactions, private error correction, and a focus on speaking and listening activities is evident. The avoidance of public reprimand and the creation of a comfortable atmosphere play crucial roles in facilitating effective learning. Positive feedback loops resulting from teachers’ corrective guidance empower learners with confidence, leading to enthusiastic engagement in various learning activities. Ultimately, the dynamic interaction between students and instructors is key to fostering a rich and productive language learning experience.

Conclusions

The prevailing necessity revolves around establishing an environment conducive to language learning and infusing the process with enjoyment via interactive sessions. Nevertheless, learners are proactively pursuing chances to enhance and showcase their speaking skills. Consequently, the onus predominantly rests on educators to transform English learning and speaking into an enjoyable journey. This entails tailoring activities that align with students’ needs and preferred learning approaches. Equally vital is cultivating a receptive mindset among learners, fostering a high level of enthusiasm and eagerness to accept, acquire, and master the language.

References

  1. Barlow, D.H. (1988). Anxiety and its disorders: The nature and treatment of anxiety and panic. New York: Guilford.
  2. Behnke, R.R., & Beatty, M.J. (1981). Comparison of anticipatory and performance anxiety in public speaking. Texas Speech Communication Journal, 6, 3-6.
  3. Horwitz, E.K., Horwitz, B.M., & Cope, J (1986). Foreign language classroom anxiety. The Modern Language Journal, 70(2), 125-132. 
  4. Horwitz, E.K., (2001). ‘Language Anxiety and Achievement’, Annual Review of Applied Linguistics 21: 112-26.
  5. MacIntyre, P.D., R.C. Gardner., (1991b). ‘Methods and Results in the Study of Anxiety and Language Learning: A Review of the Literature, Language Learning 41:513-34.
  6. Woodrow, Lindy., (2006). Anxiety and Speaking English as a Second Language, RELC Journal, 37, pp. 308-323.
  7. Spielberger, C.D. (1966). Anxiety and behaviour. Academic Press.
  8. Spielberger, C., W, Anton and J. Bedell (1976). ‘The Nature and Treatment of Test Anxiety. In M. Zuckerman and C. Spielberger, Emotions and Anxiety: New Concepts, Methods and Applications (Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum) 317-44.
  9. Tercan, Gulsah., Dikilitas, Kenan., (2015). EFL students’ speaking anxiety: a case from tertiary level students, International Association of Research in Foreign Language education and Applied Linguistics ELT Research Journal. 2015, 4(1), 16-27 ISSN: 2146-9814.

Vector Marketing: A Controversial Sales Model

Vector Marketing, a company that operates within the direct selling industry, has been a subject of both fascination and controversy for several decades. Known for its unique sales approach, which involves recruiting and training young people to sell cutlery and kitchenware, Vector Marketing has garnered attention for its marketing strategies, business model, and allegations of deceptive practices. In this essay, we will examine the history, structure, and controversies surrounding Vector Marketing.

History and Structure of Vector Marketing

Vector Marketing was founded in 1981 as the sales arm of the Cutco Corporation, a manufacturer of high-quality kitchen knives and utensils. The company’s business model primarily relies on recruiting college students and young adults as independent contractors, known as “sales representatives” or “cutco reps.” These representatives are responsible for selling Cutco products directly to consumers through in-home demonstrations.

Photo by Canva Studio on Pexels.com

Vector Marketing’s unique structure involves the following key elements:

  1. Recruitment and Training: Vector Marketing actively recruits students and young adults, often targeting those seeking part-time employment or flexible work arrangements. Once recruited, individuals undergo a training program that teaches them sales techniques and product knowledge.
  2. Commission-Based Compensation: Cutco representatives earn commissions based on their sales performance. The more products they sell, the higher their earnings. This commission-based compensation structure is central to Vector Marketing’s model.
  3. In-Home Demonstrations: Representatives are encouraged to conduct in-home product demonstrations to showcase the quality and utility of Cutco products. These demonstrations often involve the use of personal networks to secure appointments with potential customers.

Controversies Surrounding Vector Marketing

Vector Marketing has faced significant criticism and legal challenges over the years. Some of the main controversies include:

  1. Recruitment Practices: Critics argue that Vector Marketing uses aggressive and deceptive recruitment tactics. Some individuals claim they were misled about the nature of the job and its income potential. This has led to allegations of exploitation of young and inexperienced workers.
  2. High Turnover Rates: Vector Marketing has been criticized for its high turnover rates among representatives. Many recruits do not stay with the company for an extended period, leading to concerns about the sustainability of their income and job security.
  3. Focus on Friends and Family: The company’s emphasis on selling to friends and family has raised ethical questions. Critics argue that this approach can strain personal relationships and create discomfort among representatives and their social circles.
  4. Legal Challenges: Vector Marketing has faced legal action in the form of class-action lawsuits and regulatory investigations. Some cases have alleged violations of labor laws and deceptive business practices.
  5. Income Disparities: Despite promises of high earnings, many Vector Marketing representatives reportedly earn very little, especially when factoring in the time and expenses associated with the job. This has fueled accusations of income inequality within the organization.

Conclusion

Vector Marketing’s unconventional sales model has drawn both intrigue and criticism. While some individuals have had positive experiences and found success as Cutco representatives, others have voiced concerns about recruitment practices, high turnover rates, and income disparities. It is essential for potential recruits to thoroughly research and understand the company’s business model and to be cautious when considering opportunities with Vector Marketing or any direct selling organization.

As with any business, transparency, ethical practices, and adherence to labor laws are essential for maintaining a positive reputation and ensuring that individuals are not taken advantage of in the pursuit of employment and financial stability. Ultimately, Vector Marketing’s impact on the lives of its representatives and the perception of its business practices will continue to be subjects of debate and scrutiny in the years to come.

How Legal Services can be Automated

Legal services can be automated to some extent using technology and artificial intelligence (AI) tools. Automation in the legal field can help improve efficiency, reduce costs, and streamline various processes. Go Answer is one of such website providing online legal services. Here are several ways in which legal services can be automated.

Photo by August de Richelieu on Pexels.com
  1. Document Automation:
    • Contract generation: AI-powered contract automation tools can create standard contracts and agreements based on predefined templates and variables.
    • Legal document review: AI can analyze and review large volumes of legal documents, such as discovery documents, to identify relevant information and flag potential issues.
  2. Legal Research:
    • AI-powered legal research tools can quickly search through vast databases of case law, statutes, regulations, and legal literature to provide attorneys with relevant precedents and information.
  3. Due Diligence:
    • AI can assist in due diligence processes for mergers and acquisitions by analyzing and summarizing large sets of documents and highlighting key information or potential risks.
  4. E-Discovery:
    • Automated e-discovery tools can help identify and categorize electronic documents for litigation purposes, reducing the time and cost associated with manual review.
  5. Contract Management:
    • Contract management software can automate contract tracking, reminders for renewal dates, and compliance monitoring, ensuring that contractual obligations are met.
  6. Legal Chatbots:
    • Chatbots can be used for initial client intake, answering frequently asked questions, and providing basic legal information to clients or website visitors.
  7. Predictive Analytics:
    • AI can analyze historical case data to predict case outcomes, helping lawyers make informed decisions and prioritize their workload.
  8. Virtual Legal Assistants:
    • Virtual legal assistants powered by AI can perform administrative tasks, manage schedules, and handle client communication, freeing up attorneys to focus on higher-value tasks.
  9. Billing and Timekeeping:
    • Automated time tracking and billing software can streamline the billing process, making it more accurate and efficient.
  10. Compliance Monitoring:
    • Automated systems can continuously monitor changes in laws and regulations, alerting legal teams to potential compliance issues.
  11. Intellectual Property Management:
    • Automation tools can assist in managing intellectual property portfolios, including trademark and patent applications, monitoring for infringements, and renewals.
  12. Online Dispute Resolution (ODR):
    • ODR platforms can help resolve certain types of disputes through automated processes, reducing the need for litigation.
  13. Data Security and Privacy:
    • Automation can help ensure compliance with data security and privacy regulations by monitoring data breaches and implementing security measures.
  14. Client Communication:
    • Automated email campaigns and client portals can keep clients informed about case progress and upcoming appointments.

It’s important to note that while automation can bring many benefits to the legal field, there are also limitations and ethical considerations. Human judgment, legal expertise, and ethical decision-making are still essential in many legal matters. Automation should complement the work of legal professionals rather than replace it entirely. Additionally, data security and confidentiality must be rigorously maintained when automating legal processes.

Understanding Mid-Block Traffic Analysis: A Crucial Tool for Road Safety

Authors: Shashikant N Sharma, Dungar Singh

Traffic analysis plays a pivotal role in urban planning, transportation management, and road safety enhancement. While much attention is given to intersections, mid-block segments of road are often overlooked, even though they are just as critical in ensuring safe and efficient traffic flow. Mid-block traffic analysis is the systematic study of these segments, providing valuable insights into traffic behavior, road design, and safety measures. In this article, we delve into the world of mid-block traffic analysis, exploring its significance and methodologies.

In the realm of transportation and urban planning, ensuring road safety is paramount. The complex dynamics of traffic flow demand comprehensive strategies that go beyond the typical intersection-focused approaches. Mid-block traffic analysis emerges as a crucial tool in this endeavor, addressing a critical aspect of road safety often overlooked.

Mid-block segments, which refer to the sections of road between intersections, are essential components of any urban or suburban roadway network. They present unique challenges and opportunities for traffic management and safety improvement. From pedestrian safety to efficient vehicle flow, understanding and analyzing mid-block traffic is vital for creating safer and more sustainable transportation systems.

This article delves into the intricacies of mid-block traffic analysis, shedding light on its importance, methodologies, and real-world applications. We will explore how this tool can help identify traffic patterns, assess risk factors, and guide the implementation of targeted safety measures. By gaining a deeper understanding of mid-block traffic analysis, we empower urban planners, engineers, and policymakers to make informed decisions that prioritize road safety and enhance the overall quality of transportation networks.

The Significance of Mid-Block Traffic Analysis

Mid-block segments represent the stretches of road that lie between intersections or major junctions. These areas may not have traffic signals, stop signs, or other intersection controls, making them particularly susceptible to various traffic-related issues. Understanding and analyzing traffic patterns in these sections is vital for several reasons:

  1. Safety Improvement: Mid-block segments often witness a significant number of accidents, including pedestrian incidents. Analyzing traffic behavior in these areas helps identify safety deficiencies and implement measures to reduce accidents.
  2. Traffic Flow Optimization: Efficient traffic flow is essential for minimizing congestion and travel time. Mid-block traffic analysis can help identify bottlenecks, congestion points, and areas where traffic calming measures are needed.
  3. Infrastructure Assessment: Evaluating the road infrastructure in mid-block segments ensures that they are designed to accommodate the current and projected traffic volume. This can lead to better road planning and infrastructure development.
  4. Pedestrian Safety: Many mid-block areas have pedestrian crosswalks. Understanding how pedestrians interact with vehicles in these sections is crucial for designing safe pedestrian facilities.

Methodologies for Mid-Block Traffic Analysis

Several methodologies and tools are employed to conduct mid-block traffic analysis, each with its own strengths and applications:

  1. Traffic Counting: The collection of traffic data through various means, such as manual counts, automated counters, or video analysis, is fundamental. These data include vehicle counts, speed, and vehicle classifications.
  2. Speed Studies: Analyzing vehicle speeds in mid-block segments helps identify areas where speed limits may need adjustment or where traffic calming measures like speed bumps are necessary.
  3. Conflict Analysis: Identifying conflict points where vehicles interact, such as lane changes, merges, or diverges, allows for pinpointing potential safety hazards.
  4. Pedestrian Studies: For areas with pedestrian crosswalks, studying pedestrian behavior and the interaction between pedestrians and vehicles is crucial. This includes crosswalk utilization, waiting times, and crossing behavior.
  5. Geographic Information Systems (GIS): GIS technology helps in mapping and visualizing traffic data, allowing for more comprehensive analysis and planning.
  6. Surveys and Observations: Surveys and observations conducted by traffic engineers and transportation experts provide valuable qualitative data on driver behavior, pedestrian activity, and road conditions.
  7. Simulation Modeling: Computer simulation tools can replicate traffic flow scenarios and help assess the impact of different interventions and designs in mid-block segments.

Applying Mid-Block Traffic Analysis

Once data is collected and analyzed, the findings can be applied to improve mid-block traffic safety and efficiency:

  1. Infrastructure Upgrades: Implement changes to road design, signage, lighting, and pavement markings based on analysis results.
  2. Traffic Calming Measures: Install speed bumps, pedestrian refuge islands, or raised crosswalks to slow down vehicles and improve pedestrian safety.
  3. Traffic Enforcement: Allocate resources for increased police presence and enforcement in areas with high accident rates or traffic violations.
  4. Education and Awareness: Launch public awareness campaigns to inform drivers and pedestrians about the specific safety measures in place and how they can contribute to road safety.

Conclusion

Mid-block traffic analysis is a crucial tool for enhancing road safety and optimizing traffic flow in urban areas. By understanding and addressing the unique challenges posed by mid-block segments, cities and transportation authorities can make significant strides in creating safer, more efficient road networks. As technology and methodologies continue to advance, the accuracy and effectiveness of mid-block traffic analysis will further improve, ultimately leading to better and safer transportation systems for all road users.

References

  1. Ogden, K. W., & Hall, F. L. (2017). Urban Traffic Systems. Wiley.
  2. Transportation Research Board. (2018). Highway Capacity Manual (6th ed.). National Academies Press.
  3. Leden, L., & Brühwiler, P. A. (2016). Road Traffic Data: Collection and Analysis. CRC Press.
  4. Zegeer, C. V., Stewart, J. R., Huang, H. F., & Lagerwey, P. A. (2002). Safety Effects of Marked vs. Unmarked Crosswalks at Uncontrolled Locations: Analysis of Pedestrian Crashes in 30 Cities. Transportation Research Record, 1818, 84-94.
  5. Fitzpatrick, K., Koppa, R., Park, E. S., & Carlson, P. (2010). Evaluation of Pedestrian Crosswalks: Analysis of Pedestrian Crashes and Factors Influencing Driver Yielding Behavior. Transportation Research Record, 2188, 40-48.
  6. Federal Highway Administration. (2009). Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. U.S. Department of Transportation.
  7. Bonneson, J. A., Zimmerman, K., Chien, S., & Karim, A. (2017). Guidelines for the Timing of Pedestrian Walk/Don’t Walk Intervals. Texas A&M Transportation Institute.
  8. Levinson, H. S., & Dutzik, T. (2017). Dangerous by Design 2016: An Analysis of Pedestrian Deaths in the U.S. and Recommendations for Safer Streets. Smart Growth America.
  9. National Cooperative Highway Research Program. (2019). NCHRP Synthesis 545: Addressing Bicycle and Pedestrian Safety at Intersections. Transportation Research Board.
  10. Pietrucha, M. T., & Baek, J. (2016). Analysis of Vehicle Speeds at Crosswalks on Multilane Roads Using Video Data. Journal of Transportation Engineering, 142(4), 04015056.
  11. Singh, D., Ameen, T., & Ahmad, A. (2021). Analysis of delay and queue length variation at three-leg signalized intersection under mixed traffic condition. Innovative infrastructure solutions6(2), 125.

Chandrayaan-3 Historic Moon Landing, A Few points from the ISRO website, and also Cheering News in Some Foreign Papers

After a 40-day journey starting from the Satish Dhawan Space Center in Sriharikota, Andhra Pradesh, the Indian Space Research Organisation’s (ISRO) Chandrayaan-3 mission landed successfully on the Moon at 6.04 PM Indian Standard Time (IST) on August 23, 2023 (Wednesday). Naturally, ISRO scientists and others are joyous, as are all the Indians. I am fascinated to see the line on the ISRO website isro.gov.in/Chandrayaan3
‘I reached my destination, and you too!’: Chandrayaan-3; Chandrayaan-3 has successfully soft-landed on the moon. Congratulations, India! A few points from the website are presented here for the benefit of readers.
a) “The Lander Module is in 25 km x 134 km orbit. Powered descent is expected to commence on August 23, 2023, around 1745 hours of Indian Standard Time (IST).
b) The Lander Module is in 113 km x 157 km orbit around the moon. The second de-boosting is planned for August 20, 2023
c) The Lander Module is successfully separated from the Propulsion Module. Deboosting is planned for August 18, 2023.
d) The spacecraft is in an orbit of 153 km x 163 km after the firing on August 16, 2023
e) The mission is in the orbit circularisation phase. The spacecraft is in 151 km x 179 km orbit (as of August 14, 2023)
f) Chandrayaan-3 is successfully inserted into the lunar orbit. The orbit achieved is 164 km x 18074 km, as intended” (as of August 5, 2023)”
It is pertinent to mention that as per the website, “LVM3 M4 vehicle successfully launched Chandrayaan-3 into orbit. Chandrayaan-3, in its precise orbit, has begun its journey to the Moon. Health of the Spacecraft is normal”.
With the mission, India has joined a small and exclusive club of countries that have managed to soft land on the Moon after the US, Russia, and China. For the successful landing on the Moon, many foreign newspapers /agencies felt happy. According to Reuters (online), “An Indian spacecraft landed on the rugged, unexplored south pole of the moon on Wednesday in a mission seen as crucial to lunar exploration and India’s standing as a space power, just days after a similar Russian lander crashed”. Dawn of Pakistan has written, “India on Wednesday became the first nation to land a craft near the Moon’s south pole, a historic triumph for the world’s most populous nation and its ambitious, cut-price space programme”. Arab News has mentioned, “this was India’s second attempt to land a spacecraft on the moon and comes less than a week after Russia’s Luna-25 mission failed”. Another newspaper Aljazeera has highlighted, “India successfully lands spacecraft near the moon’s south pole, making it the first country to do so”. Also, it observed in the online newspaper that “Indian PM Modi says mission’s success belongs to all of humanity.”
Before conclusion, I wish to mention that ISRO was previously known as the Indian National Committee for Space Research (INCOSPAR), set up by the Government of India in 1962, as envisioned by Dr. VikramA Sarabhai. ISRO was formed on August 15, 1969, and superseded INCOSPAR with an expanded role to harness space technology. The Government of India constituted the Space Commission and established the Department of Space (DoS) in 1972 and brought ISRO under DoS management on June 1, 1972.

Prof. Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

‘Shadow under the light in Jadavpur University’: Death of a Bright Student Because of Terrible Ragging

Jadavpur University is a state University located in Jadavpur, Kolkata. It was established in 1905 as Bengal Technical Institute and was converted into Jadavpur University in 1955. In 2023, it was ranked fourth among universities in India by the National Institutional Ranking Framework (NIRF). It also achieved 10th rank in the engineering category and 13th overall in the National Institutional Ranking Framework (NIRF) 2023 (wikipedia.org/wiki/Jadavpur_University). In 1910, the Society for the Promotion of Technical Education in Bengal, which looked after Bengal Technical Institute (which later became the College of Engineering and Technology, Bengal), was amalgamated with NCE. NCE henceforth looked after the College of Engineering and Technology, Bengal. After Independence, on December 24, 1955, Jadavpur University was officially established by the Government of West Bengal with the concurrence of the Government of India. It is pertinent to mention that as per University Grants Commission (UGC), as on March 31, 2023, there is a total of 1078 universities, including 54 Central Universities, 464 State Public Universities,128 Deemed Universities, and 432 State Private Universities. Also, there are some fake universities, list of fake universities can be seen on the UGC website (sarkarilist.in/ugc-approved-university).

I am shocked to read in print media and watched in electronic media about the death of a bright student Swapnodeep Kundu because of ragging at Jadavpur University. Swapnodeep Kundu, an 18-year-old admitted youth, was admitted to the university to study Honours in Bengali as an undergraduate student. He died after falling from the balcony of Jadavpur University’s main hostel within a few days after admitting. As a senior citizen (nearly 67 years old), I could not control my emotion as Kundu’s death is horrific. I wish to mention that before the partition of India, United Bengal was, in all respects, an iconic State in United India. Unfortunately, after the partition of India, West Bengal was created, where lakhs of refugees migrated mainly for fear of life from then East Pakistan. Anyway, development scaled down in the present days of West Bengal. Under the leadership of Dr. B.C. Roy (Chief Minster of West Bengal), many development works took place in the State, but during Communists’ rule, strikes, lockouts, etc., ruined the work culture. I feel West Bengal has been losing its glory as many residents of West Bengal have been coming to the Southern part of India for treatment, and many children/youths have been joining for higher education. Now both rigging and ragging are the news in the State of so-called ‘Bhadralooks’ (gentlemen). Anyway, the death of Swapnodeep Kundu because of ragging is highly deplorable, horrific news, and a devil’s act as it happened in a so-called rank-holding university. I have come to know some youths/devils were arrested, but my hunch is what the top officials of the Jadavpur University were doing when ragging-type cruelty took place. Moreover, as per the Calcutta News TV channel, dated August 13, 2023, on the campus of Jadavpur University near the hostel, alcohol bottles, condoms, etc, were found. Since on TV, I saw; otherwise, I would not have believed it. This is very shuddering news.

 I appeal to political leaders of West Bengal, bureaucrats, members of civil societies, NGOs, and common people of the State (irrespective of caste, creed, and religion); please raise all of your voices against ragging and also unlawful activities which have been happening in the hostel of the university. No powerful persons escape from the law if anyone directly or indirectly is involved. Also, I suggest CCTV cameras must be installed to expose the unpleasant activities of the students and others. Everybody’s child is favourite and dear to the parent. I wish to mention some of the ruling party leaders of the State always blame the Union Government and thus divert attention, so it should not happen here.

Caste Issue: The highly deplorable incident at Vidyasagar University of West Bengal                     

Shankar Chatterjee

Vidyasagar University, located in the Midnapore district of West Bengal named after the most illustrious son of Bengal as well as one of the doyens of the Indian Renaissance, Pandit Ishwar Chandra Vidyasagar. It was established that is, the classes started in 1986, The University is now in the news because of caste issues. The Deputy Registrar of Vidyasagar University has accused the Registrar of the University of caste discrimination against him. The Deputy Registrar filed a police complaint also, and he even approached the High Court. The Deputy Registrar complained of constant mental torture, starting from caste insults day after day by the Registrar. According to the Deputy Registrar, even he had to take sleeping pills for his sleep which is very unfortunate. This matter is in the court, so the court verdict will reflect the truth. My hunch is that Deputy Registrar (SC), who himself is a highly qualified person why, made the allegation (police complaint and filed a case in the High Court) against the Registrar. Probably, he was insulted by the Registrar. By reading different print media and observing electronic media about the news, I am very shocked and condemn such incidents. I feel a person cannot be abused in the name of caste or religion, or qualification or for any issue. ‘Humanity is the only Caste’. It is pertinent to mention that United Bengal once upon a time was great news as many stalwarts, whether in the field of literature, spirituality, sports, independence movement, etc, were born. Even many social activists and social reformers came from the United Bengal. But after the partition in 1947, West Bengal was created, and the State faced many problems, particularly lakhs of refugees came in the State. Anyway, I feel after the Communist rule, the deterioration of the State started because in the name of the labour movement for their so-called ‘rights’, many factories, business establishments, industries, etc., were closed down or became sick. As a result, at the cost of West Bengal, many other states of India developed, but ‘bhadralooks’ (meaning gentlemen) were silent. For them, as if nothing happened. Anyway, presently, Indians observed in the name of elections in West Bengal (Assembly and Panchayati elections) widespread violence, murder, arson, damage to properties, etc., took place. Even ballot boxes were found in the ponds. Unfortunately, West Bengal rulers ignored all these and diverted attention, blaming the Centre by citing examples from other states. Now the caste-related incident has upset me to a great extent as I never thought that in a culturally developed State like West Bengal, there will be discrimination in the name of caste. According to the Deputy Registrar, his senior, i.e., Registrar, used to give him non-academic activities such as supervising sweepers, etc.  We all know long ago, there were caste issues in United Bengal (domination of Brahminism), and to neutralize the issue, Brahmo Samaj was promoted by leading personalities such as Raja Rammohan Roy, Devendra Nath Tagore father of Rabindranath Tagore, and many others. Now in July 2023, discrimination in the name of caste that too in West Bengal is news.  I feel it should not happen in West Bengal when the people claim ‘they are Bhadralooks’ (Gentlemen). The political leaders of the state should not compare West Bengal with other states, whether ‘BIMARU’ or ‘non-BIMARU’.  

References

Blunt, E. (2010). The caste system of northern India. Gyan Publishing House.

Hoff, K. (2016). Caste system. World Bank policy research working paper, (7929).

Sharma SN, editor. New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd; 2016 Jun 3.

Indians witnessed the flow of blood in the Panchayat Election of West Bengal held in 2023

The recently held Panchayat election in West Bengal has not only pained me but is painful to the rational citizens of the country. The Father of the Nation, Mahatma Gandhiji, felt that Panchayat should be a neutral body. In fact, he didn’t desire an election also. But for a simple local-level election, more than 50 people died, many were injured, and many houses and vehicles were damaged. The candidates were assaulted. Indians know the misuse of ballot boxes and ballot papers in the election. After all the awful incidents, a ruling party leader openly criticized the judiciary of the State because he probably felt that the ‘judiciary is not favouring the ruling party’. I request the intellectuals of the State, members of civil societies, NGOs, and other rational people of West Bengal, please look at recent assembly elections held in other States where violence virtually did not take place, no death took place, and, e.g., Karnataka and Uttar Pradesh are examples. I had the opportunity to visit across the State and interacted with many irrespective of castes, creeds, religions, educational qualifications, etc., and observed many were scared to talk about the present administration. Anyway, it has to be agreed that once upon a time State produced many stalwarts in different fields, but now the worst type of violence in elections, corruption by some ruling party leaders, loose talk by leaders, etc., have scaled down the image of the State. It is pertinent to mention that “Filmmaker-activist Aparna Sen has written an open letter to Mamata Banerjee, Chief Minister of the State, holding her and her government responsible for the violence in the panchayat polls that claimed 52 lives. Multiple sources have estimated the rural poll toll to be over 60”. Further, addressing Mamata Banerjee, Aparna Sen read: “You are the chief minister and home minister of West Bengal. Without overseeing the constitutional responsibility of the election commission, one can definitely say that the panchayat poll-cantered killings and anarchy were primarily the responsibility of the West Bengal government and you. You cannot deny this responsibility as the home minister of West Bengal” (The Telegraph online, Aparna Sen points finger at CM Mamata Banerjee over Bengal panchayat poll violence, July 21. 2023). My hunch is that if the madam of WB or anyone from her party gets the PM post, then Indians will awfully suffer as the present ruling party of the State cannot control a local-level election; then how India type of incredible country can be controlled? Because we all in school days read ‘Morning shows the day’.

Track2Training: An Educational Portal for Essays on Various Topics

In the digital age, the internet has revolutionized the way we access information and acquire knowledge. Online platforms have emerged as valuable educational resources, offering diverse content to learners worldwide. Among these platforms, Track2Training stands out as an exceptional educational portal that provides a wide range of essays on different topics. This essay explores the significance of Track2Training as an invaluable tool for students and individuals seeking high-quality essays to enhance their understanding and foster intellectual growth.

Photo by Armin Rimoldi on Pexels.com

Content Diversity: One of the key strengths of Track2Training is the extensive diversity of topics covered in its essay database. Whether it’s literature, history, science, technology, social sciences, or even contemporary issues, Track2Training offers a vast repository of essays on various subjects. This comprehensive coverage ensures that users can find relevant content across different academic disciplines and areas of interest. With Track2Training, individuals can access essays that span from classical literature to cutting-edge scientific research, fostering a holistic and well-rounded learning experience. The Essay Topics that you can find a good resource to access for more articles.

High-Quality Content: The essays available on Track2Training are curated with a focus on quality, accuracy, and reliability. The platform maintains strict standards to ensure that the content provided is well-researched, authoritative, and up-to-date. Essays on Track2Training are often written by subject matter experts, scholars, and educators, ensuring that users can rely on the accuracy and credibility of the information presented. This commitment to quality enables students to access reliable and well-crafted essays, serving as valuable resources for academic assignments, research papers, or personal enrichment.

Easy Accessibility and User-Friendly Interface: Track2Training is designed to provide a user-friendly experience, making it accessible to users of all ages and technological proficiency levels. The platform features a simple and intuitive interface, allowing users to navigate through the essay database effortlessly. The search functionality enables users to locate essays on specific topics or narrow down their search based on keywords, facilitating quick and efficient access to desired content. This user-friendly design ensures that learners, regardless of their technological expertise, can easily find the essays they need to support their learning and research endeavors.

Learning Beyond the Classroom: Track2Training serves as a powerful tool for supplementing traditional classroom education. It offers an opportunity for individuals to deepen their understanding of various subjects beyond what is covered in textbooks or classroom lectures. By exploring essays on Track2Training, students can gain additional insights, diverse perspectives, and in-depth analyses of topics, broadening their intellectual horizons and enhancing their critical thinking abilities. Moreover, the platform caters to lifelong learners and individuals seeking personal enrichment, enabling them to engage with thought-provoking essays and expand their knowledge in a self-paced manner.

Community Engagement: Track2Training is more than just an essay repository; it fosters an active learning community. The platform allows users to engage with the content through comments, discussions, and interactions with other learners and experts. This community-driven approach promotes collaborative learning, encourages the exchange of ideas, and enables users to gain multiple perspectives on various topics. The opportunity to engage in meaningful discussions with like-minded individuals further enhances the educational experience and nurtures a sense of intellectual community.

Conclusion: In the digital era, Track2Training stands out as an exceptional educational portal, providing a vast collection of high-quality essays on a wide range of topics. Its comprehensive coverage, commitment to quality, user-friendly interface, and community engagement make it an invaluable resource for students, researchers, and lifelong learners. By leveraging the power of Track2Training, individuals can enhance their understanding, foster critical thinking, and embark on a journey of continuous intellectual growth.

National Doctors’ Day, July 1: Birthday of Dr Bidhan Chandra Roy

 Dr. Bidhan Chandra Roy, popularly known as Dr. B. C. Roy was a renowned physician who later joined politics and became the second Chief Minister of West Bengal in 1948. For his contribution in various fields including the country’s medical development, Bidhan Chandra Roy was awarded the Bharat Ratna in 1961 also as a recognition of his enormous medical service rendered to all echelons of the society, National Doctors' Day is celebrated on July 1 (his birthday) across India. Dr. Bidhan Chandra Roy according to me was not a great physician but the best Chef Minster of West Bengal to date. 

Dr. Roy was born on July 1, 1882, in Patna and died on the same date (July 1) in 1962 in Calcutta/Kolkata after treating some patients in the morning hours without any suffering. This simply indicates he was endowed with a pure soul. It has to be admitted that medical doctors play a significant role in our lives because my father was MBBS and observed his relentless service for others’ suffering periods.
Dr. B.C. Roy led the Civil Disobedience Movement in Bengal. He was elected as Mayor of Calcutta Corporation. Roy did his Intermediate in Arts (I.A.) from Presidency College, Calcutta, and B.A. from Patna College with honours in mathematics. Prior to that, he passed the Matric (now known as High School) examination from Patna Collegiate School in 1897. Bidhan Chandra after completing his college education applied for admission to the Bengal Engineering College and the Calcutta Medical College albeit he was selected for both institutions but preferred to go in the medical line. Anyway, while Dr. B.C. Roy was the Chief Minister of West Bengal lots of industrial development took place in the state. I personally feel he is the best Chief Minster among the CMs of West Bengal as during communist rule strikes, lockouts, etc., were regular features. Also, the former Communist’s Chief Minister’s son is now a great business personality and settled abroad. Further, the massacre in Marichjhanpi, which took place under Communist rule in West Bengal between January 26 and May 16, 1979, was simply inhuman activity. And in the present times, scams, corruption, election violence, etc., in West Bengal reached the zenith.
Anyway, Dr. Roy took the initiative to establish the Indian Medical Association in 1928 and the Medical Council of India. He also played a crucial role in establishing the Indian Institute of Mental Health, the Infectious Disease Hospital, and even Calcutta’s first-ever postgraduate medical college.
Further, because of his initiative, some leading medical institutions in then Calcutta/now Kolkata were set up such as the Jadavpur T.B. Hospital, Chittaranjan Seva Sadan, Kamala Nehru Hospital, Chittaranjan Cancer Hospital etc. As Chief Minister of West Bengal, he laid the foundation of five eminent cities, namely, Durgapur, Kalyani, Bidhannagar, Ashoknagar, and Habra in West Bengal. His broadness of mind may be observed when he gifted his house to the people of West Bengal in 1961. He had also constituted a trust for his properties at Patna to carry out social service, with eminent nationalist Ganga Sharan Singh.
On the occasion of his birthday my respectful salute to this great soul.

Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

Ambubachi mela at Kamakhya temple, Guwahati, Assam in 2023: A Few Facts

Located atop the Nilachal hills in Guwahati Maa Kamakhya temple is famous for the Hindus. The pristine beauty of Guwahati city and its vicinity and other places including the mighty Brahmaputra can be seen from the hills. Anyone can visit the Nilachal hills to observe the beauty of Guwahati city. Anyway, the temple is an auspicious place for the Hindus as out of 51 Shakti Peethas this is one. I feel, almost all readers know about the mythological facts of 51 Shakti Peethas. In the Maa Kamakhya temple, Ambubachi mela is held every year in June and devotees not only from India but also from many countries visit during this time. It is the celebration of the yearly menstruation of Maa Kamakhya as it is believed that the private part (yoni/ genital part) of Maa was fallen there. During Ambubachi time, the doors of the temple are closed and no one can visit the inside of the temple. In this year, 2023, as per the tithi i.e. timings, the doors were closed at 2.30 AM on June 22-23 (Thursday midnight and wee hours of Friday) and entries of the temple will reopen on Monday morning (June 26, 2023). The place where the private part was fallen during the menstruation period is covered with a huge red cloth which is known as ‘Rakta Bastra’. And the devotees after completion of Ambubachi, collect a little piece of ‘Rakta Bastra’ which is considered very sacred for the Hindus. Some keep in the puja room in a small container, some keep their body in a small metallic container which is known as ‘Maduli’ etc. Anyway, devotees, irrespective of age, gender, or caste, can attend the mela, for seeking blessings from Maa Kamakhya. It is pertinent to mention that in 2019 around 25 lakh devotees visited the mela the largest in history.
I had the opportunity to visit Ambubachi mela on a few occasions at night time and observed hundreds of saints and sadhus from different parts of India including Nepal and other places attended. All were involved in spiritual activities.

Harmonised Guidelines and Space Standards for Universal Accessibility in India is now available on India

Under the provision of section 40 of RPwD Act 2016, the Central Government in consultation with the Chief Commissioner formulate rules for persons with disabilities laying down the standards of accessibility for the physical environment, transportation, information and communication, including appropriate technologies and systems and other facilities and services provided to the public in urban and rural areas.

Harmonised Guidelines and Space Standards for Universal Accessibility in India-2021 prepared by Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs has been amended in RPwD (Amendment) Rules, 2023 vide notification G.S. R. 413 (E) dated 05.06.2023.  

The detailed status of these guidelines/standards is as follows:

Standards/Guidelines notified in RPwD Rules under Rule 15
1.Accessibility for the ICT products and services (Part I and II)
2.Harmonised Guidelines and Space Standard for Universal Accessibility in India-2021
3.Standard for Bus Body Code for Transportation system,
Guidelines under Draft notification in RPwD Rules and inviting public and other stakeholder comments
4.Accessibility standards for Health Care by 02.07.2023
5.Accessibility Standards and Guidelines for Civil Aviation by 10.06.2023
6.Accessibility standards and guidelines for the Culture sector (monuments/sites/museums/libraries by 10.06.2023
7.Accessible Sport complex and residential facilities for sports person with disabilities by 10.06.2023
Guidelines awaited for notification in Gazette of India by concerned Ministry/Department
8.Ministry of Home Affairs
9.Guidelines on accessibility of Indian Railways stations and facilities at stations for differently abled persons and passengers with reduced mobility
10.Accessibility Guidelines and Standards for Higher Education Institutions and Universities
11.Accessibility Guidelines for Bus Terminals and Bus Stops
12.Department of Drinking Water and Sanitation 
Guidelines at various stages in the concerned Departments
13.Ministry of Rural Development
14.Ministry of Port, Shipping and Waterways
15.Ministry of Tourism
16.Department of Financial Service
17.Ministry of Information and Broadcasting
18.Department of School Education and Literacy

All the information is regarding the harmonized guidelines is available in the website of DEPwD department disabilityaffairs.gov.in

***

Saplings presented to the Guests on Golden Jubilee Wedding Anniversary: An Innovative Idea in a Gated Community in Hyderabad, India

The recent World Bank Group Report (Making Cities Green, Resilient, and Inclusive in a Changing Climate, 2023) reveals that climate change is exposing cities to increasingly frequent extreme weather events. From the 1970s to the period 2010–20, the frequency of extreme heat and dry events increased across cities globally, and the frequency of extreme wet events has increased since the 1990s. Global sea-level rise of about 0.125 millimeters per year is also increasing the risk of flooding for coastal cities. Also, it is evident from the Report that cities in high- and upper-middle-income countries are major contributors to climate change, whereas the contribution of cities in lower-income countries is modest. Globally, about 70 percent of anthropogenic greenhouse gas emissions, the bulk of which are fossil carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions, emanate from cities. Cities in lower-income countries, however, accounted for only about 14 percent of all global urban CO2 emissions in 2015, and cities in low-income cities contributed less than 0.20 percent. The mitigation challenge for cities in lower-income countries is to develop without following the historic CO2 emissions trajectories of cities in higher-income countries. Anyway, to control CO2 emissions one of the alternatives is the plantation of saplings in the house or its vicinity if vacant land is available. And one innovative idea as observed by the author was the distribution of saplings to the guests as a gift on the occasion of a senior citizen’s Golden Jubilee Wedding anniversary and at the same time his grandson’s birthday who completed 12 years of age. The case is from Libdom Villa (Raj Reddy Valley), Bandlaguda Jagir, Hyderabad, a gated community which is spread over to an area of 17 acres of land having all facilities – indoor and outdoor games, gym, park, swimming pool, function hall, etc. Altogether 190 families ( a few might be unoccupied) live in this gated community consisting of different religions, castes, and languages (people of different States), representing a mini India in the true sense and residents celebrate all festivals amicably.
A resident of the villa (75 Years old), who stays with his wife, son (41 years, software engineer and owner of the villa) daughter-in-law also a software engineer) and grandson (12 years), had initiated a good idea that others can emulate in other gated communities or houses if they have little land.
K. Veerabrahmam (75 years old), a retired administrative officer from Government Arts and PG College, Kadapa, Andhra Pradesh is a permanent resident of the villa staying along with other family members, as mentioned already. In the last part of May 2023, he celebrated his 50 years of wedding anniversary, golden jubilee. Also, his grandson who completed 12 years of age almost the same period organized a dinner party in the campus itself on 24 May 2023. Many dishes – both vegetarian and non-vegetarian – were served. As a part of the event, each guest was presented with a sapling. Around 55 saplings were brought from the local nursery and given to all guests in beautiful cotton bags. Such an innovative idea to regenerate nature can be emulated by others who live in gated communities etc. Instead of giving different types of gifts, giving saplings in the present context is the best gift.
Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

What is IPL in Cricket? – Introduction to the Indian Premier League Tournament

It’s the biggest domestic cricket tournament in the world, but what is IPL exactly and how much do we know about it?

What does IPL Stand for?

In cricket, IPL stands for Indian Premier League, a T20 cricket tournament which was originally established in 2008. It is traditionally played from April through to June each year and, from 2022, the competition will be expanded to include a total of ten teams.

Indian Premier League – The Tournament

1. Tournament Structure

The Indian Premier League starts with a round robin tournament where each franchise will play each other twice – home and away. Sides will earn two points for a win while the teams will earn one point each if there is an abandoned game.

At the end of this sequence, the top four sides in the table will progress to the playoffs while the remaining franchises will be eliminated.

The playoffs start with the first qualifier where the top two sides in the table play each other and the winner goes straight through to the final.

Next up is the eliminator where the third and fourth placed sides face off. The winner goes through to the second qualifier while the loser is eliminated.

In the second qualifier, the winner of the eliminator takes on the loser of the first playoff match. The winner of that game progresses to the final.

It sounds a little complicated on paper but it’s actually easy to follow and it’s a fairer system than having straight semi finals.

IPL cricket tournament

2. When Does IPL Start?

The exact starting dates of the IPL will vary from year to year but it will generally begin in the first week of April. The 2022 IPL starts on March 26th. The group stages kick off the competition and these progress through the month and into May.

The knockouts take over and the final will generally be scheduled for late May or early June. These dates are subject to change but this is the framework within which the tournament has worked for many years.

3. IPL Franchise Teams

From 2022 onwards, the IPL will consist of ten franchise teams. Those sides who played in 2021 will continue to be involved and they are:

  • Chennai Super Kings
  • Royal Challengers Bangalore
  • Delhi Capitals
  • Punjab Kings
  • Sunrisers Hyderabad
  • Mumbai Indians
  • Rajasthan Royals
  • Kolkata Knight Riders

In addition, two new franchises will be joining to make ten teams overall. They will be based in Lucknow and Ahmedabad but the names of the sides have yet to be confirmed as of November 2021.

what-is-ipl-in-cricket

4. Player Auction

The build up to every tournament involves a player auction. Those cricketers who want to be involved in the IPL will make themselves available for selection via the auction and the franchises will bid for their services.

The players involved will set a base price which is effectively a reserve figure. Any team wanting to sign the player must make that base price their minimum bid. 

At the end of the auction, squads are assembled ahead of the new season. Of course, there are options to bring in replacements for players who become injured or are forced to withdraw for any other reason.

Before that auction begins, the franchises submit a retained list. These are the existing players in the squad who will remain with the team for the new season. Other players will be released if they are no longer needed and they then have the option to go into the auction.

Find out more about how the IPL Auction works in 2023.

5. IPL Match Rules

The format of the IPL follows the rules of T20 cricket. Both teams are allocated a maximum of 20 overs each and the simple aim is to score more runs than the opposition. 

T20 is identical to ODI cricket in the sense that the side batting first sets a target. The fielding side then take their turn to bat and they must overtake that total within their allocated set of overs.

If the side batting second fail to overtake the target, the side batting first wins.

Bowling teams can use as many bowlers as they want but each bowler can deliver a maximum of four overs.

If the scores are tied at the end of the game, there will be a Super Over to decide the winner. One six-ball over will be sent down to each team and the batting sides have two wickets available. If the scores remain level, the Super Over process will be repeated until we have a winner.

A Glimpse about two prestigious schools in Guwahati, Assam, India: Past and Present Scenario

Guwahati earlier spelled as Gauhati is one of the popular cities of India located in the beautiful part of North-East India. The mighty perennial river the Brahmaputra has passed from the iconic City. In addition, the Nilachal Hill, the Basishtha Ashram, Umananda, etc. portray the pristine beauty of the place. The famous Maa Kamakhya temple located on the top of Nilachal Hill is not only a spiritual place but a scenic place to visit. Further, in the city and its vicinity many temples, churches, mosques, gurudwaras, and Jain temples are located which bear testimony to the historical importance of the city.
The prestigious Cotton College (established in 1901) presently Cotton University is one of the most famous educational institutions in the country. Also, two renowned schools along with some others have brought glory to the city. The two schools are – Bengali Boys’ Higher Secondary School and Bengali Girls’ High School. In the month of May 2022, both have been merged into one and rechristened as Bengali Higher Secondary School (BHSS, Co-education). Also, there were two separate primary schools on the campus Boys’ school and Girls’ school separately established many years ago. Anyway, Bengali Boys’ Higher Secondary School was established on April 28, 1936, and on the other hand, Bengali Girls’ High School was set up on March 2, 1954. Both are located in the prime location of Guwahati viz. Paltan Bazar.
It is pertinent to mention that both schools before the merger produced many great personalities and stalwarts in various fields – education. literacy, games, sports, music, and other curricular activities. Dr. Amalendu Guha, an eminent historian, and literature in India was a student at Bengali Boys’ Higher Secondary School. He was admitted in 1936 (first batch). In those days, many of his classmates, later on, were famous in their own fields. A few names may be mentioned here – Hena Ganguly, Gobinda Lal Roy, Kiranmay Lahiri, Nirmal Mukherjee, Gopal Sen, Dhurba Gupta, Pradeep Chandra Pal, Santi Ganguly, Sachindra Mohan Dey Sarkar, and others. In those, the school was under Calcutta University, and in 1948 when the school came under the umbrella of Gauhati University, the student who stood first in the entire Assam was Indrajeet Chatterjee. After that many brilliant students passed out from the school. Some of the names are – Gurudas Chatterjee, Sridhan Roy, Sujit Basu, Ashish Bose, and many others. Also, it is pertinent to mention that in those days the name of the school was Silver Jubilee. Anglo-Bengali High School, because King George V completed his tenure of 25 years reign in England and coincided with the same Silver Jubilee, was prefixed. And after independence, the name of the school was changed to Bengali Boys High School, and later on to Higher Secondary. Anyway, when the Anglo-Bengali school was established two great educationists namely Nalini Bhusan Das Gupta ( a great writer) and Pulin Bihari Ghosh were selected as headmaster and assistant headmaster respectively. Also, the teachers were highly qualified and erudite scholars. In March 1937, Kabindra Nath Das was selected as a headmaster who brilliantly served the school up to 1948. During his tenure Ashwin Chakraborty, Ramesh Chanda Dutta, Santosh Sen Gupta, and Shiba Prasad Ghosh were recruited as teachers who were brilliant teachers and cordial with the students as I had the opportunity to learn from many of them while I was a student of the school from primary to 1973. Kabindra Nath Das in addition to discharging his duty as the headmaster took the initiative to set up a cooperative society under the banner of “Silver Jubilee Anglo Bengali High School Thrift and Credit Society”. Also, he introduced the “Running Cup” in badminton (doubles), and as a cultural activity, drama, and recitation were introduced by him.
It is heartening to mention that many people contributed to the construction of the school buildings. It was estimated that Rs. 17,000.00 would be collected from different sources (1935) but the amount was much higher than the estimate. In this regard, the names of some people may be mentioned as received from different sources who contributed for the development of the school. They are Rai Bahadur Kalicharan Sen, Rai Bahadur Mahendra Mohan Lahiri, Rai Bahadur P.G. Mukherjee, Jogesh Chandra Sen, Upendra Nath Sen, Khan Sahib Eda Khan, and many others. During that period, some professors of Cotton College donated in 12 installments their one month’s salary, Also Jogesh Chandra Sen nephew of Rai Bahadur Kalicharan Sen till his death associated with the school and physically and monetarily helped the development of the school.
Regarding the construction issue of the school (1935-36), a few lines may be mentioned here. The construction of Silver Jubilee Anglo-Bengali High School was given to the contractor Khan Sahib Eda Khan who completed the school within a stipulated time as a sequel school building that could be inaugurated in 1936. It is pertinent to mention that the foundation stone was laid by then Governor Sir Michel Keen in 1935 and later on Mr. Small, Director of Public Instruction (DPI) inaugurated the school. In the first-year total students were 404 – 363 Bengali speaking, 26 Hindi speaking, seven Manipuri, three Nepali, four Punjabi, and one Tamil. Of the total 404 students, 20 were Muslim students also. Anyway, it is evident that not only Bengali-speaking students were admitted but students of other languages got admission to the school in those days.
Also, various sources reveal the fact that from the start of school, many students got first division and the percentage of passed was hovering around 75, which was a great achievement in those days as some other schools in the area could not excel like Anglo Bengali / Bengali High School. And from time-to-time students of Bengali Higher Secondary School did excellent results in the Board examination in different years. But after establishing English medium schools in Guwahati in recent times many guardians prefer to send their children to English medium for different reasons inter alia of which is job prospects so students’ strength came down. For instance, in the year 2016 in the High School Leaving Certificate (HSLC exam), the total number of students who appeared was 18, and of them, the first division got three, six were placed in the second division, and eight secured third division.
About the past history of Boys’ School, it may be mentioned that during the 1960s from class VIII (eighth), students were allotted science and arts streams which continued up to 1973, and a pass certificate was given under the umbrella of Higher Secondary School Leaving Certificate and after that High School (10th Standard) and +2 i.e., Higher Secondary, two years started which till date is continuing (10 +2 system). On the other hand, Bengali Girls’ High School from its inception continued as a high school (up to 10th standard).
Results of Girls’ High School and Boys’ Higher Secondary School:
For the benefit of the readers, a few statistics about the Girls’ school are presented here. In 2019, only 10 girls’ students appeared in the High School Leaving Certificate (HSLC) examination. No one got the first division but nine passed out in the second division and one was placed in the third division with a 100 percent pass. In 2020, like 2019, 10 students appeared – two first division, four-second division, and two third division with 80 percent pass. In 2021, because of COVID-19 based on the test results of the school, all the students passed as per the direction of the State Government. In 2022, only nine students appeared of which five got first division, three – second division, and one third division indicating 100 percent pass. It is pertinent to mention that some students got letter marks and star marks. But the other side of the coin is that 10 -10 students appeared and then nine students appeared mean low in absolute numbers and a matter of concern.
In the case of Boys’ school results are in two parts- one is High School Leaving Certificate Examination (HSLC) and the other one Higher Secondary School Leaving Certificate Examination (HSSLC). The High School results of Boys’ School for three years reveal that in 2020, 2021, and 2022, 100 percent of students passed (around 20 students each year appeared). The results of the Higher Secondary School Leaving Certificate examinations for the year 2020 reveal the fact 37 percent passed in the arts stream – two in the first division, three in the second division, and 18 in the third division. And in the science stream out of a total of nine students, three got first division, and six secured second division. In the year 2021, in the arts stream, 94 percent of students passed – first division three, second division 13, and third division 26. And in the science stream, only two students were there and both got first division. In the year 2022, in the arts stream percentage of pass was 63, first division one, second division seven, and third division nine. Against this backdrop, no students appeared in the science stream. It is evident from the data that number of students was scaling down year by year in both schools.
Present Situation:
It has already been mentioned that both Boys’ and Girls’ schools have been merged in May 2022 and the alumni of both schools have been trying to develop the infrastructure of the school by renovating dilapidated classrooms and already introduced a school bus to bring more students from far-flung areas by hiring a school bus on rent basis at the cost of Rs 55,000.00 per month. On April 10, 2023, the school bus service has been introduced. And also, 16 computers have been purchased for the students for skill development looking at the job market. And an attractive SMART kitchen has been constructed in the school for Mid-day Meal Scheme. Presently (as of May 12, 2023, around 100 alumni both males and females contributed towards the development of the school mainly for infrastructure, etc. Also, a few well-wishers of the school donated to the development of the school.
As of April 2023, there were 48 teachers in the school (presently one school as mentioned already) for 180 students from class 1 to class 12, which is not a good number because in 1936 when the school was established total number of students were 404 but instead of going up strength has come down in spite of merging two schools. Hope after the merger of both boys’ and girls’ schools in May 2022 the situation will greatly improve.

(During the course of writing this article many helped me by providing the necessary information and data. So, I offer my grateful thanks to all of them. Anyway, two names I wish to mention here – Dr. Saibal Sen Gupta (former Principal of Arya Vidyapeeth College, Guwahati, and an alumnus of the Boys’ School) and Mrs. Nazrana Rahman Hazarika (Principal of the present Bengali Higher Secondary School).

Prof Shankar Chatterjee, Hyderabad

Top Colleges to go for MBBS in Georgia

Georgia is increasingly becoming a popular educational destination for students from around the world. It offers a unique blend of high-quality education, affordable tuition fees, multiculturalism, and a welcoming environment. Here are some key points that describe Georgia as an educational destination:

Quality Education: Georgia has a well-developed educational system with a focus on providing quality education. The country has numerous universities and colleges that offer a wide range of programs in various fields, including medicine, engineering, business, humanities, and more. Many institutions follow international standards and have partnerships with universities from other countries.

Photo by Tomu00e1u0161 Malu00edk on Pexels.com

Affordable Tuition Fees: One of the major advantages of studying in Georgia is its affordability. Tuition fees in Georgian universities are significantly lower compared to many other countries, making it an attractive option for international students. This makes education accessible to a larger number of students seeking quality education at a reasonable cost. eWings Abroad Education Consultancy provide timely updates on the admission and other matters.

English-Taught Programs: Many universities in Georgia offer English-taught programs, especially in popular fields like medicine, engineering, and business. This allows international students to study in their preferred language without the need for extensive language proficiency in the local Georgian language.

Multicultural Environment: Georgia is known for its cultural diversity and warm hospitality. As an educational destination, it attracts students from different parts of the world, creating a multicultural environment that fosters intercultural exchange and understanding. This provides students with an opportunity to interact with peers from diverse backgrounds, learn about different cultures, and broaden their perspectives.

Safe and Welcoming Environment: Georgia is considered a safe country with a low crime rate. The local population is known for their friendliness and welcoming nature towards international students. The government and educational institutions also prioritize the safety and well-being of students, providing a secure environment for learning and personal growth.

Beautiful Natural Landscape: Georgia is blessed with stunning natural landscapes, including mountains, beaches, and historical sites. Students have the opportunity to explore the country’s rich cultural heritage, indulge in outdoor activities, and experience a vibrant social life outside of their academic commitments.

European Standard of Education: Georgia’s educational system follows the European standard of education, which ensures high academic quality and compliance with international standards. This enables students to pursue further studies or seek employment opportunities globally.

Overall, Georgia offers a favorable environment for international students seeking quality education, affordability, multiculturalism, and a safe learning experience. It is a country that combines academic excellence with cultural richness, making it an attractive destination for students worldwide.

MBBS (Bachelor of Medicine, Bachelor of Surgery) is an undergraduate degree in the medical field. Georgia is a popular destination for international students seeking to pursue MBBS due to its affordable tuition fees, quality education, and globally recognized degrees. Here are some options for MBBS in Georgia and some of the best colleges in the country:

  1. Tbilisi State Medical University (TSMU): TSMU is one of the oldest and most prestigious medical universities in Georgia. It offers an English-taught MBBS program, which is highly regarded among international students.
  2. Ivane Javakhishvili Tbilisi State University (TSU): TSU is another renowned institution that offers an English-language medical program. It has a long history and provides a comprehensive medical education.
  3. David Tvildiani Medical University (DTMU): DTMU is a private medical university in Tbilisi, Georgia. It offers an English-taught MBBS program and is known for its modern facilities and high-quality education.
  4. European University: The European University in Tbilisi also offers an English-language MBBS program. It has a well-established reputation and provides a conducive learning environment for medical students.
  5. Batumi Shota Rustaveli State University: Located in the coastal city of Batumi, this university offers an English-taught medical program. It is a popular choice among international students for its affordable fees and good infrastructure.
  6. Akaki Tsereteli State University: Situated in the city of Kutaisi, this university offers an English-language medical program. It is recognized for its experienced faculty and modern teaching methods.

These are just a few examples of the many universities in Georgia that offer MBBS programs. It’s important to conduct thorough research, compare the curriculum, tuition fees, admission requirements, and other factors before making a decision. Additionally, check if the university is recognized by the Medical Council of India (MCI) or the World Directory of Medical Schools (WDOMS) to ensure the degree is recognized globally.